Chartpilot 1100 Manual (New UPDATE 2017)

Operating Instructions
CHARTPILOT 1100
Software Version 6.1.9 and higher
with Annex for IHO Update to Pres. Lib. 4.0
Item No.:ED 3053 G 622 Revision: 02 (2012-05) Order No.:390005725

Revision: 04 (2017-02)
with Annex for IHO Update
to S-52 Pres.Lib.4.0
This document is our property for which we reserve all rights, including
those relating to patents or registered designs. It must not be
reproduced or used otherwise or made available to any third party without
our prior permission in writing.
Alterations due to technical progress are reserved.
Wärtsilä SAM Electronics GmbH

D - 22763 Hamburg
Service
Customer Support Center
Telephone:+ 49 (0) 18 03 00 85 53
Telefax:+ 49 (0) 18 03 00 85 54
e-mail: shipservice.sam@wartsila.com
b_cp_eti.fm / 10.05.12
CHARTPILOT
Operating Instructions General Safety Precautions
General Safety Precautions

when Using the CHARTPILOT
The CHARTPILOT combines nautical data from the planning stage right up to voyage monitoring and, if
necessary, automatic track control, and displays these data in context at various workplaces.
This increases the safety of ship-handling and reduces the workload of the bridge personnel.
However, the use of the CHARTPILOT does not release the operator from the obligation to handle the
ship in accordance with the rules of good seamanship, i.e. to monitor the course, speed and position of
the ship regularly with all other available aids too and to check that the navigation system is working prop-
erly.
Even when this modern navigation equipment is being used, non-

observance of the safety precautions can lead to unnoticed devia-
tion from the planned track, thus causing danger to shipping.
When the CHARTPILOT is being used, the following points must be observed:
1. The CHARTPILOT may be used and operated only by qualified personnel who have been trained to
operate the system.
2. Correct interpretation of indicated data requires knowledge about the implemented
Consistent Common Reference System (CCRS) See 1.2 for more information.
3. Operators must continually keep themselves informed about the nautical situation of the ship and
about the status of the system.
4. Alarms (visual alarms, acoustic alarms, messages) provide information that is relevant to safety. The
Alarms displayed on the CHARTPILOT relating to the nautical situation and to faults in the system
and in the sensors and/or actuators connected to it must be observed.
When alarms occur, the operator must immediately obtain a clear overview of their causes, the
system status and possible reactions of the system, and - if necessary - must immediately take all
of the necessary actions for avoidance of possible danger.
Only then may alarms be cancelled.
5. Before electronic charts fed into the CHARTPILOT are used, they must be checked by the operator
to make certain that they are in agreement with the official charts.
6. The courses planned or displayed by means of the CHARTPILOT must be continuously checked by
the operator with regard to traffic safety and taking account of the official charts.
Notes about system functions (for further details, see individual documents of the connected items of
equipment):
• Position data are dependent on the accuracy and proper functioning of the selected position sensor.
• Connected position sensors must fulfil the standard IEC 61162-1.
• ARPA target data received from a connected radar are directly dependent upon the accuracy and
proper functioning of the selected speed sensor and the gyro compass.
• Drift compensation by a TRACKPILOT (if there is one connected) takes place in particular modes
only.
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 3

b_cp_esh.fm / 10.05.12
CHARTPILOT
General Safety Precautions Operating Instructions
4 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_esh.fm / 10.05.12
CHARTPILOT
Operating Instructions List of Contents
List of Contents
General Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

List of Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
List of Figures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
List of Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Part I Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
1.1 The Functions of the CHARTPILOT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
1.2 The Consistent Common Reference System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
1.3 The Components of the CHARTPILOT and its Variants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
1.4 Current IHO standards / Regulatory Approvals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
1.5 Using this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
2 Switching the CHARTPILOT On and Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
2.1 Switching the CHARTPILOT On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
2.2 Switch-Over of the Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
2.3 Switching the CHARTPILOT Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Part II CHARTPILOT as ECDIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
3 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
3.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
3.2 Operating Unit; Trackball and Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
3.3 The Operating Elements on the Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
3.3.1 Individual Elements and their Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
3.3.2 Operating Procedure using the Keyboard instead of the Trackball . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
3.3.3 Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
3.3.3.1 Hierarchical Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
3.3.3.2 Context Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
3.3.4 Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
3.3.5 The Function Overview (Tree) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
3.4 Inputting Numerical Values and Editing Texts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
3.5 The Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
3.5.1 Division of the Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
3.5.2 The Basic Menu Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
3.5.3 The Navigation Data Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
3.5.4 The Chart Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
3.5.4.1 Division, Individual Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
3.5.4.2 Overview of Graphic Elements and their Setting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
3.5.4.3 Cursor and Digitizer Cursor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
3.5.4.4 Range Rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
3.5.4.5 Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
3.5.4.6 Bearing Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
3.5.4.7 Scale Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
3.5.4.8 Event Markers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
3.5.4.9 Position Fix Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
3.5.4.10 Own Ship Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
3.5.4.11 ARPA Targets and AIS Targets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
3.5.4.12 Pre-planned Tracks with their Waypoints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
3.5.4.13 Waypoints from Waypoint Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
3.5.4.14 Maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
3.5.4.15 User Chart Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 5

b_cp_eiv.fm / 10.05.12
CHARTPILOT
List of Contents Operating Instructions
3.5.4.16 Aids-to-Navigation and Base Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

3.5.5 Data Displays and Pilot Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
3.5.6 The Alarm List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
3.5.7 The Info Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
3.6 Using the Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
3.7 Using Removable Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
3.8 Subroutines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
4 Functions for Navigation and Collision Avoidance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
4.1 General Information about Electronic Charts and User Chart Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
4.1.1 Switching On the Display of the Chart and Selecting the Chart Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
4.1.2 Chart Types: Legal Aspects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
4.1.3 Vector Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
4.1.4 Raster Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
4.2 Basic Setting for the Situation Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
4.2.1 Adapting the Display and Illumination to Suit the Room Brightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
4.2.2 Adjusting the Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
4.2.3 Selection and Setting of the Raster Chart to be Displayed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
4.2.4 Display Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
4.2.4.1 Monitoring Display Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
4.2.4.2 Planning Display Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
4.2.5 Setting the Coordinate System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
4.3 Settings of the Electronic Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
4.3.1 Defining the Objects to be Displayed in the Vector Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
4.3.2 Defining the Depth Contours to be Displayed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
4.3.3 Switching the display of the User Chart Objects on and off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
4.4 ECDIS Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
4.4.1 Track Monitoring: Own Ship against the System Track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
4.4.2 Chart Monitoring: Own Ship against Vector Chart and User Chart Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
4.4.2.1 Monitoring on the Basis of a Vector Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
4.4.2.2 Monitoring against User Chart Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
4.4.3 Chart Monitoring: System Track against Vector Chart and User Chart Objects . . . . . . . . . 110
4.4.4 Track Monitoring: Depth Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
4.4.5 Anchor Watch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
4.5 Determination of Positions, Bearings and Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
4.6 Automatic Identification System (AIS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
4.6.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
4.6.2 Treatment of the AIS Targets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
4.6.3 Specifying / Viewing Own AIS Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
4.6.4 Safety Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
4.6.5 Long-Range Interrogation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
4.6.6 AIS Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
4.7 Navigational Information from Telex (NAVTEX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
4.7.1 NAVTEX Summarised Briefly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
4.7.2 NAVTEX on CHARTPILOT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
4.7.3 Displaying received NAVTEX messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
4.7.4 Extracting Geographical Data from NAVTEX Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
4.8 Trial Manoeuvres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
4.9 Marking an Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
4.10 The Marking of Position Fixes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
4.11 Using Lines of Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
4.12 Selection and Setting of the Navigation Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
4.12.1 Course Transfer Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
4.12.2 Selection of the Speed Sensor; Input of Own Speed and Drift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
6 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_eiv.fm / 10.05.12
CHARTPILOT
4.12.3 Selection of the Position Sensor; Settings to Determine the Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
4.12.4 Manual Correction of the Position (Position Adjust) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
4.12.5 Setting the Time Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
4.13 Chartpilot with Local Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
4.13.1 Local Sensors Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
4.13.2 Switchover between System Sensors and Local Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
5 Voyage Planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
5.1 Generation of Pre-planned Tracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
5.1.1 General Information about Pre-planned Tracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
5.1.2 Generation, Handling and Administration of the Tracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
5.1.3 Preparing the Generation or Modification of the Track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
5.1.4 Setting Up the Digitizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
5.1.5 Generating Waypoints by Means of the Electronic Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
5.1.6 Generating Waypoints Alphanumerically in Text Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
5.1.6.1 Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
5.1.6.2 Generation of Waypoints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
5.1.7 Generating Waypoints with the Digitizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
5.1.8 Editing Waypoint Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
5.1.9 Checking of Tracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
5.1.9.1 Geometrical Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
5.1.9.2 Check against the Electronic Chart and the User Chart Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
5.1.9.3 Computation of Sailing Times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
5.1.10 Completing the Generation of the Track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
5.1.11 Printing Out Track Data in List Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
5.1.12 Generating Waypoint Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
5.2 Editing of User Chart Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
5.2.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
5.2.2 Editing of Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
5.2.3 Editing of Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
5.2.4 Editing of Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
5.2.4.1 Editing Danger Highlights and Feature Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
5.2.4.2 Editing Anchor Watch Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
5.2.5 Editing of Text Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
5.3 Editing of Manual Updates of the ENC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
5.4 Editing Cells of Own Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
5.4.1 Characteristics of Own Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
5.4.2 Preparation for Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
5.4.3 Editing of Own Chart Cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
5.4.4 Ending the Editing Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
5.5 Generation of Maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
5.5.1 General Information about Maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
5.5.2 Generation, Handling and Administration of Maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
5.5.3 Generating Map Lines and Symbols by Means of the Electronic Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
5.5.3.1 Map Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
5.5.3.2 Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
5.5.4 Generating Map Lines and Symbols with the Digitizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
5.5.4.1 Map Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
5.5.4.2 Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
5.5.5 Generating Map Lines Alphanumerically in Text Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
5.5.6 Generating Symbols Alphanumerically in Text Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
5.5.7 Completing the Generation of the Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
5.5.8 Printing Out Map Data in List Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
6 Voyage Execution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 7

b_cp_eiv.fm / 10.05.12
CHARTPILOT
6.1 Voyage Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229

6.1.1 Defining the System Track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
6.1.2 Planning and Achieving the Voyage Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
6.1.3 Generating the Passage Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
6.1.4 Printing Out Time Schedule Planning Data in List Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
6.1.5 Activating the Passage Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
6.2 Changes in the Voyage Planning and in the Track during the Voyage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
7 Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
7.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
7.1.1 Starting, Background Operation and Ending the Chart Maintenance Subroutine . . . . . . . . 244
7.1.2 The World Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
7.1.3 Switching Over to Planning Display Mode at a Marked Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
7.2 Common Aspects of the Various Chart Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
7.2.1 The Menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
7.2.2 Procuring the Subscription, Permits and Licences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
7.2.3 Transferring and Updating the Charts or Cell Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
7.2.4 Deleting the Charts or Cell Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
7.2.5 Deleting the Product List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
7.2.6 Selecting the Charts or Cell Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
7.2.6.1 Selection according to Regions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
7.2.6.2 Selection according to Navigational Purposes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
7.2.6.3 Selection according to Agency Codes and to Cell Names / Chart Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . 254
7.2.7 Displaying Information about a Cell / Chart / Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
7.2.8 Creating a Table of Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
7.2.9 Checking the Available Hard-Disk Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
7.2.10 Errors Caused by Dirty CDs/DVDs, CD/DVD Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
7.3 Data Maintenance of the ENC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
7.3.1 Permits for Licensed ENC cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
7.3.2 Transfer Function: Transferring All ENC Cells from Removable Device to Local Database 267
7.3.3 Transfer Function: Transferring All ENC Cells from Local to Other Databases . . . . . . . . . . 268
7.3.4 Update Function: Update of IHO ENC Cells on All Databases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
7.3.5 Real Time Update (RTU) for C-MAP ENC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
7.3.6 Update Function: Update of the C-MAP ENC Cells on All Databases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
7.3.7 Divergent Procedures for Transfer and Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
7.3.8 Deleting ENC Cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
7.3.9 Later Update of an Individual Equipment Item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
7.3.10 Check of the ENC Cells Installed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
7.3.11 Other Useful Information about the Data Maintenance of the IHO ENC Cells . . . . . . . . . . . 278
7.3.12 Other Useful Information about the Data Maintenance of C-MAP ENC Cells . . . . . . . . . . . 286
7.4 Data Maintenance of the Manual ENC Updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
7.5 Data Maintenance of Own Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
7.6 Data Maintenance of the ARCS Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
7.6.1 Licence and Permits for ARCS Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
7.6.2 Transfer Function: Transferring All ARCS Charts from CD to Local Database . . . . . . . . . . 292
7.6.3 Transfer Function: Transferring All ARCS Charts from Local to Other Databases . . . . . . . 293
7.6.4 Update Function: Update of the ARCS Charts on All Databases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
7.6.6 Deleting ARCS Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
7.6.7 Later Update of an Individual Equipment Item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
7.7 Data Maintenance of the CM-93/3Pro Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
7.7.1 Licences for CM-93/3Pro Cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
7.7.1.1 First Procurement of Subscription Licences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
7.7.1.2 First Procurement of Purchase Licences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
7.7.1.3 Subsequent Procurement of Further Licences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
8 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_eiv.fm / 10.05.12
CHARTPILOT
7.7.1.4 Installing the Licences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303

7.7.1.5 Useful Information about Licensing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
7.7.2 Transfer Function: Transferring All CM-93/3Pro Cells from Medium to Local Database . . . 306
7.7.3 Transfer Function: Transferring All CM-93/3Pro Cells from Local to Other Databases . . . . 307
7.7.4 Real Time Update (RTU) for Jeppesen Marine ENC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
7.7.5 Update Function: Update of the CM-93/3Pro Cells on All Databases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
7.7.7 Deleting CM-93/3Pro Cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
7.7.8 Check of the CM-93/3Pro Cells Installed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
7.7.9 Other Useful Information about the Data Maintenance of Jeppesen Marine CM-93/3Pro Cells 312
7.8 Data Maintenance of the CM-93/2 Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
7.8.1 Taking Out a Subscription for CM-93/2 Cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
7.8.2 Transferring Cells of the CM-93/2 Chart from CD to Local Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
7.8.3 Transferring All CM-93/2 Cells from Local to Other Databases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
7.8.5 Deleting Cells of the CM-93/2 Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
8 Auxiliary Functions, ECDIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
8.1 Management of the Track, Waypoint, Map and User Chart Objects Files . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
8.1.1 Maintaining Order in the Catalogs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
8.1.1.1 Track, Map and Waypoint Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
8.1.1.2 Files of the User Chart Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
8.1.2 Data Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
8.1.3 Restoring Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
8.1.4 Transfer of Track and Waypoint Files by E-Mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
8.1.5 Reception of Track Files from a Connected Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
8.1.6 Converting Objects of the Map into User Chart Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
8.2 Text Pages; Lists and Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
8.2.1 Generating and Using the Text Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
8.2.2 Management of the Text Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
8.3 Voyage Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
8.3.1 Performing of Voyage Recording, Management of Recordings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
8.3.2 Replay of a Voyage Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
8.4 Protocol Prints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
8.5 Determination and Back-Up of the System Parameterisation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
8.6 Determining the System Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
8.7 Making System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
9 Alarm Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
9.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
9.2 List of Alarms, Warnings and Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
9.2.1 AIS Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
9.2.2 NAVTEX Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Part III CHARTPILOT as Conning Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
10 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
11 The Displays of the Conning Display and their Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
11.1 The Navigation Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
11.2 The Docking Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
11.3 The Keel Clearance Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
11.4 The Data Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
12 Auxiliary Functions, Conning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
12.1 Performing Nautical Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 9

b_cp_eiv.fm / 10.05.12
CHARTPILOT
12.1.1 Performing a Position-Reckoning Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386

12.1.2 Calculating the Rendezvous Point of Two Ships . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
12.1.3 Solving Current-Sailing Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
12.1.4 Support for the Measured Mile Run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
12.1.5 Determining the Data of Sunrises and Sunsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
12.1.6 Determination of the Data of Fixed Stars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
12.2 Generating the Pilot Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
Appendices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
A Care and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
A1 Cleaning/Exchanging the Filter Pads . . . . . . . . . . ....................................... 399
A2 Checking the Fans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ....................................... 399
A3 Check of the Monitor Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . ....................................... 399
A4 Cleaning the CDs and the Optics of the CD Drive . ....................................... 401
B Alarm Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
C Data Recorded during Voyage Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
D Conversion of the Map Objects into User Chart Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
E Displays of the UPS, Model DLP100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
F Displays of the UPS, Model DLP150 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
G Displays of the UPS, Model Series DLG. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
H Keyboard Templates. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
13 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
10 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_eiv.fm / 10.05.12
CHARTPILOT
Operating Instructions List of Figures
List of Figures
Fig. 3-1 The various operating devices for cursor control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

Fig. 3-2 The top menu appearing in the right-hand side strip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Fig. 3-3 Basic structure of a menu from the menu hierarchy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Fig. 3-4 Example of a context menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Fig. 3-5 The tree in Chart Mode (CHARTPILOT in the NACOS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Fig. 3-6 The Tree in Chart Mode (CHARTPILOT without TRACKPILOT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Fig. 3-7 Screen division in Chart Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Fig. 3-8 The basic menu line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Fig. 3-9 The navigation data line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Fig. 3-10 The Presentation > Display Settings menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Fig. 3-11 The chart area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Fig. 3-12 The Presentation menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Fig. 3-13 The menus Radar/AIS and Radar/AIS > Targets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Fig. 3-14 Recognition of collision course by means of relative vector presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Fig. 3-15 Symbols on a map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Fig. 3-16 The Track/Control Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Fig. 3-17 Next Leg Data in the Track/Control Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Fig. 3-18 The Track/Schedule Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Fig. 3-19 The Conning Data Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Fig. 3-20 The Docking Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Fig. 3-21 The Pilot > TRACKPILOT and Pilot > SPEEDPILOT menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Fig. 3-22 The alarm list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Fig. 3-23 The info box and the data box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Fig. 3-24 Device Selection (selecting removable media) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Fig. 3-25 Navigation dialog box (store/save/backup) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Fig. 3-26 Navigation dialog box (restore/load) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Fig. 3-27 The dialog box Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Fig. 4-1 The Brightness menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Fig. 4-2 The Range field with Range List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Fig. 4-3 Marking of different and excessively small cell-scales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Fig. 4-4 Scale field with chart selection menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Fig. 4-5 The Chart > Raster Chart Options menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Fig. 4-6 Overview display of a raster chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Fig. 4-7 Display in the modes True Motion and Centered Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Fig. 4-8 Display in the modes North-Up RM, Course-Up RM and Head-Up RM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Fig. 4-9 The Presentation > Display Mode menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Fig. 4-10 The Presentation > Coordinate System menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Fig. 4-11 The Chart menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Fig. 4-12 The menus Chart > Visibility Groups and ... > Visibility Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Fig. 4-13 Diagram of the depth contour system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Fig. 4-14 The menu Chart > Depth Contour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Fig. 4-15 The Alarm Settings menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Fig. 4-16 Generating the Chart Alarm with the Guard Sector (example: SAFETY CONTOUR Alarm) . 108
Fig. 4-17 The Alarm Settings > Chart Alarms menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Fig. 4-18 The elements for determination of position, bearing and range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Fig. 4-19 Button and display field of the EBL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Fig. 4-20 Button and display field of the VRM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Fig. 4-21 Context menu of the chart area and measurement line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Fig. 4-22 The Waypoint Zoom-Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Fig. 4-23 The menu Radar/AIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Fig. 4-24 The menu Radar/AIS > Targets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Fig. 4-25 AIS targets displayed in True Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 11

b_cp_eav.fm / 10.05.12
CHARTPILOT
List of Figures Operating Instructions
Fig. 4-26 The menu Radar/AIS > Voyage Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

Fig. 4-27 The menu Radar/AIS > Read Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Fig. 4-28 The menu Radar/AIS > Send Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Fig. 4-29 The menu Radar/AIS > Interrogation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Fig. 4-30 The menu Radar/AIS > Channel Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Fig. 4-31 The Radar/AIS > Trial Manoeuvre menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Fig. 4-32 Display of a Trial Manoeuvre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Fig. 4-33 The Chart > Events menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Fig. 4-34 The Drop Event menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Fig. 4-35 The menus Chart > Position Fixes and ... > Drop Position Fix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Fig. 4-36 The Sensor Settings menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Fig. 4-37 The Sensor Settings > Set Gyro menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Fig. 4-38 The Sensor Settings > Speed Sensor menu (systems with radar 1000 series) . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Fig. 4-39 The Sensor Settings > Position Sensor and ... > 2nd Position Sensor menus . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Fig. 4-40 The Sensor Settings > Date/Time menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Fig. 4-41 The Local Sensors menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Fig. 5-1 Shape of the track in the case of course changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Fig. 5-2 The menu Tracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Fig. 5-3 The CHARTPILOT display for the editing of tracks in Text Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Fig. 5-4 The Tracks > Edit menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Fig. 5-5 Dialog Box for Calibration of the Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Fig. 5-6 The Peripheral Devices > Digitizer menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Fig. 5-7 Grids of the digitizable projections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Fig. 5-8 The waypoint list in the Text Mode menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Fig. 5-9 The Tracks > Edit > Text Mode > Columns menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Fig. 5-10 The Tracks > Edit > Text Mode > Compose menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Fig. 5-11 The input area in the Text Mode menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Fig. 5-12 The Tracks > Edit > Text Mode > Edit Several Waypoints menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Fig. 5-13 The Check Track dialog box and the Extreme Values dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Fig. 5-14 The Tracks > Edit > Store menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Fig. 5-15 The Tracks > Edit > Text Mode > Print menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Fig. 5-16 The Tracks > Waypoint File > Edit menu with the Text Mode menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Fig. 5-17 The menu Chart > Edit User Chart Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Fig. 5-18 The menu Chart > Edit User Chart Objects after pressing the button Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Fig. 5-19 The menu Charts > Edit User Chart Objects > Select Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Fig. 5-20 Examples of the Object Feature Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Fig. 5-21 The menu Chart > Edit Manual ENC Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Fig. 5-22 The Select Manual Update Chart Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Fig. 5-23 The menu Chart > Edit Manual ENC Update > Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Fig. 5-24 The Own Chart Editor menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Fig. 5-25 The Load (New) Cell box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Fig. 5-26 The menu Own Chart Editor > Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Fig. 5-27 The menu Own Chart Editor > Edit > Skin of the Earth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Fig. 5-28 The Maps menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Fig. 5-29 The Maps > Edit menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Fig. 5-30 The CHARTPILOT Display for the editing of maps in Text Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Fig. 5-31 The line point list in the Text Mode menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Fig. 5-32 The input area of the line point data in the Text Mode menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Fig. 5-33 The symbol list in the Text Mode menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Fig. 5-34 The input area of the symbol data in the Text Mode menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Fig. 6-1 The Tracks > Set System Track menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Fig. 6-2 The Tracks > Select menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Fig. 6-3 Example of a Passage Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Fig. 6-4 The Tracks > Time Schedule > Print menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Fig. 6-5 The Time Schedule menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
12 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_eav.fm / 10.05.12
CHARTPILOT
Operating Instructions List of Figures
Fig. 6-6 Beginning of a Passage List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

Fig. 7-1 The Chart Maintenance display with the world chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Fig. 7-2 The selection menu in the Chart Maintenance display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Fig. 7-3 The menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Fig. 7-4 Dialog box for displaying the progress and errors/warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Fig. 7-5 Selection according to navigational purposes in a Transfer menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Fig. 7-6 Selection menus for the selection by cell / chart numbers and agency codes . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Fig. 7-7 The Info box of the Chart Maintenance subroutine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Fig. 7-8 The menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance > ENC Licensing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Fig. 7-9 The menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance > ENC Other Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Fig. 7-10 The Product List Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Fig. 7-11 Deletion a Product list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Fig. 7-12 The product list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Fig. 7-13 The dialog box ENC Cell Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Fig. 7-14 The dialog box ENC Conversion Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Fig. 7-15 The dialog box with detailed information about an ENC cell file of the ENC database . . . . . . 286
Fig. 7-16 The menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance > ARCS Licensing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Fig. 7-17 The menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance > CM-93/3Pro Licensing > Subscription Licence . . 302
Fig. 7-18 The menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance > CM-93/3Pro Licensing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Fig. 7-19 The menu ... > Chart Maintenance > CM-93/3Pro Licensing > Install Licences Manually . . . 304
Fig. 7-20 The menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance > CM-93/3Pro Other Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Fig. 7-21 The menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance > CM-93/2 Subscription . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Fig. 8-1 The Utilities > Backup/Restore menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Fig. 8-2 The Data Selection menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Fig. 8-3 The menu Utilities > Backup/Restore > Maps to User Chart Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Fig. 8-4 The CHARTPILOT Display for the Text Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Fig. 8-5 The Utilities > Text Page menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Fig. 8-6 The Voyage Recording menu and its submenus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Fig. 8-7 The Voyage Recording menu (replay functions) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Fig. 8-8 Example of a Protocol Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Fig. 8-9 The Peripheral Devices > Printer menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Fig. 8-10 The Peripheral Devices > Printer > Protocol Print > Config. Cyclic Protocol menu . . . . . . . . . 342
Fig. 8-11 The Utilities > System Maintenance menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Fig. 8-12 The Utilities > System Maintenance > Configuration menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Fig. 8-13 The Status Log Page and the ... > System Maintenance > Configuration > View menu . . . . . 345
Fig. 9-1 The alarm list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Fig. 10-1 The Tree in Conning mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Fig. 11-1 The Navigation Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Fig. 11-2 Navigation Page, conventional propulsion, middle part, Open Sea Display Mode . . . . . . . . . 367
Fig. 11-3 Navigation Page, conventional propulsion, middle part in Harbour Display Mode . . . . . . . . . 368
Fig. 11-4 Navigation Page, Azimuth Thruster, middle part in Open Sea Display Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Fig. 11-5 Navigation Page, Azimuth Thruster, middle part in Harbour Display Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Fig. 11-6 Navigation Page, example of a different propulsion combination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Fig. 11-7 Navigation Page, individual displays, Figure 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Fig. 11-11 The Docking Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Fig. 11-12 The Docking Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Fig. 11-13 Keel Clearance Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Fig. 11-14 The Keel Clearance menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
Fig. 11-15 The Track/Schedule Display in the Conning Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Fig. 11-16 The Track/Control Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Fig. 11-17 The NACOS Status Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Fig. 11-18 Example of an External Alarm Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 13

b_cp_eav.fm / 10.05.12
CHARTPILOT
List of Figures Operating Instructions
Fig. 12-1 The Calculator menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385

Fig. 12-2 The Calculator > Reckoning menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Fig. 12-3 The Calculator > Rendezvous menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Fig. 12-4 The Calculator > Current Sailing menu (problem 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Fig. 12-5 The Calculator > Measured Mile menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
Fig. 12-6 The Calculator > Sunrise & Sunset menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Fig. 12-7 The Calculator > Altitude & Azimuth menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
Fig. 12-8 CHARTPILOT Display for generating the Pilot Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
Fig. 12-9 The Pilot Card > Nautical Checklist menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Fig. 12-10 Example of a pilot card generated on the CHARTPILOT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
Fig. E-1 Display elements and operating elements of the UPS (model DLP100) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
Fig. F-1 Display elements and operating elements of the UPS (model DLP150) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
Fig. G-1 Displays and controls of the UPS (model series DLG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
14 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_eav.fm / 10.05.12
CHARTPILOT
Operating Instructions List of Abbreviations
List of Abbreviations
= In this area, a context menu can be opened. 1)
A
AFC automatic frequency control
AIS Universal Shipborne Automatic Identification System
A/N keyboard alphanumeric keyboard
ARCS Admiralty Raster Chart Service
ArSp Arrival Speed
B
BAS Bridge Alarm System
BSH Bundesamt für Seeschifffahrt und Hydrographie
BT bottom track
C
CD centered display
CEN centered
CIRM Comité International Radio-Maritime
CM (Track) Control mode
CMG course made good
CCRP Consistent Common Reference Point
CCRS Consistent Common Reference System
COG course over ground
CP CHARTPILOT
CPA closest point of approach
CrsL course limit
CSE course
C-UP Course-Up
D
deg degree
DGPS Differential GPS
Dist distance
DistR distance radius
DNV Det Norske Veritas
DNV NAUT-AW DNV nautical safety all waters
DTG distance to go
DTG R DTG radius
E
EBL electronic bearing line
Ec Economy
ECDIS electronic chart display and information system
ENC electronic navigational chart
ETA estimated time of arrival
ETA P ETA profile
ETD estimated time of departure
1) To be opened with the MORE key; for context menu, see page 40
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 15

b_cp_e01.fm / 10.05.12
CHARTPILOT
List of Abbreviations Operating Instructions
FIX ABS fixed absolute

FIX REL fixed relative
fm fathom
ft feet
G
GC great circle
GEO geographic coordinate
GK Gauss-Krüger
GPS global positioning system
H
HDG heading
H-UP heading up
I
ID identification
IHO International Hydrographic Organization
Interf. interference rejection
INV invalid
K
kn knot, knots
L
Lat latitude
Lon longitude
M
m meter
mism. mismatched
MMSI Maritime Mobile Service Identity
N
NGO Norges Geografiske Oppmåling
N-UP North-Up
O
OSD on screen display
P
PC paper chart
PCI Processor Controlled Interswitch
PD pilot data
PIN personal identification number
PlSp Planned Speed
PrSp Profile Speed
R
RAD, Rad radius
RADAR/STBY radar / standby
RCDS raster chart display systems
REL, Rel relative
RL rhumb line
RM relative motion
16 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e01.fm / 10.05.12
CHARTPILOT
Operating Instructions List of Abbreviations
RNC raster navigation chart

ROT rate of turn
ROT Pl rate of turn at Planned Speed
RPM revolution per minute
RTU real time updating
S
SENC system electronic navigational chart
SM sailing mode
SMG speed made good
SOG speed over ground
SP SPEEDPILOT
Src source
SRNC system raster navigational chart database
STBD starboard
STD DISP, Std Disp standard display
T
T track (file)
TCPA time to closest point of approach
TM true motion
To WPT to waypoint
TP TRACKPILOT
T&P NMs temporary and preliminary notices to mariners
TRDSTR track distance radius
TRK track
TrkDst track distance
TRKL track limit
TTG time to go
TTG P TTG profile
U
UKHO United Kingdom Hydrographic Office
UPS uninterruptible power supply
UTC universal time coordinated
UTM universal transversal mercatorprojection
V
VDR voyage data recorder
VRM variable range marker
W
W waypoint (file)
WAS Watch Alarm System
WOP wheel over point
WP waypoint
WPB waypoint bearing
WPD waypoint distance
WT water track
X
XTD cross track distance
Z
ZT zone time
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 17

b_cp_e01.fm / 10.05.12
CHARTPILOT
List of Abbreviations Operating Instructions
18 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e01.fm / 10.05.12
CHARTPILOT
Part I Basics
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 19

b_cp_e1.fm / 10.05.12
CHARTPILOT
20 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e1.fm / 10.05.12
CHARTPILOT 1 Overview
Operating Instructions 1.1 The Functions of the CHARTPILOT
1 Overview
1.1 The Functions of the CHARTPILOT
The CHARTPILOT is an item of navigation equipment for the planning, control and monitoring of nautical
ship-handling on the basis of an electronic chart. It is designed as a central unit in the integrated naviga-
tion system NACOS (i.e. in conjunction with the track control system TRACKPILOT), but is also used
without the TRACKPILOT but together with the radars of the.
If the CHARTPILOT is used in the NACOS, it is possible to select by simple switch-over whether it is to
act as an ECDIS or as a conning display; when used without a TRACKPILOT, it is used only as an
ECDIS:
ECDIS
In Chart mode, the CHARTPILOT is
the display medium of the ECDIS,
i.e. the electronic chart can be
displayed on its monitor, together
with present data of own ship (posi-
tion, course etc.), the targets
acquired by an ARPA radar and an
AIS system, a safety contour, and
other parameters which serve to
improve safety.
In Chart mode, the CHARTPILOT
meets the „Performance Standards
for ECDIS“ defined by the IMO/IHO
and IHO S-52 („Specification for
Chart Contents and Display Aspects
of ECDIS“) if it is operated with offi-
cial electronic charts according to
IHO S-57. The CHARTPILOT is
compatible to and approved
according to Edition 2 of IEC 61174.
Conning-Display
(in the NACOS only)
In Conning mode, the necessary
navigation data can be displayed in
the form of a conning display for
normal sailing (Navigation), for
docking manoeuvres (Docking) or
for sailing in shallow water (Keel
Clearance).
Note for the reader in a hurry:
If you wish to get into the functional
details immediately, begin at page 25
or
- for Chart mode: with Section
3.3.5 at page 41,
- for Conning mode: at page 361.
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 21

b_cp_e11.fm / 10.05.12
1 Overview CHARTPILOT
1.1 The Functions of the CHARTPILOT Operating Instructions
In Chart mode, the CHARTPILOT is also an ECDIS-based nautical planning and consulting station.
With it, you can conveniently and very precisely generate the planned voyage routes on the basis of
sequences of waypoints and store them as the pre-planned track 1). For the pre-planned track, you can
input the actual time schedule into the CHARTPILOT. Then, when the ship is travelling along the pre-
planned track, the CHARTPILOT computes the speed (Arrival Speed) with which the ship must sail in
order to arrive at the planned time.
The chart maintenance for the entire system is also performed at the CHARTPILOT. In addition, indi-
vidual chart objects can be edited (known as “User Chart Objects”). In this way, raster charts can be used
for the ECDIS monitoring. Furthermore, with the aid of the optionally installed Own Chart editor, the
CHARTPILOT enables the operator to generate own vector charts.
If there is an AIS system connected, it can be operated fully from the CHARTPILOT and the AIS displays
are shown on the CHARTPILOT. 2)
In Conning mode 3), the CHARTPILOT also offers consulting functions: with the CHARTPILOT, you can
perform position-reckoning calculations, solve water-current tasks, determine data of sunrises and
sunsets or of the fixed stars, or obtain advice in other nautical matters. For example, you can also
generate the pilot card in a simple manner or - in the form of the Text Page - create lists or make notes
which you can at any time display again and print.
The CHARTPILOT also represents the central database of the system (e.g. for tracks, charts, User Chart
Objects, Text Pages etc.). It makes these data available to those system components that need but
cannot store the data themselves (radar units, TRACKPILOT, SPEEDPILOT). If several CHARTPILOTs
are installed, the data are automatically stored redundantly on the CHARTPILOTs. The automatic redun-
dant storage also takes place on MULTIPILOTs 4), if any are installed.
1)
For this term, which has now been standardised, the term Programmed Track is used on older NACOS documents.
2) An AIS system can also be connected in such a way that it can be operated only on the radar indicators of the system or by its own display
electronic units. In this case, only the display of the AIS targets and of the Aids-to-Navigation takes place on the CHARTPILOT.
3) When used without a TRACKPILOT, these functions are available in Chart mode.
4) A MULTIPILOT is a system combining the properties of a radar unit with those of an approved ECDIS.
22 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e11.fm / 10.05.12
CHARTPILOT 1 Overview
Operating Instructions 1.2 The Consistent Common Reference System
1.2 The Consistent Common Reference System
General
The radar system with its sensors and connected equipment is implemented in form of a Consistent
Common Reference System (CCRS). Thereby it is possible to have a central function for acquisition,
processing, storage and distribution of data and information, providing identical and obligatory reference
to subsystems within the integrated system. The CCRS is the means to ensure that all parts of the
system use the same source and values for a specific type of system data, for example own ship position,
speed, heading, time, etc.
The CCRS allows to define the Consistent Common Reference Point (CCRP), a reference location in
a ship to which all measurements such as own ship position, target range and bearing, rel. course and
speed etc. are referenced. Typically this is the conning position on the bridge, but may also be the origin
of the reference axes of the ship or the radar antenna. The details of the CCRS and CCRP implementa-
tion on the CHARTPILOT are documented in the respective chapters of this manual.
HL
Cursor COG / SOG SYS
Search light area
(REF=SYS)
Chart
object
REF = SYS
COG / SOG CONN
EBL
VRM
REF = CON
AIS target
Chart
object
Measurements relative to the Conning Position (REF = CON)
Implementation on the CHARTPILOT

For a CHARTPILOT in a NACOS system with integrated Track Control System (TRACKPILOT1100) it is
important to use the same reference position for the track control and for the monitoring process. For both
purposes the so-called System Position, located in the bow of the ship, is used system-wide.
For own-ship relative measurements (EBL, VRM, Cursor, target data) on the CHARTPILOT the Conning
Position is used. In contrast to the radar system, where the reference may also be the position of the
radar antenna, no alternative reference position can be selected by the operator on the Chartpilot.
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 23

b_cp_e11.fm / 10.05.12
1 Overview CHARTPILOT
1.3 The Components of the CHARTPILOT and its Variants Operating Instructions
1.3 The Components of the CHARTPILOT and its Variants
The CHARTPILOT station consists of an industrial-quality computer electronics unit (= CHARTPILOT

electronics unit) and a colour monitor, both approved for use on ships, and an operating unit. The
CHARTPILOT electronics unit is equipped with a CD drive and a Floppy.
Each CHARTPILOT should be supplied with electric power by means of an uninterruptible power
supply (UPS), which keeps the CHARTPILOT running in the event of a ship's mains failure of limited
duration and - in the case of a longer failure of the ship's mains - ensures that the CHARTPILOT is shut
down in the proper way.
The CHARTPILOT can be equipped with a printer for the output of voyage records, waypoint lists,
screenshots of the CHARTPILOT or a connected radar, and with a digitizer for the input of coordinates
from a (paper) chart.
The CHARTPILOT needs various items of navigation data. Operation of the CHARTPILOT requires the
connection of a position sensor which supplies the ship's position in the form of geographical coordinates
in the chart datum WGS 84, as well as the as well as Course Made Good(CMG) and Speed Made Good
(SMG); a gyro compass must be connected too.
Some of the data needed for the conning displays of the system pass into the system through the
route described above, but most of them enter via the TRACKPILOT. For this reason, many conning
displays are only available at the CHARTPILOT when there is a TRACKPILOT in the system.
1.4 Current IHO standards / Regulatory Approvals
For an up-to-date overview regarding the IHO standards which are currently in effect for ECDIS, ECDIS
application software versions, compliance status and regulatory approvals for CHARTPILOT and its
surrounding equipment, please contact SAM Electronics´ website:
http://www.sam-electronics.de/dateien/navigation/chartpil.html
1.5 Using this Manual
These Operating Instructions refer to CHARTPILOTs which are approved under the software version
stated on the title page. 1)
These Operating Instructions describe the operating sequences of the CHARTPILOT 1100 when it is
installed together with units of the radar 1100 series. They also cover use in a NACOS xx-5 system, i.e.
in conjunction with the track control system TRACKPILOT 1100. They cover all possible operating and
display functions.
Because of the various possibilities of use, not all of the functions described are available on all
ships. This can be recognized in any given case from the fact that the required operating and display
elements are absent.
For information about the operating procedures and maintenance functions that are necessary on the
optional printer and the settings on the monitors, please see the manufacturer's documents which are
also supplied. For operating of the UPS, see page 27.
1) On page 346, there is a description of how to display the software version currently installed in the CHARTPILOT.
24 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e11.fm / 10.05.12
CHARTPILOT 2 Switching the CHARTPILOT On and Off
Operating Instructions 2.1 Switching the CHARTPILOT On
2 Switching the CHARTPILOT On and Off
2.1 Switching the CHARTPILOT On
Regarding the power ON/OFF switching, the console versions and the desktop versions are different.
For the console versions, the following is applicable:
If you wish to switch the CHARTPILOT on, first check on the monitor of the CHARTPILOT with the
aid of the POWER or ON/OFF switch setting and the POWER lamp (if this exists) to see whether
the CHARTPILOT is already switched on and the screen has simply been set to the dark state. If
the CHARTPILOT is already switched on, you must adapt the screen display to suit the brightness
of the room (see below). However, you must never operate the POWER or ON/OFF switch for the
purpose of „trial and error“.
NOTICE:
When the POWER or ON/OFF switch on the on the monitor of the
console version of the CHARTPILOT is operated, the CHARTPILOT is
switched off again. However, this should only be done after shutting
down the operating system in the proper manner (see Section 2.3).
Otherwise, in a few cases, renewed installation of the program and of the
data might be necessary.
For the desktop versions, the following is applicable:
Depending on the particular installation, switching the CHARTPILOT on is done by operating the
mains power switch on the monitor and/or on the computer, or by switching the supply voltage on in
the ship's electrical supply system. In this case too, once a computer has been switched on it must
not be switched off again until the operating system has been shut down - see the above warning.
When the Log-On display appears after starting of the operating system press the Enter key. 1) The main
program of the CHARTPILOT starts up, and the electronic chart that is suitable for the present position
appears in the chart area (see Figure 3-11 on page 50).
Switching the other components on: Slave monitors, printer and digitizer can be switched on at any
time independently of the CHARTPILOT.
USEFUL INFORMATION
Adaptation to Room Brightness

The basic brightness and, if applicable, the contrast of the screen display can be adjusted directly on
the monitor. An additional differentiated adaptation, including the switch-over of day and night colours, is
described on page 83.
Colour Faults in the Display on Monitors with Cathode Ray Tubes; Degaussing Function
As are result of changes in the magnetic field at the location of the monitor, colour faults might occur in
some areas of the display. To correct them, the Degauss key should be pressed on the monitor.
If this does not lead to success, the reason might be that there are magnetic components or magnet-
ised casings nearby, which will have to be removed from the vicinity or demagnetised.
Depending on the version of the monitor, an automatic time-controlled degaussing function is also
provided.
1) The CHARTPILOT can also be configured in such a way that its main program starts up without any further inputs.
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 25

b_cp_e12.fm / 10.05.12
2 Switching the CHARTPILOT On and Off CHARTPILOT
2.2 Switch-Over of the Modes Operating Instructions
Colour Distortions on Monitors with Flat Screens (TFT Monitors)

If the display on a TFT monitor has remained unchanged for a long period of time and is then replaced
by a different display, an effect can occur which is known as "ion spotting" in the case of cathode ray
tubes: the previous display is still faintly visible in the form of discoloration. In the case of TFT monitors,
in contrast to monitors with cathode ray tubes, this effect is reversible and therefore cannot be regarded
as a defect. If the monitor is operated for a long time (several hours or days) with a different display, the
discoloration disappears.
2.2 Switch-Over of the Modes
Switching Over to Chart Mode

When Conning mode is switched on, it is possible to switch over to Chart mode at any time by pressing
the function key F1. 1)
Switching Over to Conning Mode

Switching over to Conning mode is done by pressing the function key F2. 1)
In the case of switch-over, the settings of the mode that is not switched on remain stored in the back-
ground. They are available in unchanged form when the mode is called up again.
In the case of use without a TRACKPILOT, the CHARTPILOT can be operated in Chart mode only,
and so a switch-over function is unnecessary and is omitted.
2.3 Switching the CHARTPILOT Off
Usually, it is not necessary to switch the CHARTPILOT off. If the CHARTPILOT is going to remain
unused for a long time, it is advisable to protect the monitor by reducing the brightness and contrast on
the monitor.
If the CHARTPILOT has to be switched off completely, e.g. because the relevant part of the ship's elec-
trical supply system is going to be switched off, the operating system of the CHARTPILOT computer must
be shut down properly.
NOTICE:
If the CHARTPILOT is switched off without first shutting down the oper-
ating system, the program or data might be destroyed. In such cases, it
might be necessary to re-install the program. Furthermore, the CHART-
PILOT must not be switched off while track or waypoint files are being
copied or while files of the electronic chart are being transferred.
Shutting down the operating system: Press Tree button or function key F10; in the display which then
appears, click the button POWER DOWN. A dialog box appears, containing the question Are you sure
you want to shut down the system?
If you really do want to switch off the CHARTPILOT, you now have to press the OK button. As a
result, the program of the CHARTPILOT is stopped and the operating system is shut down. The computer
must not be switched off until the message System halted is shown in the bottom line at bottom left.
If you do not want to end the program after all, you must press the Cancel button instead of OK.
1) Alternatively, the switch-over is performed by means of the function overview (Tree); see page 41.
26 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e12.fm / 10.05.12
CHARTPILOT 2 Switching the CHARTPILOT On and Off
Operating Instructions 2.3 Switching the CHARTPILOT Off
Switching the CHARTPILOT off: When the message System halted is shown, switch off the monitor
of the CHARTPILOT by operating the POWER or ON/OFF switch on the CHARTPILOT monitor 1). In the
case of the console version, this also causes switch-off of the computer; in the case of the desktop
version, the computer has to be switched off separately, using the computer’s power switch.
If slave terminals are installed: The above description applies for the CHARTPILOT station. Slave
terminals can be switched off at any time independently of the CHARTPILOT station.
Switching off the uninterruptible power supply: If the uninterruptible power supply (UPS) is to be
switched off too (which can really only be necessary in the case of service work), the UPS must not be
switched off until the CHARTPILOT has been switched off.
Switching the other components off: Slave monitors, printer and digitizer can be switched off at any
time independently of the CHARTPILOT.
USEFUL INFORMATION
Behaviour in the Event of Ship's Mains Failure

If power failure occurs in the ship's mains, the most important components of the CHARTPILOT System
are supplied with power by the UPS. If the type recommended by SAM Electronics is installed, the oper-
ating system of the CHARTPILOT computer is automatically shut down in the proper way before the
voltage of the UPS collapses (in the case of a ship's mains failure lasting for at least five minutes).
The UPS is switched on continuously, and normally needs no operating actions. Appendix E
describe which displays appear on the UPS types DPL 100, DPL150 during proper operation, and
which displays appear there in the case of a fault. For other UPS types delivered by SAM Elec-
tronics, this is described in the corresponding Technical Manuals.
Newer types of UPS are connected via an interconnection box; this has a change-over switch with
which the UPS can be bypassed. If UPS should develop a fault, this change-over possibility can be
used to power the CHARTPILOT directly from the ship’s mains, by setting the switch to position I.
Behaviour in the Case of a Malfunction in the Chart or Conning Mode

If a malfunction occurs in the CHARTPILOT in the modes mentioned, and if this malfunction cannot be
corrected by means of the operating actions described in this document, an attempt can be made to
correct the fault by aborting and restarting the CHARTPILOT program:
If you press the Tree button 2), click the EXIT button in the display which then appears, and answer the
question which then appears by clicking the OK button,
- the main program of the CHARTPILOT and all running programs are stopped,
- the log-on display appears after a short time and the program has to be restarted - see page 25, 3)
- after the start program has started up completely, the standard display appears in Chart mode.
1) With some types of monitor which are switched on and off by means of a pushbutton switch, this pushbutton has to be pressed for slightly
longer in order to switch the monitor off.
2) Operating of the buttons see page 34
3) The program is restarted automatically after a waiting time of 30 seconds if the configuration is appropriate for that purpose.
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 27

b_cp_e12.fm / 10.05.12
2 Switching the CHARTPILOT On and Off CHARTPILOT
2.3 Switching the CHARTPILOT Off Operating Instructions
28 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e12.fm / 10.05.12
CHARTPILOT
Part II CHARTPILOT as ECDIS
In this part, the functions offered by the CHARTPILOT in Chart mode are described.
In the following instructions for the operating procedure of these func-

tions, it is assumed that the CHARTPILOT is switched to Chart mode.
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 29

b_cp_e3.fm / 10.05.12
CHARTPILOT
30 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e3.fm / 10.05.12
CHARTPILOT 3 General
Operating Instructions 3.1 Overview
3 General
3.1 Overview
When the CHARTPILOT is switched to Chart mode, it performs the functions of an ECDIS. If it is being
operated with an official electronic chart as per IHO S-57, it fulfils the „Performance Standards for ECDIS“
defined by IMO/IHO, as well as „IHO S-52 (Specifications for Chart Contents and Display Aspects of
ECDIS)“.
In addition to the functions stipulated for an ECDIS by these documents, namely:
- Transfer and conversion of the files of the Electronic Navigational Chart (ENC) to the databases 1)
of the system
- Display of the ENC data 2) contained in the database as an electronic chart, including display and
monitoring of the safety contour.
- Input of the official updates of the electronic charts
- Editing of update files for the existing ENC files (manual ENC update)
- Editing of objects which supplement the electronic charts (User Chart Objects)
- Display of own ship's position
- Voyage planning (generation of pre-planned tracks)
- Voyage monitoring
- Recording of voyage data (voyage recording) incl. management and replay of recorded data
- Alarm messages
- The setting of event markers and position fixes the following functions too are available in Chart
mode 3):
- Transfer and conversion of the files of the ARCS charts 4), issued by the UKHO / Admiralty Raster
Chart Service to the databases 1) of the system
- Transfer and conversion of the files of other vector chart types to the databases 1) of the system
- Alternative display of the ARCS charts and the other vector chart types
- Anchor watch incl. monitoring function
- Display of the targets of a connected ARPA radar
- Operating procedure for the connected AIS system and display of the AIS information
- Trial manoeuvres on the basis of the own ship symbol and of the targets
- Selection and setting of the navigation sensors
- Voyage planning (generation of the passage plan)
- Management of the files created in the voyage planning process
- Generation, display and management of lists and notes (Text Pages)
- Making print-outs for different purposes
- Display and print of TRACKPILOT and SPEEDPILOT parameterisation
- Determination and saving of system parameterisations and display of installed software versions
1) In the relevant standards and regulations, the database of the ENC is also called SENC (System Electronic Navigational Chart), and the
database of the ARCS charts is called SRNC (System Raster Navigational Chart Database). Throughout these Operating Instructions, the
entire set of data contained in a hard disk drive and relating to a chart type is called a database. A local database means the database
of the equipment that is being operated.
2) The electronic chart formed by these files is a vector chart (see Section 4.1 from page 79 onwards). In the following, this vector chart is
also included under the term vector chart together with the other vector chart types.
3) In the case of use without a TRACKPILOT, only Chart mode exists, in which a number of the functions described in Sections 11 and 12
are then available additionally - see page 363.
4) The electronic chart formed by the ARCS charts is a raster chart (see Section 4.1 from page 79 onwards). In the following, this electronic
chart is in fact called a raster chart.
Where both vector charts and raster charts are meant, the term electronic chart is used in the following.
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 31

b_cp_e31.fm / 10.05.12
3 General CHARTPILOT
3.2 Operating Unit; Trackball and Keyboard Operating Instructions
3.2 Operating Unit; Trackball and Keyboard
The desktop version of the CHARTPILOT has an ordinary commercial computer-keyboard supple-
mented by a mouse or by a separate trackball. The console version of the CHARTPILOT is either
equipped with a trackball or with a membrane keyboard containing an integrated trackball.
The operating procedure can be performed entirely by means of the operating elements appearing on the
screen. These mainly consist of buttons grouped in the form of menus according to subjects. The input
unit used to operate these operating elements is the trackball or mouse 1); the cursor, which appears on
the screen and can be moved by means of the trackball, serves as a pointer.
This cursor control by means of the trackball is used not only for the menu operating procedure but also
(for example) for the graphic editing of tracks or for the marking of elements of the vector chart.
The trackball in its various forms, and the mouse, each have three keys (see Figure 3-1):
- The key on the left has the main function and is called the DO key throughout this Operating
Instructions.
- With the key in the middle, information about the element marked with the cursor can be called up.
This key is called the INFO key throughout this Operating Instructions.
- The key on the right has further functions which depend on the position of the cursor („context-
sensitive“ functions). It is called the MORE key throughout this Operating Instructions.
In the case of the trackball which is also used for the series (the illustration on the right), the middle
key is the DO key so that this configuration is the same for the CHARTPILOT and the radar indica-
tors 2).
DO key MORE key

DO key MORE key DO key
INFO key
INFO key
MORE key INFO key MORE key
DO key
INFO key
Trackball on the membrane keyboard Mouse Separate trackball (examples)
Fig. 3-1 The various operating devices for cursor control
1)
The functionalities of the trackball and mouse are identical. Wherever the trackball is mentioned in these Operating Instructions, the mouse
can be used in the same way for the desktop version.
2)
The key is labelled with Cancel. In these Operating Instructions, it is referred to as the MORE key, because its function is identical to the
MORE keys of the other operating devices.
32 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e31.fm / 10.05.12
Operating Instructions 3.3 The Operating Elements on the Screen
The function keys of the keyboard are mostly assigned to functions of the basic menu line and have the
following meanings:
Further
Operating element Function information
F1 (= CHART) Switches to the Chart mode page 26
F2 (= CONNING) Switches to the Conning mode page 26
F3 None
F4 None
F5 (= Event marker) Sets an event marker and opens the Drop Event box page 133
F6 (= Range) Calls up the Range field to set the range page 85
F7 (= Set Center) Specifying the centre of the chart excerpt displayed page 94 and 95
F8 (= Std Disp) Switches the chart area to its standard display page 51
F9 (= Brightness) Calls up the Brightness field for adapting the display to suit page 83
the room brightness
F10 (= Tree) Calls up the tree page 41
F11 (= Menu) Switches the Menu display on and off page 37
F12 None
Print Screen or Prt SC Prints out the screen content on the connected printer page 73
In Appendix H, you will find a template for the function keys F1 to F12 of the keyboard for the
desktop version; you can fix this template to the keyboard until you have become familiar with the
function of the keys.
Switch-Over between CHARTPILOT Terminal and Slave Terminals

If there are slave terminals (monitors including operating units) installed, at any time only one of the termi-
nals is active.
An inactive unit is activated when, on that trackball or mouse, the DO key is pressed for three seconds.
As a result, the operating unit that has been active up until that time is de-activated.
3.3 The Operating Elements on the Screen
If you are already familiar with graphic man/machine interfaces, you can skip Sections 3.3.1 to 3.3.4.
3.3.1 Individual Elements and their Operation
Cursor
The cursor generally indicates the screen position on which the pressing of a key has its effect, especially
the keys DO, INFO and MORE.
The cursor is moved by means of the trackball 1).
Depending on its position and its current function, the cursor can have various forms:
1) You can change the transmission ratio between the trackball movement and cursor movement - see page 346.
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 33

b_cp_e31.fm / 10.05.12
3.3 The Operating Elements on the Screen Operating Instructions
Cursor outside the chart area, and in the case of context menus that have been opened; in this
form, it is used to operate operating elements and to open input fields.
Cursor inside the chart area; in this form, it is used to mark a displayed object or a position.
The geographical position occupied by the cursor in the chart area is displayed in the
Cursor display - see page 48.
This form indicates that the CHARTPILOT computer is busy with a task which permits a limited
operating procedure only.
The cursor looks like this if inputs in text boxes are to be made.
In the case of special functions, the cursor can also have other forms, e.g. when a dialog box is being
moved or when the size of a dialog box is being changed - see page 41.
Buttons
The most important operating elements are the virtual keys („buttons“) which appear on the screen.
To operate buttons, the cursor is moved onto the button by means of the trackball and the DO key is then
pressed for a short time. In the following, this procedure is called „clicking the button“ or „pressing the
button“.
Buttons whose names are displayed with weaker contrast (= insensitive display) cannot be pressed.
Buttons can have various logical switching functions. Depending on the switching function, they have
different appearances:
Corresponds to a button which does not engage in the
pressed position. The relevant function is triggered by clicking.
Corresponds to a switch with the settings on and off. The

function displayed is „on“ when the square is red. Switching
over is done by clicking.
Corresponds to a selector switch with several settings. Under

the name of the switch, all possible settings of the switch are
shown. The selected setting of the switch is indicated by a red
diamond. Switching over is done by clicking the desired
setting of the switch. In some cases, the switch settings that
can be selected alternatively are spatially separate, e.g.
Monitoring and Planning in the Presentation > Display
Mode menu - see Figure 4-9 on page 94.
This too corresponds to a selector switch with several

settings. However, under the name of the switch, only the
selected setting of the switch is displayed on the button.
Switching over is done by making the other settings of the
switch visible by clicking the button, and by then clicking the
appropriate setting of the switch.
34 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e31.fm / 10.05.12
By clicking of these arrow keys, the value displayed in the

data display field between them can be increased or
decreased in steps.
Sliding Controller
With a sliding controller, the value of a parameter can be
changed by moving the cursor onto the „handle“ of the
controller, pressing the DO key, and moving the handle to the
desired value by means of the trackball while keeping the DO
key pressed. The set value is displayed above the handle.
Fine adjustment can be carried out with the aid of the arrow
keys after the sliding controller has been provided with the
red focus frame by clicking.
Input Fields
Editing cursor These fields, in which data are entered or texts are input
(edited), can be recognised from the editing cursor.
For editing, the field must be clicked. The editing process is
described in Section 3.4.
Lists
Particular items of data are displayed in the form of lists. The
data displayed cannot be changed in the list. However, they
can be manipulated line by line (e.g. transferred, copied,
deleted). Which of the manipulations are possible depends
on the list and is described in the relevant section of these
Operating Instructions. The first step of such a manipulation
is always the marking of the lines concerned:
Marking a single line: Click the line.
Marking several consecutive lines: Position the cursor on
the uppermost line that is to be marked, press the DO key,
and - while keeping the DO key pressed - move the cursor to
the last line that is to be marked. Release the DO key.
Most lists have a defined height on the screen. If the list contains more lines than can be displayed, oper-
ating elements appear to the right of the list, by means of which all lines are made visible by scrolling:
- With the triangles, clicking causes the list to be scrolled down or up by one line (or continuously to
the end or beginning in the case of prolonged pressing).
- After positioning of the cursor on the bar, the list can be shifted (scrolled) by any desired amount by
means of the trackball, with the DO key kept pressed.
- By clicking of the gap situated between the triangle and the bar, the list is scrolled down or up by a
distance equal to the height of the window.
Almost all lists are wide enough to allow the longest line contained in them to be displayed. If the width
of a list is not sufficient for this, the list can be scrolled sideways by means of the operating elements
described. The operating elements for this then appear below the list. The operating procedure is the
same as for the scrolling of lines.
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 35

b_cp_e31.fm / 10.05.12
3.3.2 Operating Procedure using the Keyboard instead of the Trackball
Operating elements can also be operated with the keys of the keyboard. The trackball operating proce-
dure described in Section 3.3.1 is the method most quickly learned and provides rapid operation, but in
some cases, operation by means of the keys is very useful.
In contrast to the use of the trackball, operation by means of keys is impossible in some cases. In
the case concerned, try out the effect of the keys.
Basically, operation takes place in two steps:
- First of all, the operating element or the input field must be marked.
- After that, the operation takes place on the marked operating element, or the input takes place in
the input field.
Marking the Operating Element and the Input Field

The marked element is the one with a red frame, called the focus frame. The focus frame can be set
on a different element of the group with the aid of the arrow keys.
The following is generally true: Only when an operating element is provided with the focus frame can
that element be operated or used. (Incidentally: This applies also to operation by means of the track-
ball. When clicking occurs, the focus frame is set automatically, and then - if it is a button - this
button if pressed.)
It is possible to change over between the groups by means of the Tab key or by simultaneous pressing
of the keys Shift + Tab. In lists and in large input fields, the focus frame can be moved in even larger
steps by means of the keys Pg Up (or Page up), Pg Dn (or Page down), Home, End, Ctrl + Home,
Ctrl + End.
If an operating element or an input field cannot be marked in this way, the trackball must be used.
Marking of List Lines
A desired line can be marked by means of the arrow keys. Several lines can be marked simultaneously
by keeping the Shift key pressed while operating the arrow keys. Exit from the list by pressing the Tab
key.
Operation of Operating Elements

Buttons
A button provided with a focus frame can be operated by means of the space bar.
A button marked with a default frame is operated by means of the Enter key.
The default frame is displayed as an additional, grey-shaded, recessed frame. The program specifies
which button is given a default frame.
Sliding Controllers
These are moved by means of the arrow keys. They can be moved in larger steps by simultaneous
pressing of the keys Ctrl + arrow keys or by means of the keys Home and End.
3.3.3 Menus
A menu is a summary of the functions which can be selected as alternatives depending on the operating
situation.
There are two different menu systems:
36 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e31.fm / 10.05.12
- The hierarchical menus form a consistent system for the operation of (almost) all functions. The
complete set of hierarchical menus has a systematic structure. They are therefore particularly suit-
able for learning the operating procedure. For these reasons, these Operating Instructions are based
throughout on the use of the hierarchical menus.
- For some functions, context menus exist. They permit very fast operating procedures but only offer
a very limited overview of all available functions of the set of functions being operated.
3.3.3.1 Hierarchical Menus
In the case of the hierarchical menus, while in a menu you can call up a lower-order menu, and so on
until the desired function or display is obtained.
The menu at the top of this hierarchy of menus if the basic menu line (see page 45, which is always
present and from which other menus can be called up.
All other hierarchical menus appear on the right-hand side of the screen after being called up from the
basic menu line, and cover each other completely except for the name of the higher-order menu. Thus,
of the entire menu hierarchy, only one menu (in addition to the basic menu line) is visible, together with
the names of all higher-order menus. Figure 3-3 shows the basic structure of such a menu by means of
an example.
In particular operating sequences, in addition to the hierarchically structured menus a further menu is
displayed at the same time, and disappears when the inputs requested in it have been made.
Switching the Menu Display On and Off

In the CHARTPILOT main program (see page 77), the display of the (hierarchically structured) menus
can be switched on and off by pressing the function key F11 (or the Menu button situated in the basic
menu line) The switched-on menus completely cover the switched-on data display (if any) on the strip at
the right-hand side.
Operating Procedure for the Menus

Every setting which you want to make (input of data, changing of the display etc.) basically takes place
in the following steps:
1. Necessary in the CHARTPILOT main program only: If you have not already done so, switch the
Menu display on by pressing the function key F11 or the Menu button. After switch-on of the Menu
display, the menu that was operated last is always displayed at first.
2. Call up the menu from which the desired setting can be made. This is done by changing to lower-
order or higher-order menus:
Changing to a lower-order menu: All buttons having three dots after their names call up a lower-
order menu (or a dialog box - see page 41). When such a button is pressed, the corresponding menu
appears.
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 37

b_cp_e31.fm / 10.05.12
Calls up the Presentation menu, see Figure 3-12 on page 52.

Calls up the Radar/AIS menu, see Figure on page 56.
Calls up the Chart menu, see Figure 4-11 on page 106.
Calls up the Sensor Settings menu, see Figure 4-35 on page 149 (this is present
only in the stand-alone version)
Calls up the Alarm Settings menu, see Figure 4-15 on page 113.
Calls up the Tracks menu, see Figure 5-2 on page 163.
Calls up the Pilot menu, by means of which the submenus TRACKPILOT and
SPEEDPILOT (see Figure 3-21 on page 69) can be called up.
Calls up the Peripheral Devices menu, by means of which the submenus Printer (see
Figure 8-12 on page 331) and Digitizer (see Figure 5-6 on page 171) are called up if
these devices are connected.
Fig. 3-2 The top menu appearing in the right-hand side strip
Changing to a higher-order menu: Above the name of the displayed menu, there are buttons with
the names of all higher-order menus. By pressing one of these buttons, you change over to the
corresponding higher-order menu.
To reach the desired menu, there are three different cases:
- The menu being displayed is of a higher order than the desired menu: Single or multiple
change-over to the lower-order menu.
In these Operating Instructions, the menu names are preceded by the names of all higher-
order menus (separated by >).
- The menu being displayed is of a lower order than the desired menu: Direct change-over
to the desired menu.
- The menu being displayed is neither of a lower order nor of a higher order than desired
menu: First of all, change over to a menu which is of a higher order than the desired menu.
Alternatively in this case, it is also possible to switch the menu on via the function overview
(see page 41).
38 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e31.fm / 10.05.12
All higher-order menus; they can be called up directly by clicking.
Menu name of the current menu
Here, the desired settings can be made.

All types of operating element described in Section 3.3.1 can occur.
Alternatively, the relevant lower-order menu can be called up with a button whose
name ends with ... .
In many menus, the bottom line contains buttons which make valid the data that are
input in this menu, which reset the inputs to the data that were valid previously, or by
means of which the menu is exited (for details, see below).
Fig. 3-3 Basic structure of a menu from the menu hierarchy
3. Make the desired settings.

If there is a Reset button or a Cancel button in the bottom line of the menu, you can retrieve
the data that were valid previously:
Reset button: The values that have been valid since the last take-over are retrieved; the menu is not
exited.
Cancel button: The values that have been valid since the last take-over are retrieved; the menu is
exited.
4. Take over the settings, i.e. make them valid and, if appropriate, leave the menu. For these purposes,
the buttons situated on the left (and in some cases in the middle) in the bottom line of the menu are
used:
If there is no button on the left in the bottom line of the menu, the setting made becomes valid
at the latest when the menu is exited, without any need for further activity.
OK button: The settings are valid; the menu is exited (the higher-order menu appears).
Apply button: The settings are valid; the menu is not exited.
To make the function clearer, the button which makes the setting valid has a special name in
some menus. For example, in the Tracks > Delete menu, the button which makes the settings
valid (i.e. which irretrievably deletes the track files in this case) has the name Delete.
The Exit button which exists in some menus switches off the subroutine which has generated the
menu; see page 77.
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 39

b_cp_e31.fm / 10.05.12
3.3.3.2 Context Menus
Context menus are situated behind particular display fields and areas 1). They consist of a heading (if
appropriate) and the buttons situated below it:
- Buttons with a triangle on the right: These call up a subordinate menu.
- Buttons without a triangle: These execute the relevant function and close the menu.
You can operate context menus in two ways:
Operation by clicking: By clicking for a short time with the MORE key into the display field or the area,
the menu is opened and remains open. The buttons contained in it are operated by clicking with the DO
key. This method is suitable when the trackball is used.
In lists, the list entry must have been marked previously (by means of the DO key) so that the func-
tions of the context menu have an effect on it.
To close the menu without execution of a function, click at any place outside the menu.
Operation by pulling: Put the cursor onto the display field or into the area, press the MORE key, keep
it pressed, pull the cursor to the desired menu-position, and release the key on the desired function. This
method is particularly fast when the mouse is used.
To close the menu without execution of a function, release the key over the heading or over a button with
a triangle.
1. Clicking of the Chart Status field in the navigation data line with the MORE key opens this menu.
3. Clicking of a button without a triangle by means of

the DO key causes the relevant function to be
performed. The menus are closed.
2. Clicking of a button with a triangle

by means of the DO key opens a
lower-order menu. Clicking outside a context menu closes the menu.
Fig. 3-4 Example of a context menu
1) These fields and areas are marked with the symbol in the graphics of this document.
40 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e31.fm / 10.05.12
3.3.4 Dialog Boxes
If the program wishes to tell you something, e.g. if it wants to warn you about an operator error, an appro-
priate message or question appears in a dialog box. The bottom line of the dialog box contains one or
more buttons with which you can acknowledge the message or answer the question. The meaning of the
buttons is similar to that of the buttons in the bottom line of a menu. For example, the Cancel button
cancels the operating step which led to the call-up of the dialog box, and makes the dialog box disappear.
USEFUL INFORMATION
Shifting of Dialog Boxes

Some dialog boxes can be shifted on the screen by marking the title of the menu or dialog box with the
cursor and moving the title by means of the trackball while keeping the DO key pressed.
Changing the Size of Dialog Boxes

The size of some dialog boxes can be changed:
Increasing/decreasing the size of the dialog box in one axis: Position the cursor at the edge or at the
corner, press the DO key, and while keeping it pressed pull the box to the desired size.
Most dialog boxes of variable size have a small, square button at top right in the frame (see Figure
3-23 on page 71). With this button, you can set the dialog box to its maximum size. By clicking
again, you can reset the dialog box to the size selected previously.
3.3.5 The Function Overview (Tree)
You can obtain an overview of the top two menu levels and thus of the available main functions. From
this function overview - called tree - you can call up these main functions directly and you can also switch
over to the Conning mode. The Conning mode has a corresponding tree (see Figure 10-1 on page 364).
In the function overview (see Figure 3-5), the following are displayed:
- the buttons of the Chart and Conning modes (top row)
- the buttons of the menu positions of the top menu
and below each of these
- the buttons of the menus of the next lower order.
Switching the Tree On

This is done by pressing the Tree button 1).
Switching to a Different Mode (in the NACOS only)

Press the relevant mode button. As a result, a switch-over to the desired mode takes place. The Tree is
switched off, and the menu used last appears in the new mode.
Directly Calling Up a Menu

Press the button of the desired menu. As a result, the tree is switched off and the desired menu is
switched on.
1) The function key F10 has the same function.
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 41

b_cp_e31.fm / 10.05.12
Switching Off the Tree

The display of the tree can be exited by pressing the CANCEL button (without switch-over of menu or
mode).
The buttons of the top menus of the current mode and of the
menus of the next lower order.
Clicking switches the mode over. By clicking, the corresponding menu is displayed and the
- Button with red inscription: the current mode display of the function overview is switched off.
Navigation
data line;
see page 46
Tree
Basic menu line;

see page 45
Prepares the switch-off (at the mains) of Switches the tree off without a functional
the CHARTPILOT; see page 26 switch-over taking place.
Stops all programs that are running, and This button switches independent subroutines on.
after presentation of the Log-On display it - Button with red inscription: subroutine is switched on
independently starts the main program of the
CHARTPILOT (see page 27).
Fig. 3-5 The tree in Chart Mode (CHARTPILOT in the NACOS)
42 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e31.fm / 10.05.12
Operating Instructions 3.4 Inputting Numerical Values and Editing Texts
The tree shown here does not necessarily have to be identical to the one you will find on the
CHARTPILOT, since the tree is adapted to suit the system configuration concerned. Its appearance
when the CHARTPILOT is being used without a TRACKPILOT is illustrated here.
Fig. 3-6 The Tree in Chart Mode (CHARTPILOT without TRACKPILOT)
3.4 Inputting Numerical Values and Editing Texts
Input by means of Trackball and Virtual Keyboard

When numbers or texts are to be entered with the aid of the trackball (e.g. because there is no keyboard),
this is done via a keyboard which appears on the screen as soon as an input field is clicked with the
MORE key. The input possibilities of this virtual keyboard correspond to the requirements of the input field
that is clicked.
Example 1: Input of the time zone. When the input field (in the menu Sensor Settings
> Date/Time - see page 153) is clicked with the MORE key, the virtual numeric
keyboard opens up. In its input field, the time zone that is currently entered appears.
Click into this input field behind the number that is to be changed, remove the number
by means of the button , and input the new number. When you then press the OK
button, the entry is taken over. If the original entry is not to be changed after all, click
on the old value and press the OK button, or click into some other input field.
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 43

b_cp_e31.fm / 10.05.12
3.5 The Screen Operating Instructions
Example 2: Input of the Waypoint Notes: When you click on

the input field Waypoint Notes (see page 162) by means of
the MORE key, the virtual A/N keyboard opens up; it is
designed to look like an ordinary commercial keyboard.
Special feature: When you press the OK button, the entry is
taken over. With the Line button situated above that, another
line (which is still empty) is entered.
By clicking on a virtual keyboard with the MORE key, you
close this keyboard without the entries being taken over.
Input via Membrane Keyboard or Ordinary Commercial Keyboard

An input can take place when the relevant input field is marked. The editing cursor is in insert mode at
first and has the form shown on page 35. The data input or the editing can now be performed with the
aid of the keyboard. By pressing of the keys, the characters are entered additionally at the position of the
editing cursor.
With the Delete key and the Backspace key, the character to the left of the editing cursor is deleted. If
larger passages of text are to be deleted, they can be marked beforehand by moving the trackball while
keeping the DO key pressed. Double clicking of the DO key marks the entire word or number.
By means of the Insert key, the editing cursor can be switched over to the replace mode (and back to
the insert mode):
It is then displayed as an inverted character-field. The new character replaces the character that is being
displayed inverted due to the editing cursor.
The editing cursor is controlled by means of the arrow keys.
In single-line input fields, the data input is completed with the Enter key or the Enter button. If a button
is provided with the default frame, that button too is triggered by this. Some input fields are exited by
means of the arrow keys .
Most input fields can be exited by pressing the Tab key or by simultaneous pressing of the keys Ctrl +
Tab.
When clicking occurs, many one-line input fields appear inverted, i.e. their entire content is marked. In
the case of these input fields, you can
- completely replace the existing entry by inputting a character
- cancel the marking by operating one of the arrow keys , so that you can then change the
existing entry.
In multi-line input fields, a new line is generated by means of the Enter key.
Most input fields can be exited by pressing the Esc key; the data not yet stored are not taken over.
3.5 The Screen
So that this section can also be used as a brief reference during work with the CHARTPILOT, details
which you will only understand when you have attended an operator training course, or if you have
already studied all of these Operating Instructions, are stated without further explanation. If you are
currently in the process of getting to know the operating procedures of the CHARTPILOT, you should
at first simply skip the points that are unclear to you.
44 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e31.fm / 10.05.12
Operating Instructions 3.5 The Screen
3.5.1 Division of the Screen
The screen is generally divided into the following areas:

- Navigation data line
- Chart area
- Basic menu line.
When the presentation of a data display is switched on, it covers the right-hand side strip of the chart
area.
When a menu is called up, it likewise covers this side strip.
Navigation data line;

see page 46
Chart area; see Side strip

page 48
Basic menu line;

see page 45
Fig. 3-7 Screen division in Chart Mode
3.5.2 The Basic Menu Line
The right-hand side of the basic menu line contains buttons which must be accessible at all times and
are therefore displayed continuously.
As long as work is being done with the main program (Chart mode), operating and display functions
appear on the left which should be directly accessible at all times for the work in the chart area.
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 45

b_cp_e31.fm / 10.05.12
When raster charts are used:

Scale field
Scale of the displayed raster
chart or plan.
When vector charts are used: For operating procedure, see
page 87 Switches the menus displayed in the chart area
Range field into the background and switches the chart area
Size of the displayed area (if to the standard display; see page 51.
range rings are switched on,
the spacing of the range rings
is additionally displayed on the
right); for operating procedure,
see page 85. Switching the menu
Adaptation to room on and off; see
Is displayed when the main brightness; see page 36
program is being operated page 83.
Operation and display In the Monitoring display modes: Operation and display of
of the bearing line; see Position of own ship's symbol in the VRM; see page 112
page 112 the chart area; see page 94
In Planning display mode: Calling up the tree display;
Selection of the displayed chart- see page 41
excerpt; see page 95
Fig. 3-8 The basic menu line
3.5.3 The Navigation Data Line
The navigation data line displays the most important navigation data and the status data of the electronic
chart displayed in the chart area. It also contains (on the far right) the button displayed as a horn symbol,
with which the alarm list (see page 69) can be called up.
46 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e31.fm / 10.05.12
Vector charts: Display groups displayed on the chart

- Chart OFF = display of the vector chart is switched off
- Permit warn. (yellow background) = The chart might not be up to date - see page 266
- Non-HO data (yellow background) = Type ENC is selected and a cell is displayed which was not officially issued
by a hydrographic organisation. (The edge of this cell is hatched in orange.)
- Licence (yellow background) = The chart might not be up to date - see page 305;
(red background) = CM-93/3Pro Licence Expiry Date has been reached. Only cells of the navigational purposes
General Background and World can be shown after this time.
Not avail. = No ENC at a scale appropriate for navigation is available.
Display groups displayed on the chart; see page 98:
- All = all display groups
- Standard = standard selection
Raster charts:
- Chart OFF = display of the vector chart is switched off
- Datum mism. on yellow background = The position data contained in the chart are not
Red background: Status WGS84 position values.
Licence exp. exists. - Licence exp. = Licence has expired; the chart might not be up to date - see page 292.
- ENC avail. = An electronic chart of type ENC is available for the area displayed.
In the Monitoring display modes: Raster charts: Units of

Selected position sensor; measurement of the
The supplement INV = selected posi- Vector charts:
depth information - No display = ideal purpose of
tion sensor is transmitting invalid data m: = metres
or none at all; position is determined the chart
fm: = fathoms - Overscaled = purpose with too
by dead reckoning ft: = feet
In Planning display mode: small a scale is used
The word Planning appears (See page 85)
Selected electronic chart Raster charts:
- Bad Scale = chart or plan with
Display mode: larger scale is available; see
Monitoring display modes: page 87
H-UP = Head-Up - Zoom x 2 = chart or plan is
C-UP = Course-Up displayed enlarged
Compass course N-UP = North-Up
(present actual CD = Centered Display
course from the TM = True Motion
gyro compass)
and source Planning display mode:
PLAN Chart Status field
Indicates, that Date

Present rate of turn Dependent Objects are
computed from the change displayed always, irre-
in the compass course spective of the current
In the Monitoring display modes: date. See also page 101
Own position1) Speed (SMG) and
In Planning display mode: course1) (COG) over Display of the course and speed
Position of the chart centre ground (BT) or through vectors:
the water (WT) - REL = relative to own ship
- TRUE = true display
Coordinate system on which the position Mode of the log
information is usually based Zone time:
- BT = Bottom Track - UTC = zone time is equal to UTC
Left: geodetic datum - WT = Water Track
Right: projection: - ZT = zone time is UTC plus time
This information is absent if a log is zone entered in system
- No information = Mercator not being used as the speed sensor.
- Radar = Radar projection
For coordinate system setting procedure, Data source of the speed values for the SOG/COG Clicking switches the alarm list on.
see page 96 computation (the speed sensor)
Yellow background: SOG is computed, taking Horn symbol in red = there is an
For Monitoring and Planning display account of data entered manually (e.g. Set + Drift). alarm (see page 348)
mode, see pages 91 and 95
1) Own position, speed and course of the CCRP (conning position); see also chapter 2.1
Fig. 3-9 The navigation data line
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 47

b_cp_e31.fm / 10.05.12
3.5.4 The Chart Area
3.5.4.1 Division, Individual Displays
In the chart area, the electronic chart is displayed. In the chart area, various graphic elements can be
displayed additionally, such as the own ship symbol, the targets transmitted by one of the radars, and
the pre-planned tracks.
The display of most of the graphic elements appearing in the chart area can be switched on and off
individually. Furthermore, some of them can be parameterised. The graphic elements appearing in the
chart area and their operating procedures are described from page 51 onwards.
The following displays cover parts of the chart area - temporarily in some cases (for position and details,
see Figure 3-11):
TRACKPILOT Display (in the NACOS only)

This contains the most important items of the data that are needed specially for steering with the TRACK-
PILOT.
Its display can be switched on and off in the Pilot Display frame in the Presentation > Display Settings
menu by operation of the TRACKPILOT function.
SPEEDPILOT Display (in the NACOS only)

This contains the most important items of the data that are needed specially for sailing with the SPEED-
PILOT.
Its display can be set in the Pilot Display frame in the Presentation > Display Settings menu by
switching the SPEEDPILOT function on.
EBL2 Display
This makes it possible to operate EBL2 via the button, and (if EBL2 is switched on) it contains the data
of EBL2.
Its display can be set in the Presentation > Display Settings menu by switch-on of the EBL2 Display
function.
Digitizer Cursor Display

This contains the geographical position of the crosswires magnifier in the chart digitized on the digitizer.
It appears only if
- the digitizer is connected to the CHARTPILOT,
- the digitizer is set up (see page 166),
- the display of the Digitizer Cursor display is switched on (by switching the Numerical Position func-
tion on in the Peripheral Devices > Digitizer Setup menu).
Cursor Display
The Cursor display contains the geographical position of the cursor displayed in the chart area, and the
distance and bearing of the cursor relative to own ship´s conning position.
It continuously covers the bottom right-hand corner of the chart area.
48 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e31.fm / 10.05.12
Switches the presentation of the data display on and off in the side strip.
Selection of the data display that is to be shown
Switches the presentation of the TRACKPILOT display on and off. 1)
Switches the presentation of the SPEEDPILOT display on and off. 1)
Switches the presentation of the scale bar on and off - see page 53.
(Scale bar is present only if vector charts are used)
Switches the presentation of the EBL2 display on and off.
1) Is present only in the NACOS.
Fig. 3-10 The Presentation > Display Settings menu
Data Display
By switch-on of a data display, further items of nautical information can be put onto the screen. You have
a choice between
- the Track/Schedule display,
- the Track/Control display,
- the Conning display, and
- the Docking display.
The data displays are described in Section 3.5.5 from page 64 onwards. The selected data display fills
the right-hand strip above the Cursor display.
A data display is shown when the Data Display function is switched on in the Presentation >
Display Settings menu. In this menu, the data display to be shown can also be selected instead of
selection via the title button of the data display being shown.
If the CHARTPILOT is part of a NACOS, it is possible to call up on the CHARTPILOT the menus
Pilot > TRACKPILOT and, if applicable, Pilot > SPEEDPILOT in order to display the currently
existing TRACKPILOT data and SPEEDPILOT data respectively. These menus are briefly explained
in Figure 3-21 on page 69. For details of the parameters displayed, please see the Operating Instruc-
tions of the radar indicator.
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 49

b_cp_e31.fm / 10.05.12
Mode of the TRACKPILOT

TRACKPILOT OFF: TRACKPILOT is not
active
TRACKPILOT FAILURE: TRACKPILOT Mode of the SPEEDPILOT
has failed SPEEDPILOT OFF: SPEEDPILOT is not
TRACKPILOT display
active
Set course specified SP FAILURE: SPEEDPILOT has failed
SPEEDPILOT display
by the TRACKPILOT
Set radius with which the
TRACKPILOT will perform Set speed specified by the
the next manoeuvre SPEEDPILOT
Next data Set speed in the next track segment

PD: Pilot Data are switched on
for the TRACKPILOT
Navigation data
line (see page 46)
Chart area
For graphic elements
displayed, see
Section 3.5.4.2
This data display

can be blanked out
so that the chart
area extends over
the entire width of
the screen (see
page 64)
Basic menu line

(see page 45)
EBL2 display Digitizer Cursor display Cursor display
Data of EBL2 (similar to display of Cursor position Bearing of cursor position

EBL1 data - see page 113) Position of the crosswires magni- relative to own ship1)
fier on the digitized (paper) chart
Distance of cursor position
from own ship's position1)
1) Relative bearing and distance to CCRP (conning position)
Fig. 3-11 The chart area
50 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e31.fm / 10.05.12
Fast Switch-Over to the Standard Display

If you are working with a subroutine or are performing particular tasks (e.g. editing of waypoint data) in
the main program, the chart area too is almost completely covered. To ensure that, in this situation too,
you can obtain a quick overview of the current navigational situation, you can call the display of the chart
area into the foreground by pressing the Std Disp button in the basic menu 1). If Planning display mode
is switched on, a switch-over to the Monitoring display mode last used takes place (see page 91).
The subroutine or the menu of the main program in which you were working when the STD DISP
button was pressed is not switched off but continues to run in the background. When you call it up
again, you will find that the settings made previously are still valid.
3.5.4.2 Overview of Graphic Elements and their Setting Procedures
The graphic elements generated by the CHARTPILOT for the display in the chart area can be switched
on and off individually. Many of them can be parameterised.
For the following elements, the procedure for switching the display on and off, the procedure for param-
eterising them and (if necessary) the symbol used are described in this section:
- Cursor and digitizer cursor
- Range rings
- Chart grid
- Bearing scale
- Scale bar
- Event markers
- Position fix symbols
- Own ship's symbol with:
- Heading line
- Stern line
- Curved Headline (only if a TRACKPILOT is installed)
- Path Prediction
- Course and speed vector
- Past plot with time labels and position-times
- Past plot of the second position-sensor
- ARPA targets and AIS targets
- Pre-planned tracks and waypoints
- User Chart Objects (user-edited objects which supplement the electronic charts)
- - Aids-to-Navigation received via an AIS system which is connected to the radar.
Information about the following elements which are likewise displayable in the chart area is given in other
sections:
- Objects of the vector charts in Section 4.3 from page 97 onwards 2)
- Variable range marker, VRM, in Section 4.5 from page 112 onwards
- Electronic bearing line, EBL, in Section 4.5 from page 112 onwards
1) The function key F8 of the keyboard has the same function.

2) All symbols of the electronic chart of type ENC are explained in the info box in the Legend index card.
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 51

b_cp_e31.fm / 10.05.12
Setting of the coordinate system (see page 96; menu see Figure 4-10 on page 97)
Setting of the Monitoring display mode or Planning display mode (see Section 4.2.4
from page 90 onwards; menu see Figure 4-9 on page 94)
Switches on and off the presentation of the individual displays of the chart area
and the display of the scale measurement bar (see Section 3.5.4.1; menu see
Figure 3-10 on page 49).
Switches the display of the stated symbols on and off.
Defines the length of the course and speed vectors.
Switches the display of the course and speed vectors on and off (own ship and
targets).
Lets the user select the ship´s symbol (see Section 3.5.4.10)
Switches the display of the stated symbols on and off.

Defines the prediction time for the display of the Path Prediction.
Defines the length of own ship's past plots.
Switches on and off the display of the time labels on own ship's past plots.
For own ship, this switches on and off the display of the past plot of the
second position sensor.
Defines the spacing of the time labels on own ship's past plot.
Switches on and off the display of own ship's past plot.
Fig. 3-12 The Presentation menu
3.5.4.3 Cursor and Digitizer Cursor
The cursor (controlled by the trackball) contains the symbol in the chart area; the digitizer cursor is
symbolised by .
The digitizer cursor shows the present position of the digitizer's crosswires magnifier on the paper chart
which is set up there. It appears in the chart area when
- a digitizer is connected to the CHARTPILOT,
- the digitizer is set up (see page 166),
- the display of the digitizer cursor is switched on (by switching on the Digitizer Cursor function in the
Peripheral Devices > Digitizer Setup menu) and
- the position of the crosswires magnifier on the paper chart is situated within the chart area.
3.5.4.4 Range Rings
Range rings can be displayed only if vector charts are used.

The range rings are displayed centered to the CCRP (conning position) and at a fixed distance from one
another. This distance and the number of rings are specified by the program in accordance with the
selected range setting.
When the display of the range rings is switched on, the distance of the range rings from one another is
displayed in the Range field to the right of the Range display in the basic menu line.
Switching on and off the display: With the Range Rings button in the Presentation menu.
52 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e31.fm / 10.05.12
3.5.4.5 Grid
The chart grid can be displayed only if vector charts are used.
The number of grid lines displayed is specified by the program in accordance with the selected range
setting.
Switching on and off the display: With the Grid button in the Presentation menu.
3.5.4.6 Bearing Scale
The bearing scale is displayed centered to the CCRP (conning position).

Switching on and off the display: With the Bearing Scale button in the Presentation menu.
3.5.4.7 Scale Bar
The scale bar is displayed at the left-hand edge.

The scale bar has a length of 1 NM and subdivisions of 0.1 NM if the range setting is 3 NM or less.
At the longer range settings, it is 10 NM long and the subdivisions are 2 NM.
Switching on and off the display: With the Scale Bar button in the Presentation > Display Setting menu.
3.5.4.8 Event Markers
Event markers which have been set as described in Section 4.9 or on a radar indicator appear in orange
with the symbol .
If the function Text Labels has been selected in the Chart menu, the remark which was entered
when the event was being set appears also beside the event symbol in the chart area.
The display of the event markers generally cannot be switched on and off. If event markers are no longer
to be displayed, they must be deleted as described in Section 4.9.
3.5.4.9 Position Fix Symbols
Position fix symbols which have been set as per Section 4.10 Section 4.9 or on a radar indicator appear
in orange with the symbol .
If, in the Chart menu, the Text Labels function has been selected, then the time of the fix and, in
brief form, the method of position determination also appear at the position fix symbol (see page
136).
The display of the position fix symbol cannot be generally switched on or off. Position fix symbols which
are no longer to be displayed must be deleted as per Section 4.10.
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 53

b_cp_e31.fm / 10.05.12
3.5.4.10 Own Ship Display
Own ship's symbol:
The own ship can be displayed with three different symbols as selected in the Symbol menu:
Setting Symbol Remarks
At small range settings (up to 1.5 NM) or with large chart-scales

Auto Scaled (greater than 1:25000 1)); true to scale 2);located at the CCRP (conning
position)
Simplified
Minimized
1) Greater than 1:50000 if the raster chart is displayed enlarged.

2)
depending on the length of the ship
Selection of the symbol to be displayed: With the Symbol menu in the Presentation menu.
Own ship's symbol can be supplemented by the following elements:
Heading line: An extension of the ship's longitudinal axis as far as the edge of the screen
Temporarily switching on and off the display: With the Heading Line button in the Radar/AIS menu.
Curved Headline: When the ship is being steered with the TRACKPILOT in Heading mode or Course
mode, the track on which the TRACKPILOT is steering the ship in the planned or initiated course-
manoeuvre can be displayed by means of this line (for details, see Operating Instructions of the radar
indicator). The line ends at the edge of the screen.
Switching on and off the display: With the Curved Headline button in the Presentation menu.
Course and speed vector: The tip of the arrow indicates where own ship will be situated after the set
time (set with the sliding controller under the Vector Length button in the Presentation menu), assuming
that the present course and speed will remain constant.
can be seen from the vector symbol whether the vector is relative to the water (Water Track, WT = one
arrow-head) or relative to the bottom (Bottom Track, BT = two arrow-heads).
The set time also applies to the course and speed vectors of the targets being tracked.
Switching on and off the display: With the Vector Length button in the Presentation menu. With this,
the course and speed vectors of the tracked targets are switched on or off at the same time.
54 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e31.fm / 10.05.12
If the relative display has been selected for the course and speed vectors
of the tracked targets, own ship's vector is not displayed - see also page Heading line
58.
Path Prediction: At range settings up to 1.5 NM, the symbol
can be used to show where own ship will be
situated after the set time (set with the sliding controller under the Predic- Course and
tion button in the Presentation menu), assuming that the present speed speed vector
and rate of turn (ROT) will remain constant.
Switching on and off the display: With the Prediction button in the Pres- Own ship's
entation menu. symbol
0703
Past plot: The path last sailed by the ship (in the period of time set with
the sliding controller under the buttons Past Position and 2nd Past Posi- 0702
tion in the Presentation menu). The data of the selected position sensor Past plot
are used as the basis for the past plot calculation. 0701
Switching on and off the display: With the Past Position button in the 0700
Presentation menu. Time labels
Even if its display is not switched on, the corresponding data are 0659
recorded. Therefore, when you switch on its display, the past plot for Position times
0658
the entire period of time selected appears.
The past plot can be provided with time markers, and these can be
provided with position times:
Stern line
- Time labels: Marking the positions on the past plots at the intervals
of time selected with the sliding controller under the Time Labels
button in the Presentation menu.
Switching on and off the display: With the Time Labels button in the
Presentation menu.
The time labels are recorded only for as long as the Time Labels function is switched on.
Therefore, on the part of the past plot already displayed at the instant of switch-on of this func-
tion, no time labels appear.
- Position times: The present zone time in hours and minutes.
Switching on and off the display: With the Text Labels button in the Chart menu. With this, the text
labels of the vector charts are switched on or off at the same time. Even when switch-on takes place
retrospectively, the position times appear at all time labels.
Past plot of the second position sensor: A second past plot which differs from the one already
described only in that the data of the second position sensor are used as the basis.
By switching on both past plots, it is possible to obtain information about the accuracy of the position
sensors.
Switching on and off the display: With the 2nd Past Position button in the Presentation menu.
Stern line: Backward extension of the ship's longitudinal axis as far as the edge of the screen.
Switching on and off the display: With the Stern Line button in the Radar/AIS menu.
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 55

b_cp_e31.fm / 10.05.12
3.5.4.11 ARPA Targets and AIS Targets 1)
On the CHARTPILOT, the ARPA targets of one of the radars of the system and the AIS targets 2) can be
displayed.
Switching the display of the ARPA targets on and off: In the menu Radar/AIS > Targets, by means of the
button ARPA Targets from.
Switching the display of the AIS targets on and off: In the menu Radar/AIS > Targets by means of the
buttons AIS Targets and Sleeping Targets. With the button AIS Targets, all target data provided by the
AIS system are also switched off:
In the case of the system configuration without AIS operation on the CHARTPILOT, the display of
the ARPA targets and AIS targets is switched on/off jointly in the menu Radar/AIS > Targets with
the button Targets from - see footnote on next page. Sleeping targets are not displayed.
IMPORTANT:
As long as the display of the AIS targets is switched off, the AIS targets
are not tracked by the CHARTPILOT. For these targets, no collision
computation then takes place.
Switches the display of the
Opens the Targets menu ARPA targets on and off.
Simulation of trial manoeuvres; Selection of the radar from which

menu see Figure 4-31 on page 131 the ARPA targets to be
displayed are to be taken.1)
This switches the entire processing of the AIS target data on

and off, and therefore also the display, the collision computa-
tion and the automatic target acquisition of the AIS targets. 2)

sleeping targets on and off. 2)
Handling of AIS targets -

Further AIS functions, see see page 117.
Section 4.6 1)
target IDs on and off.
Switches the display of the Aids-
to-Navigation on and off. 1) Defines whether the call sign
or the ship’s name is
displayed as the target ID for
AIS targets.
Switches the past plots of

the targets on and off.
Specifies the time length of the

past plots of the targets.
1) The number of radar indicators depends on the system layout.
2) Present only if there is an AIS system connected.
Fig. 3-13 The menus Radar/AIS and Radar/AIS > Targets 3)
1)
In the following, the terms ARPA target and AIS target are used only if the statement is limited to this target type only. The term target
is used in the following if the statement applies both to ARPA targets and to AIS targets.
2)
and SAR aircraft (see page 116). SAR aircraft are treated and displayed in the same way as AIS targets, and are therefore not mentioned
again in the following. Their identity can be determined by means of the info box.
56 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e31.fm / 10.05.12
Display of ARPA and AIS targets

Targets that have been acquired and are being tracked are provided with symbols indicating their track
status. Targets being tracked can also be provided with speed vectors and with a past position plot as
per Section 3.5.4.11 (see page 56).
3)
If the AIS system is connected in such a way that it cannot be operated on the CHARTPILOT, the menus have the following form:
Switches the display of the ARPA

targets and AIS targets on/off jointly.
Functions see above
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 57

b_cp_e31.fm / 10.05.12
ARPA Targets AIS Targets

Sleeping Target
The point of the triangle is aligned with the
heading of the target, or with its COG if
heading information is not available. Dashed
symbol: Because of missing data, no colli-
Target acquired manually sion avoidance computation can be
performed - see page 117. A sleeping target
with neither a reported heading nor COG will
be orientated toward the top of the opera-
tional display area.
Target acquired automatically Target acquired automatically by acquisi-
by acquisition/guard zone tion/guard zone
(Target which has triggered the (Target which has triggered the
TARGET AUTO-ACQUIRED (n) flashing TARGET AUTO-ACQUIRED (n) alarm or the flashing
alarm or the TGT ENTERED TGT ENTERED GUARZONE (n) alarm)
GUARZONE (n) alarm)
Tracked Target
Target (moving) being tracked The triangle becomes greater than the
sleeping target, additionally it is possible to
show the true scaled outlines.
If the heading information is available, the
heading line is displayed additionally, and if
the target is turning then a flag on the
heading indicator shows the direction of turn.
Dashed symbol: See sleeping target
Target with ID
4
Target with ID BXGH
If the target is transmitting a call sign, this is
taken. If not, the system generates the ID
Target with label as reference AIS with a serial number. AIS7
target
(reference target tracking) R
Dangerous target 1) flashing, Dangerous target 1) flashing,

Target which has triggered the red Target which has triggered the red
DANGEROUS TARGET (n) alarm DANGEROUS TARGET (n) alarm
Target whose data are being
displayed Target whose data are being displayed
(symbol and ID are displayed (symbol and ID are displayed additionally)
additionally)
Lost target Lost target
Target which has triggered the flashing Target which has triggered the LOST flashing
LOST TARGET (n) alarm. TARGET (n) alarm.
(xx=target ID yy.y=range, (xx=target ID yy.y=range, zzz=true
zzz=true bearing) bearing)
1) If the DANGEROUS TARGET (n) alarm is acknowledged by the operator, the symbol stops flashing but is still drawn in red.
Acquired targets can be supplemented by the following Course and speed
elements: vector
AIS target
Course and speed vectors:
Target ID
Switching on and off the display: With the Vector Length button AHTFG
in the Presentation menu. With this, the course and speed 09
ARPA target
vector of the own ship symbol is switched on/off simultaneously.
Past plot
The vectors (together with the past plots) can be displayed as
true vectors or as vectors relative to own ship. Time markers
- Relative display: The vectors (and the past plots) show the
movement relative to own ship.
- True display: The heads of the vectors are always situated at the positions which the radar targets
will reach in the set time if they keep their present speeds and courses.
If you switch the relative display on while Centered Display mode or True Motion mode is switched
on, a target on a collision course can be easily recognised from the fact that its course and speed
vector is pointing towards own ship - see Figure 3-14.
58 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e31.fm / 10.05.12
Switching over between true and relative display is performed in the menu Presentation > Display Mode,
in the frame Vector Display.
The time represented by the vectors can be set with the sliding controller under the Vector Length button
in the Presentation menu.
The time also applies to the course and speed vector of the own ship symbol. The tips of all
vectors displayed therefore represent the same point in time.
Target is on collision course

(vector points towards own
ship symbol).
True Motion Mode with true vector presentation The same scenario after switch-over to relative vector presen-
(basic setting) tation
Fig. 3-14 Recognition of collision course by means of relative vector presentation
Past plots
These (together with the vectors) can be displayed as true plots or as plots relative to own ship:
- Relative display: Starting at the present position of the target, the past plots indicate the movement
made by the target relative to own ship in the set period of time.
- True display: The past plot shows the geographic positions occupied by the ship in the set period
of time.
Switching on and off the display: With the Past Positions button in the Radar/AIS > Targets menu.
The time represented by the past plots can be set with the Past Position Length sliding controller in the
Radar/AIS > Targets menu.
Past plots are provided with time markers: These are set simultaneously for all past plots displayed: for
past plot lengths from 1 to 6 minutes, they are set at 1-minute intervals; for lengths of 7 to 9 minutes,
they are set at 2-minute intervals; and for lengths of 10 to 12 minutes, they are set at intervals of 3
minutes.
Target IDs
The display of the target markers can be switched on and off (for ARPA and AIS targets together) in the
menu Radar/AIS > Targets by means of the button Target IDs.
By means of the buttons Call Sign AIS and Ship’s Name AIS, the type of target marker can be defined
for the AIS targets.
True Scale Outlines
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 59

b_cp_e31.fm / 10.05.12
The targets can also be displayed with an outline representing the actual
size (length, width) of the target by means if the True Scaled Targets
function. This function is only availbale for AIS targets and if additional
conditions like target range, monitor´s DPI and target size are within the
appropriate parameters. See Section 3.5.4.11 for further information.
AIS target with course line, past

plot and true scale outline
60 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e31.fm / 10.05.12
3.5.4.12 Pre-planned Tracks with their Waypoints
On the CHARTPILOT, the route to be sailed and the travelling

time can be planned for the intended voyage (see Section 5). The
result of this planning is the pre-planned track defined by a 5
sequence of waypoints.
During the planning, pre-planned tracks are provided (among
other things) with data which enable the TRACKPILOT to auto- 192
matically keep the ship on the track and enable the SPEEDPILOT Pre-planned track resulting
to keep to the planned speeds and travelling times. from the waypoint posi-
tions and from the radii
Switching on the display: Under Catalogs in the Tracks > Load stored for them
menu, select the catalog in which the pre-planned tracks to be
displayed are listed; next, under Tracks, mark the desired
Parameter point
track(s), and press the OK button.
The tracks switched on in this way are displayed in orange. If
Planned wheel-over point
a track is displayed in red, it is the System Track (see
Section 6.1.1).
The waypoint numbers and the courses of the tracklines are 6
Waypoint with serial number
displayed only if in the Chart menu Text Labels is not
switched to None.
149 Course to the next
Switching off the display: In the Tracks > Clear menu, mark the waypoint
pre-planned tracks which are no longer to be displayed, and press
Clear.
The display of the System Track (displayed in red) cannot be
switched off. If this track is no longer to be displayed, it must 7
first be deselected as the System Track (see page 233).
9
Tracklines
Display of manoeuvres which cannot be performed: If, during
the programming of the track, the waypoints have been positioned
so unfavourably (small distance between waypoints, acute angles) 211
and/or the radii have been selected so large that the pre-planned 176
M
5N
track probably cannot be sailed, this is clearly indicated by a

special display of the track (see also Section 5.1.9):
- At the waypoint, the tracklines (the straight lines to the last
waypoint and to the present one) are displayed complete in 8
the form of unbroken lines. 53
- On the display, the circular segment defined by the radius is
shifted along the trackline towards the last waypoint until it Behind the curve end of
fits between the two tracklines. waypoint 7, this curve does
not fit into the angle formed
- This shift takes place as far as the last waypoint at the most, by waypoints 7, 8 and 9.
but not further than to a distance of 5 NM between the begin- Therefore, the curve is
ning of the curve and the waypoint. displayed shifted, and the
display of the pre-planned
If the Check Track function is used in the generation or track is interrupted by the
changing of the track and if attention is paid to any error display of the tracklines.
messages that occur during that process (see Section 5.1.9),
the track contains no manoeuvres that cannot be performed. As the track control mode, To
Display of the System Track in track control mode To Waypoint is set; the ship is not
situated on the pre-planned
Waypoint: Systems with TRACKPILOT: If the track control mode track:
is set to To Waypoint, the route from own ship to the current - Recomputed current
waypoint is computed as a temporary track and is displayed addi- segment of System Track
- Unused segment of
System Track
232
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 61

b_cp_e31.fm / 10.05.12
tionally. This temporary track is recomputed continually (every 60 seconds) for the current own position
until the TRACKPILOT is switched over to Track mode. The current track segment of the pre-planned
track likewise remains displayed, but is not used.
In systems without a TRACKPILOT, the temporary track is calculated and displayed for the waypoint
previously defined with the function Select; see A p p r o a c h T r a c k t o t h e D e f i n e d S y s t e m T r a c k on page
231.
On ships with DNV approval, the way in which the waypoints were generated is indicated by the track
pattern used:
By means of electronic chart as per Section 5.1.5 or in Text mode as per Section 5.1.6
By means of digitizer
Above a latitude of 85°, no track curves are displayed.
3.5.4.13 Waypoints from Waypoint Files
Waypoints that are needed frequently for voyage planning can be collected in special waypoint files (see
page 192).
Switching on the display: Under Catalogs in the Tracks > Waypoint File > Load menu, select the catalog
in which the waypoint file is listed, then mark the desired file under Waypoint Files and press the OK
button.
Switching off the display: In the Tracks > Waypoint File > Load menu, press the Clear button.
The waypoints from waypoint files are displayed as small circles (same size as parameter points).
The ID numbers of the waypoints are displayed if Text Labels is switched on in the Chart menu.
3.5.4.14 Maps
Maps can be generated and displayed on the CHARTPILOT (for the generation of maps, see Section 5.5
from page 214 onwards). A map here is a simplified chart which can only contain sequences of straight
segments (map lines) and various symbols. The map lines can have various patterns (of dots and
dashes). The possible symbols are shown in Figure 3-15. Patterns and symbols appear in various
colours.
Light vessel Spar light buoy (starboard)

Radio reporting point Spar light buoy (port)
Pilot station Hazard buoy (N)
Anchorage Hazard buoy (E)
Fishing area Hazard buoy (S)
Cylindrical buoy Hazard buoy (W)
Conical buoy Light
Cylindrical light buoy Radio station
Fig. 3-15 Symbols on a map
62 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e31.fm / 10.05.12
The maps are the only charts capable of being handled on the CHARTPILOT which, for the purpose of
better orientation, are also capable of being added as a background to the radar display on any indicator
of the radar 9xxx series in radar mode.
These maps are not compatible with the maps which can be edited on RADARPILOT 1x00's and
which are used there, and they cannot be displayed there. Therefore, this functionality is only avail-
able if it is activated on service level.
Switching on the display: Under Catalogs in the Maps > Load menu, select the catalog in which the
maps to be displayed are listed, then mark the desired map(s) under Maps and press the OK button.
Switching off the display: In the Maps > Clear menu, mark the map(s) that are no longer to be displayed,
and press Clear.
3.5.4.15 User Chart Objects
The User Chart Objects are individual Own MARPOL line (green/
objects which can be edited on the orange)
CHARTPILOT as per Section 5.2 and Anchor watch area (orange)
displayed additionally in Chart mode
Danger highlight (red)
independently of the electronic chart.
Own safety line (orange; the
Switching on and off the display: In the hatching points towards the
Chart menu by means of the User Chart unsafe area)
Objects button.
Feature area (ochre, brown)
For symbols used; for explanations
Names and notes are
relating to the individual User Chart displayed if the display of the
Objects, see Section 5.2. Text Labels is switched on
The names of the feature areas and Feature line (orange)
feature lines, as well as the texts of
the text notes, are displayed if, in Text note, information
the Chart menu, the Text Labels Text note, caution
function is switched on.
Symbols (examples)
3.5.4.16 Aids-to-Navigation and Base Stations
Aids-to-Navigation are marks whose data are received by an AIS system.

To display them, the symbols of the ENC are used, supplemented with a blue circle whose centre is
situated at the position of the Aid-to-Navigation.
Base stations: Equipment for controlling the AIS system, e.g. as a component of a traffic control centre.
Symbol: , surrounded by a blue circle. Base stations are treated in the same way as Aids-to-Naviga-
tion, and are therefore not mentioned again in the following.
Switching the display on and off: In the menu Radar/AIS by means of the button Aids-to-Navigation.
Switch-over of the symbol presentation (Simplified / Paper Chart - see page 100) takes place together
with the vector charts (in the menu Charts > Visibility Options).
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 63

b_cp_e31.fm / 10.05.12
3.5.5 Data Displays and Pilot Menus
The presentation of the data display is optional. There is a choice between folowing types of data display:
The Track/Schedule display contains a collection of the most important data needed for track control
and time schedule planning, with the emphasis on time schedule planning. All data displayed there refer
to the System Track (see page 229).
The Track/Control display likewise contains the most important data needed for track-keeping and time
planning, likewise relating to the System Track but with a different set of data.
The Conning Data display contains not only the most important data of the System Track for track
control but also the propeller shaft revolution rate and (if applicable) the propeller pitch, as well as infor-
mation about wind, current and depth.
In the Docking display, a number of data items needed for docking manoeuvres can be displayed as
numerical values and also graphically.
A feature shared by all data displays is that the name of the unit and the CHARTPILOT number are
entered beside the company logo in the top line 1). Below that, there is the Title button.
The number of the CHARTPILOT is used in the data maintenance process of the electronic charts
to identify the CHARTPILOT whose data are being processed.
On the CHARTPILOT, the Pilot menus are used only to display the TRACKPILOT and SPEEDPILOT
data. Settings of the TRACKPILOT or SPEEDPILOT can only be made on the radar indicators.
Switching the Presentation of the Data Display On and Off

The presentation of the data display can generally be switched on and off with the Data Display function
in the Presentation > Display Settings menu.
Selection of the Data Display to be Presented

Selection is performed either in the Presentation > Display Settings menu or after clicking of the Title
button of the data display shown.
1) In the following illustrations, the line is not shown.
64 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e31.fm / 10.05.12
The Track/Control-Display
Title button; after clicking, one of the other data displays can be switched on
Name and number of the System Track

Last waypoint
Number and name of the present waypoint

Field is yellow: System Track is violated within the next 20 NM by
safety contour, object of interest or own safety line
By clicking of the INFO key, the System Track can be checked as
far as the last waypoint
Geogr. position of the present waypoint
Left: Sailing mode: GC = Great Circle, RL = Rhumb Line
Centre: Track control mode: To WPT = To Waypoint, To TRK = To Track
Right: Pilot Data Status: PD on = Pilot Data are switched on for the TRACKPILOT
Left: Bearing of the present waypoint

Right: WPD: Distance to the present waypoint 1)
WOP: Distance to the WOP
Left: In To Track mode: Direction of the present track line

In To Waypoint mode: Last computed course of the temporary track to the present
waypoint
Field is red: The course limit is exceeded.
Right: Track deviation from the System Track; R: Ship is situated to the right of the Track
Field is red: The track limit is exceeded.
TTG: Probable sailing time up to the present waypoint 1)

TTG WOP: Probable sailing time up to the WOP
TTG or TTG WOP in red: The APPROACHING WAYPOINT alarm is present
Planned time schedule: The following data are obtained if the ship
sails to the arrival point at the Arrival Speed.
Actual time schedule: The following data are obtained if the ship sails
to the arrival point at the present speed.
Next leg data: See illustration on next page
Switch-over: After clicking
Number of the waypoint of the arrival point (for arrival point, see page 233)
Estimated time of arrival at the arrival point

Planned time of arrival at the arrival point
Difference between the estimated time of arrival and the planned time of arrival at the
arrival point (Spare: Arriving too early)
Probable time to go to the arrival point

Remaining distance to go to the arrival point
Arrival Speed of the present track segment (for Arrival Speed, see page 233)
Arrival Speed of the next track segment
1) At service level, it can be specified that only the distance to go to the WOP is displayed.
Fig. 3-16 The Track/Control Display
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 65

b_cp_e31.fm / 10.05.12
Next leg data: The following data occur if the present leg and the next leg
are sailed at the present speed.
Number of the next waypoint (waypoint at the end of the next leg)
Probable time of arrival at the next waypoint
Probable sailing time up to the next waypoint
Sailing distance up to the next waypoint
Probable sailing time on the next leg
Length of the next leg
Present speed (with which the times displayed above are computed)
Fig. 3-17 Next Leg Data in the Track/Control Display
The Track/Schedule Display
Switching over to the data of the

Number, remark about the waypoint, and next waypoint takes place when the
geogr. position of the waypoint that is present waypoint is lying abeam of
passed last the ship. If the TRACKPILOT is
steering with Pilot Data or in Track
Number1), remark about the waypoint, and mode, the TRACKPILOT decides
geogr. position of the present waypoint when to switch over (usually occurs
at the wheel over point).
Estimated time of arrival at the present
waypoint
Probable time to go to the present waypoint
Number and remark about the waypoint of the arrival point (for arrival point, see page 233)
Estimate time of arrival at the arrival point
Difference between the estimated time of arrival and the planned time of arrival
at the arrival point (Spare: Arriving too early)
1) Number field is yellow: System Track is violated within the next 20 NM by safety contour, object of
interest or own safety line
By clicking of the INFO key, the System Track can be checked as far as the last waypoint
Fig. 3-18 The Track/Schedule Display
66 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e31.fm / 10.05.12
The Conning Data Display
Title button; after clicking, one of the other data displays

can be switched on
Last waypoint

Estimated time of arrival at the present waypoint
Bearing of the present waypoint
WPD: Distance to the present waypoint 1)
- In To Track mode: Direction of the present track line
- In To Waypoint mode: Last computed course of the temporary track to the
present waypoint
Expected rate of turn at the present waypoint, resulting from the actual speed
Propeller shaft revolution rate and pitch of the variable-pitch propellers
Bar and number at top right: Deviation from the System Track:
R and bar to the right: Ship is situated to the right of the track
Red strokes: The set track limit
Bar is red: The track limit is exceeded.
Wind direction
Wind speed (switch-over of the unit of measurement by means of
context-sensitive menu)
Wind display (switch-over by means of context-sensitive menu)
Rel: Relative wind; measured by wind sensor
True: True wind; computed by the system
Ship's symbol represents the present gyro heading

Yellow arrow pointing inwards: Wind direction
Blue arrow pointing outwards: Direction of the current
Red line: Present course = gyro heading + drift angle
Present depth measured by the navigation echosounder

If an echosounder with several trans-
ducers is installed, the selected Depth history of the past 10 minutes
transducer is noticed here. Red line: Depth alarm value that was set in the Alarm Settings menu
By means of a context-sensitive menu, the depth range displayed can be
set to a different fixed value or to automatic range-adaptation.
Fig. 3-19 The Conning Data Display
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 67

b_cp_e31.fm / 10.05.12
The Docking Display
Rate of Turn, computed from the change in the gyro heading
values supplied by the compass system
Bar to the right: Ship is turning to starboard
Triangle at the end of the scale: Exceeding of the scale range
Harbour display switched on: The power values of the bow
thrusters are displayed - see Figure 11-3
Gyro heading Harbour display switched off: Track deviation and course
deviation are displayed:
Transverse speed at the bow, computed by the system 1)
Course deviation (Set course minus actual course) 3)

Bar to the right: The actual value lies to starboard of the set
value
Red lines: The set course limit
Bar is red: The course limit is exceeded.
Track deviation: 3)
Bar to the right. The ship is situated to the right of the track
Red lines: The set track limit
Longitudinal speed, measured by the selected

speed sensor 1)
Propeller shaft revolution rate 2)
Pitch of variable-pitch propeller 2)
Transverse speed at the stern,

computed by the system 1)
Rudder angle, from the rudder angle sensor

Yellow triangle: The set rudder angle, specified by the TRACKPILOT
Red lines: The rudder limit that is set on the TRACKPILOT
Wind display (switch-over by means of context-sensitive menu)

Rel: Relative wind; measured by wind sensor
True: True wind; computed by the system
Wind speed (switch-over of the unit of measurement by

means of context-sensitive menu)
Water depth under the keel measured
by the navigation echosounder at the
location of the selected transducer Wind direction
1) Speed over ground if the selected speed sensor is working in Bottom Track mode,speed through the water if the
selected speed sensor is working in Water Track mode
2) Data from the engines
3) Relative to the track used by the TRACKPILOT, computed by the TRACKPILOT.
In Heading mode and Course mode, this is the deviation from a track which has been specified by the input of the set
course. In Track mode, this is the deviation from the System Track.
Fig. 3-20 The Docking Display
68 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e31.fm / 10.05.12
The Pilot Menus
These menus cannot be operated from the CHARTPILOT. They only

display the settings, received from TRACKPILOT and SPEEDPILOT.
On the CHARTPILOT, this has no function.
Display of the TRACKPILOT parameters mentioned
Pilot Data is switched on/off for the TRACKPILOT.
Setting of the sailing mode
Setting of the track control mode
Length of time by which the APPROACHING WAYPOINT alarm precedes the TP WHEEL
OVER POINT alarm (displayed on the radar indicators)
Manual course-correction of the actual course for the TRACKPILOT is switched on/off.
Correction value being used at present

The automatic course correction of the actual course is switched on/
off for the TRACKPILOT.
On the CHARTPILOT, this has no function.
Fig. 3-21 The Pilot > TRACKPILOT and Pilot > SPEEDPILOT menus
3.5.6 The Alarm List
A special dialog box, the alarm list, appears when an alarm is generated on the CHARTPILOT. The
meanings of the alarms reported in that box and the operating procedure for the alarm list are described
in Section 9.
Alarm messages with time and date of their appearance and with a
statement of the subsystem that has triggered the alarm concerned.
Opens the Chart Alarm List.

Acknowledges the marked alarm message. Switches off the display of the alarm list.
Fig. 3-22 The alarm list
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 69

b_cp_e31.fm / 10.05.12
3.5.7 The Info Box
At any time, you can obtain a display of the following data sorted into index cards and info groups 1),
provided that the data are available in the CHARTPILOT:
- General data relating to the electronic chart displayed,
- information about the objects contained in the displayed vector chart,
- the notes and diagrams printed on the raster chart,
- the Notices to Mariners and the Temporary and Preliminary Notices to Mariners issued by the UKHO
(if ARCS charts are used),
- data of the displayed User Chart Objects and Aids-to-Navigation
- data of the displayed Aids-to-Navigation received via AIS
- data of the ARPA and AIS targets being displayed,
- data transmitted by the own AIS system
- data relating to each element of the pre-planned tracks displayed
data relating to each element of the displayed maps-data relating to each event marker (see page 133)
and relating to each position fix (see page 135)
If there is a printer connected, this information can also be printed.
Display of Data
1. Position the cursor in the chart area, and press the INFO key. In the chart area, a circle appears
round the clicked position, and the info box appears.
It contains:
- all information which the system possesses about the objects situated in the circle (including
those objects that are currently not being displayed),
- all information which the system has about the selected electronic chart,
- if applicable, the Notices to Mariners and the Temporary and Preliminary Notices to Mariners
which are mentioned in the data set of the selected raster chart
The position and size of the info box can be changed (see page 41).
2. Click on the desired index card (see U S E F U L I N F O R M A T I O N ). The info groups 2) marked by means
of blue triangles and dealing with the subject of the index card appear.
If only info groups are displayed, you can either obtain a list of the objects or data types of a desired
info group by clicking on this group, or obtain a list of the objects or data types of all groups by
means of Expand.
Repeated clicking on the info group switches the display of the objects or data types off again.
The general expansion resulting from Expand can be cancelled by pressing the same button,
which is meanwhile called Compress.
3. If you click on one of the objects or data types listed, the data box containing the detailed data of
this term opens up.
4. If a Details button appears in the data box, further details (pictures and texts) can be displayed by
clicking on that button.
5. The display of the data box and info box can be switched off by pressing the Cancel button.
1) The index cards and info groups are different for vector charts and raster charts.
2) if the content of the index card is divided up into info groups, which is very often the case.
70 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e31.fm / 10.05.12
Statement of the position for which With this, the box can be set to
the information is displayed. maximum size and back again.
Alternative operating procedure for the box
Index cards with information about the

position clicked with the INFO key; by
clicking on the index card, the content is
displayed
Info groups of the index card; by clicking,

objects or data types of the info group are Info box
displayed
Objects or data types of the info group;

by clicking, the data box is opened
Closes the info box and, if

applicable, the data box
Expand: By pressing, the objects or
data types are displayed for all info
groups Printing all information existing in the
Compress: The display of all objects index card currently being displayed
or data types is switched off.
Data box
Detailed data relating to the object
or data type clicked
Printing the detailed data Displays more details

contained in the data box Closes the data box
Fig. 3-23 The info box and the data box
Printing of Data
With the Print button of the data box, the content of the data box can be printed.
With the Print All button of the info box, all data stored in the index card can be printed.
Explanations for the Objects Displayed in the ENC

In a manner similar to that of Chart 1 (INT 1) of the international (paper) chart series, there exists the
ECDIS Chart 1, in which the elements used in the ECDIS are explained. If the display of the electronic
chart of type ENC is switched on, this ECDIS Chart 1 can be opened as follows:
1. Position the cursor in the chart region, press the INFO key, and click on the index card Legend.
2. By clicking on ECDIS Chart 1, list the pages of ECDIS Chart 1.
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 71

b_cp_e31.fm / 10.05.12
3. Clicking on one of the pages (Show ....) does not cause a data box to open, which is the usual case;
instead,
- the ENC cell ECDIS Chart 1 is called up,
- a switch-over to Planning display mode takes place,
- a switch-over to the range setting 0.75 NM takes place,
- the chart excerpt is set to the area of ECDIS Chart 1 (≈ 15° N, 5° W, i.e. in the Sahara Desert!),
and
- the Presentation mode specially required for ECDIS Chart 1 is switched on.
4. In ECDIS Chart 1, only the elements are displayed, without any explanations; however, by clicking
with the Info key, all information can now be called up (see above, D i s p l a y o f D a t a ).
ECDIS Chart 1 can now be used like a normal ENC, i.e. the range setting can be changed, the
centre can be shifted, and so on.
5. When ECDIS Chart 1 is being exited, it must be ensured that a switch-over to Presentation mode
takes place again, which is necessary for all other ENC cells. This is done by changing the position
of the chart region in some way or other (but not by means of the Set Center button), for example
by switching over to Monitoring display mode, or by switching to the standard display by means of
the Std Disp button, or – in Planning display mode – by inputting a new position by means of the
menu Presentation > Display Mode.
USEFUL INFORMATION
Contents of the Index Cards

The individual index cards contain the following information:
Targets Data of ARPA and AIS targets being displayed or the AIS data of the own ship
Tracks/Maps Data relating to tracks and maps
User Objects Data relating to objects inserted by the user, e.g. User Chart Objects, event
markers, position fixes and data of the Aids-to-Navigation (navigation marks
which are reported by the AIS system)
Chart Contents For vector charts: Data relating to the chart objects
Legend Legend for the electronic chart
For vector charts: Presentation parameters. Additionally for the ENC and Own
Chart: calling up ECDIS Chart 1, which has explanations of the objects displayed.
Status Status of the electronic chart
Notes&Diagrams Notes and diagrams that are printed out on the raster chart
T&P NMs Notices to Mariners and the Temporary and Preliminary Notices to Mariners
issued by the UKHO (for raster charts only)
72 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e31.fm / 10.05.12
Operating Instructions 3.6 Using the Printer
3.6 Using the Printer
The (optional) printer can be used with equal priority by all of the system's items of equipment. The data
to be printed out are assembled page-by-page by each computer; the computer then begins the printing
process. Print jobs arriving at the printer from different items of equipment are processed one after
another.
So that the printer can be used at any time, it should continually be in On-Line mode with paper
inserted. 1)
If there is an A3 printer connected, only the screen content is printed out over the entire area. All other
data are formatted for A4 paper format. Therefore, if screen print-outs are not currently being made, the
printer should contain A4 paper.
Printing the Content of the Screen

In the menu Peripheral Devices > Printer, by pressing of the button Print Screen, a "photograph" of the
display currently being shown on the CHARTPILOT screen can be printed out.
The same result can be achieved by using the MORE key to click the Menu button and, in the context
menu thus opened, clicking the function Print Screen, or on the keyboard by means of the function key
Prt Sc (or Print Screen).
Stopping the Printing Immediately

If printing is to be stopped as quickly as possible, this can be done in the menu Peripheral Devices >
Printer by the pressing of Remove Printer Files. The print commands that have already been sent up
until that point in time are still processed by the printer.
3.7 Using Removable Devices
From Software Version 5.50/6.00 on, it is possible to use, in addition to the Floppy, CD/DVD drive,
different types of external removable media with USB-connector to back-up/save/store onto or restore/
load from. Removable Devices can be used on different CHARTPILOT systems, as long as the version
of the CHARTPILOT software is 5.5 or higher or 6.0 (Version for new performance standards) and a PCI-
USB card is installed in the Electronics Unit.
CHARTPILOT TYPE Application Software Version Removable Devices usable
1100 > 5.50 or 6.00 YES 1)
1) USB 2.0 connectors only availlable on installations after August 2008.
The following instructions are valid for every function of the CHARTPILOT, where data is stored on or
restored from removable media.
In such chapters of the manual, which differ from the instructions below, the different methods of storing
or restoring are described there.
Possible removable USB-Storage-Media 2):
1) The operating procedure that is necessary on the printer is described in the Operating Instructions enclosed with the printer.
2)
Note: Depending on the type of the monitor the USB-port can be found on the front panel near the adjustment key of the monitor or on the
back side of the CHARTPILOT Electronics Unit.
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 73

b_cp_e31.fm / 10.05.12
3.7 Using Removable Devices Operating Instructions
• Card Reader for CF-, MS-, SD-, SM-flash cards

• USB-disk/stick
• USB-hard drive
• USB-Floppy (if connected to the USB-port, built-in Floppy will not be active or displayed)
• USB-CD/DVD-drive (Only for restoring operations. If connected to the USB-port, built-in CD/DVD
drive will not be active or displayed)
Note: USB-sticks/disks with write/read protection for Windows™ Vista™
OS can not be used or have to be formatted completly (including the
boot sector of the USB-stick/disk) in DOS- or LINUX-format.
For each function of the CHARTPILOT, where data operations are possible on removable media, a
Device Selection (selecting removable media) is available. After activating the respective function the
following dialog box appears (Figure 3-24):
z_cp_
Fig. 3-24 Device Selection (selecting removable media)
In the Device Selection box the following media designations are possible:
74 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e31.fm / 10.05.12
Operating Instructions 3.7 Using Removable Devices
• Floppy (MS-DOS): Select this entry to store one or more files, if a DOS-formatted floppy disk is
used. It is the same way like working with a Floppy on a WINDOWS PC.
• Floppy (Archive): Select this entry to save as RAW-archive or load from. This mode is needed to
read data from older systems or to store data for older systems.
• USB-Disk: Select one of the USB-Disks to store there. It is possible to use several USB-Disks for
data operations in contrast to a CD/DVD or floppy drive. If the USB-Disk has a volume label, which
will be displayed. Alternativly there will be displayed the type of the USB-Disk.
• CD/DVD drive: Select the CD/DVD-drive (not visible in Figure 3-24) to restore/load data from the
CD/DVD. It is only possible to perform reading operations.
If the dialog box is opened before inserting a USB-Disk it will not yet be displayed in the list. For display
press the Refresh button. The missing USB-Disk(s) appears.
After selecting a list item (e.g. USB-Disk 1: …) click on the OK-button or leave the dialog box by clicking
the Cancel-button. Clicking the OK-button opens the next dialog box (Figure 3-25).
z_cp_301.gif
Fig. 3-25 Navigation dialog box (store/save/backup)
This dialog box is used for navigating through the file structure of the selected media and to select the
folder or to select file(s) for restore operations.
The left frame of the dialog box always displays the folder(s). The right frame displays the file(s)
contained in the selected folder.
To navigate through the folders click on one of the folder names to get in. To get back one step click on
the 1st line in the folder frame marked <<- - -.
To mark several files in a folder mark the first file, keeping the mouse button pressed, and pull down to
the last one.
The path to the folder is displayed in the Selected Path field.
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 75

b_cp_e31.fm / 10.05.12
3.7 Using Removable Devices Operating Instructions
Marked file(s) with a (+) in front of the file name are possible for restore operations. 1)
z_cp_302.gif
Fig. 3-26 Navigation dialog box (restore/load)
Press the Delete Selected-button to delete selected file(s). To delete a folder first delete the content of
a folder.
Switch the Add New Folder button on to add a new folder. Then enter the wanted folder name and then
click the Apply-button to create the folder.
To start the back-up/restore-process you have to press the OK-button. Press the Cancel-button to cancel
the operation and closing the box.
The overwriting of files during store/restore operations have to be confirmed with OK.
z_cp_303.gif
Restore dialog box: overwriting files
1) The (-) marked file(s) are not possible to restore
76 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e31.fm / 10.05.12
Operating Instructions 3.8 Subroutines
Aborting the Transfer (Floppy (ARCHIVE) only)

If, for some reason, the program should not or cannot end the transfer, it is necessary to abort the
transfer. You can abort it by pressing the Abort button in the dialog box Backup/Restore.
During copying, the progress of the work is displayed here.

The copying process is not finished until Backup finished is displayed.
After the end of the copying process, this closes the Aborts the copying process.
Track/Map Transfer menu.
Fig. 3-27 The dialog box Transfer
3.8 Subroutines
Some functions that are needed less often are provided by independent subroutines. These subroutines
must be switched on when required, and should be switched off again when they are no longer needed.
Such subroutines capable of being switched on and off are:
- In Chart and Conning modes, the individual functions listed under Utilities
- Additionally in Conning mode, the functions Navigation, Docking, Keel Clearance, Pilot Card and the
Conning mode itself.
Buttons which call up subroutines are framed by a white line in the tree.
All other functions are provided by the CHARTPILOT main program, which is started up automatically
when the CHARTPILOT is switched on and which cannot be switched off separately.
The shifting of functions into subroutines serves the purpose of reducing the workload of the CHART-
PILOT computer during the times when these additional functions are not needed. By the switching off
of subroutines that are not required, the main program can then run more quickly. Thus, if you have the
impression that the graphics (for example) are being formed too slowly, you should check (in the Conning
mode too) whether any subroutines that are not needed are still switched on, and if so, you should switch
them off.
Display of the Switched-On Subroutines

In the function overview (tree) of the mode concerned, the buttons of the switched-on subroutines are
labelled in red.
Switching a Subroutine On
When you press the button of the corresponding function (in the higher-order menu or in the function
overview), this action switches the subroutine on (if it was not switched on already).
The highest-order menu of the subroutine concerned then appears, together with the associated displays.
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 77

b_cp_e31.fm / 10.05.12
3.8 Subroutines Operating Instructions
The highest-order menus of the subroutines can be recognised from the fact that they have an Exit
button at bottom right.
Switching Off a Subroutine

When you press the Exit button in the highest-order menu of the subroutine and give the appropriate
answer to the safeguard question which then appears, this action switches the subroutine off. It also
aborts all of the subroutine's activities that might still be running.
Switching the Operating Procedure Over to Other Programs

You can abort the operation of a program at any time in order to perform an operating action in a different
program. This does not switch off the program that you leave. The menu of the program which you leave
remains preserved in the form that it had at the instant of change-over to the other program, but is
covered by the menu of the program to which you have changed over. When you switch back again, you
will find the menu exactly as you had left it.
78 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e31.fm / 10.05.12
CHARTPILOT 4 Functions for Navigation and Collision Avoidance
Operating Instructions 4.1 General Information about Electronic Charts and User Chart Objects
4 Functions for Navigation and Collision Avoidance
This section describes which functions are provided by the CHARTPILOT in Chart mode for navigation
and collision avoidance, and how these functions are operated.
Furthermore, Section 4.1 contains basic information about the electronic charts that can be used. An
understanding of this basic information is necessary so that these electronic charts can be used properly.
4.1 General Information about Electronic Charts and User Chart Objects
Regarding the data structure, the electronic charts can basically be divided up into vector charts (see
Section 4.1.3) and raster charts (see Section 4.1.4).
The types ENC, CM-93/3Pro and CM-93/2 and Own Chart which can be handled on the CHARTPILOT
are vector charts; the ARCS type consists of raster charts.
The differences between vector charts and raster charts have consequences for some of the functions
that are available on the CHARTPILOT.
The User Chart Objects are individual elements which are edited on the CHARTPILOT and which
supplement the electronic charts. They are not specific to the type of electronic chart used, and can be
displayed irrespective of the type.
4.1.1 Switching On the Display of the Chart and Selecting the Chart Type
The display of the electronic chart is generally switched on and off in the Chart menu by means of the
Chart Visible button.
The selection of the chart type to be used is done in the Chart menu with the button Type or with the
context menu of the Chart Status field in the navigation data line.
For switching on the display of User Chart Objects, see Section 4.3.3.
The chart types and User Chart Objects mentioned are not all available on all versions of the
CHARTPILOT.
4.1.2 Chart Types: Legal Aspects
The ENC chart type (Electronic Navigational Chart) consists of the vector chart which is used in the elec-
tronic chart and Information Display System (ECDIS) defined by the IMO. It conforms to the international
standard S-57 issued by the IHO, and is published by the IHO or by the responsible national hydrographic
organisations.
ECDIS is designed to fulfil the requirements which SOLAS 74 Regulation V/20 imposes regarding
the keeping of up-to-date charts, so that an ECDIS is a fully valid replacement for the conventional
chart made of paper. A necessary prerequisite for this is that the data used are approved by the IMO
or by the responsible national hydrographic organisations, that these data are always kept up to
date, and that the display system for them is approved by a notified body. The CHARTPILOT is
designed to fulfil these approval conditions.
The CM-93/3Pro chart type 1) and the CM-93/2 chart type are vector charts published by the company
Jeppesen Marine. They too conform to the IHO standard S-57 and therefore have the same functional
characteristics as the ENC. However, they differ from the latter in their legal significance, since they are
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 79

b_cp_e32.fm / 10.05.12
4 Functions for Navigation and Collision Avoidance CHARTPILOT
4.1 General Information about Electronic Charts and User Chart Objects Operating Instructions
not approved as part of ECDIS. For all of the important regions, chart data of these chart types are avail-
able. They can be obtained from SAM Electronics or any other authorized distributor; see page 299 or
314.
The ARCS chart type is the electronic form of the well-known British Admiralty Charts. They are
published by the Admiralty Raster Chart Service (ARCS) 1) which also publishes the paper charts. They
do not conform to the IHO standard S-57 and do not fulfil the requirements of SOLAS Regulation V20
concerning the keeping of up-to-date charts. The display of this chart type takes place in the Raster Chart
Display System (RCDS), which, in the CHARTPILOT, is part of ECDIS. A licence for their use can be
obtained from any authorized distributor; see page 289.
The Own Chart chart type consists of the vector chart which is generated by means of the Own Chart
editor. The Own Chart conforms to the IHO standard S-57. It is needed on ships with DNV approval for
areas for which neither approved ENC chart data nor CM-93/3Pro or CM-93/2 chart data are available.
NOTICE:
At the present time, electronic charts are permitted to be used as a
replacement for the official (paper) charts if, and only if, the electronic
charts contain ENC data. If ENC data are not available, they may be
replaced by ARCS data, but only if special permission is obtained from
the flag nations for this.
4.1.3 Vector Charts
In the case of vector charts, the symbols, areas, lines and labelling (collectively called Objects in the
following) are electronically stored individually, together with their geographical positions. Each object is
specified in the file by a number of parameters. The screen display is generated by calling up the indi-
vidual object-data by the use of an associated IHO-standardised display regulation; the display of a
number of object classes can be suppressed individually by the user. Further data can be displayed in
an object-related way in the info box.
For vector charts, the term “chart” covers all of the existing chart material of a certain type. In principle,
each of the above-mentioned vector charts therefore covers the entire surface of the earth. It is subdi-
vided into areas bounded by lines of longitude and latitude or by parts of them. These areas are known
as cells.
However, the chart is not only subdivided into cells, but also into various scale ranges (navigational
purposes). Each cell is assigned to one of these navigational purposes. The cells to be used for ocean
crossings cover a larger area than (for example) the cells intended for coastal sailing. Furthermore, the
selection and precision of the data contained correspond to the purpose intended for the cell size
concerned. Thus, coastal regions are usually charted in several cells of different sizes; the different cells
contain different items of information for the same region (all of this is similar to the case of paper charts).
Detailed data on the cell can be called up by means of the Info box.
Apart from these common features, the geographical structure exhibits the following distinctions:
1)
There are several variants of the CM-93/3 chart with different designations. The variant with the designation CM-93/3Pro that can be used
at the CHARTPILOT and that is described in these Operating Instructions is referred to as CM-93/3 Professional by the company
Jeppesen Marine.
1) ARCS is an organisation of the UK Hydrographic Office.
80 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e32.fm / 10.05.12
Operating Instructions 4.1 General Information about Electronic Charts and User Chart Objects
Geographical Structure of the ENC

The cells can overlap with one another. It is true that naviga- Cells of the ENC
tional purposes are defined, but neither the corresponding
Code Navigational Purpose
cell sizes nor the scales of the equivalent paper charts are
defined. 1 Overview
In the cell data which can be called up by means of the Info 2 General
box, the navigational purpose can be identified from the first 3 Coastal
numeral of the cell name (after the two letters which indicate 4 Approach
the country of publication or the producer) – see Code in the
table opposite. 5 Harbour
6 Berthing
Geographical Structure of the CM-93/3Pro Chart
The cells can overlap with one another. For the various navigational purposes, there are different cell
sizes in each case. The scales of the equivalent paper charts are defined.
In the cell data which can be called up by means of the Info box, the navigational purpose can be iden-
tified from the first numeral of the cell name (after the two letters which indicate the producer) – see Code
in the following table.
Cells of the CM-93/3Pro Chart Corresponding scale of a
(paper) chart
Code Navigational Purpose
7 General Background < 1 : 5.000.000
8 World 1 : 1.500.000 to 1 : 5.000.000
1 General Nautical 1 : 500.000 to 1 : 1.500.000
2 Coastal 1 : 200.000 to 1 : 500.000
3 Coastal / Approach 1 : 50.000 to 1 : 200.000
4 Approach 1 : 15.000 to 1 : 50.000
5 Harbour 1 : 5.000 to 1 : 15.000
6 Plan > 1 : 5.000
Geographical Structure of the CM-93/2 Chart

The cells of a navigational purpose do not overlap each other. Both the cell size and the scale range of
the equivalent paper charts are defined for all navigational purposes.
In the cell data which can be called up by means of the Info box, the navigational purpose can be iden-
tified from the first character of the identification (see Code in the following tables).
Cells of the CM-93/2 Chart Corresponding scale of a

(paper) chart
Code Navigational Purpose Size
Z General Background 40 x 40 degrees < 1 : 5.000.000
A World 20 x 20 degrees 1 : 1.500.000 to 1 : 5.000.000
B General Nautical 10 x 10 degrees 1 : 500.000 to 1 : 1.500.000
C Coastal 4 x 4 degrees 1 : 150.000 to 1 : 500.000
D Coastal / Approach 1 x 1 degrees 1 : 50.000 to 1 : 150.000
E Approach 20 x 20 minutes 1 : 15.000 to 1 : 50.000
F Harbour 20 x 20 minutes 1 : 5.000 to 1 : 15.000
G Plan 20 x 20 minutes > 1 : 5.000
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 81

b_cp_e32.fm / 10.05.12
4.1 General Information about Electronic Charts and User Chart Objects Operating Instructions
Geographical Structure of the Own Chart

Own Chart too is subdivided into cells, which can overlap. During editing, the cell size and the scale are
specified. The Own Chart editor does not specify anything particular about this, within wide limits.
However, all cells are automatically assigned to one of the navigational purposes that are defined for the
ENC.
4.1.4 Raster Charts
Raster charts are scanned paper-charts. In these charts, the individual pixels are stored together with
their colour values. Objects are created there only as visual impressions; the program knows only the
colour values of the pixels and not their meanings. However, from the information contained additionally
in the raster chart files, the CHARTPILOT determines the geographical position and the alignment of the
chart, so that the own ship symbol and the other synthetics generated by the CHARTPILOT can be
displayed at the correct positions 1) on the chart.
In contrast to vector charts, raster charts only have a limited functionality, to which attention is expressly
drawn in the proposal "Differences between RCDS and ECDIS" published by the IMO Committee for
Navigation Safety. The most important points of this are reproduced here:
1. Unlike ECDIS where there are no chart boundaries, RCDS is a chart-based system similar to a port-
folio of paper charts.
2. RNC data, itself, will not trigger automatic alarms (e.g. anti-grounding). However, some alarms can
be generated by the RCDS from user-inserted information 2). These can include:
- ship safety contour lines,
- isolated dangers,
- danger areas.
3. Horizontal datums and chart projections may differ between RNCs. Mariners should understand how
the chart horizontal datum relates to the datum of the position fixing system. In some instances, this
may appear as a shift in position. This difference may be most noticeable at grid intersections and
during route monitoring.
4. Chart features cannot be simplified or removed to suit a particular navigational circumstance or task
at hand. This could affect the superimposition of radar/ARPA.
5. Without selecting different scale charts, the look-ahead capability may be somewhat limited. This
may lead to some inconvenience when determining range and bearing or the identity of distant
objects.
6. Orientation of the RCDS display to other than chart-up, may affect the readability of chart text and
symbols (e.g., course-up, route-up). 3)
7. It may not be possible to interrogate RNC features to gain additional information about charted
objects.
8. It is not possible to display a ship’s safety contour or safety depth and highlight it on the display
unless these features are manually entered during route planning.
9. Depending on the source of the RNC, different colours may be used to show similar chart informa-
tion. There may also be differences in colours used during day and nighttime.
1) The geodetic chart datum of some charts is not known exactly. Consequently, the CHARTPILOT cannot position the synthetics correctly.
In such cases, a position adjust might have to be performed; see page 152.
2) On the CHARTPILOT, this is done by means of the user-edited User Chart Objects own safety lines, danger highlights, own MARPOL
lines and anchor watch areas – see page 193.
3) Therefore, these modes are not available when raster charts are used on the CHARTPILOT.
82 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e32.fm / 10.05.12
Operating Instructions 4.2 Basic Setting for the Situation Display
10. An RNC should be displayed at the scale of the paper chart. Excessive zooming in or zooming out
can seriously degrade RCDS capability. For example, by degrading the legibility of the chart image.
11. Mariners should be aware that in confined waters, the accuracy of chart data (i.e., paper charts, ENC
or RNC data) may be less than that of the position-fixing system in use. This may be the case when
using differential GNSS. ECDIS provides an indication in the ENC which allows a determination of
the quality of the data.
NOTICE:
Before the beginning of the voyage, the officer of the watch must famil-
iarise himself with the advantages and disadvantages of raster charts.
Geographical Structure of the Raster Charts

The raster charts are exact reproductions of the British Admiralty Charts which are published in paper
form, and like the latter they possess to some extent plans (detailed charts with a larger scale) which can
be displayed separately.
In addition to this conventional subdivision into chart sheets, subdivision into regions has been intro-
duced with the electronic form to make it easier to update the charts; see page 90.
4.2 Basic Setting for the Situation Display
4.2.1 Adapting the Display and Illumination to Suit the Room Brightness
Setting the Brightness and Colour

Approximate adaptation to suit the ambient brightness, including the switch-over of day and night colours,
is done by clicking the Brightness button in the basic menu line (the function key F9 has the same func-
tion) and directly selecting the desired colour palette and thus the brightness value under Palettes in the
Brightness menu which then opens 1). Clicking the arrow button closes the Brightness menu. When a
membrane keyboard is used, the internal illumination of the control panel can be adjusted by means of
the Dim + and Dim - keys.
If the cursor is situated at the upper edge of the screen, simultaneous pressing of the INFO, DO and
MORE keys causes the screen to become bright (Bright Day) 2). This is helpful if, in a bright room,
the screen had been set very dark by means of the Brightness menu (and the cursor can therefore
no longer be recognised).
WARNING:
When the brightness and colour palette are adjusted, the test described
below must be performed in order to ensure that all symbols of the elec-
tronic chart are still clearly visible.
Reproduction of the Factory-Adjusted Black Value Setting for ECDIS Display

The monitor has been calibrated in the factory in such a way that the colours and contrasts specified for
the ECDIS are displayed correctly. On monitors with cathode ray tubes, the brightness and contrast
values used (and therefore the calibration status) can be achieved again by making the markers on the
brightness and contrast knobs coincide with the corresponding markers on the casing.
1) On the service level, it is possible to define that this setting also has an effect on other indicators of the system and can be also be made
there for this CHARTPILOT.
2) If there is an keyboard, this is also done by pressing the function key F9 and by then pressing the space bar.
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 83

b_cp_e32.fm / 10.05.12
4.2 Basic Setting for the Situation Display Operating Instructions
Fine Adjustment
Because of the aging of the monitor and in order to adapt to the individual lighting conditions on board,
it might be necessary to perform a fine adjustment:
1. Set the brightness to minimum. If the monitor has a contrast control, it should be set to maximum.
2. Open the Brightness menu. It contains a symbol consisting of two concentric squares.
3. If the inner square is not visible, adjust the brightness so that this square can just be seen clearly
and no more.
– or, if there is a contrast control –
If the inner square stands out very strongly, reduce the contrast so that this square can just be seen
clearly and no more.
Checking the Brightness Setting

In the case of the night colours in particular, there is a danger that, to avoid spoiling the night vision, the
display is set so dark that some symbols on the electronic chart are no longer visible. To prevent this,
whenever you have switched the night colours on or have adjusted the brightness and contrast controls
you should check whether, in the Brightness menu, the inner square stands out faintly but clearly against
the outer square.
Choosing between Coloured and Grey Area Display

The areas of the vector charts can be displayed either in colour or in shades of grey. This setting is made
by means of the Grey mode button in the Brightness menu.
List of adjustable brightness values for the screen

Switch-over of the display is done by clicking.
Switches over between grey shade display and colour display.
Checking the brightness and contrast settings: The inner

square must be visible faintly but clearly.
Menu when vector charts Switches off the Brightness menu. Menu when raster cha
are used are used
Fig. 4-1 The Brightness menu
In these Operating Instructions, all colour information is based on the brightness value Bright Day,
with the Grey mode function switched off, or is based on the ARCS colour range Daytime.
Colours on Slave Monitors

If, as the slave monitor, a monitor type is used which is different from the monitor type in the CHART-
PILOT station, it can happen that the display of colours is different on the slave monitors.
WARNING:
As a result of this it is possible that, on such slave monitors, not all
chart objects are clearly identifiable.
84 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e32.fm / 10.05.12
4.2.2 Adjusting the Range
This section applies only to the use of vector charts. When raster charts are used, the setting of the
chart scale is done by selection of the chart to be displayed or the scale value; see Section 4.2.3.
The size of the geographical excerpt displayed can be changed by operating the Range field.
List of selectable ranges. Switch-over takes

place after clicking of the range value in
this list Symbol : For this range, data of the vector
chart are available (for details, see text).
Makes the Range list disappear.
Switches on the next smaller range. Switches on the next larger range.
Range value of the present display Distance between the range rings (displayed
only if range rings are switched on)
Clicking of this field makes the list appear.

After switch-over of the range, the data contained in the field are
displayed in red until the new picture has been generated.
Fig. 4-2 The Range field with Range List
The Range field is situated in the basic menu line. By clicking on the symbol or , you can change
the range in steps. The value currently selected is displayed between these symbols. It refers to half the
height of the chart area. Range values from 0.1 NM to 800 NM can be set. When you click the range
value or the function key F6 a list of all selectable ranges appears above this field; in this list, you can
click the desired value directly.
In the case of a switch-over through several range values, direct clicking permits faster generation
of the picture.
The symbols to the right of the range values indicate the display ranges for which a vector chart
is available - see U S E F U L I N F O R M A T I O N .
USEFUL INFORMATION
Automatic Selection of the Purposes to be Displayed

For each range setting, an ideal purpose is defined in the program, depending on the vector chart used
(see also Table on page 87.
For the set range, the program first searches in the selected vector chart to find the cell with the ideal
purpose which (in the Monitoring display modes) covers the position of own ship or (in the Planning
display mode) the centre of the chart area.
- If the cell of the purpose being looked for exists in the local database, this cell is used for the display.
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 85

b_cp_e32.fm / 10.05.12
- If no cell with the next larger scale is available either for the specified position, the program uses the
cell with the next smaller scale (or perhaps also a cell with an even smaller scale) if such a cell exists
for the specified position and contains data. In this case, the message Overscaled appears in the
Chart Status field.
If the cell found in this way does not cover the entire chart region, then for those regions that are not
covered the program likewise looks for cells having the ideal navigational purpose, and displays these
cells. For regions for which the program does not find any cells having the ideal navigational purpose, it
uses cells with a smaller scale.
If a small range is set, then in addition any existing data of the cells having the next larger scale are
displayed.
Markings Used (see Figure 4-3)

The boundary between cells having different scales is marked by a grey line.
If the scale of the cell is considerably smaller than the display scale, the area concerned is marked by a
vertical grey pattern of lines.
Areas for which no data are available are displayed empty and grey in the chart region.
The scale of the cell used here

is considerably smaller than the
display scale.
Boundary between cells having

different scales
Fig. 4-3 Marking of different and excessively small cell-scales
One month after expiry of the permit (see page 262), the cell is marked with a vertical red pattern of lines.
This indicates that it has not been possible to update the cell, i.e. that the cell might contain out-of-date
data.
Display of the Available Data

For the range settings marked in the list, cells of the selected vector chart having an ideal purpose
exist. In the Monitoring display modes (see page 90), this refers to the area around own ship's present
position; in Planning display mode, it refers to the centre of the chart area. Thus, by means of the selec-
tion procedure described above, it is also possible to display chart data for ranges not marked with the
symbol.
86 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e32.fm / 10.05.12
Assignment of the Ideal Purposes to the Range Settings
Range ENC CM-93/3Pro Chart CM-93/2 Chart

[NM] Code Ideal Purpose Code Ideal Purpose Code Ideal Purpose
800.0
7 General Background Z General Background
400.0 1 Overview
200.0 8 World A World
96.0
2 General 1 General Nautic B General Nautic
48.0
24.0
3 Coastal 2 Coastal C Coastal
12.0
6.0 4 Approach 3 Coastal/Approach D Coastal/Approach
3.0
5 Harbour 4 Approach E Approach
1.5
0.75
5 Harbour F Harbour
0.5
6 Berthing
0.25
6 Plan G Plan
0.10
4.2.3 Selection and Setting of the Raster Chart to be Displayed
When raster charts are used, setting of the chart scale is performed by selection of the chart to be
displayed or of a plan that exists on the chart.
When this selection has been made, the system attempts to retain the chart scale even beyond the
boundaries of the selected chart: one minute before the ship's position reaches the boundary of the chart
being displayed, the display switches over automatically to a chart which covers a larger area ahead of
the ship. If a chart with the same scale is available, a switch-over to that chart takes place; otherwise, a
switch-over takes place to a chart having a scale (larger or smaller) which differs as little as possible from
the scale currently being used.
Selection of a Raster Chart

When the raster chart with the next smaller scale is to be displayed, all that is needed is to click on the
symbol in the scale field (situated in the basic menu line). The raster chart with the next larger scale
is selected accordingly with the symbol .
In the Chart Status field, the display Bad Scale appears if one or more charts or plans are present
having a scale larger than the scale used for the chart region.
If a particular raster chart is to be displayed, open the Chart Selection menu by clicking on the displayed
scale in the scale field or by pressing the function key F6. Clicking on one of the charts or plans marked
there with selects this for display and closes the Chart Selection menu.
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 87

b_cp_e32.fm / 10.05.12
Explanations for the Chart Selection Menu

In the Chart Selection menu, all existing charts (together with their scales 1)) are listed which (in Moni-
toring display mode) cover own position or (in Planning display mode) the middle of the chart area,
whether this covering is done by the main part of the chart or by a plan situated on the chart.
If this position is covered both by the main part of the chart and by one or more plans, multiple naming
of the chart takes place. From the larger scale, it can then be recognised that the entry stands for a plan.
If a chart is divided into two parts having the same scale, multiple naming again takes place. In this case,
the only way in which you can determine which part is involved is to select one of the two parts.
If you do not know the numbers of the charts, you can extend the menu by addition of the display
of chart names by means of the Maximize button (at top right in the list).
The availability is indicated by the symbol entered on the left:
The chart is stored in the local database and can be displayed by clicking.
For this chart, a licence exists. However, the chart is not situated in the local database. Therefore,
it must be transferred to that place before use (see page 292).
No symbol: For this chart, no licence exists.
Scale of the chart Number of the chart

Availability of the chart: or plan
(Directly) available
Yet to be loaded Additionally displays the names of the charts
No symbol: Licence must be
obtained Inverted line: The chart or plan displayed
Clicking on a line selects the chart or plan for

display and closes the chart list
Enlarges the display scale by a Closes the chart list without any change
linear factor of 2
Selects the chart or plan with the Selects the chart or plan with the next
next larger scale smaller scale
Scale of the displayed chart

After the switch-over to another chart, the number is
Clicking on this field makes the list appear. displayed in red until the new image is generated.
Fig. 4-4 Scale field with chart selection menu
Displaying the Raster Chart in Enlarged Form

In the Chart Selection menu, you can enlarge the display of the selected chart/plan by a factor of 2 by
pressing the Zoom in button. (The zoom is cancelled by pressing of the same button, which is meanwhile
called Zoom off.)
If the raster chart is to be displayed in enlarged form, the display Zoom x 2 appears in the Chart
Status field of the navigation data line.
1) The statement of the chart scales always refers to the paper version. The scales of the screen display differ from that.
88 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e32.fm / 10.05.12
Marking the Chart Region which is Not the Active One

In all cases, a uniform scale is used as the basis throughout the entire chart region. This applies also to
all objects which the CHARTPILOT inserts in the chart region, e.g. tracks and targets, and it also applies
to the cursor position. If own ship is situated within the area of a plan, the scale of the plan also applies
to the objects that are overlaid on the main part of the chart, and vice versa. Consequently, a track (for
example) is shown throughout the entire chart region without any discontinuities, but in the area which is
not the active area the shape of the track does not correspond to the chart being displayed. One example
of the consequences of this is that, by means of the cursor, the correct position of a target is displayed.
In the menu Chart > Raster Chart Options, all non-active areas can be covered with a white pattern of
dots by switch-on of the function Shade Non-Active Areas, so that these areas can only be seen indis-
tinctly. Therefore if (in Monitoring display mode) own ship is situated within the area of a plan, the
surrounding main part is displayed more faintly, and vice versa.
It is recommended that this function should be switched on.
Displays more faintly those parts of the chart that are currently not being used.
When this function is switched on, the plan contained in the chart is displayed auto-
matically as soon as the ship is situated in the region covered by the plan.
This marks by means of black rectangles those regions of a raster chart in which
updates have been performed.
Fig. 4-5 The Chart > Raster Chart Options menu
Looking at the Entire Chart in the Form of an Overview

To obtain an overview, you can also display completely the chart that has been selected for display, see
Figure 4-6. This is done by means of the Chart Overview function of the context menu of the chart
region.
In this display, the cursor position is correct both in the main part and in the plans.
Specifying Automatic Switch-Over of the Chart Scale

In the menu Chart > Raster Chart Options, it can be ensured by switching on the Auto Scale function
that the area lying ahead is always displayed with the largest scale that is available on the selected chart
in the form of plans. The switch-over takes place in Monitoring display mode as soon as the ship's posi-
tion is situated in the area for which a plan (with a larger scale) exists on the chart.
In Planning display mode, the switch-over takes place when the centre of the chart area is set to such a
position.
In Monitoring display mode, a switch-over takes place automatically back to the main part of the chart or
into a plan with a smaller scale when the limit of the plan displayed is going to be reached in a minute's
time.
If the Auto Scale function is not switched on, no automatic switch-over occurs within a chart.
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 89

b_cp_e32.fm / 10.05.12
Marking Changed ARCS Chart Regions

If you wish to know whether updates have been carried out for the currently displayed region of the raster
chart, you can obtain a display of the changed regions (ARCS term: Tiles) in the form of black, rectan-
gular frames by switching on the function Updated Chart Regions in the menu Chart > Raster Chart
Options.
In the overview display, all changed regions are marked by means of black rectangles if the function
Updated Chart Regions is switched on there. If the Updated Chart Regions button is insensitive,
this means that the chart has not been changed.
Cursor position in
the overview
display
This excerpt is
currently being
displayed in the
chart region
In Planning display
mode, the new
centre of the chart
region is defined by
clicking on a posi-
tion; see page 95.
These regions have

been changed by
updates
Switches off
the overview
display
Switches the marking of the You can find this information in the Notes&Diagrams
changed regions on and off index card of the Info box.
Fig. 4-6 Overview display of a raster chart
4.2.4 Display Modes
Concerning the chart excerpt displayed, you have a choice between the Monitoring display modes, in
which own position is always situated in the chart excerpt displayed, and the Planning display mode, in
which a desired chart excerpt is set regardless of own position.
90 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e32.fm / 10.05.12
4.2.4.1 Monitoring Display Modes
Switching On the Monitoring Display Mode

In the Presentation > Display Mode menu, press the Monitoring button. There, by clicking one of the
buttons in the Monitoring frame, it is possible to choose between the various types of display 1). The differ-
ences between the available Monitoring display modes are stated in the following table.
The display mode that is switched on is continuously indicated in the navigation data line.
Monitoring display Chart alignment and Movement of own ship
mode chart movement symbol
True Motion True north upwards; chart remains fixed until True Motion Movement according to
Reset takes place. When the ship symbol reaches the limit course and speed
of the True Motion Reset area, a True Motion Reset occurs
Centered Display 1) True north upwards. The chart moves continuously oppo- Rotation when the course
site to the sailing direction changes; no change of the
position on the screen
North-Up RM 1) True north upwards. The chart moves continuously oppo- Rotation when the course
site to the sailing direction changes; no change of the
position on the screen
Course-Up RM 2) Upon switch-over to Course-Up mode, the chart is rotated Rotation when the course
in such a way that the ship's headmarker points upwards. changes; no change of the
This alignment is maintained. The chart moves continu- position on the screen
ously opposite to the sailing direction 3)
Head-Up RM 2) Ship's headmarker points upwards; chart rotates when None
course changes, and moves continuously opposite to
sailing direction
1)
On the CHARTPILOT, there are no differences between the Centered Display mode and the North-Up RM mode. These terms
were taken over from radar technology, where the modes differ in the treatment of the radar trails.
2)
These modes are not available when the raster charts are used.
3)
If, after a course change, the headmarker is to be made to point upwards again, the Course-Up mode must be reactivated.
Examples
In figures 4-7 and 4-8, screen excerpts from two instants of the same scenario are shown schematically
for the five Monitoring display modes:
Instant 1
- Own ship's course 60°, speed 20 kt
- Two moving targets, courses 60° and 150°, speed 10 kt for both
- Two fixed targets
- Two grid lines showing the alignment of the electronic chart
Instant 2
The same scenario, but after an own ship's course change to 10° (all other data unchanged).
Displays of the following are set: Own ship symbol, course and speed vectors, past plots of the targets.
Except in the case of True Motion, the centre of the screen excerpt shown is the own ship's position that
was set with Set Center.
The display of the own ship symbol is depending on user selection and software version !
1) Alternative: In the Display Mode context menu of the Chart Status field (navigational data line)
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 91

b_cp_e32.fm / 10.05.12
Instant 1 Instant 2
True Motion (with true vectors and past plots)
Instant 1 Instant 2
Centered Display (with true vectors and past plots)
Fig. 4-7 Display in the modes True Motion and Centered Display
92 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e32.fm / 10.05.12
Instant 1 Instant 2
North-Up RM (with relative vectors and past plots)
Instant 1 Instant 2
Course-Up RM (with relative vectors and past plots)
Instant 1 Instant 2
Head-Up RM (with relative vectors and past plots)
Fig. 4-8 Display in the modes North-Up RM, Course-Up RM and Head-Up RM
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 93

b_cp_e32.fm / 10.05.12
In all Monitoring display modes, you can determine - within particular limits - the position that is to be
occupied by the own ship symbol on the screen:
Specifying the Position of the Own Ship Symbol on the Screen

Operating procedure with key: Position the cursor at the point on the screen that is to be occupied by
the own ship symbol, and press the function key F7
Operating procedure with button: In the basic menu line, press the Set Center button or, with the
MORE key click into the chart area and select Set Center. Click the point on the screen that is to be
occupied by the own ship symbol.
The point clicked should be situated within the True Motion Reset area. If you click a point outside
the True Motion Reset area,
- in the Monitoring display modes Head-Up, Course-Up, North-Up and Centered Display, the own
ship symbol is set at the edge of the True Motion Reset area,
- in the Monitoring display mode True Motion, a True Motion Reset is performed.
Setting the True Motion Reset Area

The size of the True Motion Reset area is set by adjusting the True Motion Reset controller in the Pres-
entation > Display Mode menu. With a small numerical value of True Motion Reset, you define that own
position is situated more at the centre of the screen but that the True Motion Reset occurs more
frequently.
Switches the Monitoring display mode on, i.e. own position is

always situated in the displayed area.
Selection of the Monitoring display mode
For Monitoring display mode only: When the ship reaches

this radius, a True Motion Reset occurs
The vectors and past plots of the targets are displayed relative to own ship; the
vector of own ship's symbol is omitted (see page 58).
The vectors and past plots of the targets and the vector of own ship's
symbol are displayed true (see page 58).
Switches on the Planning display mode, i.e. any desired area can
be displayed, regardless of own position.
For Planning display mode only: Geographic position of the chart area centre
which occurs after pressing of the Apply button or the Enter key.
Takes over the position that has been input; the menu is not exited
Fig. 4-9 The Presentation > Display Mode menu
94 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e32.fm / 10.05.12
USEFUL INFORMATION
True Motion Reset

A True Motion Reset takes place when (in the Monitoring display mode True Motion) the own ship symbol
reaches the limit of the True Motion Reset area. When the True Motion Reset occurs, the chart is shifted
along the present ship's headmarker in the opposite direction so that the centre of the chart area is once
again situated ahead of the ship.
True Motion Reset Area

This area is circular, is situated at the centre of the chart area, and has the radius that was set by means
of the True Motion Reset controller. The percentage displayed there refers to half the height of the chart
area.
4.2.4.2 Planning Display Mode
The Planning display mode is provided specially for the tasks of planning: any geographical area can be
displayed regardless of the current own position by setting the picture centre at any geographical position.
In Planning display mode, the chart is always aligned with true north upwards. If own position is situated
in the chart area displayed, own ship symbol is displayed unless its display is generally switched off.
Switching On the Planning Display Mode

Press the Planning button in the Presentation > Display Mode menu 1).
Specifying the Centre of the Displayed Chart-Excerpt

To do this, there are two possible methods:
- If the desired centre is not situated in the present display area, the centre coordinates can be input:
Under Planning in the Presentation > Display Mode menu, input the centre coordinates of the new
chart excerpt and press the Apply button.
- If the desired centre is situated in the present display area, the chart excerpt can be moved manu-
ally: Press Set Center in the basic menu line 2), and in the chart area click the position that is to be
the new centre of the chart excerpt. This function can also be executed several times in order to
reach new chart excerpts step-by-step (e.g. along the course being steered or along the pre-planned
track).
Within a raster chart, a new centre can also be defined by clicking on the desired position in the overview
display. The overview display is opened by means of the Overview function of the context menu of the
chart region. See Figure 4-6 on page 90.
Switching On with the Subroutine Chart Maintenance

When you switch back directly from the subroutine Chart Maintenance to the program Navigation by
means of the Set Planning Mode function, the Planning display mode is switched on and the centre of
the displayed chart excerpt corresponds to the position clicked in the (zoomed) world chart - see page
247
1) Alternative: In the Display Mode context menu of the Chart Status field (navigational data line)
2) Or the function key F7 on the A/N keyboard
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 95

b_cp_e32.fm / 10.05.12
4.2.5 Setting the Coordinate System
This setting can be made only if vector charts are used.

The coordinate system (projection and geodetic datum) used for the display can be set, e.g. so that the
position data on the screen and on a paper chart are identical to each other or in order to minimise the
distortions in the graphic display and thus errors in range measurement and in the determination of bear-
ings.
Setting the Projection and the Geodetic Datum

1. Under Projection in the Presentation > Coordinate System menu, choose between the Radar
projection (this corresponds to the projection created by the radar measurement) and Mercator.
2. Under Geodetic Datum, select the appropriate geodetic datum.
WARNING:
If the vector chart is being used for navigation, the geodetic datum
WGS 84 must be selected.
3. Press the Apply button in order to put the new settings into effect. You can leave the Coordinate
System menu by means of Presentation, for example.
The setting procedure can also be carried out in the context menu after clicking into the position
display of the navigation data line has been performed by means of the MORE key.
USEFUL INFORMATION
Scope of Validity of the Coordinate System Selected Here

All displays provided by the CHARTPILOT refer to the coordinate system selected here, with the following
exceptions:
- For the period of editing of pre-planned tracks and maps, a different coordinate system (e.g. that of
the paper chart used) can be set for the position values that are to be input; this can be done via
the editing menu concerned. When the editing menu is exited, a return to the coordinate system
selected here takes place automatically.
- The programs for navigational consulting (Consulting) and for maintenance of the chart data (Chart
Maintenance) are based on the Mercator projection and on the geodetic datum WGS 84.
Parameterisations for Special Tasks

At service level, it can be specified that UTM and Gauss-Krueger too can be selected under Projection
in the Presentation > Coordinate System menu. In this case, the Presentation > Coordinate System
menu contains the Hemisphere button, with which the hemisphere must be input if the UTM or Gauss-
Krueger projection is selected.
If UTM and Gauss-Krueger projections are selectable, it can also be specified at service level that, for
these two projections and for the Mercator projection, not only automatic determination of reference data
but also manual input of reference data is to be possible. In this case, the Presentation > Coordinate
System menu is supplemented by the Reference frame. Figure 4-10 shows the menu in this configura-
tion.
Projection at High Latitudes

If the Radar projection is not in the switched-on state, it is switched on automatically as soon as the 85th
parallel of latitude is reached in the chart area. An appropriate message appears.
96 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e32.fm / 10.05.12
Operating Instructions 4.3 Settings of the Electronic Chart
Exits the menu; only the settings that were input before pressing
of the Apply button are taken over.
Definition of the projection

Definition of the geodetic datum
Manual input of the hemisphere for UTM and
Gauss-Krueger projection
Reference data of the projection:

- Auto: Automatic determination of the reference data
- Manual: Makes it possible to input the reference data
manually (changes the distortion of the display). These functions are
available only when
parameterisation for
Manual input of the reference latitude of special tasks has been
the Mercator projection enabled at service
level.(For example on
Manual input of the UTM zone survey-vessels)
Manual input of the Gauss-Krueger projection
Takes over the data that were input; the menu is not exited.
The data that have been valid since the last take-over are restored
again; the menu is not exited.
Fig. 4-10 The Presentation > Coordinate System menu
4.3 Settings of the Electronic Chart
Overview of the Settings for the Display of Electronic Charts:

1. The electronic charts of the type that is to be used must be available with the desired scale for the
necessary geographical area on the hard disk drive of the CHARTPILOT in the data area created
for them. These data must be completely up to date, see also page 79.
2. Select the chart type in the Chart menu with the Type button 1).
If a vector chart is selected:
3. Switch the display of the vector chart on generally in the Chart menu by pressing the Chart Visible
button.
4. In accordance with Section 4.3.1, specify the objects and text labels that are to be generally
displayed.
5. In accordance with Section 4.3.2 (from page 102 onwards), specify the depth contours that are to
be displayed.
6. In accordance with Section 4.3.3 (from page 104 onwards), switch the display of the User Chart
Objects on.
1)
Or in the Chart Type context menu after clicking into the Chart Status field of the navigation data line has taken place by means of the
MORE key.
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 97

b_cp_e32.fm / 10.05.12
4.3 Settings of the Electronic Chart Operating Instructions
7. If the area to be displayed is not the area around own ship's currently existing position, switch into
Planning display mode and specify the centre of the chart excerpt that is to be displayed; see
Section 4.2.4.2 on page 95.
8. Via the range setting as per Section 4.2.2 (page 85), the vector chart cells to be displayed are
selected.
If raster charts are selected:
9. If the area to be displayed is not the area around own ship's currently existing position, switch into
Planning display mode and specify the centre of the chart excerpt that is to be displayed; see
Section 4.2.4.2 on page 95.
10. In accordance with Section 4.2.3 (from page 87 onwards), select and set the raster chart that is to
be displayed.
11. In accordance with Section 4.3.3 (from page 104 onwards), switch the display of the User Chart
Objects on.
12. Information about the chart can be taken from the info box in accordance with Section 3.5.7 (from
page 70 onwards) (index cards Legend, Status and Notes&Diagrams).
13. Notices to Mariners and the Temporary and Preliminary Notices to Mariners can be looked up in the
info box (index card T&P NMs).
4.3.1 Defining the Objects to be Displayed in the Vector Chart
Because the symbols, areas, lines and labellings (collectively called objects in the following) are individ-
ually stored electronically in the vector chart, it is not necessary to display all of the objects all of the time.
Instead, an appropriate and, at the same time, uncluttered display can be achieved by selection of the
display groups required. Furthermore, for a number of objects (e.g. buoys), there is a choice between two
symbol presentations. Irrespective of this, the number of text labels displayed can be influenced.
Display Groups to be Displayed

Object classes (complete sets of similar objects) are grouped into display groups; for example, the
object class Restricted Areas together with the object class Military Practice Areas and other similar
object classes forms the display group Cautionary Areas.
IMO has defined two categories for the selection of the display groups that are to be shown:
- Display Standard: Contains the display groups which are normally necessary for voyage planning
and voyage monitoring.
- Display Base: Consists of the display groups which, as a minimum requirement, definitely have to
be displayed. They are normally not sufficient for safe navigation.
In both cases, further display groups can be displayed.
WARNING:
When the vector charts are being used, it must be ensured at regular
intervals (e.g. after a change of watch) that all of the necessary display
groups are being displayed. Not even the Display Standard setting guar-
antees the completeness of the display.
98 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e32.fm / 10.05.12
Editing the manual ENC update, see page 201.

Editing the User Chart Objects, see page 193.
Marking of events (see page 133; menu see Figure 4-33 on page 134).
Marking of position fix (see page 135; menu see Figure 4-35 on page 136).
Use Line of Position to verify ship´s position, see page 137.
Selection of the chart type
Selection of the display groups to be displayed:
Base: Display of the prescribed minimum scope (+ = plus the display groups
switched on in the Visibility Options > Visibility Groups menu)
Standard: Display of the prescribed standard scope
All: Display of all objects (– = minus the display groups switched off in the
Visibility Groups menu)
Input of the depth contours and safety depth when vector charts are being used,
see page 102
Display options for vector charts, e.g. switching individual display
groups on and off; menu see Figure 4-12
Display options for raster charts; menu see Figure 4-5
Switches the display of the electronic chart on and off.
Switches the display of the User Chart Objects on and off.
Defines whether the User Chart Objects produced by conversion of the maps are to
be displayed also - see page 328.
Specifies the number of texts displayed in the chart area - see page 100.
Fig. 4-11 The Chart menu
Selecting the Display Standard Groups

In the Chart menu, set the Category button to Standard. In the Chart > Visibility Options > Visibility
Groups menu, you can additionally obtain a display of the display groups listed there by switching on the
corresponding buttons (leave the menu by pressing OK). In the Chart menu (and in the Chart Status field
of the navigation data line), a plus sign then appears behind Standard.
Changing the Selection of the Display Groups

- When, in the Chart menu, you set the Category button to Base, all display groups prescribed by
the IMO as a minimum requirement are displayed. In the Chart > Visibility Options > Visibility
Groups menu, you can additionally obtain a display of the display groups listed there by switching
on the corresponding buttons (leave the menu by pressing OK). In the Chart menu, a plus sign then
appears behind Base.
- When, in the Chart menu, you set the Category button to All, all display groups that exist in the
electronic chart are displayed 1). In the Chart > Visibility Options > Visibility Groups menu, you can
switch off the display of the display groups listed there by switching off the corresponding buttons
(leave the menu by pressing OK). In the Chart menu, a minus sign then appears behind All.
1) With the exception of the data quality features. When these too are added if necessary, a plus sign appears behind All.
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 99

b_cp_e32.fm / 10.05.12
Opens the menu ... > Visibility Groups
Paper Chart: The symbols of the paper charts are used.

Simpified: Symbols optimised for screen display are used.
Symbolized: The symbols of the paper charts are used.

Plain: Symbols optimised for screen display are used.
Marking of the objects changed in the ENC:
None: No marking
Last: Changes made by the last Update are marked.
All: All changes are marked.
Within Effective Dates: Objects are displayed only during the
time periods entered in the electronic chart.
Always Visible: Objects are displayed always. An indication
appears in the navigation data line. See page 47.
Objects for which additional text information
exists are marked.
Light sectors are displayed true to scale
Light descriptions are displayed
Non-navigable areas are marked additionally by
means of a diagonal grid.
Isolated dangers situated in shallow water
are displayed
Objects are displayed independently of the
selected chart scale.
Switched-on display groups are displayed additionally in the case of Display

Base and Display Standard .
Switched-off display groups are not displayed in the case of Display All.
Exits the menu without the new settings becoming effective.
Puts the settings of this menu into effect; the menu is exited.
Fig. 4-12 The menus Chart > Visibility Groups and ... > Visibility Groups
Defining the Symbol Presentation

For symbols and areas, it is possible to define whether they should be displayed in the same way as on
the paper charts or whether a simplified set of symbols optimised for display on the screen should be
used. These settings are made in the menu Chart > Visibility Options:
Symbols: Paper Chart and Areas: Symbolized = display as on paper charts,
Symbols: Simpified and Areas: Plain = simplified display.
Setting the Display of Text Labels

In the Chart menu, the number of texts displayed can be specified by means of the Text Labels button:
None: No texts
Few: Only the most important text labels are displayed.
Normal: The text labels that are normally adequate for navigation appear.
All: All text labels contained in the chart appear.
100 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e32.fm / 10.05.12
In this way, the text labels of the chart, of the User Chart Objects, of event markers and of position
fixes are switched on/off and selected.
Temporary Displays
Marking of Official Changes of the ENC: The ENC lines and
symbols changed by official updates can be marked:
- All changed objects are framed by a large, orange star.
- All changed lines are displayed uniformly by bold, orange
dashes.
This setting is made in the Chart > Visibility Options menu by
means of the Highlight Official Updates button:
None: No marking (standard setting).
Last: All objects changed by the last official update are
marked.
All: All objects changed by official updates in the ENC that is present in the CHARTPILOT are
marked.
Temporary Objects
Temporary Objects: For objects which are not present continuously, e.g. buoys which are deployed
seasonally, it is possible to define whether the display is to take place only at the time entered for it in
the electronic chart.
This setting is made in the menu Chart > Visibility Options by means of the Objects Depending on
Date button:
Within Effective Dates: Objects are displayed only during the time periods entered in the electronic
chart.
Always Visible: Objects are displayed independently of the time periods entered. An indication appears
in the navigation data line. See page 47.
Additional information: If the function Extra Info Symbols is switched on, the objects for which addi-
tional information is given in the Data box (of the Info box - see Figure 3-23 on page 71) (behind the
i
label Information: or obtainable by pressing the button Details) are marked with the symbol .
True-to-scale display of the lights: If the function Full Length Light Section is switched on, the length
of the lines of the light sectors corresponds to the nominal range.
Light descriptions: If the text labels are switched on, the display of the light descriptions can be
switched on and off by means of the function Light Descriptions.
Additional marking of the non-navigable area: If the function Shallow Water Pattern is switched on,
the non-navigable shallow water area and mud flat areas are additionally marked by means of diagonal
grid-lines.
Display of isolated danger situated in shallow water: If the function Shallow Water Dangers is
switched on, the isolated danger symbols which are situated in shallow water are displayed.
Non-suppression of objects in the case of small scale: If the function Ignore Scale Minimum is
switched on, chart objects are displayed even in the case of chart scales that normally cause suppression
of the display of these objects.
For a very large number of chart objects, the smallest chart scale is defined at which the object
should still be displayed - see also page 206.
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 101

b_cp_e32.fm / 10.05.12
4.3.2 Defining the Depth Contours to be Displayed
In the display of the vector charts, it is possible to use colour to clearly distinguish the navigable areas
from the non-navigable ones, depending on the draught of the ship. Navigable areas are displayed in
white or grey-white, non-navigable areas in light blue or blue. The boundary between these areas is the
safety contour.
The safety contour is particularly important because it is a basis for the ECDIS Monitoring (see page
104) and for the checking of tracks (see page 185 and 230).
It is also possible both inside the navigable area and inside the non-navigable area to distinguish between
two areas with different depth ranges:
- Within the navigable area, the deep contour differentiates between the adequately deep areas
displayed in grey-white and the deeper areas displayed in white.
- Within the non-navigable area, the shallow contour differentiates between the areas displayed in
light blue which are adjacent to the navigable area, and the even shallower areas displayed in blue.
Disp Chart zero

la y: Safety depth
Shallow contour
Blue
Ligh Safety contour (input value)

t bl ue Safety contour (value existing in the
vector chart)
Grey Deep contour
-w hite
Whit
e
Non-navigable area Navigable area
Fig. 4-13 Diagram of the depth contour system
Spot soundings from individual measurements are displayed more prominently if they project beyond a
particular depth. This depth is set as the Safety Depth.
This situation is shown graphically in Figure 4-13.
Inputting the Safety Depth, Safety Contour and Other Depth Contours
1. In the Chart > Depth Contour menu, input the safety depth (draught plus a reserve of 2 m, for
example).
2. Input the safety contour (value greater than the safety depth).
3. By input of shallow contour (value between 0 and the safety contour), the non-navigable area can
be divided into two areas having different depth ranges.
By input of deep contour (value greater than the safety contour), the navigable area can be divided
into two areas having different depth ranges.
102 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e32.fm / 10.05.12
These relationships are illustrated the Chart > Depth Contour menu by a graphic.
The coloured areas set in this way can only be formed from the depth areas contained in the vector
chart, i.e. from areas representing a certain depth range. Since their minimum and maximum values
are normally formed from depth values that are also commonly utilized in paper charts as depth
contours, such values should also be used for the settings. If a value is entered which is not defined
in the vector chart as an area boundary, the displayed contour runs along the next deeper boundary
that is available in the vector chart. In the Chart > Depth Contour menu, the values that are entered
continue to be displayed.
The input of these four values can also be performed on any other CHARTPILOT and on any
MULTIPILOT of the system. This value is automatically equalised system-wide; the last input is valid.
Exception: A CHARTPILOT configured as a planning station on service level does not distribute nor
receive these settings from other stations.
If, in the menu Chart > Depth Contour, the button Depth Shades is set to Four, each of these four areas
is displayed in a different colour - see also Figure 4-13.
Displaying the Depth Values of the Contours

In the Chart > Depth Contour menu, the depth values for the depth contours being displayed can be
switched on/off by means of the Contour Labels function.
None: No depth values are shown at the depth contours.
Safety: Only the depth values of the safety contour are shown.
All: The depth values of all depth contours up to 100 m that are available in the vector chart are shown. 1)
The boundaries of the chart areas are almost always indicated by means of depth contours. Unlike
what might be expected, these are often not continuous lines. Interruptions in the depth contour
appear as gaps. For the safety contour, these gaps are closed by the program of the ECDIS. This
is done even when depth areas with different boundary depths are used over the range of the safety
depth. In such a case, various depth values are shown along the safety contour. Wherever they are
shown, they correspond to the depth value defined there in the vector chart.
1) Therefore also of the depth contours that are not at the same time shallow contours, safety contours or deep contours.
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 103

b_cp_e32.fm / 10.05.12
4.4 ECDIS Monitoring Operating Instructions
Four: The partial areas defined as shallow contour and deep contour
are displayed in different colours - see page 102.
Two: A colour distinction is made only between navigable and non-navi-
gable areas.
Setting the depth values, see text
Displaying the depth values of the depth contours:

None: No depth values are shown at the depth contours.
Safety: Only the depth values of the safety contour are shown.
All: The depth values of all depth contours up to 100 m that are available in the
vector chart are shown.
Fig. 4-14 The menu Chart > Depth Contour
4.3.3 Switching the display of the User Chart Objects on and off
The display of the User Chart Objects is switched on and off in the Chart menu by means of the function
User Chart Objects.
Because User Chart Objects are independent of the electronic chart used, they can be easily iden-
tified by switching off the display of the electronic chart (by means of Chart Visible in the Chart
menu): the chart objects that are then still being displayed are User Chart Objects.
4.4 ECDIS Monitoring
During the voyage, the ECDIS subsystem of the CHARTPILOT performs a number of nautical checks at
short intervals of time. If defined criteria are infringed, an appropriate alarm is given.
The ECDIS monitoring can be divided into
Track monitoring with the checks of own ship against the System Track (for System Track, see page
229) and monitoring of the depth on the basis of the water depth measured by the navigation echo
sounder. Alarms are selected via the Track Alarms menu, see page 105, and the Depth Alarm, see
page 111.
Chart monitoring with the checks of own ship's position, of the ship’s movement and of the System
Track relative to the vector chart and the User Chart Objects own safety line, danger highlight and own
MARPOL line. Alarms are selected via the Chart Alarms menu (see page 106) and can be activated
independently for own ship and the system track.
104 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e32.fm / 10.05.12
Operating Instructions 4.4 ECDIS Monitoring
The detailed results of the chart monitoring process are collected in a chart alarm list which can be
opened via the button Show Chart Alarm List available in the Alarm List menu. This list is also
opened if a chart alarm is acknowledged by the operator.
So that this ECDIS Monitoring can serve its purpose, namely increasing the nautical safety, the following
prerequisites must be fulfilled:
- The best possible sensors for position and speed must be selected.
- By means of a comparison between the available position sensors, a check must be performed to
ensure that the selected position sensor is supplying correct position data.
- If a vector chart is used, it must be available for the entire navigated area. Otherwise, own safety
lines and danger highlights must exist for the missing areas.
- If a raster chart is used, own safety lines and danger highlights for all potentially dangerous areas
and objects must exist for the entire navigated area.
- The track used must have been successfully checked as per Section 5.1.9.
- The latest relevant nautical warning information received by radio must be taken into account,
possibly by the editing of own safety lines or danger highlights or by manual ENC update. The check
of the track used should, if necessary, be repeated after incorporation of the warning information.
- The safety contour value must have been set correctly; see page 102.
- The alarm criteria must be correctly set - see the following sections.
- The colour reproduction produced by the monitors must be correct. In the case of doubt and once
per year, the monitor performance must be checked in accordance with Appendix A, Section A 3.
4.4.1 Track Monitoring: Own Ship against the System Track
This monitoring is closely related to equivalent functions of the TRACKPILOT; see U S E F U L I N F O R -

MATION.
Course Monitoring
If the difference between the actual course and the course defined by the System Track is greater than
the set (= displayed) course limit, the alarm message COURSE LIMIT EXCEEDED appears. If the ship
is being steered in Track mode, no message appears on the CHARTPILOT.
Settings: The valid course limit is displayed in the Alarm Settings menu.
If a TRACKPILOT is installed, the input of the course limit in the Alarm Settings menu can only be
performed on a radar indicator that is switched to act as the TRACKPILOT Master. If the TRACKPILOT
uses the data of the System Track (PD=On), then on passing a waypoint the course limit that was entered
in the track for this waypoint becomes valid. This value is automatically equalised system-wide; the last
input is valid.
If no TRACKPILOT is installed, no system-wide equalisation takes place for manual input. If a System
Track is defined, then on passing a waypoint the course limit that was entered in the track for this
waypoint becomes valid.
In the Alarm Settings menu, with the Track Alarms button the output of this alarm jointly with the output
of the alarm TRACK LIMIT EXCEEDED can be suppressed for this CHARTPILOT. 1)
Monitoring of the Cross Track Distance

If the deviation of the ship's position from the System Track is greater than the displayed track limit, the
alarm message TRACK LIMIT EXCEEDED appears. If steering is being performed in Track mode, no
message appears on the CHARTPILOT.
The settings/displays take place in a manner similar to those of course monitoring.
1) This setting is not possible if the TRACKPILOT is being operated in Track mode - see USEFUL INFORMATION.
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 105

b_cp_e32.fm / 10.05.12
Alarm on Approaching the present Waypoint

When the probable travelling time needed to reach the wheel over point (WOP) of the next course
manoeuvre defined by the System Track becomes less than the Waypoint Approach value displayed in
the Alarm Settings menu, then in the case of steering with NEXT data the alarm message
APPROACHING WAYPOINT appears. If steering is being performed in Track mode, no message
appears on the CHARTPILOT.
The settings/displays take place in a manner similar to those of course monitoring. In addition, by
switching off the function Waypoint Approach, the output of this alarm can be suppressed for this
CHARTPILOT, even if the other track alarms are not suppressed.
Setting of the chart alarms (if vector charts are used), activating the anchor watch function;
menu see Figure 4-17 on page 109
Switches the acoustic signal for particular alarms on and off generally - see page 348.
Activates the track alarms for the CHARTPILOT.

Display 1) of the set course limit
Display 1) of the set track limit
When track alarms are activated, this activates the APPROACHING WAYPOINT
alarm for this CHARTPILOT.
Display 1) of the APPROACHING WAYPOINT alarm value
Setting of the limit values for the automatic acquisition of AIS targets with output of the
DANGEROUS AIS TARGET alarm (see page 118).
Switching off the automatic acquisition of AIS targets - see page 119
Activates the alarm DEPTH LIMIT EXCEEDED
Setting of the depth value for the alarm DEPTH LIMIT EXCEEDED
Exits the menu. Data that are input have an effect only if the Apply button was
pressed beforehand.
Takes over the data that have been input; the menu is not exited.
1) In the case of systems without TRACKPILOT: input also
Fig. 4-15 The Alarm Settings menu
USEFUL INFORMATION
The Connection with the TRACKPILOT

The monitoring of own ship against the System Track is performed independently of the CHARTPILOT
by the TRACKPILOT as well (if the TRACKPILOT is switched on). During this process, both programs
operate with identical limit-values. The TRACKPILOT always checks against the track which is valid for it.
106 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e32.fm / 10.05.12
This leads to the following conclusions:

- The limit values can be set both via the TRACKPILOT controller and via the track alarms of the
ECDIS Monitoring operating facility. If a limit value is changed on the TRACKPILOT, this causes an
automatic change in the limit value for the ECDIS track alarms and vice versa. The last input is valid.
- Because, with the alarm limit values, the TRACKPILOT also changes its control behaviour, the
setting of the (ECDIS) track alarms also affects the control behaviour of the TRACKPILOT. There-
fore, if there is a TRACKPILOT the setting is possible only on the TRACKPILOT Master.
- If the TRACKPILOT is being controlled with the aid of the Pilot Data contained in the pre-planned
track, then the limit values for the (ECDIS) track alarms are automatically changed as well.
- Both programs generate equivalent alarms. As long as the TRACKPILOT is being operated in
Heading mode or Course mode, the TRACKPILOT performs its checking not against the System
Track but against the track that is set manually (course line on the set course). The tracks against
which checking is being performed simultaneously are therefore different from one another, and both
the alarms generated by the TRACKPILOT and those generated by the ECDIS subsystem appear.
In Track mode, the TRACKPILOT too performs checking against the System Track; in order to avoid
double alarms, only the alarms of the TRACKPILOT are then output. These appear on the TRACK-
PILOT Master only.
4.4.2 Chart Monitoring: Own Ship against Vector Chart and User Chart Objects
For this ECDIS Monitoring function, the program constructs a monitoring sector (ahead sector) with an
adjustable sector width and a length which can be defined in the menu Alarm Settings > Chart Alarms
under Ahead Sector Width or Distance by inputting the distance or under Time by inputting the travel-
ling time respectively. (In the case of input of the travelling time, the length is computed from the currently
existing speed.) The guard sector opens out from own position in the direction of the ship's movement
and is carried along with the ship; see Figure 4-17.
The monitoring is performed both with the guard sector and with own position. 1)
The monitoring takes place for all of the objects which are entered in the electronic chart or are
stored as User Chart Objects. The monitoring is therefore independent of whether the display of
these objects is switched on or off.
It might be an advantage to suppress the guard sector monitoring if the speed is very low. The limit value
for this is entered under Min. Speed for Chart Alarms in the menu Alarm Settings > Chart Alarms. If
the value 0 kn is entered, no suppression takes place.
4.4.2.1 Monitoring on the Basis of a Vector Chart
Warning against Sailing into an Area of Insufficient Depth

When a safety contour (see page 102) or another area with insufficient depth (less than the set safety
contour value) is touched by the guard sector, e.g. an object belonging to the object class Land Area, the
SAFETY CONTOUR NEARBY alarm appears, together with a statement of the class of object touched
and the supplement ahead or inside shown in the Chart Alarm List.
The safety contour is formed from all objects of the object classes Land Area and Intertidal Area and
from the objects of the object classes Depth Area or Dredged Area whose depths are equal to or
the next size greater than the value entered in the menu Chart > Depth Contour under Safety
Contour.
1)
The ship´s own position monitoring is done by searching intersections between the ship contour (defined on service level) and the monitored
chart objects.
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 107

b_cp_e32.fm / 10.05.12
For this monitoring, the cells with the highest precision available are used. The might be different
from the cells being used for display. It is therefore helpful to use another display range for visual
check and to use the Info Box. 1)
The setting of the guard sector length for this monitoring process is performed in the Safety Contour
frame in the menu Alarm Settings > Chart Alarms. There, the output of the SAFETY CONTOUR alarm
can be generally suppressed by means of the Safety Contour Ahead button.
As soon as own ship is situated on the safety contour or on one of the other above-mentioned areas, the
SAFETY CONTOUR alarm likewise appears, with the supplement Inside shown in the Chart Alarm List.
Guard sector moves along with the

Safety contour ship and its direction is always the
same as the ship's direction of
movement (the guard sector is not
displayed on the screen)
Ahead sector width, set in the Chart

Alarms menu
Length was input in the Safety

Contour frame in the Alarm Settings
Ship's position when the SAFETY > Chart Alarms menu
CONTOUR alarm occurs
Fig. 4-16 Generating the Chart Alarm with the Guard Sector (example: SAFETY CONTOUR Alarm)
Warning about Running Over a Potentially Dangerous Object

If the guard sector touches an object from a series of object classes specified in the program, such as
Restricted Area, Fishing Ground, Traffic Separation Zone or Buoys, the alarm OBJECT OF INTEREST
NEARBY appears, with a statement of the class of object that is touched and with the supplement ahead
or inside, shown in the Chart Alarm List. This alarm also appears if objects are touched which belong
to particular object classes and are provided with depth information (e.g. Underwater Rocks, Wrecks) and
whose depth is less than the value entered under Safety Contour in the menu Chart > Depth Contour.
The setting of the guard sector length for this monitoring process is performed in the Object of Interest
frame in the menu Alarm Settings > Chart Alarms. There, the output of the OBJECT OF INTEREST
alarm can be generally suppressed by means of the Object of Interest Ahead button.
If own ship is situated on or within one of the above-mentioned objects, the alarm likewise appears.
1) Info Box: See chapter 3.5.7
108 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e32.fm / 10.05.12
4.4.2.2 Monitoring against User Chart Objects
If an own safety line is touched by the guard sector 1), the alarm USER CHART OBJECT NEARBY
appears, with the supplement Own safety line ahead or crossing. 2)
If an own MARPOL line is touched by the guard sector, the alarm USER CHART OBJECT NEARBY
appears, with the supplement Own MARPOL line ahead or crossing.
If an area belonging to the object class danger highlight is touched by the guard sector, the USER
CHART OBJECT NEARBY alarm appears, with the supplement Danger highlight ahead.
The setting of the guard sector for this monitoring is performed in the User Chart Objects frame in the
menu Alarm Settings > Chart Alarms. There, the output of the USER CHART OBJECT alarm can be
generally suppressed by means of the User Chart Objects Ahead button.
Because the own safety lines and danger highlights are available independently of the chart type,
this part of the ECDIS monitoring process can also be performed if raster charts are used. It is
urgently recommended 3) that, if raster charts are used, the dangerous areas and objects and (for
example) traffic separation zones should be marked by means of own safety lines or danger high-
lights.
If own ship is situated on an area belonging to the object class danger highlight, the alarm USER CHART
OBJECT NEARBY appears, with the supplement Inside danger highlight shown in the Chart Alarm
List.
Own speed below which the chart alarms are not given.
Width of the Ahead Sector in which objects are detected.

Sensitises the SAFETY CONTOUR chart alarm. If Ahead is marked,
alarms are activated for Ahead Sector and Own Ship.
Length of the guard sector used to monitor the safety contour.
The length of the guard sector used to monitor the safety contour; it
is computed from Time and the existing speed.
If On Track is marked, alarms are activated for the system track.
Sensitises the OBJECT OF INTEREST chart alarm.

Length of the guard sector used for monitoring against sailing over particular objects.
The length of the guard sector used for monitoring against sailing over particular
objects; it is computed from Time and from the existing speed.
Sensitises the USER CHART OBJECT chart alarm.
Length of the guard sector used for monitoring against own safety lines,
own MARPOL lines and danger highlights.
The length of the guard sector used for monitoring against sailing over own safety
lines, own MARPOL lines and danger highlights; it is computed from Time and from
the existing speed.
Activates the anchor watch function, see page 111.
Takes over the data that have been input; the menu is not exited.
Exits the menu. Data that are input have an effect only if the Apply
button was pressed beforehand.
Fig. 4-17 The Alarm Settings > Chart Alarms menu
1) On ships with DNV approval, the alarm appears only if the own safety line is touched from within the safe area. In the case of other ships,
this setting can also be made at service level.
2) The supplementing information is shown in the Chart Alarm List.
3) On ships with DNV approval, this is compulsory.
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 109

b_cp_e32.fm / 10.05.12
Repetition of the Alarms

WARNING:
An alarm is repeated if an object belonging to a different object class is
touched or the same object class with a smaller range.
If, for example, the ship is sailing along a line of buoys and is too close to them, the alarm OBJECT OF
INTEREST NEARBY appears only for the first buoy.
4.4.3 Chart Monitoring: System Track against Vector Chart and User Chart Objects
For this ECDIS Monitoring function, a monitoring strip twice as wide as the track limit contained in the
data of the System Track and having a length of 10 to 20 NM is generated by the program around the
currently existing region of the System Track. (For details of this construction, see U S E F U L I N F O R M A -
T I O N .)
With this monitoring strip, the program performs the same checks as with the guard sector in the moni-
toring of own ship's data as per Section 4.4.2. Here too, the alarms SAFETY CONTOUR, OBJECT OF
INTEREST and USER CHART OBJECT 1) are used, but the supplement has the text On Track.
Thus, an alarm or a warning is given 10 NM at the latest ahead of a potentially dangerous area or object
which could be run over when the ship is sailing along the System Track.
Furthermore, the fields of the To WPT number in the data displays Radar/ARPA, Track/Schedule and
Conning are given a yellow background. When these alarms occur, you should definitely initiate a check
of the currently existing part of the System Track and the part lying ahead by clicking with the INFO key
into one of the To WPT number fields mentioned. The same checking routine then takes place as the
one used at the end of the track generation process (see Section 5.1.9).
USEFUL INFORMATION
Details of the Monitoring Strip

In all cases, the currently existing track segment (i.e. the track segment the ship is currently sailing on)
is monitored. If this is longer than 10 NM and has therefore been automatically divided up into subsege-
ments, the currently existing subsegment and the next one are monitored. If the currently existing track
segment is not longer than 10 NM or if the ship is situated on the last subsegment, then the next track
segment too or its first 10-NM subsegment is monitored.
The curent or next segmant may also include the track curve at a waypoint.
The monitoring strip is situated centrally over the track and is twice as wide as the track limit contained
in the data of the System Track. If the track has not been completely edited and a track limit has not been
entered, then only the line between the waypoints is therefore monitored. The width of the monitoring strip
is changing at the same locations on the track as the track limit changes occur.
1) A warning about the own safety line is given only if the own safety line is touched from within the safe area.
110 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e32.fm / 10.05.12
4.4.4 Track Monitoring: Depth Alarm
If the water depth measured by the connected navigation echo sounder is less than the depth alarm value
displayed in the Alarm Settings menu, the alarm DEPTH LIMIT EXCEEDED or DEPTH ALARM is given.
Settings: The input of the limit value takes place on the CHARTPILOT in the Alarm Settings menu. In
systems with radar 1000 series, however, it can also be performed on any other CHARTPILOT and
on any radar indicator of the system, and the value is automatically equalised system-wide; the last
input is valid.
With the button that is available in the Alarm Settings menu, it is possible to define whether an
alarm shall be given on this CHARTPILOT.
4.4.5 Anchor Watch
If the ship is located completely within an anchor watch area defined as a User Chart Object 1), the
CHARTPILOT can monitor the anchoring position.
Activating the Anchor Watch Function

When the ship is located completely within the anchor watch area, activate the anchor watch function by
means of the button Chart > Alarm Settings > Chart Alarms > Anchor Watch Area.
If the display of the User Chart Objects was not switched on previously, it is now switched on through
the activation of the anchor watch function. The borders of the monitored anchor watch area are
displayed as a thick red line.
Alarms
If the ship touches the borders of the anchor watch area and the anchor watch function is activated, the
alarm EXITING ANCHOR WATCH AREA is shown.
Special feature: This alarm cannot be acknowledged. It disappears when the ship is completly
inside the ANCHOR WATCH area again or when the watch alarm function is switched off.
Deactivating the Anchor Watch Function

Before the ship leaves the anchorage, deactivate the anchor watch function with the button Chart > Alarm
Settings > Chart Alarms > Anchor Watch Area.
If this is not done, the alarm EXITING ANCHOR WATCH AREA will be shown on leaving the anchorage.
If the anchor watch function is not deactivated after that, the alarm OUT OF ANCHOR WATCH AREA is
shown as soon as the ship is located completely outside of the anchor watch area. When this alarm is
acknowledged, the anchor watch function is then switched off automatically.
1) For editing the anchor watch area, see page 200.
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 111

b_cp_e32.fm / 10.05.12
4.5 Determination of Positions, Bearings and Ranges Operating Instructions
4.5 Determination of Positions, Bearings and Ranges
For the graphic determination of positions, true bearings and ranges in the chart area, the cursor, two
electronic bearing lines (EBL's), the variable range marker (VRM) and the measurement line are avail-
able. When the ship is getting near to the present waypoint of the System Track (for System Track, see
page 229), you can display the situation relative to this waypoint in enlarged form by calling up the
optional Waypoint Zoom box.
All data relative to own ship are measured or calculated by reference to the CCRP (Consistent
Common Reference Point). The CCRP, by default the conning position on the bridge, is defined for
the ship on service level. See also chapter 1.2
Determining the Position of a Displayed Object

If the cursor is situated in the chart area, the geographical position of the cursor is shown in the Cursor
display.
For many objects, the precise position is also contained in the info box, which you can open by
clicking with the INFO key.
Determining the Bearing from Own Ship to an Object

You can use either the cursor or the EBL:
Bearing Measurement by means of the Cursor
If the cursor is situated in the chart area, the true bearing from own ship to the cursor position is displayed
in the Cursor display.
Bearing Measurement by means of EBL
Set the EBL Mode button to CEN and click it into the display field of EBL1 or EBL2 1). With the cursor,
turn the EBL to the object. In the EBL display field, the true bearing to the object is displayed.
EBL2, here with origin not on

own ship symbol and with
range marker Measurement line with
statement of length and
2.38 NM direction
22.6 °
VRM
Chart Work menu for
EBL1, here with origin on generating/deleting the
own ship symbol measurement line; menu is
opened with Cancel key
EBL2 display and button;
the display is switched on
in the Presentation > Cursor
Display Settings menu.
Cursor display with cursor
position and distance and
EBL1 display and button bearing from own ship to
cursor position
VRM display and button
Fig. 4-18 The elements for determination of position, bearing and range
1) By clicking into the display field, the display of the EBL is switched on automatically. Alternatively, you can also use the EBL1 or EBL2
button beforehand. If EBL2 is to be switched on by means of the button and cursor, the presentation of the EBL2 display must be switched
on in the Presentation > Display Settings menu.
112 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e32.fm / 10.05.12
Operating Instructions 4.5 Determination of Positions, Bearings and Ranges
EBL Mode button with the following possibilities.

EBL button - FIX REL: The EBL moves with own ship; origin of EBL is a distance from
switches the display of the EBL own ship which can be set by means of the cursor after pressing of Set.
on and off. - FIX ABS: The origin of the EBL is a geographical position which can be
(When switch-on occurs, the set by means of the cursor after pressing of Set.
EBL appears with the setting - CEN: The EBL moves with own ship; origin of EBL is own ship.
that it had last.)
After Set has been clicked, the origin of the EBL can be
defined with the cursor (only if the EBL Mode button is
at FIX REL or FIX ABS).
Fig. 4-19 Button and display field of the EBL
Determining the Range from Own Ship to an Object

You can use either the cursor or the VRM:
Range Measurement by means of the Cursor
If the cursor is situated in the chart area, the range between own ship and the cursor position is indicated
in the Cursor display.
Range Measurement by means of VRM
Click into the VRM display field 1) and, by means of the cursor, pull the range marker ring to the desired
size and fix it by clicking. The radius of the range marker ring is continuously displayed in the VRM
display field.
VRM button VRM display

switches the display of the VRM on and off. - Indicates the radius of the VRM. (Value is identical to the
(When switch-on occurs, the VRM appears distance between the EBL origin and the EBL distance
with the setting that it had last.) marker.)
- Must be clicked so that the radius of the VRM can be set by
means of the cursor.
Fig. 4-20 Button and display field of the VRM
Determining the Bearing between Two Objects

You can use either the measurement line or the EBL:
Bearing Measurement by Means of the Measurement Line
1. Position the cursor in the chart area and click with the MORE key. In the context menu Chart Work
which is thus opened, click Set Line (with the DO key).
2. Click the position from which the measurement is to be performed. A line is now drawn between the
clicked point and the cursor position. The bearing and range from the clicked point to the cursor posi-
tion are indicated above the cursor position.
3. By means of a second click, the line (including the numerical values) is fixed.
1) By clicking into the display field, the display of the VRM is switched on automatically. Alternatively, you can also use the VRM button.
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 113

b_cp_e32.fm / 10.05.12
4.5 Determination of Positions, Bearings and Ranges Operating Instructions
Generating a measurement line by Menu appears when cursor is situated in

clicking the positions for origin and chart area and MORE key is pressed
end point of the measurement line Length of measurement line
2.38 NM
Deletes the measurement line 22.6 °
Specifies the position of the own ship symbol Direction of measurement line as seen
on the screen - see page 94 from beginning of measurement line
Manual correction of the system position; see page 152 Measurement line
Cancel the manual correction of the system position
Beginning of measurement line

Opens the Waypoint Zoom box in which, when own ship is
getting near to the present waypoint, its position is displayed
relative to this waypoint in enlarged form - see Figure 4-22.
Only in the case of raster charts: This displays the displayed chart completely; see Figure 4-6 on page 90.
Fig. 4-21 Context menu of the chart area and measurement line
4. The line (including the numerical values) is deleted in the context menu Chart Work by means of
the Clear Line function.
Bearing Measurement by means of EBL
Set the EBL Mode button of the desired EBL to FIX ABS. Then click the corresponding Set button and,
by means of the cursor, click the position from which the bearing measurement is to be performed. Click
the corresponding EBL display field, turn the bearing line to the desired direction by means of the cursor,
and fix it by clicking. In the EBL display field, the true bearing to the object is displayed.
In the procedures described above, the EBL origin is fixed at the set geographical position. If the
EBL origin is to move along with own ship, FIX REL must be used instead of FIX ABS.
Determining the Range between Two Objects

You can use either the measurement line or a combination of EBL and VRM:
Range Measurement by means of Measurement Line
If you determine the bearing between two objects by means of the measurement line (see above), the
range between these objects will also be displayed to you.
Range Measurement by means of EBL
If the VRM and EBL are displayed simultaneously, a range marker appears on the EBL. The range
between the EBL origin and the range marker is equal to the set VRM. Thus, if you position the range
marker on the second object by moving the VRM, the range between the first object (EBL origin) and the
second object is indicated in the VRM display field.
114 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e32.fm / 10.05.12
Operating Instructions 4.5 Determination of Positions, Bearings and Ranges
Displaying the Situation Relative to the Present Waypoint of the System Track in Enlarged Form 1)
Click into the chart area by means of the MORE key; in the context menu Chart Work which then
appears, click onto the WP Zoom Display function. The Waypoint Zoom box then opens (see Figure
4-22).
Name of the present waypoint Distance and bearing to
the present waypoint
Pressing of the arrow keys Right/Left display;

changes the scale in the distance of the vertical side of the triangle:
Waypoint Zoom box (between deviation from the System Track
5 m and 1000 m per grid line) Apex of the triangle: movement direction
Number: Distance between relative to the System Track
two grid lines (horizontally and
vertically) The north direction in the Waypoint Zoom
box corresponds to the north direction in
the chart area.
The grid displayed serves as a visual
Switches the Waypoint Zoom box distance-reference. It is not related to the
to the optimum scale and posi- chart grid.
tions the space between own
ship's symbol and the present
waypoint to the centre of the box. Closes the Waypoint Zoom box
Fig. 4-22 The Waypoint Zoom-Box
If there is a defined System Track, the present waypoint is named there in the top line and the distance
and bearing to the present waypoint is displayed in metres or kilometres. Below that, the deviation from
the System Track and the movement relative to the System Track are displayed in a Right/Left display.
In the graphics area of the Waypoint Zoom box, own ship's symbol and - if the distance is not too great
- the present waypoint and the (segment of the) System Track are displayed with the scale indicated in
the bottom line of the Waypoint Zoom box. The number between the arrow keys refers to the distance
between two grid lines of the underlying measurement-grid.
The alignment of the Waypoint Zoom box graphics corresponds to the alignment of the chart area. The
scale can be changed by means of the arrow keys, independently of the scale in the chart area. If the
distance from the present waypoint is small enough, the optimum scale is set by pressing of the Auto
button, and the space between own ship and the present waypoint is moved to the centre of the graphics.
If the distance is still too great, the smallest possible scale is set and own ship's symbol appears at the
centre of the box.
The Waypoint Zoom box can be shifted and its size can be changed - see page 41.
USEFUL INFORMATION
Switching Off the Display of EBL and VRM

The display is switched off by clicking the EBL button or VRM button.
When the display is switched off, the data of the EBL or VRM remain in storage: when an EBL or the
VRM is switched on, these elements appear with the values that were set last.
Bearing Measurement Errors at High Latitudes

The EBL is always displayed as a straight line. The numerical value displayed is always the direction at
the EBL origin. In the radar projection, this causes significant measurement errors at high latitudes for
bearings over large distances.
1) This optional function is provided for survey purposes and can be activated at service level only.
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 115

b_cp_e32.fm / 10.05.12
4.6 Automatic Identification System (AIS) Operating Instructions
4.6 Automatic Identification System (AIS)
This section deals with the case in which the AIS system can be operated on the CHARTPILOT. If
the AIS system is connected in such a way that it can be operated only on the radar indicators and
- if present - on its own Display and Control Unit, the AIS functions are limited on the CHARTPILOT
to the display of the tracked AIS targets and the Aids-to-Navigation. The operating procedure for this
is described on page 56 and page 63.
In case of a direct interface to the AIS electronics in addition to the ARPA electronics, the Universal Ship-
borne Automatic Identification System (AIS) automatically provides the ship's nautical officers with impor-
tant information about nearby vessels or other relevant objects within the VHF range. Full control of the
AIS is possible by means of the CHARTPILOT then.
The AIS system transmits own ship data cyclically via two defined VHF channels and receives the same
data of the other ships and objects that are equipped with an AIS.
4.6.1 Overview
The AIS is integrated within the navigation system in such a way that it can be operated on all radar indi-
cators and on all CHARTPILOTs of the system. A special switch-over facility is unnecessary for this
purpose; the most recent operating action is applicable. The operating procedure takes place in the menu
Radar/AIS (see Figure 4-23) and its submenus.
AIS Targets and Other AIS Objects

With regard to the objects that can be detected by the AIS and transferred to the CHARTPILOT, a distinc-
tion is drawn between the following:
- AIS targets: ships that are equipped with an AIS system,
- SAR aircraft: search-and-rescue aeroplanes or helicopters,
- Aids-to-navigation: navigation marks, e.g. beacons and buoys,
- Base stations: Equipment for controlling the AIS system, e.g. as a component of a traffic control
centres
The AIS targets and SAR aircraft 1) are handled in the same way as sleeping targets as soon as their
data are received by own AIS. Sleeping targets can be acquired manually or automatically, so that they
can then be tracked by the system - see Section 4.6.2.
All AIS objects can be displayed in the chart area (see page 63). Their data can be displayed by means
of the Info box.
Safety Messages and Long-Range Interrogation

Via AIS, safety messages 2) can be communicated if necessary, which are then passed on by all receiving
systems as a message or an alarm to their display units. The procedures for dealing with the safety
messages received, and for transmitting your own safety messages, are described in Section 4.6.4.
The AIS can also be interrogated about ship data via different equipment. Details of this long-range
interrogation, as it is called, are described in Section 4.6.5.
1) SAR aircraft are treated and displayed in the same way as AIS targets, and are therefore not mentioned again in the following. Their identity
can be determined by means of the Info box.
2) Also called safety related messages in the relevant regulations.
116 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e32.fm / 10.05.12
Operating Instructions 4.6 Automatic Identification System (AIS)
Treatment of the ARPA and AIS targets; for menu, see Figure 4-24 on page 118
Simulation of avoidance manoeuvres (trial manoeuvres); for menu,
see Figure 4-31 on page 131
Switches the transmitter on and off (the reception part remains switched on)
Switches the low power mode on and off - see page 127
Input/display of the own ship data transmitted by own AIS system; for menu, see Figure
4-26 on page 121
Displaying a received safety message - see Figure 4-27
Transmitting a safety message - for menu, see Figure 4-28 on page 123
Long-range interrogation - for menu, see Figure 4-29
Transmitter settings - for menu, see Figure 4-30
Switches the display of the Aids-to-Navigation on and off.
Fig. 4-23 The menu Radar/AIS
Monitoring/Setting of the Own Ship Data Transmitted

Most of the information transmitted from your own AIS system is generated automatically by the
system. However, some items of information (e.g. ship's draught, hazardous cargo, destination, ETA)
have to be defined by the operator - see Section 4.6.3.
IMPORTANT
Because these data are voyage-dependent, their updating should be
assured by including them in the navigational check list.
Setting of the communication technique (channel selection, bandwidth, transmission power etc.) usually
takes place fully automatically. In very rare cases, however, manual setting procedures too might be
necessary for this channel management process. For details, see Section 4.6.6.
4.6.2 Treatment of the AIS Targets
Manual Target Acquisition

With the on-going introduction of the AIS system, the number of sleeping targets will increase rapidly.
Therefore, the display of the sleeping targets will then normally be switched off. However, targets which
are nautically important should continue to be displayed. This is achieved by acquiring these targets,
which thus become tracked AIS targets. As long as the entire processing of the AIS target data is not
switched off, tracked AIS targets continue to be displayed. Furthermore, with the Info box, a much greater
quantity of data can be requested about tracked AIS targets than about sleeping targets.
Manual Acquisition of a Sleeping Target
1. Switching on the display of sleeping targets: In the menu Radar/AIS > Targets, by means of the
button Sleeping Targets.
2. In the menu Radar/AIS > Targets, in the frame AIS Targets click on the button Acquire Target and
then, in the chart area, click on those sleeping targets, one after another, that are to be acquired.
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 117

b_cp_e32.fm / 10.05.12
This function of the cursor is switched off as soon as the cursor leaves the chart area.
Display settings of the ARPA targets, see page 56 ff.
Switches the entire processing of the AIS target data on and off, and therefore
switches on and off the display, collision computation and automatic target
acquisition of the AIS targets.
Switches the display of the sleeping targets on and off.
Manual acquisition of the AIS targets

Deletion of individual AIS targets
Deletion of all AIS targets
Display settings of the AIS targets, see page 119
Display settings of the ARPA targets and AIS targets, see page 59
Fig. 4-24 The menu Radar/AIS > Targets
Automatic Target Acquisition and Collision Computation by the CHARTPILOT

IMPORTANT
Automatic target acquisition cannot take place unless the processing of
the AIS target data is switched on: the function AIS Targets must be
switched on in the menu Radar/AIS > Targets.
Sleeping targets are acquired automatically with the aid of the collision computation: as soon as a
Sleeping target 1) falls below the set CPA and TCPA values, it is automatically acquired, the alarm
DANGEROUS AIS TARGET appears, and the AIS target is displayed as a dangerous target.
The alarm DANGEROUS AIS TARGET also appears if an AIS target that is already being tracked
falls below the set CPA and TCPA values.
If, on falling below the CPA/TCPA values, there are already 40 AIS targets being tracked, the alarm
DANGEROUS AIS TARGET ACQUISITION FAILED appears first of all. In this case, at least one
non-critical AIS target must be deleted. As soon as this has been done, target acquisition and the
output of the DANGEROUS AIS TARGET alarm take place for the new acquired target.
Setting the CPA and TCPA values: In the menu Alarm Settings,
- the largest "closest point of approach" distance that is still to be regarded as dangerous must be
entered behind CPA (Closest Point of Approach), and
- the time between output of the alarm and reaching of the CPA must be entered behind TCPA (Time
to CPA).
1)
SAR aircraft are displayed in the same way as AIS targets, but are recognised as SAR aircraft. Automatic acquisition does not take place
for them.
118 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e32.fm / 10.05.12
In particular cases, it might be required to prevent AIS targets from being acquired by the collision compu-
tation, for example to avoid unnecessary alarms in port or at other berths caused by AIS targets, without
having to change the CPA/TCPA settings. This takes place in the Alarm Settings menu by means of the
Auto AIS Target Acq button.
IMPORTANT
For AIS targets, the collision computation, i.e. also the automatic acqui-
sition and the outputting of the DANGEROUS AIS TARGET alarm, can be
performed only if the following condition is fulfilled:
The necessary condition for the collision computation is that the relative speed between own ship
and the target is known. This must be determined from the speed vector over ground (SOG, COG) trans-
mitted from the AIS target and from the own speed vector over ground. The own speed vector over
ground is mainly determined from the Bottom Track data of the selected speed sensor; otherwise, it is
determined with the aid of the SOG/COG of the selected position sensor
If an AIS target is not transmitting SOG and COG, no collision avoidance computation takes place for this
target. Therefore, the target cannot be acquired automatically. If it is already being tracked, no
DANGEROUS AIS TARGET alarm occurs in the case of a dangerous approach. The symbol of this AIS
target is dashed.
Deletion of Targets, Loss of Target

An acquired AIS target is tracked by the CHARTPILOT until
- it is deleted or
- it is lost (loss of target).
Deletion of AIS targets: In the menu Radar/AIS > Targets, in the frame AIS Targets click on the button
Cancel Target and then, in the chart area, click on those AIS targets one after another that are to be
deleted. This function of the cursor is switched off as soon as the cursor leaves the chart area. By dele-
tion, the AIS targets become sleeping targets again.
Deletion of all AIS targets: In the menu Radar/AIS > Targets, click on the button Cancel All Targets.
A safeguard question then appears; answer Yes to that question. As a result, the tracking of all AIS
targets is stopped and the AIS targets become sleeping targets again.
Loss of target: An AIS target is lost when, for a specified length of time, the AIS system does not receive
any data from that target. The alarm LOST AIS TARGET then appears and the symbol changes its form
accordingly and flashes until the alarm is acknowledged.
True Scaled AIS Targets

Due to the fact that the transmitted AIS data set also contains information
about the system´s position abord the ship, the size of the ship can be
determined.
If additional factors like target distance, display range, monitor´s DPI and
the size of the target itself are within the appropriate parameters, the target
can be displayed in true scale.
The target is then no longer displayed as a triangle like described in Section
3.5.4.11, but the triangle is set into a look-alike shape that represents the
size of the target and the system´s position.
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 119

b_cp_e32.fm / 10.05.12
Lost target,
true scale
Own ship, Tracked Tracked target,

true scale target, as symbol only.
true scale This target is probably too small to be
displayed in true scale relating to the
actual display range and DPI
Fig. 4-25 AIS targets displayed in True Scale
4.6.3 Specifying / Viewing Own AIS Data
Specifying the Data that are to be Transmitted Depending on Speed

The following data are the data which are transmitted cyclically by own AIS system and have to be spec-
ified by the operator.
IMPORTANT
The following data must be entered at the beginning of every voyage and
(if necessary) must be updated during the voyage to ensure correct and
up-to-date information to be sent to other ships.
Input and display of the own AIS data take place in the menu Radar/AIS > Voyage Data - see the illus-
tration. So that the data entered will take effect, the Apply button must be pressed.
120 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e32.fm / 10.05.12
Destination
The time of arrival planned for the specified destination (UTC)
The present draught
Ship type or cargo: Depending on the ship type, after clicking of the Set button it is
possible to choose between several possibilities
Navigation status: Depending on the ship type, after clicking of the Set button it is
possible to choose between several possibilities
Number of persons on board
Puts the changes into effect
Causes resetting to the original data
Fig. 4-26 The menu Radar/AIS > Voyage Data
Viewing Own AIS Data

The data transmitted by own AIS system can be viewed in the Info box, in the index card Targets. For
this purpose, the operator must click on the own ship symbol (by means of the key).
4.6.4 Safety Messages
Receiving Safety Messages

When the AIS system receives a safety message, the alarm NEW SAFETY MESSAGE appears.
The content of the safety message is contained in the menu Radar/AIS > Read Message, in the lower
list.
Above this list, the identification data of the transmitting AIS object 1) are displayed:
MMSI Maritime Mobile Service Identity, definite identification of the AIS system (and hence of the
target)
ID Target marker (i.e., the call sign, if available)
Lat, Lon Position at the transmission instant
BRG, RNG True bearing and range of the AIS object at the transmission instant
1) An AIS object because not only AIS targets (ships) but also Base stations and Aids-to-Navigation can transmit safety messages.
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 121

b_cp_e32.fm / 10.05.12
In the upper list of the menu Radar/AIS > Read Message, the 40 safety messages received last are
listed. In the column New, those messages whose contents have not yet been displayed on this indicator
are marked with an asterisk.
List of stored received messages

After clicking of a message, its content and the data of the
transmitting AIS object are displayed.
Data of the transmitting AIS object at the transmission instant; see text
Content of the message which is marked in the upper list
Fig. 4-27 The menu Radar/AIS > Read Message
Sending a Safety Message

If necessary, a safety message can be sent. This can be a standardised distress message or a non-
standardised, individually entered text. The message can be broadcast generally or it can be sent to a
particular AIS object.
Broadcasting a Message
1. Open the menu Radar/AIS > Send Message. If necessary, change the setting of the top button from
Addressed to Broadcast.
2. If a standardised distress message is to be sent, click on the button Message Type and then click
on the desired message type. The content of the message is then displayed.
or:
If an individual message is to be sent, User Defined must be selected as the message type. The
message can then be entered in the input field situated below that.
3. The message is sent via the AIS system by pressing the Send button.
122 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e32.fm / 10.05.12
Broadcast: The message is broadcast generally

Addressed: The message goes to the target whose MMSI number is entered.
MMSI of the addressee of the message (input and display field)
Target marker (call sign) of the addressee
This makes it possible to select the addressee by clicking in the PPI
Selection of the message type:

New Message, User Message 1 ... 5: Individual text, which can be edited in the message field
Message field containing the content of the message
This sends the message
Resets all settings and deletes a message that has already been edited
Fig. 4-28 The menu Radar/AIS > Send Message
Sending a Message to a Particular AIS Object

1. Open the menu Radar/AIS > Send Message. If necessary, change the setting of the top button from
Broadcast to Addressed.
2. Either enter the MMSI number of the addressee in the MMSI field
or:
Switch on the function Address to Target, and in the chart area click on the AIS target that is to
receive the message.
3. If a standardised distress message is to be sent, click on the button Message Type and then click
on the desired message type. The content of the message is then displayed.
or:
4. If a freely composed, individual text is to be transmitted, the following possibilities exist:
a) Click on the button Message Type and then click on message type New Message and edit the
new message with the virtual keyboard.) 1)
b) Click on the button Message Type, and by selecting User Message 1 ... 5 call up the message
that was stored last under the selected designation. Each message can be altered with the aid
of the virtual keyboard after clicking. The message is stored during transmission.
5. The message is sent via the AIS system by pressing the Send button.
1)
The AIS does not allow the transmission of all characters that are usually present on the alphanumeric keyboard. The characters that
cannot be transmitted cannot be entered.
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 123

b_cp_e32.fm / 10.05.12
4.6.5 Long-Range Interrogation
The AIS system can be requested by other equipment, e.g. SatCom equipment, to transmit own ship
data. Because this request can be made over longer distances than the VHF range, it is called long-
range interrogation.
The requesting station specifies the data that are to be requested. 1)
Reply Modes
The reaction of the AIS system to long-range interrogation is defined by the selected Reply mode. The
task of setting the Reply mode is performed in the menu Radar/AIS > Interrogation by means of the
button Reply Mode:
OFF: The AIS system does not react to the request.
MANUAL: When interrogation occurs, the AIS INTERROGATION alarm appears with the supplement
Reply requested. The reply is sent when, in the menu Radar/AIS > Interrogation, the Reply button
is pressed 2).
AUTO: When interrogation occurs, the reply is sent automatically. For information, the alarm AIS INTER-
ROGATION appears (without a supplement and without an acoustic signal).
For setting the Reply mode - see text
Here, the last 10 incoming interrogations are listed with the MMSI of the interro-
gating station and with the time and date of the interrogation.
R: The interrogation has been answered.
By clicking, the data of the interrogation are shown in the lower display.
MMSI and name of the requesting station
Content of the interrogation, requested data
Triggers the reply for the interrogation whose data are displayed in the
lower list
Fig. 4-29 The menu Radar/AIS > Interrogation
1)
Such requests can come from shore stations, e.g. from shipping companies, traffic control centres or government offices, but not from the
AIS systems that are normally carried on board.
2)
The Reply button triggers the reply to the interrogation whose data are displayed in the menu. If, after a AIS INTERROGATION alarm, the
menu is opened, the data of this interrogation are displayed.
124 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e32.fm / 10.05.12
4.6.6 AIS Settings
Automatic Setting Procedure

The AIS system cannot function unless all AIS systems communicate on the same VHF channels and
unless the communication bandwidth and the transmission level are correctly set. The settings needed
for this are normally made automatically as described in the following.
It is also possible to make a setting manually, but this should only be done in exceptional cases after
the ship's command personnel have been informed accordingly, see page 126.
VHF channels 2087 and 2088 are used worldwide for the two AIS channels.
As default values, AIS channel A uses the VHF channel 2087 the AIS channel B uses the VHF channel
2088, and for both channels, the bandwidth setting is Auto, and transmission is performed with power
level High.
In particular geographical regions or situations, it is necessary to deviate from these settings. The neces-
sary values are received via the AIS channels. 1)
These data also contains the information about the region in which these settings are to be used,
including the transition zone surrounding that region.
The switch-over is performed automatically when the ship is
Sees
located in the transition zone. This is done in the following steps:
A, B, D, E, F
- As soon as the ship reaches the boundaries of the transition
zone, one AIS channel is set to the different VHF settings Sees Sees
B, C, D C, D, F
(with the other AIS channel remaining unchanged) and the
alarm Channel management changed is shown. As a result,
the targets situated inside and on either side of the transition
zone are now seen 2) and the ship is also seen by these A C E
targets; see the diagram.
- On leaving the transition zone, the second AIS channel is also
switched over to the different VHF settings. B D F
The general effect is that a ship which is not located in the transi-
tion zone does not see any targets located behind the transition
zone.
Region with Area with
different VHFTransition default VHF
settings zone settings
Viewing of Data Sets for the AIS Settings
The data set currently being used by the AIS system is displayed when the menu Radar/AIS > Channel
Management is opened. In the bottom line, the status of the displayed data (e.g. Data set used) appears
beside the Next button:
Before DATA SET:
- (no entry): Default values
- AIS: Data have been received via one of the VHF transceivers.
- DSC: Data have been received via the DSC transceiver.
- MAN: Data have been entered manually.
After DATA SET:
- USED: The data currently being used by the AIS system
- NOT USED: Data are currently not being used by the AIS system.
- EDITED: The displayed data have been altered manually but have not yet been stored.
1) However, these data can also be transferred by DSC. The AIS electronics unit also has a DSC receiver, so that even AIS electronics units
which do not have their AIS channels set correctly can receive these data.
2) When the channel management is used, this usually changes the VHF channels. This example refers to such a change
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 125

b_cp_e32.fm / 10.05.12
In the line SELECT, there is a display for channel A and channel B, indicating whether the transmitter
(TX) and/or the receiver (RX) is switched on.
If there are any more data sets, they can be called up by means of the button Next. 1)
Entering a Data Set Manually

The displayed values can be altered (but do not alter them unless expressly instructed to do so by an
authorised person). A data set with the altered data is stored by pressing the Apply button.
Only data sets for regions up to a distance of a few hundred NM can be entered.
Settings of a transceiver (channel A):

TX: Defines whether transmission takes place via channel A.
RX: Defines whether reception takes place via channel A.
Channel No.: Number of the VHF channel
Bandwidth: Transmission/reception bandwidth
Settings of the second transceiver (channel B):

Same as channel A
Transmission level
Geographical area in which the settings take effect. It is bounded by lines of longi-
tude and latitude. The north-east and south-west corners must be entered.
Transition zone in which the old setting is still retained

Status of the displayed data (see text)
Switch-over to further stored data sets
Puts the changes into effect
Resets to the original data
Fig. 4-30 The menu Radar/AIS > Channel Management
Switching Off the Transmitter of the AIS Electronics Unit

If necessary, the transmitting of your own AIS data can be completely prevented by switching-off the func-
tion AIS Transmitter On.
CAUTION
The transmitter should not be switched off except in justified exceptional
cases, because when it is switched off, own ship can no longer be
detected as an AIS target by other ships and cannot participate in the
communication between ships, equipped with AIS.
The status TRANSMITTER ON/OFF is stored and can also be called up after an accident at sea.
1) In addition to the default values, eight data sets can be managed.
126 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e32.fm / 10.05.12
Operating Instructions 4.7 Navigational Information from Telex (NAVTEX)
Reducing the Transmission Power when Loading and Unloading Tankers

During the loading and unloading of tankers, the transmission power of the AIS transmitter must be
reduced for safety reasons. This Low Power mode is only admissible by regulation for this particular situ-
ation. The corresponding button is therefore only provided on tankers, and the Low Power mode can only
be switched on when the navigational state AT ANCHOR or MOORING is entered in the menu Radar/
AIS > VOYAGE DATA and the speed is below 3 Kts.
In the menu Radar/AIS this setting is made by switching-on the function AIS LOW POWER MODE.
On completion of the loading procedure, the Low Power mode must be switched off again by setting the
button LOW POWER MODE to OFF.
If the operator forgets to deactivate the Low Power mode, the transmitter is automatically switched
to normal power when AT ANCHOR or MOORING is no longer entered as the navigational state, or when
the speed exceeds 3 kts.
4.7 Navigational Information from Telex (NAVTEX)
Subjects of this Section:

The most important characteristics of the NAVTEX system
Displaying and managing received NAVTEX messages
Drawing geographical objects received by means of NAVTEX messages
4.7.1 NAVTEX Summarised Briefly
The NAVTEX receiver is a Narrow Band Direct Printing (NBDP) device operating on the frequency 518
kHz (some equipment can also operate on 490 and 4209.5 kHz). It is a vital part of the Global Maritime
Distress and Safety System (GMDSS).
NAVTEX automatically receives Maritime Safety Information such as Radio Navigational Warnings,
Storm/Gale Warnings, Meteorological Forecasts, Piracy Warnings, Distress Alerts, etc. (full details of the
system can be found in IMO Publication IMO-951E - The NAVTEX Manual). Each message begins with
a start of message function (ZCZC) followed by a space then four B characters. The first, (B1), identifies
the station being received, the second, (B2), identifies the subject i.e. Navigational Warning, Met Fore-
casts, etc., and the third and fourth, (B3 + B4), form the consecutive number of the message from that
station. This is followed by the text of the message and ends with an end of message function
(NNNN).The NAVTEX system broadcasts COASTAL WARNINGS that cover the area from the Fairway
Buoy out to about 250 nautical miles from the transmitter; the transmissions from some transmitters can
be received out to 400 nautical miles and even further in unusual propagational conditions.
4.7.2 NAVTEX on CHARTPILOT
Modern NAVTEX receivers include an INS port 1) which is programmed to transfer the received message
and its alarm messages to any external system. The Radar Series 1100 can be connected to the
NAVTEX INS port whereby these text messages and alarms can be made available on the radar system
and any connected CHARTPILOT.
1) Technically, the INS port is a serial interface according to IEC 61162.
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 127

b_cp_e32.fm / 10.05.12
4.7 Navigational Information from Telex (NAVTEX) Operating Instructions
For identification of the received messages the above mentioned B-characters are combined to a
message identifier (ID) shown in the list of NAVTEX messages in the NAVTEX window.
To open this list, select Tree, NAVTEX or MENU, NAVTEX (See menu on next page).
The NAVTEX window is opened automatically when the NEW MESSAGE warning is acknowledged.
On the CHARTPILOT you can take over one or more geographical position data, which are thereafter
shown as points, lines or areas in the chart.
These geographical NAVTEX objects are only available on the CHARTPILOT which was used to create
them. That means, that the objects are not distributed between the CHARTPILOTs or to radar indi-
cators.
4.7.3 Displaying received NAVTEX messages
New NAVTEX Message

When the NAVTEX electronics unit receives a new message, the
Alarm NAVTEX NEW MESSAGE appears only if the button
NAVTEX Alarms is activated. To activate this alarm function, click
on the button NAVTEX Alarms in the NAVTEX window.
Even when the NAVTEX alarms are switched off, incoming
messages are stored in the CHARTPILOT radar and can be called
up at any time. 1)
Displaying/Printing Incoming MESSAGES

Up to 200 messages that have arrived during the last 60 hours can
be displayed at any time:
1. Click on the buttons Tree and NAVTEX one after the other.
The NAVTEX list opens. Up to 200 messages that have arrived
last are listed:
ID: Number of the message from which the
message came.
New: Messages that have not yet been read
are provided with an asterisk *.1)
Date and Time: The date and time of reception.
2. With Print All all messages can be printed out on the printer
connected to one of the CHARTPILOTS.
3. Mark the desired message by clicking to read it.
1) In case the NAVTEX Alarms are switched off, new incoming messages are stored, but no longer marked as NEW. If messages are to be
unmarked, (the asterisk * is to be deleted), switch off the NAVTEX Alarms button; this will also cancel the NEW MESSAGE alarm and
remove it from the alarm list.
128 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e32.fm / 10.05.12
Operating Instructions 4.7 Navigational Information from Telex (NAVTEX)
4.The NAVTEX MESSAGE dialogue is opened, and the

marked message is displayed:
Below the identification data of the station, the received text
message is listed in the frame.
With CANCEL, the dialogue is closed.
5.With Print the contents of the message can be printed out on
the printer connected to one of the CHARTPILOTS.
6.With Drop Position geographical positions can be drawn on
the displayed chart. (See next chapter).
For details about the NAVTEX alarms and warnings refer to chapter 9.
4.7.4 Extracting Geographical Data from NAVTEX Messages
Messages sometimes contain geographical information which may

be desired to be displayed in the electronic chart. In order to take
over these data, open the relevant message as described before
and proceed as follows:
1. Mark one or more Lat/Lon data by moving the trackball cursor
to the end of the position string and clicking DO.
2. Click on Drop Position, whereby another dialogue opens, in

which it is neccessary to check the correctness of the inter-
preted position data one by one. Check and -if neccessary-
correct the data step by step. It is possible to use the ASCII-
keyboard of the CHARTPILOT or the virtual keyboard to enter
values.(See Section 3.4)
3. Thereafter click on the Apply button so that the system stores
and displays these positions as a point object, a line or an area.
4. Graphical objects generated in this way can be verified by
clicking on Show in Chart, whereby the CHARTPILOT will be
switched over to planning mode and the chart area wil be
centered at the object drawn in the chart in step 3.
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 129

b_cp_e32.fm / 10.05.12
4.8 Trial Manoeuvres Operating Instructions
As long as the NAVTEX geographic object is shown in the chart, it can be clicked with the INFO
button. Then, the message can be read again. In the window which is opened thereafter the object can
be deleted by a click on the Delete in Chart button.
INFO
DO
Useful Information:
The messages concerning an object are stored for 60 hours, thus, the objects themselves are stored
for 60 hours and will be deleted thereafter.
The maximum number of stored messages and geagraphical objects is limited to 200.
4.8 Trial Manoeuvres
You can obtain a graphic display of the effect of a simulated manoeuvre of own ship relative to the
displayed targets (ARPA and AIS targets) and relative to the safety contour (and to the other elements
displayed in the electronic chart).
During the trial manoeuvre display, the own ship symbol is displayed at the existing position. The target
symbols are moved away from their existing positions in accordance with the simulated manoeuvre
instant. The target vectors too correspond to the simulated situation and not to the existing one.
Switching On the Trial Manoeuvre Display

The trial manoeuvre display is switched on by pressing the Trial Manoeuvre button in the Radar/AIS
menu.
130 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e32.fm / 10.05.12
Operating Instructions 4.8 Trial Manoeuvres
Switching on produces the following settings:

- The course and speed vectors of the targets are displayed.
- The vectors are displayed as relative vectors, independently of the display mode (the display mode
is not changed).
- The past plots of the targets are not displayed.
- The Trial Manoeuvre menu appears.
- In addition, the Trial Course Line appears. This is a black line which initially points in the course
direction, starting from the own ship symbol.
- In addition, the own ship symbol of the trial manoeuvre is displayed. This is a thinly drawn own ship
symbol which is initially situated under the own ship symbol, points in the direction of the set course,
and therefore cannot yet be distinguished from the latter (if the drift angle is small).
- In the lower area of the display, a large, flashing is displayed to draw attention to the fact that
the trial manoeuvre display is switched on and that the symbols and vectors of the targets are there-
fore no longer being displayed in accordance with the actual existing situation.
Display of a Trial Manoeuvre

In the Trial Manoeuvre menu, you can now simulate the manoeuvre data:
- with Trial Course, the set course onto which the ship is steered by the manoeuvre,
- with Trial Speed, the speed at which the ship will sail after the manoeuvre,
- with Trial Delay, the time up until the start of the manoeuvre.
Setting of the simulation data is best performed with the arrow keys, because then the display of the
trial manoeuvre changes continually as the set values change.
Simulated set course after the trial manoeuvre
Simulated own speed after the trial manoeuvre
Time up until the trial manoeuvre
Ends the trial manoeuvre
Fig. 4-31 The Radar/AIS > Trial Manoeuvre menu
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 131

b_cp_e32.fm / 10.05.12
4.8 Trial Manoeuvres Operating Instructions
Targets get
relative vectors
Trial Course Line
Identification of
trial manoeuvre
display
Scenario before switch-on of the trial manoeuvre The same scenario after switch-on of the trial
display manoeuvre display
(True Motion mode with true vector presentation) (The right-hand target is on a collision course.)
The set course that was

set with Trial Course
Trial Course Line
Position of the
trial manoeuvre
No danger of collision
(vector indicates
sufficiently large Distance to the
passing distance trial manoeuvre,
relative to Trial as set with
Manoeuvre position) Trial Delay
The same scenario after setting of a trial manoeuvre
which would prevent a collision
Fig. 4-32 Display of a Trial Manoeuvre
Interpretation of the Display:

The own ship symbol continues to indicate own ship's existing position, and it points ahead.
On the route up to the manoeuvre that was set by means of Trial Delay, the Trial Course Line repre-
sents the existing course; at the position at which the manoeuvre would take place, the Trial Course
Line bends and turns onto the course that was set by means of Trial Course. The line therefore approx-
imately represents the track that the ship would sail along if the manoeuvre were actually performed.
The arc along which the ship would sail in the manoeuvre is not displayed; the manoeuvre charac-
teristics of the ship are not taken into account. If the manoeuvre is actually to be executed, it would
have to be started at a suitably earlier instant.
The own ship symbol of the trial manoeuvre is displayed at the position of the simulated manoeuvre.
It points in the direction of the simulated set course.
132 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e32.fm / 10.05.12
Operating Instructions 4.9 Marking an Event
The targets are displayed at the positions which they would occupy at the instant of the simulated
manoeuvre if their existing courses and speeds were maintained.
The course and speed vectors of the targets are displayed relative to the own ship symbol of the trial
manoeuvre. They refer to the course that was set by means of Trial Course and to the speed that was
set by means of Trial Speed.
Consequently:
If the vector of a target points towards the own ship symbol of the trial manoeuvre, the execu-
tion of the trial manoeuvre would put own ship onto a collision course relative to this target.
For the same scenario, Figure 4-32 shows the display before and after switch-on of the trial manoeuvre
display and after the setting of a trial manoeuvre.
Switching Off the Trial Manoeuvre Display

Switching off is done by pressing the Cancel button situated in the Radar/AIS > Trial Manoeuvre menu.
4.9 Marking an Event
If necessary, own position or some other position can be marked in the chart area by means of the
(orange) event marker . An event can be provided with a remark. More than one event marker can be
set. The chart area can be adjusted at any time so that one of the events forms the centre.
Event markers can optionally be edited on all of the system. There is only one set of event markers in
the system; edited data are automatically distributed system-wide, i.e. stored on all hard disks and
displayed when required.
Marking an Event
1. Press the function key F5, or else press the Drop Event button in the Chart > Events menu. In the
Drop Event menu which then opens up, own position and the time of the set event are displayed.
2. The event position can now be changed by switching on the Pick function in the menu and clicking
the desired position in the chart area. The clicked position is now displayed under Geographic Posi-
tion.
3. If necessary, directly enter a short remark about the event under Remark, or, after pressing of the
Select button, mark the remark in the resulting Event Remark Selection menu and press OK.
4. In the Chart > Events menu, store the event by pressing the OK button and close the menu. The
event marker is now displayed.
If Text Labels is switched on in the Chart menu, the remark entered also appears beside the
event symbol in the chart area.
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 133

b_cp_e32.fm / 10.05.12
4.9 Marking an Event Operating Instructions
Sets the event. Opens the Drop Event menu (see Figure 4-34), with
which the event marker is set at another position and a remark
about the event can be entered.
Opens a menu in which it is possible to edit event remarks, which can

then be called up at any time.
List of stored events

(The time statement is the stored time in UTC)
Centres the chart area on the event marked in the list of stored events and
switches to Planning display mode
Deletes the events marked in the list of stored events
Fig. 4-33 The Chart > Events menu
Pick function switched off: own position is

the event position
Event position Pick function switched on: click the event

position in the chart by means of the cursor
Date and time of the event
Enter a remark, e.g. by calling up

remarks which have already been
edited.
Mark the
Stores the event and remark
closes the menu
Closes the menu without an
event being stored.
Closes the menu

Enters the marked
remark and closes the
menu
Fig. 4-34 The Drop Event menu
134 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e32.fm / 10.05.12
Operating Instructions 4.10 The Marking of Position Fixes
Adjusting the Chart Area so that an Event Forms the Centre

In the Chart > Events menu, mark the desired event in the list, and press the Show in Chart button. The
Planning display mode is then switched on and the chart excerpt is adjusted so that the event is situated
at the centre.
Editing Event Remarks which can be Called Up

In the menu Chart > Events, press the button Edit Remarks List, edit the remark in the input field, and
add the remark to the list by pressing the Add button.
You can delete remarks in the list by marking them and then pressing the Delete button.
Putting an event remark into the list avoids the need to edit that event remark again, since the
remarks entered in the list can be called up in the menu Event Remark Selection when an event
marker is being set.
Deleting Events
In the Chart > Events menu, mark the desired events in the list, and press the Delete button.
Management of the Event Data

Event markers are not entered in electronic charts but are stored independently of them in a file 1).
4.10 The Marking of Position Fixes
Position fixes can be marked in a manner similar to the entering of positions in the paper chart. They are
marked with the (orange) symbol . Procedures and possibilities are largely the same as for the setting
of event markers.
Position fixes can optionally be edited on all of the system. There is only one set of position fixes in the
system; edited data are automatically distributed system-wide, i.e. stored on all hard disks and displayed
when required.
Entering a Position Fix

1. In the menu Chart > Position Fixes, press the button Drop Position Fix. In the Drop Position Fix
menu which then opens up, own position and the time of the set position fix are displayed.
2. The position of the position fix can now be changed by switching on the Pick function in the menu
and clicking on the desired position in the chart region. The clicked position is now displayed under
Geographic Position.
3. By means of the button Position Finding Method, select the method of position-determination.
The objects before the dash are the short form with which the symbol can be provided on the
screen; see step 4.
4. In the menu Chart > Position Fixes, store the position fix by pressing the OK button and close the
menu. The position fix symbol is now displayed.
1) together with the position fixes and the areas edited as User Chart Objects; for the handling of the file, see Section 8.1.
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 135

b_cp_e32.fm / 10.05.12
4.10 The Marking of Position Fixes Operating Instructions
If, in the Chart menu, the Text Labels function is 1342 time of the fix
switched on, the time of the fix (zone time) appears (hours and minutes)
above the position fix symbol in the chart region, and the
method of position-determination appears in the short dG position-determination
form under the symbol. (short form)
Setting the Chart Region as the Centre by Means of a Position Fix

In the menu Chart > Position Fixes, mark the desired position fix in the list and press the Show in Chart
button. This causes switch-on of the Planning display mode, and the chart excerpt is automatically set in
such a way that the position fix is situated at the centre.
Deleting a Position Fix
In the menu Chart > Position Fixes, mark the desired position fixes in the list and press the Delete
button.
Managing the Position Fix Data
Position fixes are not entered in electronic charts; instead, they are stored independently of them in a
file 1).
Sets the position fix. Opens the Drop Position Fix box, with which the position fix symbol can
be set at another position and the method of position-determination can be entered.
If the Pick function is switched off: Own posi-

tion is the position of the position fix
If the Pick function is switched on: By means

of the cursor, click on the position of the
position fix in the chart region
Position of the position fix
Date and time of the position fix
Select the method of position-determination.

On the left, the short form is entered, which
appears as a text label
Stores the position fix and closes the menu
Closes the menu without any

List of the stored position fixes storing of a position fix.
(the time statement is the stored time in UTC)
Centres the chart region on the position fix which is marked in the list of
stored position fixes, and switches over to the Planning display mode.
Deletes the position fixes which are marked in the list of stored position fixes
Fig. 4-35 The menus Chart > Position Fixes and ... > Drop Position Fix
1) together with the Events and the areas edited as User Chart Objects; for handling of the file, see Section 8.1.
136 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e32.fm / 10.05.12
Operating Instructions 4.11 Using Lines of Position
4.11 Using Lines of Position
In order to verify or determine the ship´s position, there are three possibilities using the Lines of Position
function. They make use of fixed objects in the vicinity of the ship which are also plotted in the chart, for
example a light-house. The three possibilities are:
Known Bearing and Range

From the ship´s bridge, the true bearing φ and range r of the lighthouse are taken. Both values are
entered into the CHARTPILOT and are then calculated with the result of the actual position of the ship.
Known position of the light-house
r φ
Cross Bearing
From the ship´s bridge, the true bearings φ1 and φ2 of two fixed objects are taken. The intersection point
of those two base lines is the actual position of the ship. If the two base lines intersect in a rather acute
or flat angle, a third object with its base line can be used.
Known position of light-house #1
φ1
φ2 Known position of light-house #2
Optional:
φ3
Optional: Known position of light-house #3
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 137

b_cp_e32.fm / 10.05.12
4.11 Using Lines of Position Operating Instructions
Transferred Base Line

The ship is sailing with known and constant speed and course. The true bearing φ1 of one fixed object is
taken and entered into the system. After a while the true bearing φ2 of the same object is taken again.
Due to the fact that the ship´s position has changed, the true bearing does now have another value. The
intersection point of the new base line (2) and the transferred base line (1) is the actual position of the
ship.
Known position of light-house
Transferred base line 1
Base line 2
φ2
Base line 1
φ1 Ship´s position at time t + Δt.
Ship´s position at time t.
138 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e32.fm / 10.05.12
The Lines of Position-menue
Three tabs for possible Lines of Position
Pick the position of the fixed object from the chart. The position is
then displayed below
Indication of the object´s position. Alternatively, an object´s position

can be entered here manually
Enter the bearing of the known object
Enter the range of the known object, if applicable
Choose whether the time the known object has been

acquired is the actual time or enter the time manually
Select here if the data are relevant for this LOP or if they shall be
transferred from another LOP.
Click to use data of acquired object
Click to reset data. See Useful Information below
Indication of the calculated ship´s position
Sets the position fix. See Section 4.10. (Button is only active if data
has been entered in the fields above). See also important remark
below
Use calculated position data for Dead Reckoning.
(Button is only active in case the position sensor is set to Estimated.
See Section 4.12.3. Further on, it must be configured in several
entries on service level, that Dead Reckoning can be activated.This
is especially dependant on the settings for the use of sensors.)
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 139

b_cp_e32.fm / 10.05.12
Important remark on Drop Position Fix
Position fix
Base line #2 Base line #1
1342
LOP 1
1342
LOP 2
1342 EP
After having clicked on Drop Position Fix, the calculated position is displayed on the screen by means
of a symbol and additional information. See Section 4.10 for details.
It may happen that the symbol of the position fix is not displayed at the same position as the
intersection of the base lines.
This is not a fault! The base lines are displayed as straight lines within a mercator projection. But in
reality, they should be displayed as slight curves, with a radius depending on the actual geographical
position of the ship. The calculation of the Drop Position Fix takes this fact into account and may
deliver a slightly different position than the graphical method does.
The more northern or southern the ship´s position is, the more different are the calculated and graph-
ically determined positions.
Performing a Position Fix using known Bearing and Range

1. Choose an object which can be seen from the ship´s bridge and that is also detectable on radar.
2. Open the Lines of Position dialogue. Click on LOP 1 and on Reset to clear all data. Then, click
Pick Position. In the chart, locate the desired object and click on it. The position data of the object
will be displayed 1).
3. Take and enter the Bearing and Distance data of the object that has been acquired.
4. Choose whether the time of the acquisition of the known object is the actual time or enter the time
manually.
5. Click on Apply. The calculated Position Fix will be displayed in the LOP-window. It is now possible
to display the calculated position fix in the chart by clicking on Drop Position Fix. See Section 4.10
for details.
If the position sensor is set to Estimated, the position fix can be used as new origin for the
dead-reckoning. Click on Use for DR Origin to take over the position fix.
Performing a Position Fix using Cross Bearing

1. Choose two objects which can be seen from the ship´s bridge.
2. Open the Lines of Position dialogue. Click on LOP 1 and on Reset to clear all data. Then, click
Pick Position. In the chart, locate the desired object and click on it. The position data of the object
will be displayed 2).
1)
Alternatively, the position of the object can be entered manually into the Lat / Lon fields. If you wish to do
so, do not klick on Pick Positon.
140 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e32.fm / 10.05.12
3. Take and enter the Bearing data of the object that has been acquired.
4. Choose whether the time of the acquisition of the known object is the actual time or enter the time
manually.
5. Click on Apply.
6. Open the tab for LOP 2 and repeat the action done for the first object, but use the second one !
7. If neccessary, a third base line can be added: Open the tab for LOP 3 and repeat the action done
for the first two objects, but use the third one !
8. After having clicked on Apply, red baselines are displayed in the chart. The calculated Position Fix
will be displayed in the LOP-window. It is now possible to display the calculated position fix in the
chart by clicking on Drop Position Fix. See Section 4.10 for details.
If the position sensor is set to Estimated, the position fix can be used as new origin for the
dead-reckoning. Click on Use for DR Origin to take over the position fix.
2)
so, do not klick on Pick Positon.
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 141

b_cp_e32.fm / 10.05.12
Performing a Position Fix using Transferred Base Line

1. Choose an object which can be seen from the ship´s
bridge and that will be visible for at least as long as the
position determination is supposed to take.
2. Open the Lines of Position dialogue. Click on LOP 1
and on Reset to clear all data. Then, click on Pick Posi-
tion. In the chart, locate the desired object and click on
it. The position data of the object will be displayed 1).
3. Take and enter the Bearing data of the object that has
been acquired.
4. Choose whether the time of the acquisition of the known
object is the actual time or enter the time manually.
5. Click on Apply. The base line will be displayed in the
chart.
6. Let the ship sail until the bearing of the object has
changed significantly. Make sure the course and speed
of the ship does not change !
7. Open the tab for LOP 2, take the new bearing of the
object (its position is already displayed) and enter the
value into Bearing 2). Click on Apply. The base line will
be displayed in the chart.
8. Choose the LOP from which the transferred base line is
to be taken. Select the appropriate LOP with the Mode
selector. In the described case, LOP 1 must be selected,
because LOP 1 is the base line that must be transferred
to the new position.
9. Click on Apply. The transferred base line will be
displayed in the chart. and the calculated Position Fix
will be displayed in the LOP-window. It is now possible to
display the calculated position fix in the chart by clicking
on Drop Position Fix. See Section 4.10 for details.
If the position sensor is set to Estimated, the posi-
tion fix can be used as new origin for the dead-reck-
oning. Click on Use as DR Origin to take over the position fix.
1)
so, do not klick on Pick Position.
2)
Do not click on Pick Position this time ! This would mean that another object than the first one is to be used. So, this would lead back to
the cross-bearing mode !
142 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e32.fm / 10.05.12
Useful Information:
The position data from LOP 1 is automatically copied into the LOP 2-tab after Apply has been clicked,
the position data from LOP 2 is automatically copied into the LOP 3-tab after Apply has been clicked.
This makes it easier to work with the data, especially when using transferred base lines.
Clicking on Reset on LOP 1 erases all data in all tabs, clicking on Reset on LOP 2 erases data in LOP
2-tab and LOP 3-tab. Clicking on Reset on LOP 3 erases data only in LOP 3.
All actions taken with respect to LOP are stored in the voyage recording.
Position fixes generated by means of LOP are stored in the list Position Fixes... There, they can be
edited in several ways.(See Section 4.10)
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 143

b_cp_e32.fm / 10.05.12
4.12 Selection and Setting of the Navigation Sensors Operating Instructions
4.12 Selection and Setting of the Navigation Sensors
For many important functions, the CHARTPILOT depends upon receiving adequately accurate values for
the navigation data heading, speed and position. Some of the sensors concerned are present redun-
dantly, so that you have to make a choice. Furthermore, some settings have to be made manually, e.g.
during course transfer, which might have to be synchronised, or after status changes of the sensor.
The CHARTPILOT can be configured in such a way that selection and setting of the navigation sensors
- are generally not possible, because these settings are intended to be made on the radar indicators
or on a CHARTPILOT integrated in the bridge console, but not on a CHARTPILOT situated at the
chart table,
- are not possible if the TRACKPILOT is in the active state, or are not possible if the TRACKPILOT is
being operated in Track mode because the settings are then intended to be made on the TRACK-
PILOT Master only, or
- are possible at any time. (This configuration is implemented in special cases only.)
Reading of position, speed and course delivered by the radar system.
Setting of the course transfer; menu see Figure 4-37 on page 145
Selection of the position sensor and associated settings; menu
Selection of the second position sensor; menu see Figure 4-39 on page 149
Selection of the speed sensor; manual input of drift and speed values; menu
Setting of date and time; menu see Figure 4-40 on page 153
Fig. 4-36 The Sensor Settings menu
USEFUL INFORMATION
Sensor Master
The tasks of selecting the navigation sensors and setting the navigation data take place by means of soft-
ware in one of the connected radar indicators. This radar indicator is called the Sensor Master. The
Sensor Master function can be executed on any radar indicator to which a gyro compass system, a speed
sensor and a position sensor system are directly connected. If several radar indicators have these
connections, the program automatically defines which of the radar indicators is the Sensor Master. If the
Sensor Master fails, another radar indicator automatically becomes the Sensor Master, in which case - if
possible - the sensor selection and the settings remain unchanged.
The Sensor Master can also be changed manually by the operator on any radar indicator having this
function.Availability of the Sensor Menus
As described above, the menus and functions of the following chapters 4.12.1to 4.12.5 are only available
on the CHARTPILOT if they are configured on service level.
144 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e32.fm / 10.05.12
Operating Instructions 4.12 Selection and Setting of the Navigation Sensors
4.12.1 Course Transfer Settings
For the transfer of the heading information, a technique can be used which transfers course changes
only, but not the absolute value. In these cases, therefore, the synchronism of the course transfer must
be checked after switch-on of signal transfer, and must be corrected if necessary.
Heading value used in the CHARTPILOT at present
Here, input the heading value obtained by reading the gyro compass. 1)
1)
On modern compass systems the heading information is available
as an absolute value (mostly from a serial interface according to IEC
61162). In this case, the above mentioned menu is used to accept the
currently transferred heading data, for instance after a failure or signal
interruption of the heading measuring system and no input can be
made in the Set field of the Set Gyro menu.
Exits the menu without the new settings being put into effect.
Fig. 4-37 The Sensor Settings > Set Gyro menu
Synchronising of Course Transfer

1. Call up the Sensor Settings > Set Gyro menu. The heading value to which the system is currently
synchronised is indicated there under Actual.
2. Under Set, input the heading value obtained by reading the compass.
3. When the values under Actual and Set are identical, press the OK button and check that the same
heading values are now being displayed in the navigation data line of the CHARTPILOT and on the
compass indicator.
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 145

b_cp_e32.fm / 10.05.12
4.12.2 Selection of the Speed Sensor; Input of Own Speed and Drift
Normally, there is more than one speed sensor. One of them has to be selected. In the case of speed
sensors which transfer only the speed ahead, the drift must be input manually. As an alternative to
selecting a speed sensor, the speed can also be input manually if necessary.
Selection of the Speed Sensor

1. In the Select frame in the menu Sensor Settings > Speed Sensor, mark the desired sensor.
If the marked sensor is a position sensor, the following applies:
- When the marked sensor reports that the data transferred are valid, the message Valid Value
appears instead of the mode (Bottom Track or Water Track) in the menu.
- If the marked sensor reports that the data are not valid, the message Invalid Value appears.
- If the marked sensor does not transfer any status message about the validity of the values
transferred, Not Available appears there.
2. If a sensor was selected which can simultaneously supply the speed through the water and the
speed over the bottom, the speed that is to be used preferentially must be switched on in the LOG
Priority frame.
If a sensor was selected which does not have this possibility, no input is possible.
3. Pressing of the OK button selects the marked speed sensor.
The speed sensors also include position sensors which transfer not only the position but also the
speed (and course) over ground .
IMPORTANT:
GPS receivers and other position receivers generally do not fulfil the
IMO Performance Standards for SDME (Speed and Distance Measuring
Equipment). On ships with BSH or DNV approval, the use of speed
signals from position sensors is usually not permitted
In the Select list, all sensors that are possible as suppliers of the speed signal are listed. If several
sensors of the same type are connected, they are given a serial number in addition to the sensor
type identification.
If a sensor does not transfer a transmitter identifier, the Sensor Master cannot assign the received
signals to a sensor type. So that the speed data transferred can be used nevertheless, such a
sensor appears in the list as None.
Inputting the Present Drift

In the Manual frame in the Sensor Settings > Speed Sensor menu, enter the magnitude of the drift under
Drift and enter the direction of the drift under Set. Exit the menu by pressing the OK button.
This input is possible only in the case of single-axis logs.
146 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e32.fm / 10.05.12
In the list, a dual axis log is marked:
Sensor status 1)
Longitudinal and transverse speeds over ground (WT) and

through the water (BT) transferred from the marked sensor
List of the connected speed
sensors; mark the speed sensor Definition of whether speed through the water or speed
that is to be selected. over ground is to be used in the system, if the log delivers
both types of data
In the list, a single-axis

log is marked:
Sensor status 1)
In the list, a position Longitudinal speeds

sensor is marked as the transferred from the
speed sensor: marked sensor
Sensor status 1)
Course and speed over

ground Input fields for the drift
(magnitude and direction)
The display depends on

the speed sensor that is
marked in the list.
In the list, MANUAL is marked:
Longitudinal and transverse speeds obtained from

the values that were entered last under MANUAL
Input field for longitudinal speed and drift (magni-

Exits the menu without the tude and direction) which take effect after pressing
new settings being put into of OK.
effect.
Puts the settings of this menu

into effect; the menu is exited.
1) Bottom Track, Water Track: Present sensor mode

Valid Value: The marked sensor is transferring valid data.
Invalid Value: The marked sensor is reporting the transferred data as invalid.
Not Available: The marked sensor is not supplying a status message.
Fig. 4-38 The Sensor Settings > Speed Sensor menu (systems with radar 1000 series)
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 147

b_cp_e32.fm / 10.05.12
Inputting Own Speed Manually

In the Select list in the Sensor Settings > Speed Sensor menu, mark Manual Speed instead of a sensor.
In the Manual frame, enter the speed at which the ship is sailing. Enter the present drift and set if appli-
cable, and exit the menu by pressing the OK button.
WARNING:
For safety reasons, an available speed sensor must be selected as soon
as possible.
The modes of the NACOS might be limited by the selection of Manual
Speed.
USEFUL INFORMATION
Determination of the Longitudinal and Transverse Speeds

If a sensor is selected which produces the speed information in the form of course over ground and speed
over ground (e.g. a position sensor), the system uses this information and the heading value from the
gyro compass to compute the longitudinal and transverse components of own speed that are displayed
and used in the system.
Failure of the Speed Sensor

If the selected speed sensor fails, the menu Sensor Settings > Speed Sensor, in which some other
sensor is marked, opens up automatically. After checking the sensor data displayed there, select this
sensor by means of OK or select some other sensor.
4.12.3 Selection of the Position Sensor; Settings to Determine the Position
Of the position sensors that are connected, it is necessary to select the one whose position data are used
generally in the system for determination of the system position. If a DGPS receiver has been selected,
it is optionally possible to define whether the position received is to be used only if the DGPS receiver is
operating in Differential mode. As an alternative to selecting a position sensor, it is also possible to
specify, if necessary, that the system position is to be determined in the Sensor Master by dead reck-
oning (Estimated Position).
After the position sensor has been selected, the accuracy of the position data must be checked continu-
ously, even although the system continuously performs a check of the position quality.
In addition, a second position sensor can be selected so that its positions can be plotted as a second
past plot for comparison purposes.
Selection of the Position Sensor

Call up the Sensor Settings > Position Sensor menu and mark the desired sensor in the Select list.
Behind Lat and Lon in the frame below the list, the position currently being transferred from the marked
sensor appears.
If the marked sensor reports that the data transferred are valid, the message Valid Value appears there.
If it reports that the data are not valid, the message appears. If the marked sensor does not transfer any
status message about the validity of the values transferred, Not Available appears there.
The distance from the position currently being used to the position transferred from the marked sensor is
displayed behind Distance, and the corresponding direction is displayed behind Bearing. If the difference
displayed is relevant for the nautical situation, you must first check whether the sensor marked is a suffi-
ciently accurate one.
148 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e32.fm / 10.05.12
Selection of the position sensor marked is done by pressing the OK button.

On ships with BSH approval and on ships with DNV approval, the take-over of position values is
permitted only if the sensor, by means of a status signal, declares that these data are valid. Position
sensors which do not transmit this status signal can be displayed but cannot be selected for use in
the system.
Specifying the Use of the GPS Mode in the Case of the DGPS Receiver 1)
Call up the Sensor Settings > Position Sensor menu, and in the Use of GPS frame switch on the DGPS
and GPS function if the position data generated in GPS mode are to be used too. Otherwise, switch on
the function DGPS only.
If the TRACKPILOT is in the activated state, this setting can only be made on a radar indicator that
is switched to act as the TRACKPILOT Master.
If the USE of GPS function is not available (not visible in the menu), GPS and DGPS mode are
treated as valid position data.
List of connected position sensors; mark the position sensor

that is to be selected.
Valid Value: The marked sensor is transferring valid data.
Invalid Value: The marked sensor is reporting the trans-
ferred data as invalid.
Not Available: The marked sensor is not supplying a
status message.
Position currently being transferred by the marked sensor
Distance between the position currently being used in

the CHARTPILOT and the position transferred from the
marked sensor
Direction from the position currently being used in the

CHARTPILOT to the position transferred from the
marked sensor
Use of the DGPS receiver data in the case of failure of the
DGPS mode:
DGPS only: GPS receiver is regarded as having failed.
DGPS and GPS: The data determined in GPS mode are used.
If Estimated is marked, input fields for the starting posi-

tion of the dead reckoning appear here.
Fig. 4-39 The Sensor Settings > Position Sensor and ... > 2nd Position Sensor menus
1) The Use of GPS function is optional and only visible if activated on service level.
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 149

b_cp_e32.fm / 10.05.12
Checking the Accuracy of the Position Data

In the chart area, any inaccuracy of the position data leads to a displacement between
- the own ship symbol and the ARPA targets on the one hand, and
- the electronic chart and User Chart Objects, the AIS targets, the pre-planned tracks, the Aids-to-
Navigation on the other hand.
The position used is normally sufficiently accurate if, with a small range setting, the fixed targets coincide
with the corresponding symbols on the electronic chart.
To minimize the inaccuracies, the system position can be corrected manually - see Section 4.12.4.
If the entire set of ARPA targets is displayed rotated relative to the electronic chart or User Chart
Objects, this indicates that there is a compass error.
The position used by the CHARTPILOT can be checked continuously against a second position
sensor; see below, S e l e c t i n g t h e S e c o n d P o s i t i o n S e n s o r .
Selecting the Second Position Sensor

In the Select list in the Sensor Settings > 2nd Position Sensor menu, mark the desired sensor. Behind
Lat and Lon in the frame below the list, the position currently being transferred from the marked sensor
appears. Furthermore, the distance from the position currently being used to the position transferred from
the marked sensor is displayed behind Distance, and the corresponding direction is displayed behind
Bearing. When the OK button is pressed, the marked position sensor is selected.
For the plotting of the second past plot, the position determined by dead reckoning can be used instead
of the second position sensor. The inputs for this are made in the Sensor Settings > 2nd Position
Sensor menu as described above.
Determining the Position Used by Means of Dead Reckoning

If there is no position sensor available, the only available method of position determination is that of dead
reckoning from the gyro heading and the data of the selected speed sensor.
1. In the Select list in the Sensor Settings > Position Sensor menu, select Estimated instead of a
sensor.
2. In the lower Estimated frame, enter the position with which the dead reckoning is to be started.
3. The dead reckoning is started by pressing the OK button.
In the CHARTPILOT, the position determination performed by dead reckoning is called Estimated
Position.
WARNING:
The accuracy of the dead reckoning position must be checked continu-
ally. For safety reasons, an available position sensor must be selected
as soon as possible.
The operation of the system might be limited by the selection of Esti-
mated Position; for example, the modes of the TRACKPILOT are limited,
and after 10 minutes the AIS is switched off.
Correction of the Dead Reckoning Position when Estimated Position is Used

1. Before the known position e.g. determined by means of cross-bearings is reached, enter this position
in the lower Estimated frame in the Sensor Settings > Position Sensor menu.
2. When the position entered has been reached, press the OK button in the Sensor Settings > Position
Sensor menu.
150 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e32.fm / 10.05.12
USEFUL INFORMATION
Conning Position
On every ship, a point on the ship is defined at service level as the conning position. Normally, it is the
conning position on the bridge. Except for the information in the Sensor Settings menu, all system
displays relative to own position refer to this conning position. For use in the system, all position sensor
values are converted to the conning position.
In these Operating Instructions, the system position is also called own position.
System Reaction on Failure of a Sensor

If the selected position sensor fails, the system automatically switches over to Estimated Position, and a
message about the failure is given (the alarm POSITION TIMEOUT or POSITION INVALID).
If the course sensor or speed sensor fails while Estimated Position is switched on (the alarm GYRO
FAULT, SPEED TIMEOUT or SPEED INVALID), the value used for the dead reckoning is the last course
or speed value transferred before the failure.
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 151

b_cp_e32.fm / 10.05.12
4.12.4 Manual Correction of the Position (Position Adjust)
For various reasons, it can happen that the position of the electronic chart or of the self-generated mapon
the screen is not in agreement with reality (i.e. with the ship's own position and with the ARPA targets).
In such cases, the Position Adjust function offers the possibility of adding the necessary correction value
(position offset) to the own position used in the NACOS.
WARNING:
Be very careful when using the Position Adjust function: by checking
several objects, make certain which area the position offset can be valid
in. Check regularly whether the position offset is still valid, especially
after a change of positional accuracy from DGPS to GPS and vice versa.
WARNING:
When the watch is changing over, the selected offset must definitely be
pointed out to the new officer of the watch.
Every time the Position Adjust function is used, the fact of its use and
the determined values are stored by means of the Voyage Recorder.
Performing the Position Adjust

With the Cancel key (or the right-hand key of the mouse) click to the chart background. In the menu that
is thus opened, press Adjust Position. With the Cancel key (or the right-hand key of the mouse) click to
a chart symbol (i.e. a light house) for which an ARPA target exists. Draw a line to the corresponding
ARPA fixed target symbol, and click this symbol (with the DO key or the left-hand key of the mouse).
The distances displayed on the line are added as the position offset to the system position. The position
offset has an effect throughout the whole system, i.e. on the automatic trackkeeping, on the position of
the electronic chart relative to the track, etc. For this reason, it can happen that, as a result of the position
adjust, an alarm message (e.g. the TRACK LIMIT alarm of the TRACKPILOT) is triggered on connected
units.
Display of the Position Offset

The size of the position offset is indicated in the line ADJ ... in the Cursor display.
After the position adjust has been performed, the position field of the navigation data line is given a
yellow background.
Resetting the Position Offset

The position offset is reset automatically (i.e. is set to zero) whenever a change-over to a different posi-
tion sensor occurs.
The resetting occurs manually in the context menu of the chart area with the function Clear Pos. Adjust.
4.12.5 Setting the Time Zone
If a zone time differing from the UTC is to be processed and displayed in the CHARTPILOT and on all
other SAM Electronics equipment items of the system, the time zone must be entered on one of the
equipment items:
Under Time Zone in the Sensor Settings > Date/Time menu, input the time difference of the desired time
zone relative to UTC. Leave the menu by pressing the OK button. The time zone that is entered takes
effect over the entire system.
152 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e32.fm / 10.05.12
Operating Instructions 4.13 Chartpilot with Local Sensors
The date and time delivered by the position sensor connected to the Sensor Master
(see ) are used throughout the entire system. (Input not possible)
Input field for the time zone (time difference relative to UTC)
Fig. 4-40 The Sensor Settings > Date/Time menu
4.13 Chartpilot with Local Sensors
In the integrated system

- CHARTPILOT with SAM radars (1x00 series)
- CHARTPILOT within a NACOS (with SAM radars and TRACKPILOT)
the CHARTPILOT receives its navigation sensor data regularly from the connected radar indicators. In
case of a failure of the complete radar system or if the communication or connection to the radar system
is lost, the CHARTPILOT can be used as a backup for emergency operation if local navigation sensors
are connected to its optional serial interface. The following chapter describes the additional functionality
available on a CHARTPILOT with local backup navigation sensors.
4.13.1 Local Sensors Menu
Operation of local sensors installed at the CHARTPILOT are supported by an aditional Sensor Settings
menu. In the Local Sensors window, the displayed sensor data are totally independent from the system
sensors.
For compatibility with the CCRS (see 1.2) the position, speed and course are corrected for the conning
position, which is the CCRP defined on service level. 1)
1) Also the sensor offsets for the local sensors are to be set on service level.
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 153

b_cp_e32.fm / 10.05.12
4.13 Chartpilot with Local Sensors Operating Instructions
Reading of position, speed and course delivered by the radar systemand used system-wide.
as described in chapter 4.12
The selection of Local Sensors is only available in case of failure status of the data distribution
from the radar system (alarm NAVIGATION DATA NOT AVAILABLE is present)
Heading value received from the connected heading sensor.

Position data currently being tranferred by the connected position sensor
Course and speed currently received from the connected position sensors, or course and speed
calculated by the CHARTPILOT using the heading and the data received from the connected
Selection of the position sensor. (see page)

Operation of these menus and
Selection of the second position sensor. (see page) correponding data display is also
Selection of the speed sensor; manual input of drift and possible if System Sensors are
speed values. (see page) selected.
Fig. 4-41 The Local Sensors menu
4.13.2 Switchover between System Sensors and Local Sensors
After the alarm NAVIGATION SENSOR DATA NOT AVAILABLE has been announced, the local sensors
can be activated by clicking on the Local Sensors button in the menu Sensor Settings.
From now on, this CHARTPILOT is working with its own navigation sensors which can be operated via
the corresponding sub-menus. Other parts of the system or other CHARTPILOTs are not affected.
After the System Sensors are available again (that means the alarm NAVIGATION SENSOR DATA NOT
AVAILABLE has been cancelled), the operator must click on the System Sensors button in order to
reactivate the sensor data received from the radar system again.
Restrictions:
During use of the Local Sensors, the setting of date and time is not possible, but the CHARTPILOT´s
internal UTC time is synchronized with the UTC of the connected GPS sensor. Additionally, the previously
set zone time (ZT) will be retained. It cannot be changed until the system data are available again.
The Position Adjust function (see chapter 4.12.4) cannot be executed while the Local Sensors are acti-
vated. After switchover a previously set position offset is cleared by the system, but after reactivation of
the system sensors it will be available again and be reused automatically with its current setting.
Useful information:
Depending on the installation and configuration on service-level
- a heading sensor (gyro compass or equivalent)
- a position sensor
154 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e32.fm / 10.05.12
Operating Instructions 4.13 Chartpilot with Local Sensors
- a speed sensor or a second position sensor can be available for local use in the CHARTPILOT system.
The data received from the sensors connected directly to the CHARTPILOT can be displayed at any time
in the Local Snesors menu, even if they are not activated for use.
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 155

b_cp_e32.fm / 10.05.12
4.13 Chartpilot with Local Sensors Operating Instructions
156 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e32.fm / 10.05.12
CHARTPILOT 5 Voyage Planning
Operating Instructions 5.1 Generation of Pre-planned Tracks
5 Voyage Planning
The part of the (long-term and medium-term) voyage planning that can be performed on the CHART-
PILOT consists of
- generating and, if necessary, modifying pre-planned tracks for the planned route - see Section 5.1,
- procuring and updating the electronic chart for the voyage area - see Section 7.3 to 7.8,
- the editing (if necessary) of the Manual Update data of the ENC as per Section 5.3 (if ENC files are
used which do not contain the latest safety-relevant changes),
- if necessary, generating User Chart Objects - see Section 5.2,
- generating an Own Chart in special cases (if no chart is available for the region to be navigated, but
navigation is to take place with an electronic chart) – see Section 5.4.
5.1 Generation of Pre-planned Tracks
The work on the pre-planned tracks can be performed on any radar indicator or on the CHARTPILOT,
whichever is selected. These items of equipment exchange the entered data with one another, so that
(for example) a track that is generated on the CHARTPILOT can also be altered on any RADARPILOT.
5.1.1 General Information about Pre-planned Tracks
Pre-planned tracks 1) are planned voyage routes which are generated on the basis of waypoint sequences
and are stored in the form of files. They can then be used by the components of the system as follows:
- Tracks can be displayed in the chart area on the CHARTPILOT in Chart mode.
- On any radar indicator, one or more tracks can be selected and added as a background to the radar
picture. The present part of the track is then displayed automatically on the radar picture.
- On the radar indicator or on the CHARTPILOT, one of the displayed tracks can be defined as the
System Track, which is effective for the entire system. With the aid of the TRACKPILOT, the ship
can be piloted automatically along this track. But even during manual control, the diverse displays at
the system components that refer to the System Track can be most helpful.
- If the planned time of arrival is input at the beginning of the voyage, the CHARTPILOT continuously
performs a speed calculation while the ship is sailing along the track; this calculation is based on the
speed settings contained in the track file, and its purpose is to achieve the required time of arrival.
The result, the Arrival Speed, is displayed in the Track/Schedule display, and can be used by the
operator as the current speed setting.
- If the system is equipped with a SPEEDPILOT, the speed can be controlled automatically while the
ship is sailing along the System Track, in such a way that the Arrival Speed is achieved and the time
schedule planning is thus fulfilled. Alternatively, predefined speeds that are likewise contained in the
track file (Profile Speeds) can be set for the individual track segments by means of the SPEED-
PILOT.
Geographical Position and Shape of a Track

A track is divided by waypoints into track segments. The waypoints are the main construction elements
of the track. Their positions are defined by geographical coordinates.
1) In this document, pre-planned tracks are also simply called tracks if there is no danger of confusion.
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 157

b_cp_e33.fm / 10.05.12
5 Voyage Planning CHARTPILOT
5.1 Generation of Pre-planned Tracks Operating Instructions
If it is planned that the ship will change course at a waypoint, the radius of the turn must be specified.
In this case, at the beginning of the manoeuvre computed on the basis of the specified radius, the track
leaves the track line 1) at the wheel over point (WOP), and after completion of the manoeuvre it goes
over to the next track line.
The geographical coordinates of the waypoints, together with the radii assigned to the waypoints, thus
define the geographical position and shape of the track.
Tracks each have a first waypoint and a last one. During editing, all waypoints are automatically
numbered consecutively, beginning at 1 for the first waypoint. All track functions refer to this sequence.
Thus, a track can only be sailed in the direction for which it has been generated.
However, the direction of a track that has already been generated can be reversed by means of a
simple operating step during editing and then processed further - see page 177.
WOP Actual waypoint

(To WP)
n
ir ectio
gd
ilin
Sa
Radiu
Track
s
Last waypoint
(From WP)
Fig. 5-1 Shape of the track in the case of course changes
There is practically no limit to the number of waypoints that a track can consist of, or to the length of a
track. Thus, the entire route between two ports can be defined as one track. It can often be appropriate
to divide the entire distance up into individual tracks. For example, if a port is approached from various
directions along various routes, it might be appropriate to perform separation into the port-related
segment that is identical for all routes and the part that is specific for the route concerned. In this way,
the data relating to the port need to be input once only, and the maintenance of these data only has to
take place in one track. When the voyage begins, a new track covering the entire distance can then be
generated in a simple manner by taking over all waypoints of the individual tracks into this overall track
by means of a special operating function - see page 172 and 177.
1) Track line = a line joining two consecutive waypoints
158 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e33.fm / 10.05.12
The Data of Which a Track Consists

In addition to the administrative data, which refer to the entire track, a track can contain a series of data
per track segment. These data are assigned in each case to one of the two waypoints which form the
limits of the track section. They are therefore called waypoint data.
Administrative Data (for details, see page 189)

The following parameters refer to the entire track:
- Track Number
- Track Name
- Catalog to which the track is assigned
- Notes (your own notes about the track)
Waypoint Data (for details, see page 182)

Parameters for general use of the track:
- Waypoint Number
- Waypoint Position
- Remark about the waypoint
- Parameter Point Attribute
- Waypoint Notes
- Administration ID
- Administration Owner
Parameters that are also used for the automatic parameterisation of the TRACKPILOT (these data are
also called Pilot Data):
- Radius
- Sailing mode
- Track control mode
- Rudder economy
- Course limit
- Track limit
Parameters for time planning and for use of the SPEEDPILOT:
- Profile Speed
- Planned Speed
- Arrival attribute
The following data are computed from the waypoint data by the program and can be displayed (for
details, see page 173),
- Track (= direction of the track line)
- Distance
- Track Distance
USEFUL INFORMATION
Assignment of the Waypoint Data to the Track Segments

Depending on their meaning, the waypoint data have different areas (relative to the waypoint) in which
they act:
- The speeds and the waypoint notes are used during the approach to the waypoint for which they are
entered.
- All other data are valid starting at the waypoint for which they are entered.
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 159

b_cp_e33.fm / 10.05.12
5.1.2 Generation, Handling and Administration of the Tracks
During the generation of the tracks, you can transfer the waypoint positions graphically, (in Graphic
mode) from the electronic chart, and - if a digitizer is connected - from a (paper) chart. You can also edit
the waypoint positions by alphanumeric input (in Text mode); all other data must be edited in this mode.
In Text mode, the following functions too are possible:
- During the generation of a track, waypoints - including all waypoint data - can be taken over (copied)
from tracks that already exist.
- By means of a special function, all waypoints of an existing track can be appended (copied) onto
the track that is being generated.
- By means of another special function, the direction of the track can be reversed, i.e. the first
waypoint becomes the last one, and so on.
- Waypoints used frequently can also be collected in a waypoint file (see page 192), from which the
waypoint positions can be taken when necessary. This possibility is provided, for example, for using
the CHARTPILOT on survey vessels.
Once the track has been generated, it should definitely be checked with the special checking function.
The track that is checked must be stored in the form of a separate file 1) on the hard disk of the CHART-
PILOT and assigned to a catalog. During the storing process, you have to give the track a track number,
by means of which the system - in conjunction with the catalog name - can clearly identify any track. So
that you too can identify the track later, you should give the track an appropriate track name during the
storing process.
If a track is to be displayed or modified on the CHARTPILOT, you first have to load it. In this process, a
track stored on the hard disk is copied into the main memory.
For modifying a track, you have all of the input possibilities that are also available to you for the initial
generation process. After the modification, the track must be stored. If this is done under the old track
number, the old data set of the modified track is lost. If, during the storing process, you input a new track
number, the modified track is stored additionally as a new track; the original track continues to exist in
unchanged form.
Although it is improbable, hard disk drives can get damaged or the data stored on them can be erased.
So that, in such cases, the stored data are not irretrievably lost, it is absolutely essential to make a back-
up copy 2) at regular intervals, i.e. before such an event can occur (see page 323). After a hard disk fault
or after the hard disk has been exchanged, the files can then be copied back 3) to the hard disk drive (see
page 326). This mechanism can also be used to exchange files between the systems on different
ships.
1)
In the following, no distinction is drawn between the track and the track file.
2) on/from a Floppy or on/from a removable device (see also Chapter 3.7: "Using Removable Devices" on page 73)
3) see footnote 2
160 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e33.fm / 10.05.12
Loads tracks into the main memory so that they can be displayed, modi-
fied or handled in some other way (see pages 165 and 176).
Defining the System Track (see page 241; menu see Figure 6-1 on page 231).
Deselects the System Track (see page 230).

Opens the menu area for execution of voyage preparation (see page 235 and 240; menu
see Figure 6-5 on page 237).
With this function, any waypoint of the System Track can be defined as the next waypoint
that is to be approached (see page 230 and 241; menu see Figure 6-2 on page 232).
Deletes tracks from the main memory, e.g. to switch off the display of these
tracks in the chart area (see page 61).
Opens the menu area for the generating of tracks; makes it possible to create catalogs (see
page 189; menu see Figure 5-4 on page 166).
Deletes tracks on the hard disk,
and deletes superfluous catalogs (see page 321).
Opens the menu area for the generating of waypoint files (see page 192; see also Figure
5-16 on page 193).
Fig. 5-2 The menu Tracks
Generation of Tracks
A track is generated by inputting (editing) the waypoint positions and the other waypoint data and the
administrative data. If the file is then stored, the track that has been generated is available at any time in
the entire system.
Methods of Data Input

For data input, the following possibilities are available, depending on the equipment of the CHARTPILOT:
Generation of Waypoints and Input of Waypoint Positions

- If an electronic chart of the area is available: by clicking the waypoint position with the aid of the
cursor in the chart area of the CHARTPILOT screen,
- if the CHARTPILOT is equipped with a digitizer: by clicking the waypoint position with the aid of the
digitizer pointer on the (paper) chart aligned on the digitizer,
- if neither an electronic chart nor a digitizer is available: by alphanumeric editing, including the
possibility of taking over waypoints from a waypoint file (see page 192).
After appropriate preparation (see page 164), all three methods can be used interchangeably:
- To switch over between editing with the electronic chart and alphanumerical editing, all that has to
be done is to press the Text Mode button in the Tracks > Edit menu, which is already in the open
state anyway.
- Both during editing with the electronic chart and during alphanumeric editing, the digitizer is in the
active state without any need for further switching.
The administrative data and all other waypoint data must be edited alphanumerically.
Alphanumeric editing takes place in Text mode, for which a large menu covering the entire chart area is
available. An overview of the display in Text mode is shown in Figure 5-3. The individual areas are
explained in detail in the following sections.
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 161

b_cp_e33.fm / 10.05.12
Administrative Intended for other At this instant, the Coordinate system which is
data of the track system configura- last modification used as the basis for the The Tracks > Edit
tions of the track was input of the waypoint posi- menu;
See page 189. stored. tions - see page 173 1) see page 166
Input area:
Here, the waypoint data of the waypoint marked in the waypoint list are displayed and edited -
see Section 5.1.6 (page 173) and Section 5.1.8 (page 180).
Waypoint list: 1) If parameterisation of the coordinate system for

- Shows an overview of all edited waypoints together with a special tasks has not been selected at service level, the
selection (defined by you) of waypoint data. Geographic button serves only for the display of the
- Permits alphanumeric generation of waypoints (see page 173). (permanently) selected projection (see page 96).
Fig. 5-3 The CHARTPILOT display for the editing of tracks in Text Mode
The Work Steps for Generating a Track

The generating of tracks is mainly divided into the following steps (the same applies to the modifying of
existing tracks):
- Preparing the generation of the track - see page 164,
- Setting the digitizer up, if it is to be used - see page 166,
- Generation of waypoints - see page 171. 173 and 178,
- Editing of waypoint data - see page 180,
- Checking the track - see page 185,
- Completing the generation of the track - see page 189.
162 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e33.fm / 10.05.12
To minimise the effort needed for the editing and later modification of the waypoint data, the work of
generating the waypoints and editing the waypoint data should be done in a particular order. This order
is based on the following facts:
- The TRACKPILOT, the SPEEDPILOT and the time schedule planning process use the values
contained in the track and the values that are input manually while the ship is sailing along the track,
until a new value is set for these parameters.
To parameterise the TRACKPILOT and SPEEDPILOT with the aid of the track, it is thus only neces-
sary to make one entry
. for the waypoint at which the automatic setting process is to take place for the first time,
. for each waypoint at which the value is to change automatically,
. for each waypoint at which a value that may have been input manually while sailing along the
track is to be reset.
Any other entry has the disadvantages
. that a value entered manually during sailing of the track is reset unintentionally,
. and that, in the case of a modification of the track file, an unnecessarily large quantity of data
have to be modified.
- Every waypoint that is generated contains at least the following waypoint data:
. Waypoint number (assigned automatically by the program)
. Waypoint position,
. Sailing mode,
. Track control mode.
- After one waypoint has been generated, generation of the other waypoints is done mainly by copying
and modifying existing waypoints. When waypoints are copied, such copying always includes all of
the waypoint data entered (in the case of generation by means of the electronic chart and digitizer:
using the cursor position as the waypoint position).
If you comply with the sequence of waypoint generation and waypoint data editing described in the
following, you will obtain with minimum effort a track which contains only the necessary waypoint data
and no irritating additional waypoint data:
- Generate the first waypoint of the track. If the waypoint was generated in Text mode, edit the
waypoint position and the remark about the waypoint.
- If you do not want to use the values for the sailing mode, (Rhumb Line) and track control mode, (To
Track) that are entered automatically by the program, correct the value concerned.
- Generate all other waypoints in the order in which they are to appear in the track. If the waypoints
have been generated in Text mode, you should at the same time also edit the waypoint position and
the remarks about the waypoint.
- Edit all other necessary waypoint data. It might be appropriate to do this in several separate runs for
separate subjects, e.g. entering all radii in one run, all speeds in another run, and so on.
USEFUL INFORMATION
Use of Various Coordinate Systems for Position Input

The position data that are input on the CHARTPILOT do not have to refer to any particular coordinate
system. It is possible to choose between various coordinate systems.
Generally, the CHARTPILOT program (and also the connected radar/NACOS components) work inter-
nally with the chart datum WGS 84. If position data referring to a different chart datum are input, a conver-
sion to WGS 84 automatically takes place internally during input. A necessary prerequisite for correct
conversion is that the chart datum used is known to the program!
If a different chart datum for the display is selected on the CHARTPILOT, all positions are converted to
the desired chart datum specifically for this display.
If the position input is performed graphically, the program must also know the projection of the chart used.
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 163

b_cp_e33.fm / 10.05.12
From the above remarks, the following statements apply to the various methods of position input:
- Graphic editing in the electronic chart:
In the case of all vector charts and most raster charts, the coordinate system is known to the
program and is taken into account by the program. For the position input, no further setting activity
is necessary in this respect.
WARNING:
Raster charts whose coordinate system is not known 1) are permitted to
be used as the basis for editing only in those geographical areas in
which high positional accuracy is not important.
- Alphanumerical editing (in Text mode):

The program cannot know which chart datum is relevant for the position data that are to be input;
therefore:
WARNING:
In Text mode, you must ensure that, for the editing, the chart datum that
is set is the one to which the source of the position data refers (see page
173).
Furthermore, by input of the projection used, you can adapt the input and display areas to suit the
projection-specific position parameters.
- Graphic editing with the digitizer:
The chart datum and projection of the chart used are important, and must be input when the chart
is being set up on the digitizer:
WARNING:
In the process of setting up on the digitizer, the projection and chart
datum that are suitable for the chart used must definitely be entered.
5.1.3 Preparing the Generation or Modification of the Track
A track can be generated in various ways:

- By generation as a new track
- By copying and modifying an existing track.
A track can also be modified at any time (if it has not been defined as the System Track).
Generating a New Track

1. Check whether the electronic chart being used is officially approved (see also page 79).
If an officially approved electronic chart of the area is available with a suitable scale, you should use
this chart to generate the waypoints; in the case of non-approved electronic charts, please check the
nautical safety of your planning by comparing with official (paper) charts.
WARNING:
Raster charts whose coordinate system is not known 2) are permitted to
be used as the basis for editing only in those geographical areas in
which high positional accuracy is not important.
1) These are indicated in the Chart Status field of the navigation data line by the entry Datum mism. on a yellow background.
2) These are indicated in the Chart Status field of the navigation data line by the entry Datum mism. on a yellow background.
164 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e33.fm / 10.05.12
If a vector chart is used, switch on the display of this (with the Chart Visible button in the Chart
menu).
Switch the chart area to Planning display mode and select the chart excerpt so that at least the posi-
tion of the first waypoint is situated in the chart area and so that the scale permits sufficiently precise
graphic input.
You can also make this setting by marking the position of the first waypoint in the (zoomed)
world chart by means of the Chart Maintenance subroutine and by switching back directly into
the Navigation program - see page 247.
2. If the system is equipped with a digitizer and you want to perform editing graphically on the basis of
a (paper) chart, you must first set up the digitizer in accordance with Section 5.1.4.
3. If you want to use waypoints from a waypoint file (see page 192), you must load that file: under
Waypoint Files in the Tracks > Waypoint File > Load menu, mark the waypoint file, and leave the
menu by pressing the OK button.
4. Call up the Tracks > Edit menu.
If there are one or more tracks loaded, the number and name of one of the loaded tracks are
displayed there under Selected Track. In this case, you must create a new (still empty) track by
pressing the New button. If there is no track loaded, the new track is already created by calling up
the Tracks > Edit menu; there is then no need to press the New button. The program automatically
gives the number 0001 and the title untitled xxx to the new track. The correct number and title are
input upon completion of the track generation process at the latest (see page 189).
You can now begin to generate the waypoints - see page 171, 173 and 178.
Track Generation by Copying and Modifying an Existing Track

1. If the modification is to be performed using graphic aids, this should be prepared in the same way
as for generation of a new track as described in steps 1 to 3 above.
2. Loading an existing track: Under Catalogs in the Tracks > Load menu, click the catalog to which
the track is assigned; under Tracks, click the track that is to be loaded; then leave the menu by
pressing the OK button.
Under Loaded Tracks in the Tracks > Edit > Select menu, all loaded tracks are displayed.
3. Under Loaded Tracks in the Tracks > Edit > Select menu, click the track that is to be used as the
basis, and leave the menu by pressing the OK button. The track selected in this way is stated under
Selected Track in the Tracks > Edit menu which then appears.
You can now begin to generate the waypoints - see page 171, 173 and 178.
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 165

b_cp_e33.fm / 10.05.12
Modifying an Existing Track

The preparations for this are the same as for track generation by copying and modifying an existing track.
Number and name of the track that is being edited.
Selection of the track that is to be modified or that is to be used

as the basis for the new track.
Press if a brand new track is to be generated.

This reverses the direction of the selected track - see page 177.
Takes over all waypoints of an existing track and copies them behind the last waypoint -
see pages 172 and 177.
Checks the selected track - see page 185.
Stores the selected track - see page 189; menu see Figure 5-14 on page 190.
Operating elements for graphic editing on the

basis of the electronic chart - see page 171
Switches over between Text mode and Graphic mode.
Fig. 5-4 The Tracks > Edit menu
5.1.4 Setting Up the Digitizer
Before you can edit waypoints with the digitizer, it has to be set up, i.e.:
- The chart must be fixed to the digitizer.
- The coordinate system and the scale of the chart used must be input.
- The position of the chart on the digitizer must be calibrated.
Criteria for the selection of the suitable chart:
- Largest possible scale in order to achieve maximum accuracy and display of all nautical obstacles,
wrecks etc.,
- the reference latitude and chart datum must be known,
- the chart must be up to date.
Fixing the Chart on the Digitizer

1. Lay the chart on the digitizer and fix it so that it cannot be moved; it does not have to be aligned at
a particular angle. All that has to be done is to ensure that the part of the chart from which position
data are to be digitized is lying within the working area of the digitizer.
On the A0 and A1 boards, the working area is situated within the area formed by four corner-
markers; on the A2 board, it is situated under the transparent sheeting.
166 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e33.fm / 10.05.12
These Operating Instructions refer to the DrawingBoard (size A2 to A0) from the CalComp
company. Reading of the operating instructions written by the digitizer manufacturer is unnec-
essary, since the required operating steps are explained in the following. However, if a different
type of digitizer is used, it might be necessary to additionally utilise the digitizer manufacturer's
operating instructions that are supplied along with the digitizer.
2. Put the digitizer pointer down on the working area. Switch the digitizer on now if this has not already
been done; the POWER lamp must be alight.
If the digitizer is in the switched-on state and the digitizer pointer is situated outside the working
area, the POWER lamp flashes and an acoustic signal sounds.
Setting the Coordinate System and Calibrating the Chart

You are guided through this work step-by-step by the program after you have pressed the Setup
Assistant button in the Peripheral Devices > Digitizer menu. Therefore, a few remarks about the proce-
dure will be sufficient here:
Paper Chart No.

Under Paper Chart No. in the first dialog box which opens up after pressing of the Setup Assistant
button, input the number of the chart that is lying on the digitizer. You can allocate this number yourself
(max. 18 places; all editable characters are permitted). It is used only for simplification of repeated cali-
bration of the charts. The program stores the coordinate system that was input during first-time calibration
of the chart, and the reference coordinates that were entered, and assigns them to the Paper Chart No.
If you want to use the same chart again later, you do not need to input these data again.
Once a Paper Chart No. has been input, it cannot be erased after successful completion of the cali-
bration process. However, if you want to use the number for a different chart, you can alter in any
desired manner the data that are stored for this number.
If you want to know whether a Paper Chart No. has already been allocated, input the number and
press the Next>> button. If a chart projection is marked (by inverted display) in the list which then
appears, the Paper Chart No. has already been allocated.
Coordinate System
In the Chart Projections and Chart Datums lists, mark the coordinate system in which the chart exists.
For important notes about this, see U S E F U L I N F O R M A T I O N on page 169.
Calibration Procedure
The chart is calibrated by inputting the coordinate values for each of four reference points one after
another, and by clicking the reference point on the chart in each case.
Clicking on the (paper) chart: Position the digitizer pointer exactly on the point that is to be
clicked, and briefly press the 0 key of the digitizer pointer.
The four reference points must fulfil the following conditions:
- Two reference points situated side by side must be at the same latitude, and two reference points
situated one above the other must be at the same longitude, i.e. in the Mercator projection they must
form a rectangle. As the reference points, coordinate crosses are the most suitable.
- They must be as far apart as possible. The larger the rectangle formed by the reference points, the
smaller the effect of the digitization error of the reference point coordinates on the subsequent digi-
tization.
The sequence of input is important: you must always begin with the south-west reference point and
continue counterclockwise. If the assignment of the coordinate values does not correspond to this instruc-
tion, a request to repeat the calibration appears before completion of the calibration process.
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 167

b_cp_e33.fm / 10.05.12
If, during input, errors have been made or the reference points have not been input with the necessary
accuracy, an error message appears, requesting that the calibration be repeated (for possible source of
error, see USEFUL INFORMATION, P r e c i s i o n o f D i g i t i z a t i o n ).
The geographical coordinates of the

reference points that are read on the
chart must be input here.
Number of the
reference point
Coordinates of the
reference points
Resets the coordinate values to the

initial values. Calibration must be
begun again at reference point 1.
Opens the dialog box that was shown previ- Exits from the menu without
ously, and makes it possible to correct the Transition to the next work step activation of the inputs.
values that were input there.
Fig. 5-5 Dialog Box for Calibration of the Chart
Setting the Display of the Digitizer Position on the Radar PPI and in the Chart Area
In the last dialog box, by switching on the Digitizer Cursor function you can specify that the position of
the digitizer pointer will be displayed on the radar PPI and in the Chart Area by the symbol .
With the Numerical Position function, you can switch the presentation of the Digitizer Cursor display on
and off.
Both functions are also available in the Peripheral Devices > Digitizer menu.
The digitizer pointer does not act on the display processes and editing processes until the digitizer
has been set up.
Setting the Desired Chart Excerpt on the Radar PPI and in the Chart Area
When you have successfully set up the chart, you can put the digitizer pointer down on the chart at the
position that is to become the centre of the screen display. When you then press the Set Planning Mode
button in the Peripheral Devices > Digitizer menu, the display mode is switched over to the Planning
display mode (i.e. the chart excerpt is independent of the ship's own position) and the screen excerpt is
moved accordingly.
168 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e33.fm / 10.05.12
Calibrating the chart.
- Switches the Planning display mode on.

- Sets the display centre to the current position of the digitizer pointer.
Clears the calibration data.
In the chart area, this switches on and off the presentation of the chart position
of the digitizer pointer.
Switches on and off the presentation of the Digitizer Cursor display.
Paper Chart No. of the calibrated chart and its coordinate system
Fig. 5-6 The Peripheral Devices > Digitizer menu
USEFUL INFORMATION
Preparing the Charts

During first-time calibration of a chart, it is desirable to label this chart with the Paper Chart No. and to
mark the reference points on it with a transparent text-marker. In this way, the calibration of the chart is
reduced to the input of the Paper Chart No. and to clicking of the four marked reference points.
If the whole chart does not fit on the digitizer, separate Paper Chart Nos and reference points can be
defined and marked for the individual areas.
Grids of the Usable Projections

In the vast majority of charts, the Mercator projection is used. With the other projections, not all grid lines
are parallel to one another. On charts having a large scale, this lack of parallelism is not obvious.
Because input of the correct projection is very important for precise digitization, the projection type should
be read off the labelling of the chart.
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 169

b_cp_e33.fm / 10.05.12
Mercator Gauss Conformal Cylindrical Cassini Gauss-Krueger

Polyconic Cylindrical Equal Spaced UTM
(This is the transversal
Mercator projection.)
Fig. 5-7 Grids of the digitizable projections
The NGO chart datum

The NGO chart datum exists with three different reference longitudes. In some cases, these are not
marked on the charts.
Allocation of the numbers of the Norwegian charts to the NGO chart datums:
- NGO Ref. 10°43'30.0E: Charts 8, 9, 55, 58, 62 to 65, 73 to 78
- NGO Ref. 10°43'37.5E: Charts 6 and 7
- NGO Ref. 10°43'22.5E: All other charts
Precision of Digitization
The digitizer has a digitization precision of ± 0.25 mm. During calibration, the program performs a check
in which the digitizer coordinates of the four reference points are compared with the geographical coor-
dinates entered, taking account of the entered scale, projection and chart datum (including the reference
latitude if applicable). In this check, the program permits a standard deviation of 1 mm 1).
The Menu Line of the Digitizer

The menu line (coloured key-symbols) is not needed for use of the digitizer with the CHARTPILOT, but
it is capable of being operated.
IMPORTANT:
The menu line of the digitizer must not be operated.
If a menu function is triggered by accident (with the digitizer pointer), this can cause faults in the digitiza-
tion. Such faults can be corrected by
- switching the digitizer off,
- switching it on again after a few seconds at the earliest, and
- setting up the digitizer again.
Ending the Digitizer Work

If you no longer need the digitizer, you can switch it off at the mains. Several seconds after switch-off,
the set-up is cleared.
Alternatively, you can leave the digitizer switched on at the mains and you can clear the set-up by means
of the Clear Setup function in the Peripheral Devices > Digitizer menu.
1) Default value, can be set at service level.
170 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e33.fm / 10.05.12
5.1.5 Generating Waypoints by Means of the Electronic Chart
In the Tracks > Edit menu, the Text mode function must not be switched on; if necessary, press the Text
Mode button in order to switch into Graphic mode.
Generating, inserting, moving and deleting are done with the functions mentioned under Graphic mode.
The function desired is switched on by clicking, as usual. If the cursor is then moved into the chart area,
this function remains switched on until the cursor is moved out of the chart area or until the MORE key
is pressed.
Generation of the First and Subsequent Waypoints

Switch on Set/Continue and click the desired waypoint position; then click the next waypoint position,
and so on. Each click in the chart area generates a waypoint at the end of the track, and enters the cursor
position as the waypoint position. The resulting track is displayed in the chart area.
If necessary, move the displayed chart area after pressing Set Center. It should only be moved by an
amount which still allows the last waypoint to be displayed in the chart area. After that, you can generate
further waypoints behind the last waypoint (see below).
If the waypoint to be generated is so far away that, with the selected scale, it cannot be displayed
together with the last waypoint, the following procedure can be used:
- With Range, increase the range setting sufficiently,
- behind the last waypoint, generate the waypoint (even if the position is initially not precise) - see
below.
- after pressing Set Center, move the displayed chart area to the position of the new waypoint.
- with Range, reduce the range setting sufficiently and
- move the new waypoint to the exact position (see below).
After that, you can generate further waypoints behind the new waypoint (see below).
If you wish to use the sailing mode Great Circle or the track control mode To Waypoint, it is advis-
able to edit these data immediately after generation of the first relevant waypoint.
Generation of Further Waypoints Behind the Last Waypoint or in Front of the First One
Switch on Set/Continue and click the last waypoint or the first one. Click the position of the next waypoint
that is to be generated, then click the next waypoint position, and so on.
The clicking of the waypoint can be cancelled by pressing the MORE key.
Inserting One or More Consecutive Waypoints

Switch on Set/Continue and click the track line between the waypoints between which the waypoint is to
be inserted. Click the position of the waypoint that is to be inserted. Behind this waypoint, further
waypoints can be inserted by clicking.
The clicking of the track line can be cancelled by pressing the MORE key.
Shifting a Waypoint
Switch on Modify, click the waypoint that is to be moved, and then click the desired position.
Deleting Waypoints
Switch on Delete and, one after another, click the waypoints that are to be deleted.
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 171

b_cp_e33.fm / 10.05.12
Inserting Parameter Points

Switch on Set Parameter Point, and on the track line click the point at which the waypoint data are to
change.
Parameter Points are waypoints at which no course change takes place but at which particular
parameters can be set to different values (see page 183).
Taking Over Waypoints from a Waypoint File

In the input area of the Text Mode menu, switch on Compose. You can now generate and insert
waypoints at the positions of the waypoints that are stored in a waypoint file, as described above for the
Set/Continue function. The only difference compared to the Set/Continue function is that, after selection
of the Compose function, only the position of a waypoint stored in a waypoint file is accepted as a
waypoint position.
The waypoints contained in the loaded waypoint file are indicated in the chart area by small orange
circles.
Taking Over All Waypoints from an Existing Track

1. If the track whose waypoints are to be copied has not yet been loaded: Under Catalogs in the
Tracks > Load menu, click the catalog to which the track is assigned, under Tracks click the desired
track, load the track by pressing the OK button, and call up the Tracks > Edit menu.
2. Under Catalogs in the Tracks > Edit > Merge menu, mark the catalog to which the track whose
waypoints are to be copied is assigned. Then, under Tracks, mark the desired track.
3. Leave the Merge menu by pressing the OK button. As a result, all waypoints (including all waypoint
data) of the track marked in the Merge menu are copied behind the last waypoint.
USEFUL INFORMATION
If a Waypoint Cannot be Modified

In the chart area, although several tracks can be displayed simultaneously, only the selected track can
be modified. If you cannot modify a displayed waypoint, the track to which the waypoint belongs is not
the selected track. It is advisable to switch off the display of all unneeded tracks (in the Tracks > Clear
menu).
Conversion of the Coordinate System of Raster Charts

In most files of the raster charts, the projection and chart datum are entered. In the case of these charts,
the program automatically performs a conversion to the WGS84 chart datum used in the NACOS. The
content of these charts is then displayed in the WGS84 chart datum; if you set the cursor to the symbol
of a buoy, for example, the Cursor display shows the position which the buoy has in the WGS84 chart
datum. Therefore, from the point of view of positional accuracy, this chart is suitable as the basis for
editing.
If the datum of the chart used here is not WGS84, the grid depicted is not displayed correctly; if you
set the cursor to a intersection in the coordinate system, the Cursor display shows a position differing
from the grid position.
In the case of some raster charts, there is no chart datum entered in the files. These charts are indicated
in the Chart Status field of the navigation data line on the CHARTPILOT by the entry Datum mism.
(= Datum mismatch) on a yellow background, and cannot be converted to WGS84. With these charts, the
grid is displayed correctly, but the chart contents do not have the WGS84 positions. These charts are
therefore unsuitable as a basis for the generation of tracks except in areas in which high positional accu-
racy is not important (e.g. on the open sea).
172 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e33.fm / 10.05.12
5.1.6 Generating Waypoints Alphanumerically in Text Mode
In the Tracks > Edit menu, switch on the Text mode function. The Text Mode menu shown on page 162
appears.
5.1.6.1 Preparation
1. Under Coordinate System (see Figure 5-3 on page 162), select the chart datum to which the posi-
tion data to be input refer.
WARNING:
When the Text mode is exited, the coordinate system that is active for
the Text mode is automatically set to the coordinate system that was
selected for the display of the electronic chart in the Navigation > Pres-
entation > Coordinate System menu. Therefore, whenever you call up the
Text Mode menu again, you must repeat step 1 (and 2).
You can avoid the repeated input of the coordinate system that is active for the Text mode as
follows: For the duration of the track generation process, for the display of the electronic chart
you should set the coordinate system to which the position data to be input refer.
2. Under Coordinate System, select the projection in which the position data to be input exist or in
which the display of the position data in the Text Mode menu is to take place.
3. If the waypoint parameters which you need for your work are displayed in the waypoint list, you can
now begin to generate the waypoints 1). Otherwise, you should first configure the waypoint list in a
suitable form.
Configuring the Waypoint List

In the waypoint list, all waypoints generated are listed. In this list, not only the waypoint number but also
all waypoint data can be displayed, but not all at the same time. It is therefore necessary to define which
data are to be displayed:
1. After pressing of Columns, the menu shown in Figure 5-9 appears:
There,
- under Configured, the parameters whose data are displayed in the waypoint list are listed in
the order in which they are displayed;
- under Available, all other waypoint parameters whose data can be displayed in the waypoint
list are listed.
In the following, the designations used in the Columns menu are shown on the left, and those used
in the headline of the waypoint list are shown beside them.
1) If parameterisation of the coordinate system for special tasks has been selected at service level, you must choose beforehand under Coor-
dinate System the projection in which the position data to be input are available or in which the display of the position data is to take place
in the Text Mode menu.
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 173

b_cp_e33.fm / 10.05.12
Waypoint data whose parameters were selected in the Tracks > Edit > Text
Mode > Columns menu for display in the waypoint list
Starts the printing of the track list
(listing of waypoint data for all
waypoints - see page 191; menu
see Figure 5-15 on page 191).
Calls up the Tracks > Edit >

Text Mode > Columns menu;
(see Figure 5-9 on page 175),
in which it is possible to specify
the parameters whose data are
to be displayed in the waypoint
list and printed out in the track
list.
Stores the marked Deletes the marked Before the waypoint marked last, this
waypoints as waypoints waypoints and stores them inserts the last waypoints that were
that are to be copied. in the copying memory. either deleted or marked with Copy.
Fig. 5-8 The waypoint list in the Text Mode menu.
Control Mode CM Track control mode

Course Limit CrsL Course limit
Date Date Date on which one of the items of waypoint data was modified last
Distance Dist Distance from the last waypoint
Economy Ec Rudder economy
Owner ID Owner ID Administration Owner and Administration ID
Planned Speed PlSp Planned Speed
Position 1) Latitude Waypoint position
Longitude
Profile Speed PrSp Profile Speed
Radius Rad Radius
Remark Remark Remark about the waypoint
ROT (PlSp) ROT Pl The maximum ROT that occurs at the Planned Speed
Sail Mode SM Sailing mode
Track Track Direction of the track segment starting at the last waypoint
Track Distance TrkDst Distance from the first waypoint (sum of the distances between the
waypoints)
Track Limit TrkL Track limit
Type Type Arrival attribute and parameter point attribute
2. Under Available, mark the parameters that are to be displayed, and by pressing Add>> enter them
under Configured. If there is no parameter marked under Configured, the entry takes place at the
last position; thus, the parameter concerned is then displayed on the left in the waypoint list. If there
are one or more parameters marked under Configured, the entry takes place before these markers.
1) If parameterisation of the coordinate system for special tasks has been selected at service level, selection of Position causes a display of
the waypoint position in the coordinates corresponding to the projection that was input under Coordinate System in the Text Mode menu.
In the Columns menu, the following are then available in addition:
Position GEO = waypoint position stated in geographical coordinates
Position GK = waypoint position stated in Gauss-Krueger coordinates
Position UTM = waypoint position stated in UTM coordinates
174 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e33.fm / 10.05.12
3. Under Configured, mark the parameters that are not to be displayed, and by pressing <<Remove
delete them under Configured (and enter them under Available).
4. The configuration which existed when Columns was pressed can be re-established by means of
Reset.
5. Complete the configuration process by pressing the OK button.
Figure 5-9 shows a configuration which can be recommended for the alphanumeric generation of
waypoints. Figure 5-8 shows the corresponding display of the waypoint list.
Transfers the parameters marked Transfers the parameters marked in

in Available to Configured. Configured to Available.
These parameters are contained in

These parameters are not the waypoint list (in the order listed
contained in the waypoint list. and only insofar as there is space
in the waypoint list).
Activates the settings of this Re-establishes the configu- Closes the menu without activa-
menu; the menu is closed. ration that existed when this tion of the new settings.
menu was called up.
Fig. 5-9 The Tracks > Edit > Text Mode > Columns menu
5.1.6.2 Generation of Waypoints
In the waypoint list, all waypoints generated are listed line-by-line. As in all lists, the lines (i.e. in this case,
the waypoints) can be marked here too. Waypoints are generated, deleted and copied by performing
marking in the waypoint list and by then pressing the appropriate function button. Editing, i.e. modifying
the waypoint data, is done not in the waypoint list but in the input area situated below it.
If there is a line marked in the waypoint list, you can call up a small menu by pressing the MORE
key. If you then click the menu item Show in Chart, the electronic chart appears with the marked
point as the centre. (Return with Text Mode)
For details of editing of the waypoint data, see page 180.
Generating the First Waypoint in a New Track

There is a blank line marked in the waypoint list. Within the Waypoint-xxxx frame, the number 0001 is
displayed, i.e.:
1. Input the waypoint position.
2. We recommend inputting a remark about the waypoint, e.g. the name of the waypoint. This remark
is intended to help you to identify the waypoint during the subsequent processing. It then not only
appears in this Text Mode menu but for voyage preparation it can also be displayed and printed in
the time planning lists.
3. If you want to use the sailing mode Great Circle, you should input this value now.
4. If you want to use the track control mode To Waypoint, you should input this value now.
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 175

b_cp_e33.fm / 10.05.12
5. By pressing of the Enter button (see Figure 5-3 on page 162), the first waypoint is now generated
with the data that were input. It appears in the waypoint list with the waypoint number 0001.
(Waypoint numbers are allocated automatically by the program.)
Generating Another Waypoint behind the Last One

1. In the waypoint list, mark the line below the last waypoint. The data displayed in the input area for
this new waypoint are a copy of the data of the waypoint that was previously marked last.
2. Correct the waypoint position and the remark about the waypoint (see above).
3. Press the Enter button. The new waypoint that is thus generated is displayed in the waypoint list.
The next (blank) line is marked.
By successive repetition of processes 2 and 3, all waypoints of the track can now be generated.
Inserting a New Waypoint before a Waypoint

1. In the waypoint list, mark the waypoint before which the additional waypoint is to be inserted. The
data of the waypoint marked are displayed in the input area.
2. Correct the waypoint position and the remark about the waypoint (see above).
3. Press the Insert button (see Figure 5-3 on page 162). The new waypoint that is thus generated is
displayed in the waypoint list. All waypoints situated behind it are automatically renumbered 1).
Deletion of Waypoints
In the waypoint list, mark waypoints that are to be deleted, and press the Delete button. The remaining
waypoints are automatically renumbered.
Inserting Deleted Waypoints

In the waypoint list, mark the waypoint before which the deleted waypoints are to be inserted, and press
the Paste button. The waypoints that were deleted last with the aid of the Delete button or were copied
with the aid of the Copy button are inserted.
Copying of Waypoints
1. In the waypoint list, mark the waypoints that are to be copied, and press the Copy button.
2. In the waypoint list, mark the waypoint before which the waypoints to be copied are to be inserted,
and press the Paste button. The waypoints to be copied are then inserted.
Taking Over Waypoints from an Existing Track

1. Under Track in the input field Name (see Figure 5-3 on page 162), note the name of the track which
you are currently processing.
2. If the track from which the waypoints are to be copied is not yet loaded: Under Catalogs in the
Tracks > Load menu, click the catalog to which the track is allocated, under Tracks click the desired
track, load the track by pressing the OK button, and call up the Tracks > Edit menu.
3. Press Select; under Loaded Tracks click the track from which the waypoints are to be copied; and
leave the menu by pressing the OK button. (If you have just performed step 2, you now have to
press Text Mode again.) In the waypoint list, mark the waypoints that are to be copied, and press
the Copy button.
1)
When you press the Insert button, it gets the default frame. After that, the Enter key acts like the Insert button. If you want to insert further
waypoints at the same place, you can then take the Enter key instead of the Insert button.
176 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e33.fm / 10.05.12
4. Press Select; under Loaded Tracks click the track into which the waypoints are to be copied (you
noted its name in step 1; and leave the menu by pressing the OK button.
5. In the waypoint list, mark the waypoint before which the waypoints to be copied are to be inserted,
and press the Paste button. The waypoints to be copied are then inserted.
When the Copy button (and also the Delete button) is pressed, the waypoints marked in the
waypoint list are written into the waypoint copying memory; the old content of the waypoint copying
memory is overwritten. With the Paste button, the content of the waypoint copying memory is always
inserted at the place marked in the waypoint list. The last content of the waypoint copying memory
is not deleted until the CHARTPILOT is switched off.
Taking Over All Waypoints from an Existing Track

1. If the track whose waypoints are to be copied is not yet loaded: Under Catalogs in the Tracks >
Load menu, click the catalog to which the track is allocated, under Tracks click the desired track,
load the track by pressing the OK button, and call up the Tracks > Edit menu.
2. Under Catalogs in the Tracks > Edit > Merge menu, mark the catalog to which the track whose
waypoints are to be copied is allocated. Then, under Tracks, mark the desired track.
3. Leave the Merge menu by pressing the OK button. As a result, all waypoints (including all waypoint
data) of the track marked in the Merge menu are copied behind the last waypoint.
Taking Over Waypoints from a Waypoint File

1. In the waypoint list, mark the waypoint before which the waypoints to be taken over are to be
inserted.
2. Press the Compose button (see Figure 5-3 on page 162). In the menu (see Figure 5-10) which then
appears, the waypoints of the loaded waypoint-file are listed. (If the input fields Owner, From ID and
To ID are set differently from the settings shown in Figure 5-10, it might be that not all waypoints are
listed; see page 178.)
3. In the list, mark the waypoints that are to be copied, and press the Copy to Track button. The
waypoints that are to be copied are then inserted in the waypoint list of the track.
In the case of the waypoints of the waypoint file, the waypoint parameter sailing mode is gener-
ally set to Rhumb Line, and cannot be set to Great Circle until after take-over into the track.
Reversing the Direction of the Entire Track

In the Tracks > Edit menu, press the Reverse button. As a result, the first waypoint becomes the last
waypoint, the second one becomes the second-last one, and so on, i.e. the track can now be sailed in
the opposite direction. The assignment of the waypoint data to the waypoints is automatically inter-
changed so that the same values are applicable on the same track segments (see A s s i g n m e n t o f t h e
W a y p o i n t D a t a t o t h e T r a c k S e g m e n t s on page 159):
- Profile Speed, Planned Speed and Waypoint Notes are entered at the next waypoint 1).
- Sailing mode, track control mode, Rudder economy, course limit and track limit are entered at the
preceding waypoint.
All other waypoint data remain unchanged.
WARNING:
After reversal of the track, it is necessary to check carefully whether the
existing data are correct for the new sailing direction as well.
1) This refers to the situation after reversal.
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 177

b_cp_e33.fm / 10.05.12
In traffic separation zones, for example, the waypoint positions must be changed, the waypoint notes
might have to be assigned to a different waypoint, speeds during arrival and departure are different,
and so on.
USEFUL INFORMATION
Only the waypoints of the owner entered here are listed Only those waypoints whose ID's lie in the
(after Apply Filter has been pressed). If the waypoints of number range defined here are listed
all owners are to be listed, an asterisk (*) must be input. (after Apply Filter has been pressed).
Press so that the entries made

under Owner, From ID and To ID
have an effect on the list.
After Apply Filter has been pressed, all

waypoints of the loaded waypoint-file
- which are allocated to the owner entered
above under Owner and
- which have an ID lying in the number range
defined by the values entered under From ID
and To ID
are listed here.
Inserts the marked waypoints in the track Leaves the menu without transferring
before the waypoint marked last in the of the marked waypoints to the track.
waypoint list of the Text Mode menu.
Fig. 5-10 The Tracks > Edit > Text Mode > Compose menu
Filtering Waypoints of a Waypoint File

All waypoints contained in a waypoint file are allocated to an owner.
Each waypoint is identified by means of a number called an ID, which was allocated per owner during
generation of the waypoint file.
In the Tracks > Edit > Text Mode > Compose menu, it is possible to input under Filter whether all
waypoints contained in the waypoint file are to be mentioned in the list situated under it, or only those of
a particular owner, and whether, for the selected owner, all waypoints or only those within a particular ID
number range are to appear in the list.
All waypoints contained in the waypoint file are listed if an asterisk * is entered under Owner, the number
0000 is entered under From ID, and the number 9999 is entered under To ID. To enable the settings in
these three input fields to have an effect, the Apply Filter button must be pressed.
5.1.7 Generating Waypoints with the Digitizer
With the digitizer, you can generate waypoints regardless of whether the Graphic mode or the Text mode
is switched on in the Tracks > Edit menu. The digitizer cannot be used to move or delete waypoints.
178 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e33.fm / 10.05.12
It is not essential but nevertheless usually very useful to set the coordinate system for editing to the one
used in the (paper) chart situated on the digitizer (see pages 96 and 173).
If you are using the Graphic mode, you should switch on the digitizer cursor. In the chart area, the digi-
tizer cursor indicates the current geographical position of the digitizer pointer on the (paper) chart cali-
brated there.
Before you generate the first waypoint of the track by means of the digitizer, you should make certain that
the chart has been calibrated correctly. To do this, position the digitizer pointer on a coordinate cross (if
possible, not one that was used as a reference point) and compare these coordinates with the presenta-
tion on the Digitizer Cursor display.
If the positions are not in agreement with one another, check the set coordinate systems (the coordinate
system of the (paper) chart is marked in the Peripheral Devices > Digitizer > Coordinate System menu)
and, if necessary, repeat the setting-up of the chart on the digitizer.
Switching the Display of the Digitizer Cursor On and Off

In the Peripheral Devices > Digitizer menu, the display of the digitizer cursor can be switched on and off
by pressing the Digitizer Cursor button. You thus have the possibility of checking the digitizer-generated
waypoints and other objects at the paper chart in relation to their presence in the electronic chart.
WARNING:
If shoals or hazardous objects are not shown on the electronic chart, the
navigation should only be based on the paper chart.
Switching the Digitizer Cursor Display On and Off

With the Numerical Position function, you can switch on and off the presentation of the Digitizer Cursor
display (contains the numerical indication of the digitizer cursor position).
Generating the First and Subsequent Waypoints

Click the waypoint position on the (paper) chart, then click the next waypoint position, and so on. Each
click generates a waypoint at the end of the track and at the same time enters the cursor position as the
waypoint position. The resulting track is displayed in the chart area if the Graphic mode is switched on.
Clicking on the (paper) chart: Position the digitizer pointer exactly at the point that is to be clicked,
and briefly press the 0 key of the digitizer pointer.
If you want to use the sailing mode Great Circle or the track control mode To Waypoint, it is advis-
able to edit these data immediately after generation of the first waypoint.
Whether you also enter the remark about a waypoint after every generation of a waypoint, or
whether you do so subsequently during editing of the waypoint data, depends (for example) on the
spatial configuration of the or on the CHARTPILOT relative to the digitizer, and is a matter for you
to decide.
Inserting One or More Consecutive Waypoints

Graphic mode is switched on:
Switch on Set/Continue, and on the screen click the track line between the waypoints between which the
waypoint is to be inserted. Click the waypoint position on the (paper) chart. Behind this waypoint, further
waypoints can be inserted by clicking.
The clicking of the track line can be cancelled by pressing the MORE key.
Text mode is switched on:
In the waypoint list, mark the waypoint before which the waypoint is to be inserted. Click the waypoint
position on the (paper) chart. Behind this waypoint, further waypoints can be inserted by clicking.
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 179

b_cp_e33.fm / 10.05.12
Generating Further Waypoints behind the Last Waypoint or before the First Waypoint
Switch on Set/Continue and click the last or first waypoint. On the (paper) chart, click the position of the
waypoint that is to be generated, then click the next waypoint position, and so on.
In the waypoint list, mark the last or first waypoint. On the (paper) chart, click the position of the waypoint
that is to be generated, then click the next waypoint position, and so on.
USEFUL INFORMATION
Switching Off the Digitizer, Deleting the Reference Points

If you no longer wish to use the digitizer for editing, but at the latest when you remove the paper chart
from the digitizer or when you switch the digitizer off, you have to delete the reference points. This occurs
when, in the Peripheral Devices > Digitizer menu, you press the Clear Setup button and appropriately
answer the safeguard question which then appears.
5.1.8 Editing Waypoint Data
In the Tracks > Edit menu, switch on the function Text mode. The Text Mode menu shown in Figure 5-
3 on page 162 appears.
In the waypoint list, all waypoints generated are listed line-by-line. The data of the waypoint marked last
appear in the input area situated under the waypoint list - see Figure 5-11 on page 181. Only there can
the waypoint data be edited (input and modified). In the frame Waypoint-xxxx, the number of the
waypoint whose data are displayed in the input area and can be edited is shown.
After you have generated the waypoints of the track, you can either
- edit the values of one or more thematically interrelated parameters in separate runs for all waypoints,
or
- edit all waypoint data for each waypoint one after another in one run.
Furthermore, in a simple manner, you can simultaneously assign the same values to several waypoints.
Editing the Values of a Parameter for All Waypoints

1. In the waypoint list, mark the first waypoint that is to be processed.
2. In the input area, press the desired button
or
3. mark the input field in which a value is to be entered or modified.
4. Enter or modify the value in the input field.
In these input fields, only characters which are meaningful for the parameter concerned are
accepted.
Wherever separating characters are prescribed (e.g. the colon, the decimal point and the blank
in the case of Lat and Lon), they are set automatically.
Speeds, limits and the radius can be entered as whole numbers or as decimal fractions.
As the decimal character, a point must be used. Numbers outside the permissible value range
are not accepted.
5. Press the Enter 1) key. As a result, the value that is input is taken over into the track file, and a
switch-over takes place to the data set of the next waypoint.
180 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e33.fm / 10.05.12
6. If necessary, mark in the waypoint list the next waypoint at which the parameter is to be modified or
entered.
7. By repeating processes 2 or 3, 4 and (if appropriate) 5, enter the values of the parameter for the
remaining relevant waypoints.
Number of the waypoint whose data are displayed in

the input area and can be edited there. Makes it possible to change the geographical
position by input of the direction and distance by
which the displayed position is to be changed.
For details of the waypoint data, see text.
- Takes over the values displayed Before the waypoint marked last Makes it possible to take over
in the input area into the track in the waypoint list, this inserts a waypoints from the loaded waypoint-
file, and switches over to the waypoint with the data shown in file; menu see Figure 5-10 on page
next waypoint. the input area (see page 176. 178.
- Generates the first waypoint
(see page 175).
Fig. 5-11 The input area in the Text Mode menu
Editing All Parameters One after Another in One Run for All Waypoints
1. Mark the first point in the waypoint list.
or
4. Enter or modify the value in the input field (for notes, see above).
5. One after another, mark the input fields in which a value is to be entered or modified, and enter or
modify the value concerned.
6. Press the Enter key. As a result, all of the values that are input are taken into the track file and
switching forward takes place to the data set of the next waypoint.
7. By repeating the processes 5 and 6, enter the waypoint data of the remaining waypoints.
Assigning the Same Values to Several Waypoints Simultaneously

1. In the waypoint list, mark all waypoints to which you wish to assign the same values in one opera-
tion.
1)
if the Enter button has the default frame. Otherwise, the first time, you must press the Enter button instead of the Enter key. As a result,
the Enter button gets the default frame and the Enter key then acts like the Enter button.
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 181

b_cp_e33.fm / 10.05.12

or
4. Enter or modify the value in the input field (for notes, see above).
5. One after another, mark the other input fields in which a value is to be entered or modified, and enter
or modify the value concerned (for notes, see above).
6. Press the Enter key. As a result, the menu Edit Several Waypoints is opened (see Figure 5-12 on
page 182). There, the parameters which you have just entered or modified are switched on. You can
modify the selection of parameters by clicking.
7. When you press the OK button in the Edit Several Waypoints menu, for all parameters that are
switched on there the values displayed in the input area are entered in all marked waypoints.
Parameters:
(Remark about the waypoint)
(Arrival attribute and parameter attribute)
(Sailing mode)
(Track control mode)
In all marked waypoints, this enters the values that are displayed for the switched-
on parameters in the input area.
Switches on the parameters that were switched on when this menu was called up.
Closes the menu without modification of the waypoint data.
This menu appears only if the same values are to be assigned to several
waypoints at the same time; see page 181.
Fig. 5-12 The Tracks > Edit > Text Mode > Edit Several Waypoints menu
Details of the Waypoint Data
Waypoint Number
Meaning: Serial number within the track; is automatically allocated consecutively by the program, begin-
ning at 1. It clearly identifies the waypoint within the track. It appears as a reference marker in all lists, in
the chart area, and in all other displays of the system which refer to the individual waypoint.
Display in the input area: Behind Waypoint in the Waypoint-xxxx frame
Remark about the Waypoint

Meaning: Helps to identify the waypoint during the subsequent processing. It can be displayed or printed
out in all lists, and can be shown in most displays of the system which refer to the individual waypoint.
Appears under Details in the Info window (together with other waypoint data). As a remark, the name (for
example) of the waypoint can be entered.
Editing: In the input field in the Waypoint-xxxx frame
182 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e33.fm / 10.05.12
Arrival Attribute
Meaning: Only waypoints for which the Arrival Attribute is set can be used as arrival point.
The passage plan can be generated in such a way that only waypoints having the Arrival Attribute are
contained in it.
Editing: Under Arrival in the Waypoint-xxxx frame
Parameter Point Attribute

Meaning: With the aid of a waypoint for which the Parameter Point Attribute is set, new values for the
parameters
- Profile Speed
- Planned Speed
- Course limit
- Track limit
- Rudder economy
can be set within a straight track segment.
Editing: Under Change Parameters Only in the Waypoint-xxxx frame
Special features during editing: Parameter points should not be generated until editing of the waypoint
data takes place. If a waypoint that has already been generated is to be converted retrospectively into a
parameter point, all values other than those of the named parameters are deleted after the pressing of
Change Parameters Only, and the position is changed so that it lies on a straight line between the last
waypoint and the next one.
Waypoint Position
Meaning: Geographical position of the waypoint
Editing: In the Geographic Position 1) frame.
Special features during editing: The quadrants are input with N, S, E, W; + and – are accepted too.
A position can be moved, with input of distance and direction. To do this, press Adjust; in the menu
which then opens, input the values by which the waypoint is to move; and leave the menu by pressing
the OK button.
Sailing Mode
Meaning: This specifies whether the track segment between this waypoint and the next waypoint is to be
computed, displayed and used as the basis for steering with the TRACKPILOT and displayed as a Great
Circle or as a Rhumb Line. The default setting defined by the program is the Rhumb Line.
Editing: Under Sail in the Sail Control frame.
Track Control Mode

Meaning: This parameter is used for automatic parameterisation of the TRACKPILOT. It specifies
whether, in the track segment between this waypoint and the next waypoint if the ship is not situated on
the pre-planned track, the waypoint is to be approached directly (To Waypoint) or whether the pre-
planned track is to be approached first, after which the ship will begin to approach the waypoint (To
Track). The default setting defined by the program is To Track.
Editing: Under To in the Sail Control frame.
1) The names of the input fields depend on the projection selected under Coordinate System.
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 183

b_cp_e33.fm / 10.05.12
Radius
Meaning: Radius with which the manoeuvre is to be performed
Editing: Under Radius in the Sail Control frame
Waypoint Notes
Meaning:
- Here, you can input information and instructions for the nautical personnel, which are displayed in
the Waypoint Data display of the radar indicators while the ship is approaching this waypoint when
sailing along the track. The consecutive waypoint notes can be used as an automatic notebook.
- In addition, lowest line is printed out in the passage plan.
This text appears under Details in the Info window (together with other waypoint data).
- Waypoint Notes can be printed as a complete list of a track
Editing: In the input field Waypoint Notes
In the Waypoint Notes window you can "cut and paste" the text for the use in the same track for another
waypoint:
1. Select the line which includes the note to be copied.
2. Click with the more key into the Waypoint Notes window (opens the virtual keyboard).
3. Select a new line where the note shall be copied to.
4. Click ok in the virtual keyboard.
5. Click ENTER in the track editor.
6. select the line again for modification of the copied text.
Waypoint notes cannot be displayed in the waypoint list.
Planned Speed
Meaning: This is the speed that is planned for the track segment between the last waypoint and this
waypoint. While the ship is sailing along the track, the Arrival Speed is computed on the basis of the
Planned Speed values. The Arrival Speed is the speed with which the ship will have to sail in order to
reach the destination at the planned estimated time of arrival and which is used as the speed setting by
the SPEEDPILOT in Arrival mode - see page 233. Because the Arrival Speed is displayed in the Track/
Schedule display, it can be adopted as the set value for the manual speed setting even without a SPEED-
PILOT.
Because it is possible for you at any time to limit the Arrival Speed, it is recommended that, as the
Planned Speed, the maximum speeds that are permissible and possible should be entered. While the
ship is sailing along the track, you can generally limit the speed to an economical value and can increase
the limit if a delay occurs.
Editing: Under Planned Speed in the To Waypoint Use: frame
Profile Speed
Meaning: The Profile Speed is used by the SPEEDPILOT in Profile mode as the setting for the track
segment between the last waypoint and this waypoint. By input of the Profile Speed, in conjunction with
the SPEEDPILOT you thus have the possibility of sailing along the track with a predefined speed profile.
Editing: Under Profile Speed in the To Waypoint Use: frame
184 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e33.fm / 10.05.12
Course Limit
Meaning: Alarm limit of the TRACKPILOT for the difference between set course and actual course. It also
influences the correction performed by the TRACKPILOT if the ship deviates from the track and the
ECDIS monitoring, see Section 4.4.
Editing: Under Course Limit in the At Waypoint Change: frame
Track Limit
Meaning: Alarm limit of the TRACKPILOT for the deviation from the set track. The track limit also influ-
ences
- the possibility of switching the TRACKPILOT over to Track mode,
- the control precision of the TRACKPILOT in Track mode,
- filtering and monitoring of the external position-data,
- the ECDIS monitoring, see Section 4.4
- the checking of the System Track (see page 230),
- and the checking of the edited track (see page 185).
Editing: Under Track Limit in the At Waypoint Change: frame
Rudder Economy
Meaning: Optimization of the TRACKPILOT between precision of control and frequency of rudder move-
ment, depending on the sea state and on the wind. To simplify manual adjustments during use of the
TRACKPILOT, this value should only be entered for the first waypoint and at the boundary between a
protected area (harbour, river, canal) and an unprotected area.
Editing: Under Economy in the At Waypoint Change: frame
5.1.9 Checking of Tracks
A necessary prerequisite for achieving the required safety in the use of the track is that, before being
used, the track is carefully checked. This check should take place immediately after the track has been
created or changed, i.e. before storage.
this check, the track must be subjected to a geometrical check and a check against the electronic
chart and the User Chart Objects. These checks take place one after another under program control.
Furthermore, the sailing times resulting from the speeds entered can be checked; this check too takes
place under program control.
5.1.9.1 Geometrical Check
This check takes place independently of the electronic chart used. However, because the geometrical
check, if successful, is followed by the check against the electronic chart, without any interruption, then
before the start of the check against the electronic chart it is necessary to create the conditions for the
execution of the check against the electronic chart and the User Chart Objects; see page 187.
Starting the Check

The check is started by pressing the Check button in the menu Tracks > Edit. In the Check Track dialog
box which then opens up, the following messages may appear as results of the geometrical check:
Error: [Waypoint No.]: Short radius.
A radius is too short, i.e. shorter than the limit value that was set for it at service level.
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 185

b_cp_e33.fm / 10.05.12
If no radius was input at the first waypoint, the program uses 0.0 NM as the input value, i.e. it reacts
as if too short a radius had been input.
Error: [Waypoint No.]: Long radius.
A radius is too long, i.e. the distance to the next waypoint is so small and the radii are so long that the
curve planned in this way can probably not be executed at this waypoint (see also page 61).
Error: [Waypoint No.]: Max ROT exceeded.
The rate of turn is too high, i.e. the ROT resulting from the radius and from the Planned Speed is larger
than the limit value that was set for it at service level.
Note: [Waypoint No.]: Parameter point within curve.
There is a parameter point situated in the curve area.
To make certain that the changes made by means of the parameter point are indeed effective in the
desired track section, parameter points should basically lie outside the curve area.
During the geometrical check, the track is evaluated statistically. The result appears after pressing of the
Extreme Values button in the Check Track dialog box. In the dialog box which then opens up, the
following extreme values are displayed, together with the waypoint at which they occur:
- Largest radius
- Smallest radius
- Largest course-change
- Largest rate of turn referenced to the Planned Speed (this information covers only the track
sections for which a Planned Speed has been defined).
- Shortest track-section, taking account of the planned radii. (Too small a value leads to the error
message Long radius.)
No. of checked track Number of errors found Extreme values of the checked track
Result of
check
Status Closes the Closes the

Message dialog box. dialog box.
Fig. 5-13 The Check Track dialog box and the Extreme Values dialog box
Correcting the Track

If a message is marked and then clicked with the MORE key, the following can be performed in the
context menu:
- For the purpose of editing, you can switch directly into Text mode by means of Edit Waypoint. In
Text mode, the waypoint to which the message refers is already marked.
- By means of Show in Chart, you can switch into Graphic mode; the waypoint to which the message
refers is situated at the centre of the chart area.
If appropriate, modify the track and start the check again.
186 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e33.fm / 10.05.12
Continuing/Ending the Check

If none of the messages mentioned appears, the check against the electronic chart and the User Chart
Objects starts automatically. If the status message Track checked. No errors found. appears, the track
has been checked successfully.
5.1.9.2 Check against the Electronic Chart and the User Chart Objects
Preparation
1. In the menu Chart > Depth Contour, set the safety contour correctly; see page 102.
2. Set the type of the electronic chart against which the check is to be performed.
3. In the Chart menu, switch on the display of the User Chart Objects.
4. Adjust the range setting so that cells of the electronic chart or raster charts which contain the nauti-
cally relevant information are displayed.
5. If a vector chart is used, check whether cells having the appropriate navigational purpose are
present for the entire track, at least over the width corresponding to the contained track limit:
- Correctly set the display of the objects that are to be displayed; see page 98.
- With the Set Center function, sail along the track.
If the Own Chart is used, it must also be ensured that it contain all nautically relevant information.
For the track areas which are not covered by suitable cells, all nautically relevant objects must be
marked by means of own safety lines or danger highlights.
To check this, the raster chart can be used – see step 6. If there is no suitable raster chart available,
the check must be performed manually against the paper chart. For this purpose, the planned track,
including the track limits, must be entered in the paper chart and checked on that chart.
WARNING:
Vector charts which have not been approved or updated might contain
errors. Successful checking of the track on the basis of such vector
charts does not guarantee that the ship can sail safely along the track.
6. If raster charts are used, then 1) all nautically relevant objects must be marked by means of own
safety lines or danger highlights for the entire track, at least over the width corresponding to the track
limit. For this purpose, sail along the track by means of the Set Center function.
WARNING:
The checks mentioned in steps 5 and 6, and the editing of the own chart
and own safety lines and danger highlights, must be performed with
extreme care.
7. If necessary, edit any missing objects as own safety lines or danger highlights, and repeat the prep-
aration procedure.
1) This is prescribed for ships with DNV approval.
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 187

b_cp_e33.fm / 10.05.12
Performing the Check

The check begins automatically after a successful geometrical check; see page 185.
In this check, the geographical shape of the track 1) is compared with the data of the vector chart and with
the User Chart Objects own safety line and danger highlight.
For the execution of the check, the display settings mentioned under Preparation are not important.
What is important is the selection of the type of electronic chart and the setting of the safety contour.
For the check, the cells with the highest precision are used as the basis. They might therefore differ
from the cells used for the display. Because of this, messages might occur which initially contradict
the presentation of the track in the vector chart 2).
In the Check Track dialog box, the following messages can appear as results:
Error: Leg to [waypoint No.]: [object]
Violation at: [position]
The object mentioned is shallower than the set safety contour (see page 102). The track segment
touches or covers the object before the stated waypoint at the position mentioned.
The objects which lead to this error message are the same objects as those which, in the case of
ECDIS monitoring, trigger the SAFETY CONTOUR alarm or the USER CHART OBJECT alarm; see
page 110.
Error: Leg to [waypoint No.]: No charts of type [type of vector chart]
For the track segment before the waypoint mentioned (or for part of that segment), the program does not
find a cell of the vector chart having the navigational purpose being searched for. The nautical check is
therefore incomplete if, in the area, not all relevant objects exist as own safety lines or danger highlights.
Warning: Leg to [waypoint No.]: [object]
Violation at: [position]
The object mentioned is potentially dangerous. The track segment touches or covers the object before
the stated waypoint at the position mentioned.
The objects which lead to this message are the same objects as those which, in the case of ECDIS
monitoring, trigger the OBJECT OF INTEREST alarm; see page 107.
Correcting the Track

If a message is marked and then clicked with the MORE key, the following can be performed in the
context menu:
- For the purpose of editing, you can switch directly into Text mode by means of Edit Waypoint. In
Text mode, the waypoint to which the message refers is already marked.
- By means of Show in Chart, you can switch into Graphic mode; the waypoint to which the message
refers is situated at the centre of the chart area.
If the line with the position information is marked, the position of the violation appears at the centre of the
chart area after Show in Chart.
If appropriate, modify the track and start the check again.
1) The track considered here also includes the area with the width corresponding to the track limits contained in the pre-planned track.
2) To clarify supposed contradictions of this kind, it is helpful to switch to a different range setting and to use the Info box.
188 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e33.fm / 10.05.12
5.1.9.3 Computation of Sailing Times
It is possible to compute the sailing times that occur if the track is sailed at Planned Speed or at a
constant speed, and to compute what the effect of a speed limit would be. This is done when you
generate a passage plan without printing it out - see page 235.
You can also have the sailing times computed for the case in which the track is sailed at the Profile
Speed. You obtain these values when you are preparing the printing of the passage plan and passage
list and configure TTG Profile Mode and ETA Profile Mode for the waypoint list - see page 238.
5.1.10 Completing the Generation of the Track
The new or modified track must be stored together with a statement of the necessary administrative data
so that the data that are input will not be lost as soon as the CHARTPILOT (or the CHARTPILOT
program) is switched off. The details of this process depend upon whether the track has merely been
modified, or whether it has been generated as a completely new track, or whether it is generated on the
basis of an existing track.
Ending the Generation of a Completely New Track

In the Tracks > Edit menu, the Text mode must be switched on.
1. In the No. input field in the Track frame of the Text Mode menu, enter a new track number and
press the Enter key.
When specifying the track number, pay attention to the following points:
- Each track is assigned to a catalog. Within the catalog, the track is clearly identified by means
of the track number, i.e. within a catalog the same track number can only be assigned once.
- In all listings from which tracks can be selected, the tracks are listed together with a statement
of the track number in ascending order.
- Track numbers do not have to be assigned consecutively.
Before you specify the track number, you should therefore be certain which catalog you want to
assign the track to. For example, you can inspect the list of existing catalogs by looking under Cata-
logs in the Tracks > Edit > Merge menu. If you mark the relevant catalog there, all tracks that
already exist in the catalog are listed under Tracks, together with their numbers. (Leave the Merge
menu by pressing the MORE button!)
If you accidentally enter a track number that has already been assigned, your attention will be drawn
to this in good time.
2. In the Name input field in the Track frame, enter the track name and press the Enter key.
When specifying the track name, pay attention to the following points:
- In (almost) all listings, the track name is listed behind the track number.
- In many listings, only the first 13 characters of the track name appear.
3. You can press the Notes button and in the input field of the menu opened in this way you can make
notes about the track; later, you can at any time examine these notes at the same place. After editing
the notes, you must close the menu by pressing the OK button.
4. Storing the track: Under Catalogs in the Tracks > Edit > Store menu, mark the catalog in which
the track generated is to be entered. If you want to generate a new catalog, you can input under
Selected Catalog the name of the catalog that is to be generated.
In the Tracks > Edit > Store menu, press the OK button. If this menu is then closed, the track is
saved on the hard disk of the CHARTPILOT (and also on the hard disk of the MULTIPILOT, if
present). If, by means of step 1, you have input a track number that already exists in the catalog,
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 189

b_cp_e33.fm / 10.05.12
you will be asked whether the existing track is to be overwritten. Because, in the case described
here, the track is a new one, you must answer this question by pressing the No. button and by
entering a different track number (either as described in Text mode or in the No. input field in the
Tracks > Edit > Store menu).
While the TRACKPILOT is being operated in Track mode, no track can be put into storage
under the number of the System Track in the directory of the System Track.
Number under which the track selected for editing is

stored; this number can be changed here.
Name of the selected track; this name can be changed here.
In this list of existing catalogs, mark the

catalog in which the track is to be stored.
Catalog in which the track is stored.

By overwriting with a new name, a new catalog is generated.
Activates the settings of this menu; the menu is exited.
Leaves the menu without activation of the new settings.
Fig. 5-14 The Tracks > Edit > Store menu
Ending the Generation of a Track which you Generate by Copying and Modifying an Existing
Track
In the main memory, by the selection process described in Section 5.1.3 (see page 164), you have
already generated a copy of the existing track. The modifications which you have made were made in
this copy. Therefore, the administrative data of the track used as the basis must not be taken over,
because otherwise the track used as the basis would be overwritten by the modified copy.
1. Switch on Text mode, alter the track number in the No. input field in the Track frame and press
the Enter key.
2. Also modify the track name and (if applicable) the notes - see above, processes 2.
3. Store the track - see above, step 4.
Ending the Modification of a Track

In the main memory, by the selection process described in Section 5.1.3 (see page 164), you have
already generated a copy of the existing track. The modifications which you have made were made in
this copy. The track stored on the hard disk must now be overwritten by this copy: do not alter the track
number; call up the Tracks > Edit > Store menu; do not alter the catalog; and close the menu by pressing
the OK button. A question then appears about overwriting of the existing track file; answer this question
by pressing the Yes button.
190 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e33.fm / 10.05.12
5.1.11 Printing Out Track Data in List Form
The waypoint data of all waypoints of a track can be printed out in list form.
You have a choice between
- a standard list containing the following parameters (from left to right):
. Waypoint number
. Arrival attribute and parameter attribute
. Waypoint position, stated in geographical coordinates
. Sailing mode
. Track control mode
. Radius
. Planned Speed
. Remark about the waypoint
- and a list with a different configuration which you can specify yourself; the configuration selected for
the waypoint list in the Text Mode menu is used.
Preparing the Printing of the List (if still necessary)

1. Set the printer and the printer control (see page 73).
2. Loading a track: Under Catalogs in the Tracks > Load menu, click the catalog to which the track is
assigned, under Tracks click the track that is to be loaded, and leave the menu by pressing the OK
button.
3. Selecting a track: Under Loaded Track in the Tracks > Edit > Select menu, click the track that is to
be used as the basis, and leave the menu by pressing the OK button.
4. In the Tracks Edit menu, switch on the Text mode function.
Printing Out a Standard List

1. In the Text Mode menu, press the Print button. The Print menu appears:
2. Under Format, press the Standard button. By pressing the OK button, start the printing of the
standard list.
Prepares the printing of the list in standard configuration.
Prepares the printing of the list in the configuration of the waypoint list.
Prepares the printing of the Waypoint NOTES in the configuration of the waypoint list.
Printing takes place on this printer.
0 = no printer is selected.
Leaves the menu without a print-out taking place.
Starts the printing.
Fig. 5-15 The Tracks > Edit > Text Mode > Print menu
Printing Out the List in a Different Configuration

1. In accordance with the desired list, configure the waypoint list displayed in the Text Mode menu (see
page 173).
2. In the Text Mode menu, press the Print button. The Print menu appears.
3. Under Format, press the As Configured button. By pressing the OK button, start the printing of the
list.
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 191

b_cp_e33.fm / 10.05.12
5.1.12 Generating Waypoint Files
For waypoints that are needed frequently (e.g. approach buoys used in several tracks), it is also possible
to generate waypoint files from which, during generation of the tracks, the waypoint positions can be
transferred if necessary.
The loading and generation of waypoint files take place via the Tracks > Waypoint File menu. The proce-
dure involves the use of methods and operating sequences that are also used for the generation of
tracks.
Because you will probably not use waypoint files until you have acquired experience in the genera-
tion of tracks, the following description covers only those special features that occur during the
generation of the waypoint files.
Waypoint files consist of the following data:
- Administrative data (these data refer to the entire waypoint file)
- Number of the waypoint file
- Name of the waypoint file
- Catalog to which the waypoint file is assigned
- Last modified date, time
- Waypoint data
- Owner
- ID
- Waypoint position
- Remark about the waypoint
Waypoint files can be assigned to the same catalogs as those that also contain the tracks. The numbers
of the waypoint files can be assigned independently of the numbers of the tracks.
If several waypoint files are generated, it must be noted that, in contrast to tracks, only one waypoint
file at a time can be loaded, i.e. the content of only one waypoint file can be displayed.
The waypoints contained in a waypoint file have no relationship to one another; the sequence of the
waypoints within the file does not have any significance. However, the set of waypoints in a waypoint
file can be sorted into two levels:
- Owner is the upper level. It consists of a four-place alphanumerical code and can (for example) be
assigned to the person who generated the waypoint.
- ID is a four-figure number which can be assigned freely for each owner.
In the subdivision into owner and ID, it must be noted that, when the waypoint positions are being taken
over into a track, waypoints of any given owner and of any given ID number range can be selected by
means of a special filter function (see page 178).
192 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e33.fm / 10.05.12
Operating Instructions 5.2 Editing of User Chart Objects
Fig. 5-16 The Tracks > Waypoint File > Edit menu with the Text Mode menu
5.2 Editing of User Chart Objects
User Chart Objects can be edited on all CHARTPILOTs and all MULTIPILOTs of the system. There is
only one set of User Chart Objects in the system; edited data are automatically distributed system-wide,
i.e. stored on all hard disks and displayed when required. A CHARTPILOT or MULTIPILOT being shut-
down or off-line during editing, deleting or modifying of User Chart Objects will receive the new or modi-
fied data when it is online again.
5.2.1 General
The User Chart Objects can be added to the electronic charts. These objects are not tied to the type of
electronic chart used, and can be displayed independently of them on the CHARTPILOT and on the indi-
cators of the Radar Series.
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 193

b_cp_e33.fm / 10.05.12
5.2 Editing of User Chart Objects Operating Instructions
The following objects can be input into the system's database as User Chart Objects:
- Danger highlights: Areas used to mark danger areas and individual dangers. They appear as trans-
parent red areas with a thick red border.
- Own safety lines: Lines used to mark unsafe areas. They are displayed as orange lines provided
with hatching . The hatching points towards the unsafe area.
The danger highlights and the own safety lines are used in the same way as the safety contour of
the vector charts as a basis for ECDIS monitoring (see page 104) and for the checking of the
tracks (see page 185 and 230). Consequently, these important functions can also be implemented
when raster charts are used.
- Own MARPOL lines: Lines for the marking of areas that are relevant according to MARPOL 73/
78 1). These appear as dashed orange/green lines. They are used as a basis for chart monitoring
(see page 107).
- Anchor watch areas: These areas define anchoring zones that can be monitored (see page 111).
They appear as orange-bordered areas filled with orange anchor symbols.
- Feature areas: Used to display areas of any kind (without functions for ECDIS monitoring or for the
checking of tracks). They appear as transparent ochre areas with a brown border.
- Feature lines: Used to display lines of any kind (without functions for ECDIS monitoring or for the
checking of tracks). They appear as orange lines.
Feature areas and feature lines can each be provided with a name and a remark. The names appear
on the screen if (in the Chart menu) the display of text labels is switched on. The name and remark
can be viewed at any time in the Info box.
- Symbols: The most important symbols of the ENC can also be edited as User Chart Objects. They
differ graphically from the vector chart symbols by the additional (orange) marking .
- Text notes: Notes which are fixed at a particular geographical position and are marked there by
means of a symbol. The (orange) symbol ! is provided for the marking of danger information; the
(orange) symbol i is intended for all other notes. The notes appear at the symbol on the screen
if (in the Chart menu) the display of text labels is switched on. However, they can also be viewed at
any time in the Info box.
NAVTEX symbols and areas: 2) Geographical positions which are sometimes part of NAVTEX
messages can semi-automatically be transferred to user objects. Please refer to chapter 12-10. Their
presentation is comparable to the Text Notes (see above), but the symbol coming with NAVTEX
objects is a N .
The graphical NAVTEX objects are (in contrast to the other User Chart Objects) not distributed over
the entire system. They are shown only on the CHARTPILOT they have been created on. These
objects can easily be deleted by a INFO-click on the N object and then clicking on Delete in the
chart after opening the NAVTEX window.
Automatic Management of the User Chart Objects Files

User Chart Objects are stored in various files (see page 323), but the files are automatically stored and
called up for display.
Each input or change of the User Chart Objects is saved by the program immediately and automatically
on the hard disk drive. Therefore, the final storing too is omitted (in contrast to tracks and Own Charts).
The distribution of the new or changed data to the other items of equipment in the system takes place as
soon as the editing menu is exited.
On the other hand, because the editor cannot be exited without storing, it is not possible to recover
the old data after a change.
1) MARPOL 73/78 = The International Convention for the Prevention of Pollution of Ships, 1973
2) Only available if a NAVTEX receiver is connected to the radar system.
194 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e33.fm / 10.05.12
If there are several CHARTPILOTs and MULTIPILOTs in a system, the catalog structure of the User
Chart Object files, their file structure and the contents of the files are automatically kept identical on
all of the hard disk drives that exist there. As a result of this, there is a common stock of data in the
system, regardless of which CHARTPILOT or MULTIPILOT was used for editing.
Data Source
Electronic chart: If an officially approved electronic chart with a suitable scale exists for the area (ARCS
chart or ENC), this chart should be used to generate the objects. In the case of non-approved electronic
charts, the nautical safety of the planning must be checked by comparing with official (paper) charts.
WARNING:
ARCS charts whose coordinate systems are not known 1) may be used as
the basis of editing only in those geographical areas in which high accu-
racy of position is not important.
Paper chart: If neither a suitable electronic chart nor a digitizer is available, the positioning of the objects
takes place with the cursor and its displayed position only.
Preparation for Editing

Editing can take place at any time, both in Planning display mode and in Monitoring display mode.
1. Check to determine whether the electronic chart used is officially approved.
2. Switch on the display of the electronic chart (in the Chart menu, by means of Chart Visible).
Select the chart excerpt in such a way that the scale allows a graphic input with adequate accuracy.
You can also make this setting by marking the position on the (zoomed) world chart by means
of the Chart Maintenance subroutine, and switching back directly to the Navigation program;
see page 247.
3. If the system is equipped with a digitizer and the objects are to be inserted on the basis of a (paper)
chart, the digitizer must be set up beforehand in accordance with Section 5.1.4.
WARNING:
In the process of setting up on the digitizer, the projection, scale and
chart datum that are suitable for the chart used must definitely be
entered.
General Remarks about the Editor

Editing is performed in the menu Chart > Edit User Chart Objects. The menu can be opened only if this
menu is not open on any of the other items of equipment in the system 2).
By opening the menu Chart > Edit User Chart Objects (= start of the editor), the display of the User
Chart Objects is switched on.
Before insertion, all characteristics of the objects that are to be inserted are to be specified in the Set
Objects frame (except for the position). Insertion is then performed by clicking on the desired position.
The geographical coordinates are displayed at all times as the cursor position.
For the insertion of objects, the digitizer can additionally be used in the manner described for the
editing of tracks in Section 5.1.7.
In order to modify objects that already exist, the desired function is selected first of all in the frame
Modify Objects, and then the object to be modified is selected in the chart area by clicking on the object
that is to be changed. If, at the clicked position, there are several objects that can be modified by means
1) These are marked in the Chart Status field of the navigation data line by the entry Datum mism. on a yellow background.
2) User Chart Objects can be edited on any CHARTPILOT and MULTIPILOT of the system, but only on one equipment item at a time.
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 195

b_cp_e33.fm / 10.05.12
of the selected function, a context menu appears for the purpose of selecting the object that is to be modi-
fied. If Delete is selected, the context menu is always shown, in order to reduce the risk of accidental
deletion.
During the input and modifying of lines and areas, the cursor position is often joined to the adjacent line
points by means of a "rubber band" and the distance and direction of the cursor position are shown rela-
tive to the preceding line point. At any time, the "rubber band" represents the shape that would be caused
by clicking. By pressing of the MORE key, the cursor can be released from the "rubber band" and hence
from the object being edited.
Y
Example: Inserting a line point Z
X
— X — Y — Z — : Existing line
2.35NM
Distance and direction of the cursor as seen from point X; 251.3° Cursor
values are stated on the extension of the line from point X to the cursor.
Insertion of the object named
Modifying of individual User Chart Objects
Deletion of individual User Chart Objects
Fig. 5-17 The menu Chart > Edit User Chart Objects
USEFUL INFORMATION
Auxiliary Points Generated Automatically

At high latitudes, the following is applicable: If two set points of a line (including an area-bounding line)
are more than one degree of longitude apart, the line is automatically provided with auxiliary points (one
point per degree of longitude). The auxiliary points are not visible, but they fix the line at the geographical
position concerned.
196 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e33.fm / 10.05.12
Because edited lines are always straight, this characteristic leads to the fact that long lines near the pole
which intersect several degrees of longitude become curved lines when the projection is switched over
(Mercator/radar). Therefore, when editing is performed in the radar projection, approximate Great Circles
are created.
Generating User Chart Objects from Maps

When a map edited on the RADARPILOT 9xxx and on the MULTIPILOT 91xx is converted, the objects
contained in the map become User Chart Objects. For details, see Section 8.1.6.
5.2.2 Editing of Symbols
General Remarks about the Editor: After the cursor has been moved into the chart area, the editing
function remains switched on until the cursor exits from the chart area again.
Inserting a symbol: Press the Symbols button. If there is a symbol description in the display field under
the Symbols button, the symbol described can now be set at the desired position by clicking. Repeated
clicking sets the same symbol several times.
Position of the symbol to be inserted
Selected: After pressing Set, the Planning mode

is switched on and the inserted symbol is
displayed in the centre.
Inserts the defined symbol at the

position entered
Description of the symbol specified

for insertion
Opens the Select Symbol menu for speci-
fying the symbols to be inserted; for menu,
see Figure 5-19.
Opens the box Set Symbol by Position
Fig. 5-18 The menu Chart > Edit User Chart Objects after pressing the button Symbols
If a symbol other than the one actual selected is to be inserted, it must first be defined:
- Press the Select Symbol button, and in the menu Charts > Edit User Chart Objects > Select
Symbol which then opens up press the button of the desired symbol.
- With most symbols, the Object Feature box then opens up, in which additional parameters have to
be set.
Symbols can also be inserted at any position by specifying the geographic coordinates. To do this, press
the button Set Symbol by Position, enter the position and click on Set. If the option Show After Set
was selected, clicking on Set switches on the Planning mode and the chart excerpt appears in the chart
area with the inserted object in the middle.
Moving a symbol: Switch on Move, click on the symbol, and click on the new position.
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 197

b_cp_e33.fm / 10.05.12
Deleting a symbol: Switch on Delete, click on the symbol, and in the context menu click on the button
containing the description of the symbol that is to be deleted.
Selection of the symbol which is to be inserted
In most cases, this causes opening of the Object Feature box; see
Figure 5-20.
Fig. 5-19 The menu Charts > Edit User Chart Objects > Select Symbol
Symbol selected in the

menu ... Select Symbol
Input of additional parameters
This ends the specifying of the

symbols which are to be inserted.
Stops the specifying of the

symbols which are to be input.
Fig. 5-20 Examples of the Object Feature Box
198 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e33.fm / 10.05.12
5.2.3 Editing of Lines
Inserting a line: Press the Lines button, and in the frame Lines which then opens up press the button
of the desired type of lines. By clicking on the desired position, set the starting point of the line, and
then set all other points one after another by clicking. The input is completed by pressing of the
MORE key.
If Feature Line was selected, a dialog box is first shown for entry of the name and remark which,
for this feature line, are later to be displayable in the Info box.
Inserting a point: Switch on Continue, click on the line where a point is to be inserted, and then click
on the position of the new point.
Continuing the line: Switch on Continue, click on the starting point or end point of the line, and then
set new points by clicking on the positions.
Moving a point: Switch on Move, click on the point, and click on the new position.
Cutting a line: Switch on Cut, and click on the line where cutting is to take place.
Because the cutting point is initially not visible, it is advisable to move one of the new starting
points or end points immediately after the cutting takes place.
Deleting a point: Switch on Delete, click on the point, and click in the context menu ... Line (Vertex
Only).
Reversing the safe/unsafe side of an own safety line: Switch on Reverse Own Safety Lines and click
on the own safety line.
The hatching must always point towards the unsafe area.
Converting a feature line into a own safety line and vice versa: Switch on Convert Lines and click
on the line. 1)
Deleting a line: Switch on Delete, click anywhere on the line, and click in the context menu ... Line
(Whole Object).
5.2.4 Editing of Areas
Areas which cover the North Pole or South Pole cannot be edited.
5.2.4.1 Editing Danger Highlights and Feature Areas
Inserting an area: Press the Areas button, and in the frame Areas which then opens up press the button
of the desired type of area. Set the vertices of the area one after another by clicking on the desired
position. The input is completed by pressing of the MORE key.
If Feature Line was selected, a dialog box is first shown for entry of the name and remark which,
for this feature line, are later to be displayable in the Info box.
If the danger highlight is to be provided with a remark, which can be viewed in the Info box for
example, this can be done by setting a text note; see below.
Inserting a vertex: Switch on Continue, click on the line bounding the area where a vertex is to be
inserted, and then click on the position of the new vertex.
1)
This function is provided so that own safety lines can be obtained from feature lines which have been generated by conversion of a map;
see G e n e r a t i n g U s e r C h a r t O b j e c t s f r o m M a p s on page 197.
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 199

b_cp_e33.fm / 10.05.12
Moving a vertex: Switch on Move, click on the vertex, and click on the new position.
Deleting a vertex: Switch on Delete, click on the vertex, and click in the context menu ... (Vertex Only).
Deleting an area: Switch on Delete, click anywhere on the area, and click in the context menu ... (Whole
Object).
5.2.4.2 Editing Anchor Watch Areas
Editing a Polygonal Anchor Watch Area

Inserting the area: Press the Areas button, and in the frame Areas which then opens up press Anchor
Watch Area. In the box which then opens, click on Polygon. Set the vertices of the area one after
another by clicking on the desired position. The input is completed by pressing of the MORE key
For all other editing functions: see Section 5.2.4.1.
Editing a Circular Anchor Watch Area

Watch Area. In the box which then opens, click on Circle. By clicking in the chart area, define the
center of the circle, then pull open the circle to the desired size by using the cursor, and click again.
Deleting the area: Switch on Delete, click anywhere on the anchor watch area, and click in the context
menu ... (Whole Object).
Editing an Anchor Watch Area as a Zone with the Shape of a Ring Segment
Watch Area. In the box which then opens, click on Zone. In the field Width, enter the (radial) width
of the zone. In the field Angle, enter the (segment) angle of the zone. By clicking in the chart area,
define the center of the circle, then pull open the circle to the desired size and in the desired direction
by using the cursor, and click again.
Deleting the area: Switch on Delete, click anywhere on the anchor watch area, and click in the context
menu ... (Whole Object).
5.2.5 Editing of Text Notes
General Remarks about the Editor: After the cursor has been moved into the chart area, the editing
function remains switched on until the cursor exits from the chart area again.
Inserting a text note: Press the Text Notes button. In the dialog box which then opens up, specify by
means of Category the category (and therefore the symbol appearing in the chart area), enter the
note, and press the OK button. By clicking on the desired position, set the text note. Repeated
clicking sets the same text note several times.
Moving a text note: Switch on Move, click on the text note, and click on the new position.
Deleting a text note: Switch on Delete, click on the text note, and click in the Text Note context menu.
200 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e33.fm / 10.05.12
Operating Instructions 5.3 Editing of Manual Updates of the ENC
5.3 Editing of Manual Updates of the ENC
The content of the ENC can be changed not only by means of official updates (see page 259) but also
by the editing of a Manual Update. In this process,
- objects can be added,
- attributes of existing objects can be changed, and
- existing objects can be marked as being deleted.
Because the edited Manual Updates must be distributed together with the ENC data to all CHART-
PILOTs and MULTIPILOTs of the system, and because chart maintenance measures should gener-
ally be performed at the same CHARTPILOT, it is advisable to also edit them there.
Marking of Changes in the Chart

The changes are marked by the addition of the following (orange) markings:
New Modified Deleted
Point objects,
Symbols for centres of areas
Lines,
Borders of areas
Point objects inserted manually are not visually different from the corresponding User Chart Objects.
If you wish to know which type is involved, briefly switch off (in the Chart menu) the display of the
User Chart Objects or obtain information with the aid of the Info box.
Objects which have been changed by an official update are not marked, but they can be marked by
means of the function Highlight Official Updates so that they become visible – see page 101
Display of file name
Input/indication of display scale
Makes it possible to process a further manual ENC update.
Opens the editing menu.
Options for display of the chart during editing
Shows the detailed record of all stored entries in the Manual Update file.
Stores the entered data (after an appropriate enquiry).
Calls up a safeguard question; appropriate answering

of this causes switch-off of the editor.
Fig. 5-21 The menu Chart > Edit Manual ENC Update
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 201

b_cp_e33.fm / 10.05.12
5.3 Editing of Manual Updates of the ENC Operating Instructions
Management of the Manual Update Data

Any change in the ENC relates to a particular cell of the ENC. For each cell, all changes are summarised
in a manual ENC update file. During this process, the files of the cells remain unchanged. When the ENC
file is then used, the contents of the associated manual ENC update files are also taken into account
automatically.
So that the changes will also take effect on the other items of equipment in the system, the new or
changed manual ENC update files must be transferred to these items of equipment – see page 287.
If the system is equipped with a digitizer and if objects are to be inserted on the basis of a (paper)
chart, the digitizer must be set up beforehand in accordance with Section 5.1.4.
Preparation for Editing

1. In the Chart menu, select the chart type ENC and press Edit Manual ENC Updates.
2. Select the ENC file that is to be changed. With the aid of the Select Manual Update Chart box which
is now open, three possibilities of doing this exist:
a) Switch the Pick function on, and in the chart region click on a position that is covered by the
ENC file that is to be changed. Under Chart, all ENC files that exist at this position are listed. Mark
the file that is to be changed, and press OK.
b) In the box, input the coordinates, and then press Refresh. Under Chart, all ENC files that exist
at this position are listed. Mark the file that is to be changed, and press OK.
c) Under Selected Chart, input the file name of the chart (name of the cell), and press OK.
Selection of the ENC file by clicking on

These charts are present at the clicked/ the position in the chart region
entered position. By clicking, mark the
chart that is to be edited. Selection of the ENC file by input
of the position
Press so that the charts which exist at

the entered position will be listed
Selection of the ENC file by under Chart Selection.
input of the file name
Starts the editor with the

marked chart.
Fig. 5-22 The Select Manual Update Chart Box
3. In the ENC Update Log Data box which is thus opened, enter your name or some other identifier
behind User Identification, and behind Source enter the source from which the change data come.
After the pressing of OK, the chart appears as an overview display, i.e. in such a way that all of it
is visible.
4. Set the display scale, either by setting the range value or by inputting the scale in the input area
Scale 1:.
202 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e33.fm / 10.05.12
Operating Instructions 5.3 Editing of Manual Updates of the ENC
5. In the menu Chart > Edit Manual ENC Update > Chart Settings,
- by means of Category, define which display groups (objects) can be displayed during editing,
- by means of Text Labels, specify whether text information is to be displayed,
- by means of Ignore Scale Minimum, specify whether the objects selected with the aid of Cate-
gory are to be displayed independently of the display scale or whether the automatic display-
suppression function which acts in the case of smaller display scales is to activated.
In the menu Chart > Edit Manual ENC Update > Chart Settings, the values that are set in the
menu Chart > Depth Contour are displayed for information – see page 102.
6. Move the chart so that the editing position is situated in the chart region: this can be done with the
Set Center function or in the menu Chart > Edit Manual ENC Update > Edit by entering the editing
position under Centre Position. Editing can now be started.
The Addition of Objects

1. In the menu Chart > Edit Manual ENC Update > Edit, under Define Objects click on the type of
object (point object, line object or area object), and in the menu thus opened click on the desired
object.
2. In the case of most point objects, an Object Features box now opens up, in which further character-
istics of the selected type can be specified. In the case of the depth contour, its depth value must
be entered.
3. Click on the position of insertion.
Right from the beginning in all cases, you have to click on the final position. If you have clicked
on an incorrect position, the object will have to be deleted and the input will have to be
repeated.
In the case of a point object, the insertion process is now finished, and so the attributes of the
inserted object should now be entered – see below. By clicking on further positions, the same point
object can be inserted repeatedly.
In the case of line objects and area objects, the next vertices are defined by further clicking. The
insertion process is ended by pressing the MORE key. The next click then sets the first point of a
further object of the selected type.
If several objects of the same type are to be inserted, it is advisable to set the attributes
correctly after insertion of the first object. The subsequent objects are then inserted with these
attributes.
If the Undo button is pressed in the menu Chart > Edit Manual ENC Update > Edit immediately after
the addition process, the last entry is cancelled.
Changing the Attributes of the Objects

1. In the menu Chart > Edit Manual ENC Update > Edit, switch on the Modify Attributes function, click
on the object that is to be processed, and in the context menu which is thus opened mark the object
that is to be processed.
In the context menu, all objects situated at the clicked position are listed, including those which
are invisible because the Ignore Scale Minimum function is switched off.
Objects under the heading of the ENC file name with the extension MUD indicate entries of the
ENC Update file.
The supplements of the point objects, such as lights, topmarks etc., are treated as objects, and
also have to be processed individually.
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 203

b_cp_e33.fm / 10.05.12
5.3 Editing of Manual Updates of the ENC Operating Instructions
2. In the Attributes box which is thus opened, the attributes can now be added or changed. In this
connection, it must be ensured that the attribute Scale Minimum is set at a suitable value. This
value is the smallest display scale at which the object is still displayed.
The effect of the Scale Minimum can be seen very clearly if the display scale is changed by an
extreme amount by adjustment of the range value, once with the Ignore Scale Minimum func-
tion switched on and once with it switched off (in the menu Chart > Edit Manual ENC Update >
Chart Settings).
If the Undo button is pressed immediately after the modification, the last modification is cancelled.
Specifying the object that is to be inserted.
Changing/inputting the object attributes.

Deleting objects, or providing them with a deletion marker.
The position entered here is set at the centre of the

chart region after the pressing of Apply.
Cancels the last input.
Fig. 5-23 The menu Chart > Edit Manual ENC Update > Edit
Deleting Objects, Marking Existing Objects as Deleted

1. In the menu Chart > Edit Manual ENC Update > Edit, switch on the Delete Objects function, click
on the object that is to be deleted, and in the context menu which is thus opened mark the object
that is to be deleted.
2. The object marked in the context menu is now marked on the chart. If the safeguard question which
simultaneously appears is answered with Yes, the object is provided with a deletion marker. The
ECDIS monitoring function associated with the object is not cancelled by this. If the object was
inserted or modified in the current session, the object or modification is completely removed.
If the Undo button is pressed immediately after deletion, the deletion is cancelled or the deletion
marker is deleted.
204 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e33.fm / 10.05.12
Operating Instructions 5.4 Editing Cells of Own Chart
Ending the Editing

Before the editing of a Manual Update is ended, you must pay attention to the following points:
- The objects inserted during this session can no longer be removed after saving of the Manual
Update 1). It is true that the objects can be marked later as being deleted, but they remain visually
present.
- The modification markers and deletion markers inserted during this session can no longer be
removed after saving of the Manual Update 1).
If a further Manual Update file is to be created or changed: In the menu Chart > Edit Manual ENC
Update, press the Chart Selection button and, by answering the question that might appear, decide
whether the changes made should be saved. Continue as described above under P r e p a r a t i o n f o r
E d i t i n g , beginning at 2.b)
If the changes are to be saved: In the menu Chart > Edit Manual ENC Update, press the Store and
End button.
If no further Manual Update file is to be created or changed: In the menu Chart > Edit Manual ENC
Update, press the Exit button.
5.4 Editing Cells of Own Chart
With the Own Chart editor, (paper) charts can be digitised. During this process, cells of Own Chart are
created which are technically 2) equivalent to those of the ENC.
Own Chart, in contrast to the User Chart Objects, can always only be displayed as an alternative to
some other electronic chart. Therefore, it must contain all of the information that is necessary for safe
navigation, and so the amount of editing needed is considerable. Therefore, Own Charts are prob-
ably only appropriate for areas for which no official electronic charts are available.
Because the edited Own Chart cells and the Chart Maintenance subroutine have to be distributed to
all CHARTPILOTs and MULTIPILOTs of the system, it is advisable to edit them at that particular
CHARTPILOT with which the chart maintenance is performed.
5.4.1 Characteristics of Own Chart
Technically, Own Chart is equivalent to the ENC in every respect, with the sole exception that not all
objects defined for the ENC are available for Own Chart. However, the object selection is adequate for
ensuring that all of the information needed for safe navigation can be integrated into Own Chart.
All objects used in Own Chart are therefore described in ECDIS Chart 1 - see page 71.
The explanations regarding the ENC which are contained in these Operating Instructions, particularly in
4.2 to 4.4 and 7.3, are thus applicable for Own Chart too, and cannot be repeated here. In addition, only
those aspects that have to be specially borne in mind during editing are pointed out here.
1) Except for the possibility of completely deleting the manual ENC update file – see page 287.
2)
As far as approval is concerned, Own Charts do not have the status of the ENC or ARCS charts. They cannot under any circumstances
replace paper charts. No statement can be made here about approval or about restrictions in their use.
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 205

b_cp_e33.fm / 10.05.12
5.4 Editing Cells of Own Chart Operating Instructions
Skin of the Earth and Other Objects

The objects to be edited can mainly be divided up into
- Skin of the Earth: Objects which describe the earth's surface (lines and areas) and
- Overlaid Objects: Objects that are displayed on the earth's surface (points, lines and areas).
Skin of the Earth: Areas of the Skin of the Earth are, for example, land areas or areas with a particular
depth range. These areas are displayed in colour over their entire extent, and by definition they are mutu-
ally exclusive. (A water area with "depth between 10 m and 20 m" cannot simultaneously be a land area
or a water area with "depth between 5 m and 10 m".) The lines of the Skin of the Earth are the bounding
lines of these areas.
Overlaid Objects: These consist of all point-objects as well as all lines and areas that are not objects of
the Skin of the Earth. Areas of this kind, e.g. traffic separation zones, anchorage area etc., are displayed
transparently, either with outlines only, or as transparent patterns, or both. Basically, they are not mutually
exclusive. (An area designated as a "caution area" can certainly also be a "restricted area".)
Simultaneous Display of Several Cells

When Own Chart is being used, the algorithm described on page 85 under A u t o m a t i c S e l e c t i o n o f t h e
P u r p o s e s t o b e D i s p l a y e d is used.
Where cells of the same navigational purpose overlap, all objects contained in these cells are displayed
superimposed on one another. It is not defined which of the objects are on top. Exception: The areas of
the Skin of the Earth are situated below all other objects. Where Skin of the Earth areas too are contained
in several cells, only one of these areas is displayed; it is not defined which one that is.
From this it follows that, in areas where cells having the same navigational purpose overlap, all data
should definitely be edited in only one of the cells - see the illustration.
All objects of this area should be edited

only in cell X or in cell Y.
Cell X
Cell Y
If cells having different navigational purposes are displayed simultaneously, the objects of the cells with
the larger scale cover the cells with the smaller scale. This also applies to Skin of the Earth areas.
From this, it follows also that if an object is contained in a cell with a small scale, it also has to be edited
in the cell with the larger scale.
Recommendation: During the editing process, display all cells (at least occasionally for checking)
which, according to the algorithm described above, can be displayed simultaneously when Own Chart is
being used.
Range-Dependent Suppression of the Display of Individual Objects

When Own Chart is being used, particular objects automatically cease to be displayed when the display
scale becomes smaller than the value specified for such display. As a result, for example, when cells
having different navigational purposes are being displayed simultaneously, of the large-scale cell on top
only the most important objects are displayed and over-filling of this area is avoided. When the range is
reduced, the objects appear as soon as the scale becomes smaller than the specified scale. This limit
value can - and should - be defined as the Scale Minimum attribute for each individual relevant object
during the editing process.
206 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e33.fm / 10.05.12
Coordinate System of Own Chart

Own Chart is displayed in the Mercator projection during editing. The geodetic datum is WGS 84.
Management of Own Chart

Management of the edited Own Chart (transfer to other units in the system, deletion of cells) is done with
the aid of the subprogram "Chart Maintenance" - see page 288 onwards.
5.4.2 Preparation for Editing
Setting Up the Digitizer

Editing is best done on the basis of an approved, up-to-date paper chart with the aid of the digitizer after
the latter has been set up in accordance with Section 5.1.4. It is true that all inputs can also be made
without a digitizer, but because the editing of these Own Chart cells is a really laborious task anyway, it
is not advisable to do without the digitizer. As preparation, the digitizer must be set up in accordance with
Section 5.1.4 together with the paper chart that is to be used as the basis.
WARNING:
In the process of setting up on the digitizer, the projection, scale and
chart datum that are suitable for the chart used must definitely be
entered.
Starting the Own Chart Editor

Press the Tree button, and then the Own Chart editor button. the Own Chart Editor menu appears.
Loading of existing cells and generation of a new cell
From the loaded cells, this selects the cell that is to be edited.
Data of the cell that is currently being edited
Editing of the cell(s)
(Intermediate) storage of the cell(s) that is (are) being edited
Selection of the display groups that are to be displayed - see page 99; this is set to
All when the Edit menu is opened
Setting of the depth contours - see page 102
Setting of the display
Switching the display of the text labels on and off
Switching on and off the range-dependent suppression of the display of individual

objects. By opening of the Edit menu, Ignore Scale Minimum is switched on, i.e.
all objects are displayed during editing.
Switches the Own Chart editor subroutine off and calls up the display of the
electronic chart again.
Fig. 5-24 The Own Chart Editor menu
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 207

b_cp_e33.fm / 10.05.12
Generating a New Cell

1. In the Own Chart Editor menu, press the Load (New) Cell button to open the box having the same
name.
2. Behind Select (New) Cell, enter the name of the new cell. For this purpose, use the name of the
paper chart used.
3. Press the Add button. In the box which then opens up, enter the data of the cell:
... Border: The geographical borders of the cell
Scale: The scale of the paper chart used
Date of Edition: The date of issue of the paper chart used
4. After pressing of the OK button, the new, empty cell is generated and displayed. The range and the
center position are automatically set in such a way that the complete cell is displayed. The area of
the cell is shown dashed.
Loading the Existing Cell that is to be Modified

1. In the Own Chart Editor menu, press the Load (New) Cell button to open the box having the same
name. There, all cells that are present in the Own Chart database are initially listed (sorted according
to navigational purpose).
2. In the list, mark the cell that is to be modified (or enter its name behind Select (New) Cell).
If the name of the cell is not known, the list of possible cells can be reduced by
- entering the position of the cell under Geographic Position and then
- pressing the Refresh button.
As a result, only those cells are listed that are present in the region of the current editing area.
3. With the Add button, the marked or entered cell is loaded and displayed. The range and the center
position are automatically set in such a way that the complete cell is displayed. The area of the cell
is displayed dashed.
Selection of the cell by input of

position
After starting of the Own Chart editor:
Listing of all cells present in the local data- Press so that the cells present at the
base entered position will be listed.
After pressing of the Refresh button:
These cells are situated in the current
editing area (in whole or in part).
Purpose: The navigational purpose (see

Section 4.1.3)
Cells already loaded are marked as - This cell is loaded.

loaded-.
Loads the selected cell additionally
By clicking, mark the cell that is to be
edited. Removes all cells from the load
memory and loads the selected cell
Fig. 5-25 The Load (New) Cell box
Loading Further Cells

1. After the cell that is to be edited has been loaded, press the Refresh button in the Load (New) Cells
box.
208 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e33.fm / 10.05.12
2. From this list, load further cells if necessary. All loaded cells are displayed simultaneously (transpar-
ently, one on top of another).
If the wrong cell has been loaded by mistake: By means of Replace, all loaded cells can be removed
from the load memory and replaced by the cell selected in the list.
Selecting the Cell that is to be Edited

In the editing area, the cell selected for editing is marked by means of a violet frame. The data of this cell
are displayed in the Selected Cell frame in the Own Chart Editor menu:
- Name, Scale and Date of Edition: For data entered during generation of this cell, see above.
- Last Modification: Date of the last modification that was made with the Own Chart editor. This date
is automatically entered in the data set if editing is ended with storage.
If the wrong cell has been selected and objects are to be inserted: In the Own Chart Editor menu, open
the Cell Selection box by pressing the Select button. In that box, all loaded cells are listed. Mark the
desired cell and press Select. If the names of the cells are not informative enough, the data of the
marked cell can be displayed by means of the Info button. Return with OK.
If the wrong cell has been selected and existing objects are to be modified, the procedure already
described can be used. In this case, however, selection is much easier during editing - see S e l e c t i n g a
D i f f e r e n t C e l l f o r E d i t i n g on page 211.
Specifying the Editing Area

The display scale during editing:
- Enter the desired scale in the Scale field or
- change the range by means of the arrow button of the Range field.
Center position:
- Move the cursor in the editing field to the desired position and press the INFO key or
- press the Set Center button and then click on the desired position in the editing field, or enter the
position in the Set Position frame in the menu Own Chart Editor > Edit and press Apply or
- in the Own Chart Editor menu, press the Select button, and in the box which then opens up mark
the desired cell and, at that place, press the Set Center button. The center position is then set at
the center of the marked cell.
After pressing of the Overview button, the display scale and the center position are selected such
that all loaded cells are displayed.
In the Own Chart editor, the effect of the INFO key is usually not to open the Info box but to specify
a new center position.
Specifying the Display of the Cells

In the Display Settings frame of the Own Chart Editor menu, selection of the objects that are to be
displayed can be influenced as follows:
- With Category: Selection of the display groups that are to be displayed - see page 99
- With Text Labels: Switching all text labels on and off
- With Ignore Scale Minimum: When this function is switched on, no range-dependent suppression
of the display of objects takes place.
With Depth Contour, the way in which the depth contours are to be displayed is specified - see page 102
So that all objects will be visible during editing, when the Edit menu is opened the Category is auto-
matically set to All and the function Ignore Scale Minimum is switched off.
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 209

b_cp_e33.fm / 10.05.12
5.4.3 Editing of Own Chart Cells
General Remarks about Editing

The actual editing process (insertion and modification of objects) takes place in the menu Own Chart
Editor > Edit and in its submenus. The following descriptions are based on this menu.
There are six editing functions available:
Set: Insertion of new objects (definition of the object, position, necessary attributes)
Modify Attributes: Modifying and adding to attributes
Insert/Continue: Insertion of line points (and also points in the border lines of the areas) and
extending the lines
Move: The moving of points (point objects, line points, including the points of the border lines of
areas)
Cut Lines: The cutting of lines (not of border lines of the areas)
Delete: Deletion of the objects (all kinds)
On the left under the editing area, a message about the switched-on editing function appears.
Key functions within the editor:
DO: Normal function
INFO: This sets the center position at the place that is clicked in the editing area.
MORE: This switches off the active function.
Return to the Own Chart Editor menu
Name of the cell that is being edited
Specifying the object that is to be inserted
Modifying and adding to the object attributes

Deletion of objects or assigning the deletion mark to them
The position entered here is set at the center of the chart area after pressing of Apply.
Fig. 5-26 The menu Own Chart Editor > Edit
210 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e33.fm / 10.05.12
Selection of the Objects that are to be Modified Cell selected for editing
An object that is to be modified is selected by clicking (normal script)
on it in the editing area.
If there are several objects at the clicked position, a The objects contained
there at the clicked posi-
context menu appears, in which these objects are tion
listed. There, all objects that are present at the
clicked position in any one of the loaded cells are also Cell that is loaded but not
listed. The name of the cell is likewise listed. selected for editing (pale
script)
In the context menu, click on the object that is to be
modified. The objects contained
there at the clicked posi-
Selecting a Different Cell for Editing tion
If, in the context menu, an object is clicked which is
not present in the cell selected for editing, the result is that the cell containing the clicked object is
selected for editing. This setting continues to exist until, by a similar process or by means of the Select
button of the Own Chart Editor menu, a different cell is selected.
Identification of the Objects Present in the Editing Area
If there is no editing function switched on and there is only one object present at the clicked position, or
if an object is clicked that is not present in the cell selected for editing, the context menu containing the
type of the clicked object appears also. For this purpose, a switched-on editing function can be switched
off beforehand by means of the MORE key and then switched back on again in the Edit menu. The Set
function (the only function for which special settings have to be made) retains the settings previously
made.
Measuring/Specifying the Distance and Direction between Two Positions
Press the Set Ref Point button (on the left under the editing field), and click on the reference position.
The distance and bearing of the cursor position relative to the reference position are now displayed
beside the cursor position.
Adding Overlaid Objects

1. In the Set Objects frame of the Edit menu, click on the kind of object (point object, line object or
area object), and in the menu which then opens up click on the desired object.
2. With many objects, a box now opens up in which particular attributes of the selected type have to
be specified.
With many point objects, further additions have to be defined in this box, such as topmarks or lights.
3. In the editing area, enter the position(s) of the object that is to be inserted; do this either by clicking
with the digitizer cursor, mouse cursor or trackball cursor, or by entering the geographical coordi-
nates in the Edit menu.
In the case of a point object, the insertion process is now finished, and so the other attributes of the
inserted object should now be entered - see below. By clicking on further positions, the same point
object is inserted repeatedly.
In the case of line objects and area objects, the next vertices are specified by further clicking. Inser-
tion is ended by pressing the MORE key. The next click then sets the first point of a further object
of the selected kind.
If several objects of the same kind are to be inserted, it is a good idea to set the attributes
correctly after insertion of the first object. The subsequent objects are then inserted with these
attributes.
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 211

b_cp_e33.fm / 10.05.12
Long lines are not automatically fixed by means of auxiliary points (in contrast to lines of the
User Chart Objects - see page 196, A u x i l i a r y P o i n t s G e n e r a t e d A u t o m a t i c a l l y ). When Own
Chart is being used, lines are displayed as straight lines between the manually edited positions,
regardless of the projection that is selected at that time. As a result, the following is true: If, in
the radar projection too, a line at high latitudes is to run via the same coordinates as those
displayed during editing, straight lines must be subdivided (fixed) by means of auxiliary points
that are inserted manually.
4. With all inserted objects, the attributes entered must be checked/corrected and added to - see below.
Adding Objects of the Skin of the Earth
1. In the Set frame of the Edit menu, click on the Skin of the Earth button to open the menu having
the same name.
The geometry of each area of the Skin of the Earth is defined by one of the lines contained in the
Skin of the Earth menu. The area concerned must thus be completely enclosed by these lines;
the boundaries of any of these areas usually consist of various types of line.
Except for the Closing Lines, the lines are also independent objects which are displayed when Own
Chart is being used and whose data can be called up in the Info box.
The Closing Lines are auxiliary lines which bound the areas of the Skin of the Earth at those places
where no bounding line is to be displayed. This is usually the case at the boundaries of the cell that
is being edited. Therefore, when the cell is being generated it has a closing line which coincides with
the boundaries of the cell. This Closing Line too can, if necessary, be modified like all other lines.
2. Edit the lines as described under A d d i n g O v e r l a i d O b j e c t s .
3. In the Areas frame, select the kind of area; then, one after another, click on all areas of this kind.
Repeat this for the other kinds of area.
It is true that the depth areas are given identical colours, depending on the setting of the depth
contour, but nevertheless they are independent objects, as can be seen in the Info box when
Own Chart is being used.
Return to Edit menu
These lines are independent objects, but they also represent the bound-
aries of the Skin of the Earth areas.
This auxiliary line serves to bound the Skin of the Earth areas, but
is displayed as a line in the Own Chart editor only.
This defines the meaning of the areas whose geometry is specified by the
lines which can be edited in this menu.
Fig. 5-27 The menu Own Chart Editor > Edit > Skin of the Earth
212 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e33.fm / 10.05.12
Modifying or Adding to Attributes of the Objects

1. In the Edit menu, switch on the function Modify Attributes and click on the object that is to be proc-
essed.
The supplements of the point objects, such as lights, topmarks etc., are listed as objects, and
also have to be processed individually.
2. In the Attribute Editor box which then opens up, the attributes can now be added to or modified. In
this connection, it must be ensured that the attribute Scale Minimum is set appropriately. For the
meaning of Scale Minimum, see Seite 206.
Modifying the Geometry or Position of the Objects

Inserting a line point (also a point on the border lines of areas): Switch on the Insert/Modify function,
and click on the line at the place where a line point is to be inserted. Then click on the position of the
new line point.
Extending a line: Switch on the Insert/Modify function and click on the line at its end; then click on the
position of the new line point.
Moving a point (point object, line point, or point on the border lines of areas): Switch on the Move func-
tion and click on the point; then click on the new position of the point.
Cutting a line: Switch on the Cut function, click on the line at the place where it is to be cut, and answer
the resulting safeguard question with Yes.
Because the cutting point is invisible at first, it is advisable to move or delete one of the new
starting/end points immediately after cutting.
Deleting a line point (also a point on the border lines of areas): Switch on the Delete function and click
on the point that is to be deleted. In the context menu, click on the entry with the supplement (Vertex
Only).
Deleting an object (point object, line, or area): Switch on the Delete function and click on the object that
is to be deleted. If necessary, click on the entry with the supplement (Whole Object) in the context menu,
and answer the resulting safeguard question with Yes.
Deleting a feature line: switch on Delete, click at any place on the feature line, and click on Feature
Line (Whole Object) in the context menu.
5.4.4 Ending the Editing Process
In the Own Chart Editor menu, press the Store button. In the box which then opens up, all loaded cells
are listed. The cells that have been modified but not yet stored after starting of the editor are marked as
-modified-. Cells that have already been stored after starting of the editor and have not been modified
since then are marked as -stored-.
One after another, mark the cells that are to be stored and press the Store button. As a result, the old
content in each case is overwritten in the local database and the present date is entered under Last
Modification in the data set of the cell.
Exit the box by means of the Close button.
Ending the subprogram Own Chart Editor: In the Own Chart Editor menu, press the Exit button and
answer the safeguard question appropriately.
Before the new or modified cells can be used throughout the entire system, they have to be trans-
ferred to the Own Chart databases of the individual units by means of the Chart Maintenance
subprogram - see Section 7.5.
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 213

b_cp_e33.fm / 10.05.12
5.5 Generation of Maps Operating Instructions
5.5 Generation of Maps
At the radars of the series 9xxx, the only possibility of displaying sea chart information together with the
video lies in generating “maps”, over which the radar video can then be superimposed. Such maps can
be generated at any radar of the series 9xxx and used locally there; alternatively, they can be edited
much more conveniently at a CHARTPILOT or MULTIPILOT 91xx and are then available to all series
9xxx radars.
If such self-generated sea chart information is also to be used at the CHARTPILOT, it is advisable
to edit the corresponding User Chart Objects, because - unlike the maps - these are compatible to
the electronic charts.
For the same purpose as these maps, maps can also be edited at the radars of the series 1x00 that
can then be displayed locally there in Radar mode. The maps generated for the radar 1x00 series
are not compatible to those produced for the radar 9xxx series, however.
The map editor described below therefore only serves to generate maps for use at the radar
9xxx series. For this reason, it is normally not available at systems with the radar 1x00 series. 1)
5.5.1 General Information about Maps
The Elements of the Map

A map can contain both map lines (for land contours, channel boundaries etc.) and various symbols (for
buoys, beacons etc.).
Map lines are chains of straight segments whose starting points, end points and vertices (called line-
points in the following) are defined by the geographical position. The positioning of the symbols too is
done by defining their geographical positions.
It must be clearly understood that, in contrast to maps printed on paper, each of the maps being
discussed here can span the entire world, because any geographical position can be entered in any
map. Furthermore, the various areas of a map can have any desired different degrees of detail.
When the data are being divided up into individual maps, it must be remembered that maps are diffi-
cult to maintain if they contain too many items of data. On the other hand, each map has to be called
up separately for display in the radar picture, and so this operating procedure is often necessary if
maps cover only a small geographical area.
The Data of Which a Map Consists

A distinction must be drawn between the administrative data, which relate to the entire map, and the
data of the map elements.
Administrative Data (for details, see page 226)
The following parameters relate to the entire map:
- Map number
- Map name
- Catalog to which the map is assigned
- Last modified date, time (the date and time of the last modification; these are generated automat-
ically)
Data of the Map Elements (for details, see pages 220 and 224)
1)
Note on Radar 9600 Maps: For users of the CHARTPILOT who would like to use maps formerly edited for Radar 9xxx series also on their
new systems, this functionality can be achieved by a special setting on service level.
214 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e33.fm / 10.05.12
Operating Instructions 5.5 Generation of Maps
A map line is defined by the following data:

- The sequence in which the line points are entered in the line point list
- The starting identifier, which is assigned to the first line point of a map line.
Data for each line point:
- Line point positions
- Map line pattern
- Map line colour
- Furthermore, a remark about the line point can be entered.
Each symbol is defined by the following data:
- Symbol position
- Symbol type
- Symbol colour
- Furthermore, a remark about the symbol can be entered.
5.5.2 Generation, Handling and Administration of Maps
Insofar as is permitted by the various tasks and structures, there is no difference between maps and
tracks as far as generation, handling and administration are concerned.
- Generated maps too are stored in the form of separate files on the hard disk of the CHARTPILOT
(and the MULTIPILOT 91xx, if present) and are assigned to the same catalogs as those to which
the tracks are assigned.
- The menu operating procedure for maps is performed via the Maps menu, just as the menu oper-
ating procedure for tracks is performed via the Tracks menu.
- Like the waypoint positions, so can the positions of the line points and symbols too be transferred
from the electronic chart or possibly with the digitizer from the (paper) chart, or can be edited in Text
mode together with the other items of map data.
Like the waypoint in the case of the track, in the case of the map the map lines and/or symbols can also
be taken over (copied) from maps that already exist, or - by means of a special function - all map lines
and symbols of an existing map can be appended (copied) to the map that is being generated.
In this section and in the description of the map generation process, it is assumed that you have
already studied the generating of tracks. The details explained in Section 5.1 regarding the tracks,
insofar as such details also apply to maps, are not repeated here. Therefore, there is no need for
you to search through pages of text already known to you from Section 5.1 in order to find map-
related information. Thus, if an explanation which you need is missing, look it up in Section 5.1.
Loads maps into the main memory so that they can be displayed, modi-
fied or handled in some other way (see page 165).
Deletes maps from the main memory, e.g. in order to switch off
their display in the chart area (see page 61).
Opens the menu area for the generating of maps; makes it possible to
generate catalogs (see page 189; menu see Figure 5-29 on page 216).
Deletes maps irretrievably on the hard disk and
deletes superfluous catalogs (see page 321).
Fig. 5-28 The Maps menu
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 215

b_cp_e33.fm / 10.05.12
Generation of Maps
A map is generated by generating the map lines and/or symbols and by inputting (editing) their additional
data and the administrative data. If the file is then stored, the map generated is available at any time.
Map lines and symbols are generated in the same way as waypoints, by inputting the positions (of the
line points and symbols). The methods and procedures are similar; exception: in the Maps > Edit menu,
by pressing Symbols or Lines under Objects, it is additionally necessary to specify whether symbols or
map lines are to be edited. Thus, in the case of the map, the symbols and map lines are processed in
separate operations. As in the case of the tracks, with the maps too the administrative data and the other
data of the map lines and symbols must be edited in Text mode. The Text mode menus too that are used
are very similar to the Text mode menu used in the track generation process.
Regardless of whether you wish to generate a completely new map or to generate a map by copying an
existing one, or whether you wish to modify a map, the preparations are the same as for track generation
(see page 164), and so too is the method of completion (see page 189).
Here too, the following applies to the coordinate systems used:
WARNING:
In Text mode, you must ensure that, for editing, the same chart datum is
set as the one to which the source of the position data refers.
In the process of setting up on the digitizer, the projection and chart
datum that are suitable for the chart used must definitely be entered.
Number and name of the map that is being edited
Selection of the map on which the new map is to be based,

or of the map that is to be modified
Press if a completely new map is to be generated.

Takes over all map lines or symbols of an existing track, and copies them behind the last
waypoint; see pages 219 and 219.
Storing the selected map; see page 226.
Specifying whether map lines or symbols are to be edited:

- The Text Mode menu is switched over accordingly.
- The operating elements for graphic editing act only on the selected type of element.
- The Merge button acts only on the selected type of element.
- With the digitizer, only the selected type of element can be edited.
Operating elements for graphic editing by means of the electronic chart;

see page 217
Switches over between Text mode and Graphic mode, and thus switches on
and off the menu for alphanumerical editing.
Fig. 5-29 The Maps > Edit menu
216 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e33.fm / 10.05.12
Administrative data of the Coordinate system on which the input of The Maps > Edit menu; see
map, see page 226 the line point positions is based; see page below
216
Input area:
Here, the data of the line point marked in the line point list are displayed and edited - see page 222.
When the editing of the symbols is switched on, the data of the symbol marked in the symbol list appear here.
Line point list:

- Shows an overview of all edited map lines and line points, together with a selection (defined by you) of waypoint data.
- Makes it possible to generate map lines and line points alphanumerically (see page 222).
When the editing of symbols is switched on, the symbol list appears here (see page 225).
Fig. 5-30 The CHARTPILOT Display for the editing of maps in Text Mode
5.5.3 Generating Map Lines and Symbols by Means of the Electronic Chart
In the Maps > Edit menu, the Text mode function must not be switched on, press the Text Mode button.
The generation, insertion, shifting and deletion of map lines and symbols are performed (as in the case
of the waypoints, see page 171) with the functions listed under Graphic Mode.
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 217

b_cp_e33.fm / 10.05.12
5.5.3.1 Map Lines
To generate the map lines, the Lines button under Objects in the Maps > Edit menu must be in the
pressed state.
Generating a Map Line

A map line is generated by generating line points at the starting point, at each bend, and at the end of
the line. If the pattern or colour is to change within the map line, a line point must be generated at the
position of the change.
1. Before the first line point is generated, the pattern and colour of the map line should be set. In this
way, you avoid the retrospective work that would otherwise be needed later (in Text mode) for these
characteristics.
Whenever a line point is being generated, the pattern and colour of the line point processed last are
taken over. Therefore, there are three different cases:
- The map line is to be given the pattern and colour of the map line that was processed
last:
The task of generating the line points can be started without any further activities.
- The map line is to be given the pattern and colour of a map line displayed on the screen:
Switch on Modify, and click on the map line with the desired pattern/colour combination.
Switch on Set and start to generate the line points.
- The map line is to be given a new pattern/colour combination:
Switch to Text mode, select the desired pattern and colour under Line (for details, see page
223), and switch back to Graphic mode. Switch on Set and start to generate the line points.
2. Generating the line points:
Switch on Set and click the position of the first line point, then click the position of the next line point,
and so on. Each click in the chart area generates a further line point at the end of the map line, and
thus enters the existing cursor position as the line point position. The resulting map line is displayed
in the chart area. After clicking of the last line point, move the cursor out of the chart area or press
the MORE key. If you use the MORE key, Set remains switched on, and with the next click of a posi-
tion you generate the first line point of the next map line.
Extending an Existing Map Line

Switch on Continue and click the first or last line point. Click the position of the next line point that is to
be added, then click the next line point position, and so on.
Inserting One or More Consecutive Line Points

Switch on Continue and click the map line between the line points between which the line point is to be
inserted. Click the position of the line point that is to be inserted. Behind this line point, further line points
can be inserted by clicking.
You can cancel the clicking of the map line by pressing the MORE key.
Shifting a Line Point

Switch on Modify, click the line point that is to be shifted, and then click the desired position.
The clicking of the line point can be cancelled by pressing the MORE key.
218 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e33.fm / 10.05.12
Deletion of Line Points

Switch on Delete; one after the other, click the line points that are to be deleted.
Cutting a Map Line

Switch on Delete and click the map line between the line points.
Taking Over All Map Lines from an Existing Map

The maps whose map lines are to be copied must be loaded. Under Catalogs in the Maps > Edit >
Merge menu, mark the catalog to which this map is assigned, and under Maps mark the desired map.
Leave the Merge menu by pressing the OK button. As a result, all map lines (including all line point data)
of the map marked in the Merge menu are copied into the map selected for editing.
5.5.3.2 Symbols
To generate the symbols, the Symbols button under Objects in the Maps > Edit menu must be in the
pressed state.
Generation of Symbols
1. Symbols can be generated in any desired sequence. Because, whenever a symbol is generated, the
type and colour of the last symbol processed are taken over, by proceeding according to type and
colour you avoid the retrospective work (in Text mode) that would otherwise be needed later for
these characteristics. Therefore, there are three different cases:
- The symbol is to be given the type and colour of the symbol that was processed last:
The symbol can be generated without any further preparation.
- The symbol is to be given the type and colour of a symbol displayed on the screen:
Switch on Modify, and click on the symbol with the desired pattern/colour combination. Switch
on Set and generate the symbol(s).
- The symbol is to be given a new pattern/colour combination:
Switch to Text mode, select the desired type and colour under Symbol (for details, see pages
224 and 223), and switch back to Graphic mode. Switch on Set and generate the symbol(s).
2. Generating the symbols:
Switch on Set and click the position of the symbol, then click the position of a further symbol, and
so on. Each click in the chart area generates a symbol of the same type and colour and enters the
existing cursor position as the symbol position. These symbols are displayed in the chart area.
Shifting a Symbol
Switch on Modify, click the symbol that is to be shifted, and then click the desired position.
The clicking of the symbol can be cancelled by pressing the MORE key.
Deletion of Symbols
Switch on Delete and, one after another, click the symbols that are to be deleted.
Taking Over All Symbols from an Existing Map

The map whose symbols are to be copied must be loaded. Under Catalogs in the Maps > Edit > Merge
menu, mark the catalog to which this map is assigned, and under Maps mark the desired map. Leave
the Merge menu by pressing the OK button. As a result, all symbols (including all symbol data) of the
map marked in the Merge menu are copied into the map selected for editing.
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 219

b_cp_e33.fm / 10.05.12
USEFUL INFORMATION
If a Displayed Map Line or Symbol Cannot be Modified

Although it is possible to display several maps simultaneously in the chart area, only the map selected
for editing can be modified. If you cannot modify a displayed element, it probably does not belong to the
selected map. It is advisable to switch off the display of all maps that are not needed (this should be done
in the Maps > Clear menu).
5.5.4 Generating Map Lines and Symbols with the Digitizer
With the digitizer, you can generate map lines and symbols regardless of whether the Graphic mode or
the Text mode is switched on in the Maps > Edit menu. Shifting and deletion of line points and symbols
is not possible by means of the digitizer.
Whether you generate map lines/line points or symbols with the digitizer depends on whether the
Symbols or Lines button is pressed under Objects in the Maps > Edit menu.
The generation of map lines and symbols with the digitizer is done in the same way as described for
waypoints in Section 5.1.7 (see page 178). The remarks made there about the generation of the coordi-
nate system and of the digitizer cursor are applicable here too.
Before you generate the first line point or symbol with the digitizer, you should ensure that the chart is
correctly calibrated. To do this, position the digitizer pointer on a coordinate cross (if possible, not one
that was used as a reference point) and compare these coordinates with the presentation on the Digitizer
Cursor display.
If the positions are not in agreement with one another, check the set coordinate systems (the coordinate
system of the (paper) chart is marked in the Peripheral Devices > Digitizer > Coordinate System menu)
and, if necessary, repeat the setting-up of the chart on the digitizer.
5.5.4.1 Map Lines
To generate the map lines, the Lines button under Objects in the Maps > Edit menu must be in the
pressed state.
Generating a Map Line

A map line is generated by generating line points at the beginning, at every bend and at the end of the
line. If the pattern or colour is to change within the map line, a line point must be generated at the position
of the change.
1. Before the first line point is generated, the pattern and colour of the map line should be set. In this
way, you avoid the retrospective work that would otherwise be needed later (in Text mode) for these
characteristics.
Whenever a line point is being generated, the pattern and colour of the line point processed last are
taken over. Therefore, there are three different cases:
- The map line is to be given the pattern and colour of the map line that was processed
last:
The task of generating the line points can be started without any further activities.
- The map line is to be given the pattern and colour of a map line displayed on the screen:
Switch on Modify and click on the map line with the desired pattern/colour combination. Switch
on Se t and start to generate the line points.
220 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e33.fm / 10.05.12
- The map line is to be given a new pattern/colour combination:

Switch to Text mode, select the desired pattern and colour under Line (for details, see page
223), and switch back to Graphic mode. Switch on Set and start to generate the line points.
2. Generating the line points:
Click the line point position on the (paper) chart, then click the next line point position, and so on.
Each click generates a line point at the end of the map line and enters the existing cursor position
as the line point position. The resulting map line is displayed in the chart area if Graphic mode is
switched on. After clicking the last line point, press key 3 of the digitizer pointer. With the next click
of a position, you generate the first line point of the next map line.
Inserting One or More Consecutive Line Points

Switch on Continue and, on the screen, click the map line between the line points between which the
line point is to be inserted. Click the line point position on the (paper) chart. Behind this line point, further
line points can be inserted by clicking.
The clicking of the map line can be cancelled by pressing the MORE key.
In the line point list, mark the line point in front of which the line point is to be inserted. Click the line point
position on the (paper) chart. Behind this line point, further line points can be inserted by clicking.
Extending a Map Line

Switch on Continue and click the last or first line point of the map line. On the (paper) chart, click the
position of the line point that is to be generated, then click the next line point position, and so on.
The clicking of the line point can be cancelled by pressing the MORE key.
In the waypoint list, mark the last or first waypoint. On the paper chart, click the position of the line point
that is to be generated, then click the next line point position, and so on.
5.5.4.2 Symbols
To generate the symbols, the Symbols button under Objects in the Maps > Edit menu must be in the
pressed state.
Generation of Symbols
1. Symbols can be generated in any sequence. Because, whenever a symbol is being generated, the
type and colour of the symbol processed last are taken over, by proceeding according to type and
colour you avoid the retrospective work (in Text mode) that would otherwise be needed later for
these characteristics. Therefore, there are three different cases:
- The symbol is to be given the type and colour of the symbol that was processed last:
The symbol can be generated without any further preparation.
- The symbol is to be given the type and colour of a symbol displayed on the screen:
Switch on Modify, and click on the symbol with the desired pattern/colour combination. Switch
on Set and generate the symbol(s).
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 221

b_cp_e33.fm / 10.05.12
- The symbol is to be given a new pattern/colour combination:

Switch to Text mode, select the desired type and colour under Symbol (for details, see pages
224 and 223), and switch back to Graphic mode. Switch on Set and generate the symbol(s).
2. Generating the symbols:
Click the position of the symbol, then click the position of a further symbol, and so on. Each click in
the chart area generates a symbol of the same type and colour and enters the existing cursor posi-
tion as the symbol position. These symbols are displayed in the chart area if Graphic mode is
switched on.
5.5.5 Generating Map Lines Alphanumerically in Text Mode
Select Lines under Objects in the Maps > Edit menu, and switch on the Text Mode. The Text Mode
menu shown on page 178 appears. As you can see, it is very similar to the Text Mode menu for gener-
ating a track (see page 162). In fact, a map line is generated by generating the line points, just as a track
is generated by generating the waypoints (see page 173). Here too, as a preparatory step, the coordinate
system to which the line point positions to be input refer must be set, and if necessary the line point list
must be configured. The editing of the line point data too is done in the same way as described for
waypoint data in Section 5.1.8 (beginning page 180).
Line point data whose parameters were selected in

the Maps > Edit > Text Mode > Columns menu for
display in the line point list
Causes printing of the line point

list; see page 227.
Calls up the Maps > Edit > Text

Mode > Columns menu, in
which it is possible to specify the
parameters whose data are to
be displayed in the line point list
and (if necessary) printed out.
Stores the marked line points as In front of the line point marked last, this
line points that are to be copied. Deletes the marked inserts the line points that were either deleted
line points. last or marked last with Copy.
Fig. 5-31 The line point list in the Text Mode menu
Differences exist in the following points only:

1. In the task of configuring the line point list, the following line point parameters can be set (the
designations used in the Maps > Edit > Lines > Columns menu are quoted on the left, and those
used in the headline of the line point list are quoted in the middle column).
222 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e33.fm / 10.05.12
Color Color The colour of the section of the map line between this line point
and the line point which is entered above it in the line point list
Date Date Date on which one of the items of line point data was modified last
Pattern Pattern Pattern (of dots and dashes in the map line section between this
line point and the line point entered above it in the line point list)
Longitude
Remark Remark Remark about the line point
2. In contrast to the track, a map can contain several lines. You obtain several map lines by splitting
up one map line:
Splitting up a map line: In the line point list, mark the line point above which splitting is to take
place, and under Line press the New Line button. As a result, the marked line point becomes the
start of the map line that is formed by the line points entered under it. This start of a map line is
marked by means of an asterisk on the left in the line point list.
3. In contrast to the track, a map line has no direction; in contrast to waypoints, the line points and map
lines have no serial numbers. Consequently, for the map lines there is no function equivalent to the
reversal of the track direction.
4. For the map lines, there is no equivalent to the waypoint files.
- Sets the start of a map line. For details of pattern and color, see text.
- Splits up a map line.
- Takes over the values displayed in In front of the line point marked Permits the modification of the geographical
the input area into the map file and last in the line point list, this position by input of the direction and distance by
switches over to the next line point. inserts a line point with the data which the displayed position is to be modified.
- Generates the first line point. shown in the input area.
Fig. 5-32 The input area of the line point data in the Text Mode menu
5. Line points have two parameters for which waypoints do not have an equivalent:
Pattern
Meaning: This specifies the pattern of dots and dashes which is to be used for displaying the map
line between this line point and the line point that is entered above it in the line point list. By selection
of the Pattern 01, the display of a map line section can be suppressed.
Editing: In the Line frame
Color
Meaning: This specifies the colour in which the map line is displayed on the colour screens between
this line point and the line point entered above it in the line point list.
1) See footnote on page 174
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 223

b_cp_e33.fm / 10.05.12
The following colours are available:

- Default (colour which is programmed for the display of map lines for the Radar mode)
- Black/white (black if Brightness is set to Bright Day;
white in all other brightness settings)
- Magenta
- Blue
- Green
5.5.6 Generating Symbols Alphanumerically in Text Mode
Select Symbols under Objects in the Maps > Edit menu, and switch on Text Mode. A Text Mode menu
appears, differing from the one shown on page 217 in that it contains the symbol list shown in Figure 5-
33 and the symbol data input area shown in Figure 5-34. Symbols are generated in exactly the same way
as the waypoints of a track or the line points of a map line. Here too, as a preparatory measure, it is
necessary to set the coordinate system to which the symbol positions to be input refer, and (if necessary)
to configure the symbol list. The editing of the symbol data too is done in the same way as described for
waypoint data in Section 5.1.8 (beginning page 180).
Differences relative to the editing of the navigation lines exist in the following points only:
1. In the configuring of the symbol list, the following parameters can be set (the designations used
in the Maps > Edit > Symbols > Columns menu are quoted on the left, and those used in the head-
line of the symbol list are quoted in the middle column).
Color Color The colour of the symbol
Date Date Date on which one of the items of symbol data was modified last
Longitude
Remark Remark Remark about the symbol
Type Type Symbol type (form and meaning of the symbol)
2. Symbols are individual elements. They do not form lines. Therefore, the sequence of the symbols
within the file is of no significance, and the editing possibilities which relate to lines are not applicable
here.
3. Symbols have only one parameter for which the line points have no equivalent:
Type
Meaning: This specifies the form of the symbol.
Editing: In the Symbol frame
Light vessel Spar light buoy (SB)

Radio reporting point Spar light buoy (P)
Pilot station Hazard buoy (N)
Anchorage Hazard buoy (E)
Fishing area Hazard buoy (S)
Cylindrical buoy Hazard buoy (W)
Conical buoy Light
Cylindrical light buoy Radio station
1) See footnote on page 174
224 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e33.fm / 10.05.12
Symbol data whose parameters were selected in

the Maps > Edit > Text Mode > Columns menu
for display in the symbol list
Causes printing of the symbol

list; see page 227.
Calls up the Maps > Edit > Text

Mode > Columns menu, in
which it is possible to specify the
parameters whose data are to
be displayed in the symbol list
and (if necessary) printed out.
Stores the marked symbols as In front of the symbol marked last, this
Deletes the marked inserts the symbols that were either
symbols that are to be copied. symbols. deleted last or marked last with Copy.
Fig. 5-33 The symbol list in the Text Mode menu
For details of Type, see text; for Color, see page 223.
- Takes over the values displayed in In front of the symbol marked last Makes it possible to modify the geograph-
the input area into the map file, and in the symbol list, this inserts a ical position by inputting the direction and
switches over to the next symbol. symbol with the data displayed in distance by which the displayed position is
- Generates the first symbol. the input area. to be modified.
Fig. 5-34 The input area of the symbol data in the Text Mode menu
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 225

b_cp_e33.fm / 10.05.12
5.5.7 Completing the Generation of the Map
The new or modified map must be stored, together with a statement of the necessary administrative data,
so that the data that have been input will not be lost as soon as the CHARTPILOT is switched off. The
details of this process depend on whether the map has only been modified, whether it has been gener-
ated as a completely new map, or whether it is generated on the basis of an existing map.
Ending the Generation of a Completely New Map

In the Maps > Edit menu, the Text mode must be in the switched-on state.
1. In the No. input field in the Map frame, enter a new map number.
When specifying the map number, note the following:
- Map numbers are independent of track numbers, i.e. a map and a track both having the same
number can be assigned to one and the same catalog.
- All circumstances that also have to be taken into account in the specifying of the track number
(see page 189).
2. In the Name input field in the Map frame, enter the map name.
When specifying the map name, note the following:
- In (almost) all lists, the map name is quoted behind the map number.
- In many lists, only the first 13 characters of the map name appear.
3. Store the map: Under Catalogs in the Maps > Edit > Store menu, mark the catalog in which the
map generated is to be entered. If you want to generate a new catalog, you can input under
Selected Catalog the name of the catalog that is to be generated (see also page 189).
In the Maps > Edit > Store menu, press the OK button. When this menu is then closed, the map is
saved on the hard disk of the CHARTPILOT. If, in step 1, you have input a map number that already
existed in the catalog, you are asked whether the existing map is to be overwritten. Because, in the
case described here, the map is a completely new one, you must answer this question by pressing
the No button, and you must enter a different map number (either as described in Text mode or in
the No. input field in the Maps > Edit > Store menu).
Ending the Generation of a Map which you Generate by Copying and Modifying an Existing Map
In the main memory, when preparing the editing, you have already generated a copy of the existing map
by selection. The modifications which you have made were made by you in this copy. Therefore, the
administrative data of the map that is used as the basis must not be taken over, because otherwise the
map used as the basis would be overwritten by the modified copy.
1. Switch on Text mode, and in the No. input field in the Map frame change the map number.
2. Also change the map name - see above, step 2.
3. Store the track - see above.
Ending the Modification of a Map

In the main memory, when preparing the editing, you have already generated a copy of the existing map
by selection. The modifications which you have made were made by you in this copy. The map stored
on the hard disk must now be overwritten by this copy: do not change the map number; call up the Maps
> Edit > Store menu; do not alter the catalog; and close the menu by pressing the OK button. A question
then appears about overwriting the existing map file; you must answer this question by pressing the Yes
button.
226 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e33.fm / 10.05.12
5.5.8 Printing Out Map Data in List Form
Like the waypoint data of all waypoints of a track, it is also possible to print out, in list form, the line point
data of all map lines of a map and the data of all symbols contained in a map. The procedure is the same
for all three types of list, and is described on page 191.
Whether you print out the data of the map lines or the data of the symbols depends upon whether
Symbols or Lines is selected under Objects in the Maps > Edit menu.
The standard list which can be selected with Standard in the menu Maps > Edit > Print contains the
following
- for map lines:
. Marking of the beginning of the line by means of an asterisk,
. Line point position stated in geographical coordinates,
. Colour,
. Pattern,
. Remark about the line point,
- for symbols:
. Position stated in geographical coordinates,
. Colour,
. Pattern,
. Remark about the symbol.
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 227

b_cp_e33.fm / 10.05.12
228 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e33.fm / 10.05.12
CHARTPILOT 6 Voyage Execution
Operating Instructions 6.1 Voyage Preparation
6 Voyage Execution
If, during the voyage, the CHARTPILOT is currently not being used for planning, it is used in Chart mode
for navigation and collision avoidance. The operating procedure for this is described in Section 4.
This section describes which preparations have to be made at the beginning of the voyage for the utili-
sation of the tracks generated as per Section 5.1, and which operating procedures can be performed on
the CHARTPILOT during the voyage with regard to the track being used.
Furthermore, under V o y a g e P r e p a r a t i o n , the time schedule planning aspect of track generation, of
voyage preparation and of voyage execution is summarised.
6.1 Voyage Preparation
This section describes the preparations that have to be made when pre-planned tracks are to be used
during the voyage. This work can be done on any CHARTPILOT or MULTIPILOT.
If a pre-planned track is only to be used to steer the ship, it is sufficient to define this track as the System
Track in accordance with Section 6.1.1.
If the possibilities provided by the system to control the speed of the ship are to be utilised too, set values
for the times and speed to be achieved must have been specified to the system. An overview of the
procedures required for this is given in Section 6.1.2.
6.1.1 Defining the System Track
If the ship is to sail along a pre-planned track, this track must be defined beforehand as the System
Track. This can also occur on any radar indicator.
The System Track is an important basis for the ECDIS monitoring (see page 104). A System Track must
also be defined so that the passage plan can be activated to achieve the planned sailing time (see page
240).
When a pre-planned track is defined as the System Track, it acquires the following special characteristics:
- The TRACKPILOT and SPEEDPILOT cannot be remotely controlled by any pre-planned track other
than the System Track.
- When the passage plan is being activated, the System Track is always used as the basis. Therefore,
the set speed information and sailing time information computed by the system during the voyage
always refer to the System Track.
- In the data displays of the CHARTPILOTs and the radar, only data of the System Track are
displayed.
- If the system configuration is suitable, the System Track is also available on the connected GPS
receiver 1).
The System Track is indicated by the fact that it is displayed in red with a dashed line style (and nor in
orange with a dotted line style like all other tracks).As long as
- the TRACKPILOT is using data of the System Track (i.e. when steering with Pilot Data and in Track
mode) or
- the SPEEDPILOT is using data of the System Track (i.e. in Profile mode and in Arrival mode),
no other pre-planned track can be defined as the System Track.
1) This function can be activated on service level of the radar system and for specific position sensors only.
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 229

b_cp_e38.fm / 10.05.12
6 Voyage Execution CHARTPILOT
6.1 Voyage Preparation Operating Instructions
Defining the System Track on the CHARTPILOT

1. The pre-planned track must be loaded: In the Tracks > Load menu, under Catalogs click the catalog
to which the track is assigned, under Tracks click the track that is to be loaded, and exit the menu
by pressing the OK button.
2. Under Loaded Tracks in the Tracks > Set System Track menu, mark the track that is to be defined
as the System Track, and exit the menu by pressing the OK button.
Frequently, own ship's position is then joined to the System Track by means of a approach track (for
details of this, see below under A p p r o a c h T r a c k t o t h e D e f i n e d S y s t e m T r a c k ).
If own ship's position is beside the System Track, you must check whether the program has selected the
current waypoint that you want to approach (displayed under To WP in the Track/Schedule or Track/
Control display, for example) or whether you will have to define a different waypoint to be approached.
Defining a Different Current Waypoint

Under Waypoints in the Tracks > Select menu, mark the desired waypoint and exit from the menu by
pressing the OK button. As a result, this waypoint is set as the current waypoint.
The defining of a different current waypoint leads automatically to other changes, which are defined
below under A p p r o a c h T r a c k t o t h e D e f i n e d S y s t e m T r a c k .
Checking the System Track

You have the possibility of checking the System Track against the vector chart and against the User
Chart Objects. The program uses the same routine as for the track check which is performed at the end
of the track generation process (see page 185). The check can also be performed during the voyage. The
region from the present track segment to the last waypoint is checked in this case.
The check is started by clicking with the INFO key into the field To WP, on the Track/Schedule display
or on the Conning Data display.
For the currently applicable track section, this check is also performed automatically by the program
while the ship is sailing along the track section – see page 106.
Deselecting the Existing System Track on the CHARTPILOT

If neither the TRACKPILOT nor the SPEEDPILOT is using data of the System Track, the System Track
can be deselected on the CHARTPILOT by pressing the Cancel System Track button in the Tracks
menu
230 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e38.fm / 10.05.12
USEFUL INFORMATION
Approach Track to the Defined System Track

The approach track, which - possibly after defining of the System Track or of a different current waypoint
- joins own ship's symbol to the current waypoint of the System Track, appears because the track control
mode of the TRACKPILOT was switched to To Waypoint. 1)
The switch-over of the TRACKPILOT to To Waypoint (and thus the insertion of the approach track)
always occurs
- when, during the defining of the System Track, the beginning of this track lies ahead (and therefore
waypoint No. 1 was used as the current waypoint) or
- when a different current waypoint was defined in the manner described above.
If, during the defining of the System Track, the ship is already situated beside the System Track, a
waypoint situated ahead (to one side) is automatically used as the current waypoint. In this case, the
TRACKPILOT is switched to To Waypoint
- if the use of the Pilot Data is switched on and, in the System Track, the track control mode is set to
To Waypoint for the track segment that is now the current track segment, or
- if the use of the Pilot Data is not switched on and the track control mode of the TRACKPILOT (in
the Pilot > TRACKPILOT menu) is To Waypoint.
Mark the track that is to become the System Track.
Defines the marked track as the System Track (if neither the TRACKPILOT nor the
SPEEDPILOT is already using data of a track); the menu is exited.
Exits the menu without definition of the System Track.
Fig. 6-1 The Tracks > Set System Track menu
1) If the CHARTPILOT is not being operated in the NACOS, the approach track appears in the following cases:
- When the System Track is being defined, the beginning of this track is situated ahead (and therefore waypoint No. 1 was used as the
current waypoint).
- A different current waypoint was defined as described above.
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 231

b_cp_e38.fm / 10.05.12
When the System Track is being defined, the ship does not necessarily have to be near this track. On
the contrary, the ship can be situated at any distance from the track. In the case of the voyage from
Rotterdam to New York, at the exit from the English Channel for example the track for the approach to
New York could be loaded and the first waypoint of this track could be approached in Track mode if there
are no other nautical conditions opposing this. Whether the approach track which then appears follows a
great circle or is a rhumb line depends on the setting of the sailing mode in the TRACKPILOT 1) (for
display, see the Pilot > TRACKPILOT menu).
The approach track to the defined System Track can be used as the track in every respect. Thus,
for example, it can not only be sailed along automatically with the TRACKPILOT: in the activated
passage plan too (see page 233), this route is taken into account for the time planning.
Number and name of the System Track
Mark the waypoint which is to be directly approached.
Pressing the OK button

- sets the marked waypoint as the present waypoint,
- switches the track control mode to To Waypoint.
Exits the menu without a waypoint having been selected.
Fig. 6-2 The Tracks > Select menu
6.1.2 Planning and Achieving the Voyage Timing
To plan the timing of the voyage and to fulfil this plan, several processes occurring at different times are
necessary. They depend upon whether the planning is to take place on the basis of the Planned Speed
values or on the basis of a constant speed.
1) If the CHARTPILOT is not being operated in the NACOS, the sailing mode parameter of waypoint No. 1 is the key parameter for this.
232 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e38.fm / 10.05.12
Voyage Planning on the Basis of the Planned Speed Values

1. During Track Generation
For the individual track segments, the Planned Speed must be defined (see page 184).
Furthermore, the waypoints which are to appear in the passage plan or are to be selectable as the
arrival point must be labelled by entering the Arrival Attribute (see step 2).
If the individual track segments are to be sailed at particular speeds with the aid of the SPEEDPILOT
(in Profile mode), the Profile Speed values must be input (see page 184).
2. Before the Start of the Voyage (for details, see Section 6.1.3)
If the planned time of departure and/or the planned time of arrival are known, a passage plan can
be printed out. For this purposes, the following items are input:
- the starting point, i.e. the waypoint at the beginning of the track section that is to be covered by
the time schedule planning (this is usually the first waypoint of the pre-planned track),
- the destination point, i.e. the waypoint at the end of the track section that is to be covered by
the time schedule planning (e.g. port of destination, pilot take-over point etc.; this destination
point is called the arrival point in the following),
- the planned time of departure or the planned time of arrival or - in the case of ferry services for
example - both the planned time of departure and the planned time of arrival,
- the maximum speed at which the ship is to sail (speed limit).
For all waypoints (which are provided with an Arrival Attribute), the passage plan contains, among
other things, the Estimated Time of Arrival (ETA) resulting from the Planned Speed values and
from the values that were input in the process of generating the passage plan.
If the time of departure and the time of arrival have been input and if these times are further apart
than the time difference resulting from the Planned Speed values, taking account of the speed limit
that has been input, then for the computation of the ETA values the highest Planned Speed values
are reduced sufficiently to ensure that the time of arrival that was input will in fact be achieved.
The speed at which the ship must sail in order to achieve the computed (and displayed) ETA values
is called the Arrival Speed within the system. The Arrival Speed values too are listed in the passage
plan.
3. Shortly Before or After Departure
To ensure that, during the voyage, the relevant displays and the computation of the Arrival Speed
will refer to the planned time of arrival at the arrival point, the passage plan must be activated. For
this purpose, the arrival point and the planned time of arrival must be input anew after the pre-
planned track has been defined as the System Track.
The ETA values of the waypoints situated ahead of the ship and the Arrival Speed values of the track
segments situated ahead of the ship are then computed anew. The computation is based on the
distance still to be sailed before the arrival point is reached, and on the existing time.
The Arrival Speed is determined as follows:
- If, with the Planned Speed values that were entered, the arrival point would be reached earlier
than planned, the Planned Speed values are reduced for the computation in the manner
described in step 2.
- If, with the Planned Speed values that were entered, the arrival point would be reached later
than planned, the delay is indicated behind Delay in the Track/Schedule display.
The active voyage planning data can be modified at any time. It is also possible at any time to
generate a new passage plan containing the updated data for the rest of the voyage.
4. During the Voyage
While the ship is sailing along the System Track, the computation described in step 3 is continuously
repeated by the program. The Arrival Speed which is computed during that process for the present
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 233

b_cp_e38.fm / 10.05.12
track segment (and for the next one) and the ETA computed during that process for the present
waypoint and for the arrival point are displayed in the Track/Schedule display.
From this, it follows that
- if no delay is displayed, the arrival point will be reached at the planned instant of time, as long
as the ship sails at the Arrival Speed displayed in each case,
- if a delay is displayed, it can be reduced or prevented by increasing the speed limit that was
input.
If the system is equipped with a SPEEDPILOT, the currently applicable Arrival Speed can be
achieved by activating the SPEEDPILOT and operating it in Arrival mode.
CHARTPILOT 01.11.95 DMY 10:27:04 HMS [ZT] Page 1
P A S S A G E P L A N
Text entered under Notes 1300 STO-S.ARM-KAS-HKI
in the Text Mode menu
during track generation Charts: 1125, 2314, 1316, 1317
ArSp ETA ATA Remark Waypoint Notes Weather/Remarks
3.1 10:26 __:__ AVGÅNG VÄRTAN ANM.VHF 9

The first waypoint 8.0 10:47 __:__ FJÄDERHOLM.VHF ANM.VHF 9
listed is the starting 12.0 10:51 __:__ KUNGSHAMN .
12.0 11:11 __:__ GRANHOLMEN .
point. 10.0 11:24 __:__ BERGHOLMEN .
8.0 11:34 __:__ LAGNÖGR.VHF ANM.VHF 9
10.0 11:51 __:__ OFB .
12.0 12:14 __:__ Ö.ÄLGÖGRUND ANM.VHF 9
12.0 12:27 __:__ BLÖTHOLMEN .
12.0 12:48 __:__ RYSSMASTERNA GRHOLMEN VHF 9
12.0 13:04 __:__ STABOUDDE .
12.0 13:36 __:__ GRYTEN ANM.VHF 9
12.0 13:51 __:__ EKNÖ .
8.0 14:03 __:__ FURUSUND SKATEN .
17.0 14:19 __:__ MARÖ VHF ANM.VHF 9
19.0 14:35 __:__ LERSKÄR D =0.02
Data of the waypoints 22.0 14:51 __:__ TJÄRVEN ANM.VHF 9
22.0 14:58 __:__ SÖDERARM 2 RODERP./ECON.6
that have an Arrival 23.0 15:47 __:__ ARMBÅGEN B= D= L=
Attribute 23.0 16:16 __:__ BOGSKÄR B= D= L=
23.0 16:53 __:__ SUOMEN LEIJONA B= D= /NMT SF
23.0 17:35 __:__ LILLHARUN B= D= L=
23.0 18:12 __:__ HAMNSKÄRS KUMMEL B= D= L=
23.0 19:11 __:__ BENGTSKÄR B= D= L=
23.0 20:34 __:__ JUSSARÖ B= D= L=
23.0 21:35 __:__ KALLBÅDAN B= D= L=
23.0 22:31 __:__ H:FORS KASUN ANM.TILL GRHARA
The last waypoint 23.0 22:44 __:__ FLATHÄLLSGRUNDET SE CHECK LISTA 1
listed is the arrival 16.0 22:50 __:__ GRÅHARA ANM.VHF 16
12.0 23:01 __:__ G-SVÄRD SE CHECK LISTA 2
point. 1.5 23:30 __:__ ANK.HELSINGFORS
Fig. 6-3 Example of a Passage Plan
Voyage Planning on the Basis of a Constant Speed

If the greater part of the pre-planned track is to be sailed at constant speed and therefore no Profile
Speed values have been entered for the track, it might be sufficient to perform the voyage planning
activity only for that part of the track that is to be sailed at constant speed. In that case, during the
passage plan generation process in step 2, you should input not the speed limit but the set speed (see
page 235), and when the passage plan is being activated (step 3) you should additionally input this set
speed (see page 240).
234 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e38.fm / 10.05.12
6.1.3 Generating the Passage Plan
If the time of departure or the desired time of arrival or (e.g. in the case of schedule shipping line serv-
ices) the time of departure and the time of arrival are known, the passage plan can be generated. The
passage plan (see Figure 6-3 on page 234) contains among other things the ETA values for all waypoints
that are provided with an Arrival Attribute, and can be used as a dead reckoning table.
Generating the Passage Plan

1. Adjust the printer and the printer controller (see page 73).
2. In the Tracks > Load menu, load the track that is to be used as the basis, mark that track in the
Tracks > Time Schedule > Loaded Track menu, and exit the menu by pressing the OK button. The
Time Schedule menu appears (see Figure 6-5 on page 237); its structure is similar to that of the
text editing menus. 1)
3. If the parameters which you need for your work are not displayed in the waypoint list of the Time
Schedule menu, you must first configure the waypoint list (see below).
4. Switch off the Show All function.
5. Specifying the time zone to which all time information in the passage plan is to refer: in the frame
Time Zone,
- select Actual if the time zone that is currently set (entered in the menu Sensor Settings > Date/
Time - see page 152) is to be used
- select UTC or
- select Manual and enter the time zone that is wanted for the passage plan.
6. Selecting the Starting Point (the waypoint at which the time calculation is to begin):
In the waypoint list, mark the starting point and press Set Departure.
7. Selecting the arrival point:
In the waypoint list, mark the arrival point and press Set Arrival.
8. Setting the speed limit (if the voyage planning is to take place on the basis of the Planned Speed
values):
Press the Planned button in the Speed Base frame; under Limit, enter the maximum speed at
which the ship is to sail; and press the Apply button in the Speed Base frame.
or
9. Inputting the Set Speed (if the planning is to take place on the basis of a constant speed):
Press the Set button in the Speed Base frame; under Value, enter the speed at which the ship is
to sail; and press the Apply button in the Speed Base frame.
10. Now, you can
- input only the planned time of departure. The earliest possible times of arrival are then
computed on the basis of this point in time.
- input only the planned time of arrival. The latest possible times of departure are then computed
on the basis of this point in time.
- input both the time of departure and the time of arrival. If these times are further apart than the
time difference resulting from the Planned Speed values, taking account of the set speed-limit,
or resulting from the set speed that was input, then for the computation of the ETA values the
highest speed values are reduced sufficiently to ensure that the time of arrival that was input
will in fact be achieved. If these times are closer together than the time difference resulting from
1)
If, in the passage plan, the position data are to refer to a coordinate system different from the one that was set for the display in the chart
area, you can set the desired coordinate system under Coordinate System in the Time Schedule menu.
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 235

b_cp_e38.fm / 10.05.12
the Planned Speed values, taking account of the set speed-limit or resulting from the set speed
that was input, the possible times of arrival are computed on the basis of the time of departure
that was input.
Inputting the Planned Time of Departure
Under ETD in the input area in the Departure frame, input the planned time of departure (estimated
time of departure), and press the Apply button in the Departure frame. The time-dependent data
are then computed anew in the waypoint list.
Inputting the Planned Time of Arrival
Under ETA in the input area in the Arrival frame, input the planned time of arrival (estimated time
of arrival), and press the Apply button in the Arrival frame. The time-dependent data are then
computed anew in the waypoint list.
All time information must be based on one and the same time zone, preferably the one that will
be set for the system during the planned voyage.
11. If the desired timing is displayed in the waypoint list, the passage plan can be printed or stored on
a Floppy or removable device 1):
Press the Print button; in the menu which then appears, click Passage Plan; and press the OK
button. The passage plan is then printed.
If, in the Print menu, To Floppy or To Device is selected instead of To Printer, the passage
plan is not printed out. It will be stored as a CSV-file on a removable device 2). The name of
the file is "MapFile.txt". This file can be read by the Microsoft programs Word or Excel, and then
processed further, for instance in order to add specific information or to generate a user specific
print format on an external Windows-PC.
Passage Plan and Passage List can be printed only, As Configured must be used to store
the passage plan a removable device.
Prepares the printing of the passage plan.

Prepares the printing of the passage list in standard configuration- see. page 239.
Prepares the printing of the passage list in the configuration of the waypoint list of
the Time Schedule menu. - see page 239.
Selects whether the passage plan, the passage list or the time schedule is output to the
printer (To Printer) or written to a removable device as a file (To Floppy or To Device).
Printing takes place on this printer.
0 = no printer is selected.
Leaves the menu without a print-out taking place.
Starts the printing.
Fig. 6-4 The Tracks > Time Schedule > Print menu
1) see also Chapter 3.7: "Using Removable Devices" on page 73

2) see footnote 1)
236 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e38.fm / 10.05.12
Calls up the Tracks > Edit > Selecting the time zone to Here, a different coordi-
Text Mode > Columns menu which all time information in nate system can be set
(Figure 5-9 on page 175) in the passage plan refers: for the listed position
which it is possible to specify UTC data than the one that is
the parameters whose data Actual: The time zone that is set for the chart area. 1)
are to be displayed in the currently set (entered in the
Initiates printing of the waypoint list and are to be menu Sensor Settings > Date/
passage plan or of the time printed out in the list of time Time - see page 152)
schedule planning data in schedule planning data. Manual: The time zone that is
list form - see page 239. entered manually here
Management data of the track;

under Notes, you can inspect the
notes that were input during
generation of the track.
Switched on: In the waypoint list, all

waypoints are listed.
Switched off: Only the waypoints
having an Arrival Attribute are listed.
Waypoint list:
Waypoint data whose parameters
were selected in the Tracks > Time
Schedule > Columns menu for
display in the waypoint list.
The Arrival Speed and the ETA
values are calculated from the
values that were input in the
Departure, Arrival and Speed
Base frames.
Defines the marked waypoint

as the starting point (not
possible if the track is defined
as the System Track).
Defines the marked waypoint

as the arrival point.
Activates the passage plan with

the values displayed in this menu
(possible only if the track is
defined as the System Track).
Planned pressed:
The Arrival Speed and the ETA values are
Data of the starting point; if necessary, computed from the Planned Speed values,
change ETD and press Apply (not Data of the arrival point; if taking account of the limit that is entered
possible if the track is defined as the necessary, change ETA and under Limit.
System Track). press Apply. Set pressed:
The Arrival Speed and the ETA values are
computed for the speed that is entered
under Value. The Planned Speed values
1) If the parameterisation of the coordinate system for are not used.
special tasks was set at service level, the Geographic After any change of these data, press
button serves only to display the (permanently) set Apply.
projection (see page 96).
Fig. 6-5 The Time Schedule menu
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 237

b_cp_e38.fm / 10.05.12
Configuring the Waypoint List

The configuring of the waypoint list shown here is done in the same way as the configuring of the
waypoint list during generation of the tracks (see page 173). During this process, the following parame-
ters can be set (the designations used in the Tracks > Time Schedule > Columns menu are listed on the
left, and the designations used in the headline of the waypoint list are listed beside them).
1. All parameters which can be configured for the waypoint list during generation of the track:
Control Mode CM Track control mode
Course Limit CrsL Course limit
Date Date Date on which an item of the waypoint data was last altered
Distance Dist Distance from the last waypoint (from waypoint to waypoint)
Economy Ec Rudder economy
Owner ID Owner ID Administration Owner and Administration ID
Planned Speed PlSp Planned Speed
Longitude
Profile Speed PrSp Profile Speed
Radius Rad Radius
Remark Remark Remark about the waypoint
Sail Mode SM Sailing mode
Track Track Direction of the track segment from the last waypoint
Track Distance TrDst Sum of the distances between the waypoints, cumulatively
from the first waypoint onwards
Track Limit TrkL Track limit
Type Type Arrival Attribute and Parameter Point Attribute
2. Special Planning Parameters:
Arrival Speed ArSp Length of the track segment to the waypoint (along the track,
taking account of the radii)
DistanceR Dist R Length of the track segment to the waypoint (along the track,
taking account of the radii)
Distance To Go R DTG R Total distance to go to the arrival point (along the track, taking
account of the radii)
ETA ETA Estimated time of arrival (probable time of arrival if the ship
sails at the Arrival Speed)
ETA Profile ETA P ETA for Profile mode (probable time of arrival if the ship sails
at the Profile Speed)
Track Distance R TrDstR Total distance from the starting point (along the track, taking
account of the radii)
TTG TTG Time to go (sailing time to the arrival point if the ship sails at
the Arrival Speed)
TTG Profile TTG P TTG for Profile mode (sailing time to the arrival point if the
ship sails at the Profile Speed)
If you select ETA Profile and TTG Profile, the waypoint list will show you the times which will result
if the ship sails along the track with the Profile Speed values.
1) See footnotes on page 174
238 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e38.fm / 10.05.12
6.1.4 Printing Out Time Schedule Planning Data in List Form
The planned timing of the voyage can be printed out in list form. The passage plan is one of the possi-
bilities for doing this; the process of generating it is described on page 235. Another standard configura-
tion is the passage list. Alternatively, however, you can configure the list yourself, and while doing so you
can select the parameters to be listed.
Passage List
In the passage list, the following parameters are listed for all waypoints of the pre-planned track (see
Figure 6-6:
- Waypoint number
- Arrival attribute and Parameter attribute
- Length of the track segment to the waypoint (along the track, taking account of the radii)
- Planned Speed
- Arrival Speed
- Profile Speed
- Time to go
- Estimated time of arrival
- Remark about the waypoint.
The passage list is generated and printed out in exactly the same way as the passage plan, the only
difference being that, after pressing of the Print button, Passage List has to be clicked instead of
Passage Plan - see page 236, step 11.
Configured List
If you proceed in accordance with Section 6.1.3 as if you wanted to generate a passage plan, but after
pressing of the Print button you then click As Configured instead of Passage Plan, a list is printed out
with the configuration that is set for the waypoint list in the Time Schedule menu.
With the Show All button, you can specify whether the data of all waypoints are to be printed out,
or only the data of those waypoints that have an Arrival Attribute.
CHARTPILOT 01.11.95 DMY 10:27:25 HMS [ZT] Page 1
P A S S A G E L I S T
1300 STO-S.ARM-KAS-HKI
Charts: 1125, 2314, 1316, 1317

Text entered under Notes
in the Text Mode menu No. DistR PlSp ArSp PrSp TTG ETA Remark
during track generation
0001 A 0.00 3.1 3.1 3.1 01.11.95 10:26 AVGÅNG VÄRTAN
0002 0.39 3.4 3.4 3.4 6:54 01.11.95 10:32 YTTER OM VÄRTAN
0003 0.76 8.0 8.0 8.0 5:41 01.11.95 10:38 LOUDDEN
0004 0.69 8.0 8.0 8.0 5:08 01.11.95 10:43 FJÄDERHOLMARNA
0005 A 0.53 8.0 8.0 8.0 3:57 01.11.95 10:47 FJÄDERHOLM.VHF
The data of all waypoints 0006 P 0.28 10.0 10.0 10.0 1:39 01.11.95 10:49 HÖGUDDEN
are listed. 0007 A 0.45 12.0 12.0 12.0 2:14 01.11.95 10:51 KUNGSHAMN
0008 1.31 12.0 12.0 12.0 6:33 01.11.95 10:58 HASSELUDDEN
Fig. 6-6 Beginning of a Passage List
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 239

b_cp_e38.fm / 10.05.12
6.2 Changes in the Voyage Planning and in the Track during the Voyage Operating Instructions
6.1.5 Activating the Passage Plan
So that, during the voyage, the Arrival Speed and the displays for fulfilment of the passage plan will refer
to the planning values that are input during generation of the passage plan, the passage plan must be
activated with these values as soon as the System Track has been defined.
1. In the Tracks > Time Schedule menu, press the System Track button. In the Time Schedule menu
which then appears, the data of the System Track are displayed.
2. Set the speed limit (if the pre-planned track is to be sailed on the basis of the Planned Speed
values):
In the Speed Base frame, press the Planned button; under Limit, enter the maximum speed at
which the ship is to sail; and in the Speed Base frame, press the Apply button.
or
3. Input the set speed (if the pre-planned track is to be sailed at a constant speed):
In the Speed Base frame, press the Set button; under Value, enter the speed at which the ship is
to sail; and in the Speed Base frame, press the Apply button.
4. Select the arrival point:
In the waypoint list, mark the arrival point, and press Set Arrival.
5. Input the planned time of arrival:
Under ETA in the input area in the Arrival frame, input the planned time of arrival, and press the
Apply button in the Arrival frame. This time of arrival must refer to the time zone that is set for the
system (e.g. on the radar) when the time of arrival is input.
6. Press Activate Schedule, and answer the question which then appears by pressing the Yes button.
Only then do the inputs that were made become effective.
If the values that are input here are not in agreement with the passage plan generated previously,
the generation of the passage plan can be repeated with input of the new values. The differences
relative to the procedure described in Section 6.1.3 are that the starting point and the departure time
can no longer be defined and that the passage plan is printed only for the waypoints lying ahead.
If, during activation of the passage plan, the ship is not situated on the System Track (see page 231),
this is taken into account in the activated passage plan.
6.2 Changes in the Voyage Planning and in the Track during the Voyage
This section describes the possibilities available to you for changing the System Track and the activated
voyage planning during the voyage, and how the track can change during the voyage as a result of other
influences.
All of the changes described here are temporary. The stored data of the track that is defined as the
System Track remain unaffected by this.
Changing the Activated Voyage Planning

If lateness develops during the voyage and is displayed, the voyage planning for the rest of the voyage
can be modified by raising the speed limit that was input during activation of the schedule. The planned
time of arrival too or the arrival point can be altered during the voyage. The input of the new values is
done using the procedure described in Section 6.1.5.
240 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e38.fm / 10.05.12
Operating Instructions 6.2 Changes in the Voyage Planning and in the Track during the Voyage
Changing the Track by Changing the Sailing Mode

If the ship is being steered with the TRACKPILOT in Track mode, the sailing mode (see page 183) can
be changed manually on a radar indicator, i.e. the current track segment (and possibly the following track
segments up to the next waypoint for which the sailing mode is defined in the stored track data) changes
from a rhumb line to a great circle segment or vice versa. 1))
Depending on the spacing and position of the waypoints, a lateral offset occurs between the waypoints,
which, if the range setting is small, can also cause the track to disappear from the screen.
A Waypoint Lying Further Ahead is Approached Directly

When the ship is sailing along the System Track, it can be specified that, instead of the current waypoint,
a different waypoint is to be approached directly. This specification process can also be performed on the
CHARTPILOT:
1. Under Waypoints in the Tracks > Select menu, mark the waypoint that is to be approached.
2. Press the OK button. As a result,
- the marked waypoint is set as the current waypoint,
- the track control mode is switched to To Waypoint,
- the distance between the ship and the waypoint that is now the current waypoint is computed
anew as a direct connection and is displayed additionally in the chart area,
- in the System Track, the current track segment is replaced by this newly computed track
segment 2).
1) If the CHARTPILOT is not being operated in the NACOS, a change in the sailing mode is possible only by editing the track. For this
purpose, the track must be deselected so that it is no longer the System Track.
2) All displays of the System Track (e.g. those in the data displays) now refer to the newly computed System Track.
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 241

b_cp_e38.fm / 10.05.12
6.2 Changes in the Voyage Planning and in the Track during the Voyage Operating Instructions
242 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e38.fm / 10.05.12
CHARTPILOT 7 Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts
Operating Instructions 7.1 General
7 Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts
If the use of electronic charts is to increase the level of safety in navigation, the charts that are displayed
must be reliable. A prerequisite for this is that the charts are installed correctly and are constantly kept
up-to-date. This goal can only be achieved if the operator has adequately understood what effect his data
maintenance activities actually have on the system.
Unfortunately, the fact that, for technical reasons, different procedures are necessary for the various chart
types 1) which can be used at the CHARTPILOT, that the same objects or concepts are given different
names by the providers 2), that the same terms sometimes have different meanings 3) and also that the
on-board systems differ in the number of CHARTPILOTs and MULTIPILOTs and with regard to the chart
types used 4) does not lead to particularly clear situation.
If you are not yet familiar with the subject matter, we recommend the following:
- First read Section 4.1: "General Information about Electronic Charts and User Chart Objects" on
page 79 and 4.2 for general information on the chart types used (or to be installed) in your system.
- Then read through Section 7.1: "General" on page 243 and 7.2 and, if possible, reproduce the oper-
ating sequences described there at a CHARTPILOT for a better understanding.
- Only then should you perform the work described in Section 7.3: "Data Maintenance of the ENC" on
page 259 to 7.8 for the chart types used or to be installed in your system.
7.1 General
For each chart type to be used, every CHARTPILOT and every MULTIPILOT has a database on its hard
disk drive. 5) This contains all the files needed for displaying and updating the corresponding chart type.
These sets of data must be continually updated, i.e. new files must be transferred to them, and old files
must be deleted or overwritten there.
At CHARTPILOTs and MULTIPILOTs, only the chart data existing in the own database can be
displayed. 6) Most chart maintenance activities can be performed at any CHARTPILOT for all CHARTPI-
LOTs and all MULTIPILOTs 7), but please note:
IMPORTANT:
It is urgently recommended that all chart maintenance work for all
CHARTPILOTs and MULTIPILOTs should, if possible, always be
performed o n t h e s a m e C H A R T P I L O T .
1) Examples: Various licensing schemes; different information on the data media provided
2)
Example: The “permit” for ARCS charts is known as the “licence” for other chart types.
3) Example: For various chart types, the “plan” is the designation for the navigational purpose corresponding to the largest chart scale, but for
ARCS charts this is also the term for detailed charts it contains. Such a plan can also have the navigational purpose Harbour or Approach.
4) It is not practicable to produce separate Operating Instructions for the various combinations which may result. This section refers to the
maximum version of the system, i.e. having several CHARTPILOTs and MULTIPILOTs and using all the possible chart types. If there is
only one CHARTPILOT or no MULTIPILOT installed, the corresponding selection possibilities and transfer requirements mentioned in the
following are not applicable. The same applies for the chart types.
5) The same chart types are normally used on all CHARTPILOTs and MULTIPILOTs. On the service level, however, it is possible to define
that certain chart types are not used on particular CHARTPILOTs and MULTIPILOTs, i.e. that no databases for these types are created
there. The reason for distinctions can also lie in the different possibilities of the units which can be combined with each other: Within a
NACOS xx-2 system, for example, only the chart type CM-93/2 can be used at a MULTIPILOT 9x22, but other chart types can also be
utilized at a CHARTPILOT.
6) The data of the charts displayed at the CHARTRADARs of the system originate from the databases of a CHARTPILOT (defined for this
purpose on the service level).
7)
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 243

b_cp_e35.fm / 10.05.12
7 Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts CHARTPILOT
7.1 General Operating Instructions
IMPORTANT:
The initial installation can take several hours. Even an update may
require a considerable length of time. Therefore, perform this task in
good time before the start of the voyage.
IMPORTANT:
The chart maintenance work must be carried out so that the databases
of all CHARTPILOTs and MULTIPILOTs always have the same status.
This is ensured if the notes given here are observed and the sequences
described are followed.
☞ An easily determined indication of unequal stati of the databases is when the numbers of cells /
charts they contain are different; see Figure 7-2.
7.1.1 Starting, Background Operation and Ending the Chart Maintenance Subroutine
Data maintenance of the electronic charts is performed by means of the Chart Maintenance subroutine.
An exception to this rule is the data maintenance of the User Chart Objects, which is performed together
with the track files and waypoint files - see Section 8.1: "Management of the Track, Waypoint, Map and
User Chart Objects Files" on page 321.
☞ When starting the Chart Maintenance subroutine, all CHARTPILOTs and MULTIPILOTs at which a
chart maintenance action is to be performed must already have been switched on.
Starting: Press the Tree button, and then press the Chart Maintenance button. As a result, the world
chart appears (see Figure 7.1.2) together with the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance and the selection
menu. In the following, this setting is assumed as the starting point.
Background operation: To use the CHARTPILOT for other purposes while prolonged maintenance
sequences are running automatically, there are the following possibilities:
- Switching over without changing the previous settings: Press the Tree button, and then in the top
line press the CHART or CONNING button.
- Switching over to the standard display using the button Std Disp (see page 51).
- Switching over to Planning display mode at a marked position (see page 247).
☞ As soon as the chart maintenance program running in the background needs an operator action, a
message is shown. Then return to the current chart maintenance operation by using the buttons
Tree and Chart Maintenance.
Ending: The Chart Maintenance subroutine should be terminated if it is not performing any operations:
In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance, press the Exit button.
244 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e35.fm / 10.05.12
7.1.2 The World Chart
Menu Utilities >

Chart Mainte-
nance - see Figure
7-3 on page 248
World chart with

display of the existing
charts or cells
For certain back-

ground operations
that take some time,
an appropriate
message is shown
here.
Selection menu - see

Figure 7-2 on page
246
Geographical posi-
tion of the cursor on
the world chart
Fig. 7-1 The Chart Maintenance display with the world chart
The world chart offers a graphic overview of the existing files of the various types of electronic chart, for
all CHARTPILOTs, MULTIPILOTs and for the Removable Device 1) of the CHARTPILOT being operated.
If necessary, it is also possible to select here the electronic chart files that are to be dealt with in connec-
tion with data maintenance - see page 253.
Furthermore, the pre-planned tracks existing in the system can be added to the display of the world chart.
Displaying the Position of the Existing Cells / Charts / Plans 2)

1. In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance, select under Source the equipment item or data medium
whose data are to be displayed.
☞ If the content of a Removable Device 3) is to be displayed and if this data medium was
exchanged after the start of the Chart Maintenance subroutine, a new table of contents must be
generated by pressing the Make Table of Contents button; see also page 257.
2. In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance, select under Type the type of electronic chart whose
data are to be displayed.
1)
see also Section 3.7: "Using Removable Devices" on page 73
2) Cells of the vector charts (ENC, CM-93/3Pro, CM-93/2, Own Chart), charts and plans of the raster charts (ARCS).
3) see also Section 3.7: "Using Removable Devices" on page 73
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 245

b_cp_e35.fm / 10.05.12
3. By means of the Navigational Purpose button under Displayed Cells or Displayed Charts in the
Selection menu, select the navigational purpose of the cells / charts / plans that are to be displayed.
The existing cells / charts / plans which fulfil the selection are marked by means of white hatching.
The white lines around these areas represent the boundaries of the individual cells / charts / plans.
Displaying an Excerpt from the World Chart in Enlarged Form

1. In the Selection Mode frame, select the Rectangle function.
2. Move the cursor to a corner of the area that is to be enlarged, press the DO key, and keep it
pressed; with the trackball, draw a rectangle round the area that is to be enlarged, and release the
DO key. If the rectangle is to be modified, move the cursor to the line or corner that is to be modified;
when the cursor symbol changes, press the DO key and correct the rectangle. Next, under Display,
press the Zoom button.
3. For greater enlargement, repeat point 2.
4. If necessary, press Previous to return to the display that had been generated previously.
5. If necessary, press World to return to the display of the world chart.
In the case of long-duration data Navigational purpose of the Switches on/off the display of
maintenance activities, the current displayed cells 1) towns and points of approach.
program-status is displayed here.
For zooming, switch
on Rectangle.
Specifying the
chart excerpt.
Scale range of the navigational Number of cells 1) 2) of the

1) 2) purpose being displayed (in the case navigational purpose
Graphic selection of cells*) Total number of cells
of ARCS, CM-93/2 and CM-93/3Pro) being displayed
1) or ARCS charts and ARCS plans.
2) When all databases of a chart type have the same status, the number must be the same:
Check this by marking all Sources one after the other in the Chart Maintenance menu; see Figure 7-3.
Fig. 7-2 The selection menu in the Chart Maintenance display
Displaying the Position of the Existing Tracks

1. In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance > Display Tracks, select under Catalogs the catalog in
which the tracks to be displayed are listed, and under Tracks select one or more tracks.
2. Press the OK button. The selected tracks are then displayed (in orange) in the world chart.
Alternatively, all tracks can be displayed by pressing the Display All Tracks button.
☞ If there are a large number of tracks, the necessary loading of all tracks might take several minutes.
The display of the tracks is switched off by pressing the Clear Track Display button in the menu Util-
ities > Chart Maintenance > Display Tracks and by exiting the menu by pressing the OK button.
Display of Town Names and Points of Approach

By pressing the Locations button, you can switch on and off the display of the town names and points
of approach on the world chart.
246 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e35.fm / 10.05.12
Operating Instructions 7.2 Common Aspects of the Various Chart Types
7.1.3 Switching Over to Planning Display Mode at a Marked Position
1. Enlarge the excerpt of the world chart so that the centre of the chart excerpt that is to be displayed
can be defined precisely enough.
2. In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance, set as the Type the electronic chart that is to be used.
3. In the Selection menu, define the range scale of the chart display by setting the navigational
purpose.
4. In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance, press the Set Planning Mode button, and for the ques-
tion which then appears give the answer OK.
5. In the world chart, click on the position that is to be the centre of the chart excerpt which is to be
displayed. As a result,
- a switch-over to Planning display mode occurs,
- a switch-over to the display of the electronic chart occurs, and
- in the case of vector charts, there is a switch-over to a range corresponding to the navigational
purpose that is set under Displayed Cells or,
in the case of raster charts, a chart having the scale that is displayed under Displayed Charts
is selected,
- the clicked position is used as the centre of the chart area.
☞ The Chart Maintenance subroutine continues to run. If a return to that subroutine is to take place,
the buttons Tree and Chart Maintenance must be pressed one after another. The display that had
been set before pressing of the Set Planning Mode button then appears.
7.2 Common Aspects of the Various Chart Types
7.2.1 The Menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance
The most important operating steps here are:

- Selection of the chart type: After pressing the Type button.
- Selection of the data source, the data of which are to be displayed, transferred or deleted:
Mark as required in the Source list. Explanation of the possibilities:
- CHARTPILOT/MULTIPILOT: The source is the database of the equipment item mentioned. If
several equipment items of the same type are present, the number displayed in the header of
the equipment item’s data display is stated - see page 64.
- (this one): If there are several CHARTPILOTs installed, (this one) indicates the CHARTPILOT
on which this menu appears (= local database).
- CDROM: The source is the CD/DVD 1) that is inserted in the CD/DVD 1) drive
- Floppy: The source is the Floppy disk that is inserted in the Floppy of the CHARTPILOT
- USB-Disk X 2): The source can be a USB-disk or an external USB-storage-media connected via
the USB-port of the CHARTPILOT, see also Section 3.7: "Using Removable Devices" on page
73.
1) see footnotes on page 245 and on page 298.

2) X means 1, 2, 3 ...
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 247

b_cp_e35.fm / 10.05.12
7.2 Common Aspects of the Various Chart Types Operating Instructions
Selection of the chart maintenance activity:

- With the buttons Update and Transfer: Transfers/updates of the chart or cell files.
- With the button Delete: Deletion of files in the databases.
- With the button ... Licensing or ... Subscription: Procure/transfer/change of the subscription,
permits or licences.
- With the button Other Functions: Other functions, e.g. delete databases completely.
For further operating possibilities in this menu: see Figure 7-3.
Checking of the available hard disk capacity (see page 259)
Marking the equipment item / data medium (source) whose cells/charts/plans are to be
displayed, transferred or deleted, list of availlable items will be updated every 3 second.
Selecting the type of electronic chart to be displayed.
This generates a table of contents of the inserted data medium; it is only necessary
after an exchange of CD/DVD, USB-Disk(s) or Floppy (see page 257).
Transferring and updating of chart data. The button that must be used for a particular transfer
or update is described in Section 7.3: "Data Maintenance of the ENC" on page 259 to 7.8.
Deleting of chart data.
After the clicking of a position, this switches over into the main program (into Planning
display mode), and thus switches on the display of the electronic chart. This does not
cause switch-off of the Chart Maintenance subroutine (see page 247).
Displays tracks in the world chart (see page 246).
Purchase/transfer/change the subscription, permits or licences.
Other functions, e.g. delete databases completely.
Switches the Chart Maintenance subroutine off and calls up the display of the
electronic chart again (see page 244).
Fig. 7-3 The menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance
7.2.2 Procuring the Subscription, Permits and Licences
The electronic charts are not included within the scope of delivery of the CHARTPILOT 1). To be able to
use them, licensed cells / charts must be procured or a subscription taken out in many cases.
Licensed cells / charts are encrypted by the manufacturer or provider. The provider supplies a key that
is needed to be able to use such a cell / chart; amongst other data, it contains the identification code of
the system for which the cells / charts were procured. It is therefore necessary to inform the provider
about this system identification code 2) in addition to the required geographical regions. You can deter-
mine the system identification code at the CHARTPILOT, specify the required geographical areas, and
then contact the provider 3) yourself.
1) Exception: In certain cases, a licence of the chart type CM-93/3Pro is included in the scope of supply; see page 300.
2)
This system identification code has the designation User Permit No. for the chart types IHO ENC and ARCS and the designation System
ID for Jeppesen Marine ENC and CM-93/3Pro. For CM-93/2, it is contained in the CM-93/2 User Code.
3)
Or the distributor. In this business, some distributors perform the tasks of the provider, and vice versa. The term "provider” will be used
throughout this document, even when the tasks typically performed by a distributor are involved.
248 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e35.fm / 10.05.12
Depending on the chart type, you will then receive

- one key for all regions (with CM-93/2, where this is called the Authorization Code),
- a file with keys for individual regions or cells (with Jeppesen Marine ENC 1) and CM-93/3Pro, where
they are called licences), or
- one or more files with the keys for the individual cells / charts (with IHO ENC 1) and ARCS, where
they are called permits).
Normally, you will receive these data on a Floppy. It is also possible that they are sent by e-mail to the
ship, where they must then be copied to a Floppy or external USB-Disk(s) 2).
These keys must then be transferred to the local database before the licensed cells / charts can be trans-
ferred. Insofar as they are needed for the display, they are automatically transferred to the other data-
bases during the transfer and updating of the chart and cell files.
☞ Before the cells / charts for which licences were installed are actually used (Section 4: "Functions
for Navigation and Collision Avoidance" on page 79 and following sections), the corresponding chart
type must be selected again as per Section 4.1.1: "Switching On the Display of the Chart and
Selecting the Chart Type" on page 79 at the corresponding CHARTPILOT or MULTIPILOT. This
does not apply to the CHARTPILOT at which the chart maintenance work was performed.
For further details on this subject, see Section 7.3.1: "Permits for Licensed ENC cells" on page 262 to
7.8.1.
7.2.3 Transferring and Updating the Charts or Cell Files
(ARCS) chart and (vector) cell files are made available by the relevant provider on CD-ROM/external
USB-Disk(s), both for the initial installation and the regular updates. Various providers make it possible,
through their online update services, to transfer the most recent data to the ship by e-mail and/or by
Internet file transfer, so that the necessary CD-ROM (or, in certain cases, the Floppy or external USB-
Disk(s)) can be produced on board.
There are two different functions:
Transfer function: This is started with the Transfer button of the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance.
It can be used for all chart types to perform the following tasks:
- Transfer data of all files, or of selected files, from the CD-ROM, USB-Disk(s) or Floppy to one,
several or all databases of the system.
- Also to copy all, or selected, files from the local database to one, several or all other databases of
the system. 3)
If there are files, will be overwritten on the CHARTPILOT, a safeguard question apears.
Update function: This is started with the Update button of the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance.2)
If there are files, which will be overwritten on the CHARTPILOT, a safeguard question apears.
It is used for licensed ENC cells, for ARCS charts and for CM-93/3Pro cells. In one working step, this
function is used for the following purposes with the CD-ROM/USB-Disk(s) on one, several or all data-
bases of the system:
- New additional files are transferred 4).
- Where necessary, files are updated.
- Outdated files that are no longer supported are deleted (for ENC cells and ARCS charts after a safe-
guard question).3)
1) Jeppesen Marine ENC and IHO ENC: see page 259

3)
A Select Device dialog box opens, if the file-structure (Table of Contents) of ENC, ARCS, CM-93/3Pro-charts or cells does not have the
standard file structure. CD/DVD, Floppy or USB-Disk(s)s having the stanard file structure will be updated automatically to the CHARTPILOT
without opening a Select Device dialog box.
4) Not with all online update services.
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 249

b_cp_e35.fm / 10.05.12
With regard to the selection of these functions and the order in which the data are transferred to the
various databases of the system, we recommend this approach:
- Always first transfer the licences / permits to the local database; see Section 7.2.2: "Procuring the
Subscription, Permits and Licences" on page 248.
- For the initial installation of the databases with all chart types using the Transfer function, first
transfer all data to the local database only and then, in a second step, transfer them from the local
database to all other databases.
- If the provider offers an online update service, we urgently recommend that you use this service
and perform the following step with the data received in this way; see below.
- Perform the updates of the licensed ENC cells, the ARCS charts and the CM-93/3Pro cells
using the Update function in one working step for all databases.
- For the updates of the unlicensed ENC cell files and the CM-93/2 cells using the Transfer func-
tion, first transfer all data to the local database only and then, in a second step, transfer them from
the local database to all other databases. (In these cases, the corresponding deletion measures
must be used to ensure that files which are no longer supported do not remain in the databases.)
- Installation of subsequently licensed cells and charts: as for updating (in the case of large quan-
tities of data, also as for initial installation).
Other approaches are possible and, in special cases, even advisable; see Section 7.3: "Data Mainte-
nance of the ENC" on page 259 to 7.8.
Online Update Services: If a PC with Internet connection is available on board, the online update
service that is offered should be used no later than one week after last receiving a regular (Update) CD.
If this is done, the charts used on board can be kept constantly up-to-date.
With all online update services, the data must be requested by the ship for each update; in contrast to
the procedure for the regular update, the provider does not automatically send the data.
From the viewpoint of the CHARTPILOT, a distinction must be made:
- Update procedure of the company Jeppesen Marine: This is available for the chart types
Jeppesen Marine ENC and CM-93/3Pro and bears the designation Real Time Update (RTU). This
method is supported by the CHARTPILOT, in that the request file can be generated there; see
Section 7.3.5: "Real Time Update (RTU) for C-MAP ENC" on page 270.
- Update procedures of other providers: At present, Primar Stavanger offers an online update
service for IHO ENC and UKHO offers one for ARCS charts. These providers also supply PC
programs for downloading the data.
What all procedures have in common is that the update data received at the PC must be transferred to
a CD/DVD/USB-Disk(s) (or Floppy), with which an update is then performed at the CHARTPILOT as per
Section 7.3.4: "Update Function: Update of IHO ENC Cells on All Databases" on page 269, 7.3.6 or 7.7.5
NOTICE:
These online updates do not replace the regular updates. Even if online
updates are performed at regular intervals, an update must still be
carried out with every (Update) CD received in the regular way.
Dialog Box for Displaying the Progress and Errors/Warnings

As soon as the program begins the transfer, update or other lengthy operations, a dialog box opens; this
has the same basic structure for all activities:
The activities currently taking place are reported in the upper list of the dialog box. At the end of the
process, the completion message is shown together with notes on any problems which may have
occurred.
If applicable, the lower list indicates which problems occurred for which cells / charts.
The Print button can be used to log these activities on paper.
250 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e35.fm / 10.05.12
The Abort button can be used to terminate the entire process, if necessary. The transfer and conversion
of the file currently being transferred are then continued until they are finished, and are completed with
an appropriate message.
☞ An abort should be avoided, because this can easily result in databases with different contents,
which in turn may lead to errors during the subsequent data maintenance work or during using the
chart.
To ensure that the positions of the cells / charts / plans are displayed correctly in the world chart,
the table of contents must be generated again after an abort; see page 257.
Here, the activity currently taking

place is displayed. From the
resulting list, it is possible to see
(among other things) which files are
transferred.
Here, messages appear if prob-

lems occur in the transfer process.
Prints the information Aborts the transfer.

contained in the lists
Closes the dialog box after transfer is finished.
Fig. 7-4 Dialog box for displaying the progress and errors/warnings
7.2.4 Deleting the Charts or Cell Files
(ARCS) charts and (vector) cells that are not (or no longer) updated must be deleted in the data-
bases, to ensure that the active electronic charts continue to operate reliably.
Reasons why cells / charts are not updated (examples):
- The manufacturer or provider no longer supports the chart / cell.
- The licences / permits have expired and were not renewed.
- The charts / cells of a region are no longer needed (e.g. because the sea region is no longer being
sailed).
The deleting of files is performed at the CHARTPILOT intended for the chart maintenance work on all
databases of the system (see page 243).
The relevant details are described in Section 7.3: "Data Maintenance of the ENC" on page 259 to 7.8.
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 251

b_cp_e35.fm / 10.05.12
Complete Deletion of a Database

If no further work with a chart type is to be done on the system, or if an error occurs in the licence
management process and cannot be corrected by means of the operating procedure described, or if it is
simply that you have lost the overview of the contents of a database, the entire database of that type can
be deleted 1). For the ARCS charts this work can only be carried out at the CHARTPILOT the database
of which is being deleted. This is not possible at MULTIPILOTs; in the event of problems, for ARCS chart
it is only possible to delete all cell files of the MULTIPILOT (at the CHARTPILOT).
NOTICE:
After execution of the following procedure, charts / cells of the type can
no longer be used on the equipment item. The database can be restored
only if the database of the type is OK on another CHARTPILOT or if all
current chart CDs/DVDs or USB-Disk(s) and, for licensed charts / cells,
the licence / permits Floppy or USB-Disk(s) are available and if there is
still enough time available.
In the Other Functions menu of the type, press the button Remove Complete Database. A safeguard
question then appears. 2) If you then enter the word PRUNE in the input field of that safeguard question
and press the OK button, all data of the chart type (chart / cell files, lists, licences/ permits etc.) are
deleted on the hard-disk drive of the CHARTPILOT that is being operated.
7.2.5 Deleting the Product List
After the installation of the first IHO ENC cell from your new supplier we recommend to delete the Product
List from your previous supplier.
A new Product list will be installed automaticly with the next IHO ENC cell installation if nessasary
(see page 281).
7.2.6 Selecting the Charts or Cell Files
☞ A selection is only required in special cases. If you are still familiarizing yourself with the topic of
chart maintenance, you can initially skip this section and return to it later when it becomes neces-
sary.
If not all files but only certain ones are to be transferred or deleted by means of the Transfer function,
they must be selected for this purpose. The following steps must be conducted in sequence:
- selection according to regions,
- selection according to navigational purposes 3),
- selection according to agency codes, and
- selection according to cell / chart number.
These selection procedures are basically the same for all chart types, but some of the selection possibil-
ities mentioned will not always be available. Section 7.3: "Data Maintenance of the ENC" on page 259 to
7.8 describe when to use which procedure.
1)
Is not possible with the chart type CM-93/2, but is also not necessary. In this case, it is sufficient to delete the cell files contained in the
databases.
2)
For the chart types ENC and CM-93/3Pro, a menu is shown beforehand in which, under Destination, the equipment items for which the
database is to be deleted must be marked. Exit the menu with OK.
3)
Where relevant, it is possible to define for the type ENC whether cells of unlicensed ENC, IHO ENC and/or Jeppesen Marine ENC charts
are selected; see page 259.
252 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e35.fm / 10.05.12
7.2.6.1 Selection according to Regions
This is used to define a region in the world chart. All (vector) cells or (ARCS) charts and (ARCS) plans
that lie completely or partially in this region are selected by this method. This applies to all navigational
purposes.
☞ With the chart type ARCS, the chart and all plans located on it are always treated in the same way.
For example, even if only one plan is selected, the chart and the other plans of the same chart
number are also selected.
☞ If no selection is performed in the working step in which the selection by regions is intended to take
place, then a l l cells / charts / plans are selected.
Definition of the Region

Three functions are available:
Rectangle Function
In the Selection menu of the Chart Maintenance display within the Selection Mode frame, the function
Rectangle must be selected.
In the world chart (zoomed, if necessary), a rectangle is drawn as is also done for zooming of the world
chart; see page 246.
Contour Function
In the case of an intercardinally arranged shipping area (e.g. from Hamburg to the exit from the English
Channel), use of the rectangle function also selects the (unneeded) cells (here, cells of the Irish Sea and
the English North Sea coast). To prevent this, the contour function can be used:
In the Selection menu of the Chart Maintenance display within the Selection Mode frame, select the
function Contour. Move the cursor to a vertex of the region, and click on the DO key. By moving the
trackball and clicking repeatedly, more vertices can be set. Conclude the process by pressing the INFO
key. If necessary, the definition can be cleared by pressing the MORE key, and can be repeated by
means of the procedure described.
Track Function
In the case of a transfer or an update from the CD/DVD, USB-Disk(s) or Floppy, the selection can also
be performed in such a way that only the cells needed in connection with existing tracks are transferred.
This is done with the Track function:
In the world chart, display the relevant tracks - see page 246. In the Selection Mode frame, press the
Tracks button. With the Range button that exists there, it is also possible to specify the width of the strip
for which cells are selected on either side of the tracks.
Displaying Selected Cells / Charts / Plans in the World Chart

In the world chart, the positions of the cells / charts / plans selected according to region are shown in
green instead of white, if (in the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance with the button Transfer) the
Transfer menu is opened or (with the Delete button) the Delete menu is opened. See also D i s p l a y i n g
t h e P o s i t i o n o f t h e E x i s t i n g C e l l s / C h a r t s / P l a n s on page 245.
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 253

b_cp_e35.fm / 10.05.12
Selecting Only the Cells / Charts / Plans that Lie Completely within the Defined Region
If the selection was made according to region, the button Include Touched Cells or Include Touched
Charts is provided in the Delete menu (to be opened in the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance with the
button Delete). By switching off this function, you can limit the selection to the cells / charts / plans that
lie completely within the defined region.
7.2.6.2 Selection according to Navigational Purposes
This selection is performed in the Transfer menu or in the Delete menu, which is opened (in the menu
Utilities > Chart Maintenance with the button Transfer or Delete) after the selection according to regions
has taken place.
There, the number of cells / charts / plans previously selected according to regions is specified in the
lower area: After Total the total sum, and above that the figures for the individual navigational purposes 1).
By clicking on the navigational purposes, all cells / charts / plans of certain navigational purposes can be
excluded from the selection.
(Data source from which transfer takes place)
(Chart type which is transferred)
(Equipment items to which the cells are transferred)
Selection of the navigational purpose by clicking
Number of cells / charts / plans selected according to regions:

Raster charts: Sum of the charts and plans
Vector charts: Sum of the cells (exception: ENC – during transfer from CD/DVD or USB-
Disk(s), the sum of the files (base files and update files; see page 278 is shown)
Opens the selection menu with which selection can take place according to file name
Fig. 7-5 Selection according to navigational purposes in a Transfer menu
7.2.6.3 Selection according to Agency Codes and to Cell Names / Chart Numbers
Where this selection possibility is given, a corresponding selection menu appears as soon as the OK
button is clicked in the Transfer menu or Delete menu; see Figure 7-6. 2)
1) With ENC CDs, the update cells are also counted (see page 278), and with ARCS charts also the included plans.
2) This selection possibility is available not only for charts / cells but also, where necessary, for permits / licences.
254 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e35.fm / 10.05.12
If no selection by cells / charts and agency codes is to take place, click on the Add All >> button.
Then click on the OK button in the selection menu to begin the transfer or deletion process.
If a selection is to be made, the following applies:
The left-hand list of the selection menu names the files of all cells / charts 1) that have been selected up
to that time. The selection is made by entering the cells / charts to be transferred or deleted into the right-
hand list. By then clicking the OK button, the transfer or deletion process is initiated.
Selection according to agency codes
☞ The agency code is the first two places of the cell name. It denotes the manufacturer of the cell. This
is generally a national hydrographic organization, so that the agency code corresponds to a certain
geographical area in most cases.
In the case of ENC and CM-93/3Pro charts, the button Selection by Agency Codes is located above
the right-hand list. Switching on this function calls up the selection menu Agency Codes, which contains
all agency codes of the cells that have been selected up to this time.
The left-hand list contains the cells whose agency codes are marked in the selection menu Agency
Codes. By marking the agency codes, the contents of the left-hand list can therefore be limited as
required.
If all cells of the marked agency codes shall be transferred or deleted, click on the Add All >> button.
Then click on the OK button in the selection menu to begin the transfer or deletion process.
1) The plans of the ARCS charts are contained in the chart files and therefore do not appear in this list.
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 255

b_cp_e35.fm / 10.05.12
Only available with List with all previously selected Cells / charts to be Only available with vector charts:
vector charts: Opens cells / charts. transferred or selection menu Agency Codes:
and closes the addi- Only with vector charts: If the deleted when the Contains all agency codes of the cells
tional selection menu selection menu Agency OK button is clicked selected in the previous selection
Agency Codes. Codes is active, only the cells steps.
with the codes marked there These files belong
remain in this list. Mark all the agency codes
to the same cell. whose cells are to be included
in the left-hand list.
Puts all cells / charts Explains the possibili- Removes all cells / Marks all listed agency
displayed in the left- ties of the marking. charts from the codes.
hand list into the right-hand list.
right-hand list.
Starts the deleting or Puts the cells / charts Removes from the right-hand Clears all markings in this
transfer process. marked in the left-hand list all of the cell / charts that selection menu
list into the right-hand list. are marked there.
Fig. 7-6 Selection menus for the selection by cell / chart numbers and agency codes
Selection according to cell names / chart numbers

By means of Add >>, only those cells / charts that are marked in the left-hand list are entered into the
right-hand list.
☞ In the right-hand list, the entries marked there can be removed by means of << Remove, and all
entries are cleared with << Remove All.
Marking several agency codes or cells / charts
- Hold the Shift key down and then click to mark a range of consecutive list entries.
- Hold the Ctrl key down and click to mark a number of non-consecutive list entries.
- If list entries have already been marked, hold the Ctrl key down and click on an entry again to
remove the marking.
256 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e35.fm / 10.05.12
7.2.7 Displaying Information about a Cell / Chart / Plan
The Chart Maintenance subroutine has its own Info box. It contains information which is necessary or
useful in the execution of chart maintenance.
Opening the Info box

The Info box is opened when the INFO key is used to click in the world chart on the displayed position
of a cell / chart / plan.
If there are several cells / charts / plans of the same navigational purpose at the clicked position, these
are listed in the Info box.
The cell / chart / plan marked in the Info box is marked orange in the world chart. If (with ARCS charts)
there are several charts or plans in the clicked chart for the same navigational purpose, these are also
marked orange in the world chart.
With the Expand button of the Info box, a list opens with the detailed data of the marked cell / chart /
plan. With ARCS charts, this also contains the data of charts or plans for other navigational purposes, if
these are located on the clicked chart.
☞ For the ENC chart, the Info box contains special items of information. These are explained from page
285.
With the button Set Planning Mode of the Info box, the cell / chart / plan marked in the list is displayed
(as for the same button in the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance; see page 245).
Main data of the cell / chart /

plan clicked in the world chart
Switches on/off the display of the details.
Switches over to the main program (to Planning display mode) and thus switches on the display of the selected Closes the
cell / chart / plan. This does not cause switch-off of the Chart Maintenance subroutine. For details see page 247. Info box.
Fig. 7-7 The Info box of the Chart Maintenance subroutine
7.2.8 Creating a Table of Contents
For each database whose data are displayed or modified in any way, the program needs an up-to-date
table of contents. This is generated automatically as soon as it is definite which data media are affected.
The table of contents is automatically updated when the contents are changed, and remains stored until
the Chart Maintenance subroutine is exited.
However, if the inserted data medium is exchanged after selection of CD/DVD, USB-Disk(s) 1) or Floppy
as the Source and the program has not requested this change of medium, the table of contents for the
new data media must be created anew in the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance by pressing Make
Table of Contents.
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 257

b_cp_e35.fm / 10.05.12
If the transfer or deletion of data was terminated (Abort function; see page 251), it may also be necessary
to create a new table of contents for the relevant database, e.g. so that the positions of the cells / charts
/ plans are shown correctly in the world chart. To do this, mark the corresponding equipment item under
Source and then press Make Table of Contents.
258 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e35.fm / 10.05.12
Operating Instructions 7.3 Data Maintenance of the ENC
7.2.9 Checking the Available Hard-Disk Capacity
In the Utilities > Chart Maintenance menu, the Actual Source State button can be used to open up an
information box containing information about the hard disk drives of all CHARTPILOTs and MULTIPILOTs
installed and a List of Removable Media (Floppy, CD/DVD, USB-Disk(s)). The meanings are as follows:
Status: On-line = data exchange with the CHARTPILOT or MULTIPILOT is possible.
Free Disk/Memory: Free hard disk capacity, including the capacity that is to be kept free for other
purposes (Min Free). For the electronic Charts, the difference between Free Disk and Min Free is
therefore available.
Min Free/available: Capacity to be kept free for other purposes.
7.2.10 Errors Caused by Dirty CDs/DVDs, CD/DVD Drives
If problems arise when data are transferred from the CD/DVD, they may be caused by soiling of the CD
or the optics of the CD/DVD drive. In such cases, cleaning may possibly solve the problem - see page
401.
7.3 Data Maintenance of the ENC
ENC cell files are always produced by the national hydrographic organizations according to the same
standards. The distribution, and thus the procurement by the user, takes place in various ways, however.
The ENC data of some regions are made available only through one or more providers authorized for
this, following procurement of the relevant licences (involving further cost), whereas the ENC data of
other regions can be procured without the need for licences.
Licensed cells are delivered in an encrypted form. There are several different encryption methods. Most
providers use the method corresponding to the S63 standard, which was published by the IHO. ENC cells
encrypted in this way are referred to as IHO ENC in the following.
The company Jeppesen Marine 1) uses its own method; the ENC cells delivered by Jeppesen Marine are
referred to as C-MAP ENC in the following. When importing the ENC cells into the own database, the
CHARTPILOT must apply various decryption methods; the required operating sequences may differ to
some degree.
The CHARTPILOT is capable of using IHO ENC, C-MAP ENC and unlicensed ENC cell files, also simu-
taneously. 2)
☞ The CHARTPILOT also supports the use of so-called Large Media. (IHO S63 Edition 1.1).
A large media can for example be a DVD or a USB memory stick that contains multiple data
exchange sets in a specialized structure.
☞ The distinctions between these ENC types only exist with regard to the chart maintenance, not for
use of the ENC cells. When different types are utilized at the same time, it is possible to use the Info
box at any time to find out which ENC type is currently being displayed.
1) Jeppesen Marine is the distributor of C-MAP data. Formerly, C-MAP used to be the company´s name.
2)
What this means: Various cells may differ in respect of the ENC type, but the same cell cannot be present in different ENC types several
times over.
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 259

b_cp_e35.fm / 10.05.12
7.3 Data Maintenance of the ENC Operating Instructions
Special hint for C-MAP ENC on Multiple Volumes

Since the amount of data of the electronic charts has increased continuously, data may be delivered as
a set of two or more DVDs nowadays.
So it may be necessary to change between the inserted volumes of one delivery during the installation/
update process.
Due to the fact that the moment, in which the change has to be made, is not exactly predictable, please
Note:
You will be prompted by a message window if it is neccessary to change the inserted volume. Please
follow the instructions stated in the message window to complete the installation/update process.
Use of Licensed Cells

If licensed ENC cells are obtained from different providers, the following operations must be performed
for each provider.
In special cases, however, it may be advisable to use a different procedure; see Section 7.3.7: "Divergent
Procedures for Transfer and Update" on page 272.
Initial Installation of Licensed Cells: (This procedure should be used to install a choice of data
quickly. If there is enough time to install all licensed cells, the Update-Procedure shall be used!
See Section 7.3.7: "Divergent Procedures for Transfer and Update" on page 272)
1. Conclude a contract with the provider, obtain the necessary ENC cell permits from him, and then
install them on the local database; see Section 7.3.1: "Permits for Licensed ENC cells" on page 262.
2. Using the Transfer function as per Section 7.3.2: "Transfer Function: Transferring All ENC Cells from
Removable Device to Local Database" on page 267, transfer all the cell files for which permits have
already been installed from the provider’s CDs to the local database.
3. Then use the Transfer function to transfer all ENC files as per Section 7.3.3: "Transfer Function:
Transferring All ENC Cells from Local to Other Databases" on page 268 from the local database to
all other ENC databases of the system.
Updating of Licensed Cells:
Regular update: As soon as a new CD has been received, perform an update on all ENC databases of
the system in one working step, using the Update function as per Section 7.3.4: "Update Function:
Update of IHO ENC Cells on All Databases" on page 269 or 7.3.6.
Online update: If an online update is possible (see page 250), perform it at least once a week, beginning
no later than one week after last receiving a regular (Update) CD.
To do this, an Online Update CD is produced at the PC, with which the update is performed on all ENC
databases of the system in one working step, using the Update function as per Section 7.3.4: "Update
Function: Update of IHO ENC Cells on All Databases" on page 269 or 7.3.6; see also page 250. The
online update of the Jeppesen Marine ENC begins with the generation of the RTU request as per Section
7.3.5: "Real Time Update (RTU) for C-MAP ENC" on page 270.
Installing Subsequently Licensed Cells:
1. Install any ENC cell permits that were procured later to the local database; see Section 7.3.1:
"Permits for Licensed ENC cells" on page 262.
2. Using the Update function as per Section 7.3.4: "Update Function: Update of IHO ENC Cells on All
Databases" on page 269 or 7.3.6, transfer the cells to all ENC databases of the system in one
working step.
260 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e35.fm / 10.05.12
Use of Unlicensed Cells

Unlicensed cells should only be installed if they originate from the same provider or, if the cells of various
providers are used, if the updating process can be performed properly; see below.
When both licensed and unlicensed ENC cells are being used, the following actions may only be
performed for the unlicensed cells. For this, only the function Unlicensed ENC Data may remain
switched on in the menu which appears as one of the first selection steps.
If unlicensed ENC cells are obtained from several different providers, the following operations must be
performed for each provider. 1)
In special cases, however, it may be advisable to use a different procedure; see Section 7.3.7: "Divergent
Procedures for Transfer and Update" on page 272.
Initial Installation of Unlicensed Cells:
Removable Device to Local Database" on page 267, transfer all the cell files to the local database.
Local to Other Databases" on page 268, transfer all cell files from there to all other ENC databases
of the system.
Updating of Unlicensed Cells
1. On the local ENC database, delete all cell files of the provider as per Section 7.3.8: "Deleting ENC
Cells" on page 275.
Removable Device to Local Database" on page 267, transfer all the cell files of the provider to the
local database.
3. On all other ENC databases, delete all cell files of the provider as per Section 7.3.8: "Deleting ENC
Cells" on page 275.
Local to Other Databases" on page 268, transfer all cell files from the local database to all other ENC
databases of the system.
If unlicensed files from several providers are used, it must be possible to select the files of each provider
out of the unlicensed files of all other providers for the purposes of deleting them. This is practically only
possible if they are located in a region in which there are no unlicensed files from other providers 2). This
difficulty does not arise if the provider regularly announces which cells are no longer supported. In this
case, only these cells must be deleted in step 1.
From this follows:
CAUTION
To keep the ENC database up-to-date with a justifiable amount of effort,
unlicensed files should only be used
- when exclusively files from one provider and no licensed files are
used, or
- when up-to-date information is always available on which files are
no longer supported, or
- when it is easy to select only the files originating from each
provider.
1) The case in which different data sets (i.e. supplied on separate CDs/DVDs) are obtained from the same contractual partner (provider) must
be treated as if the data sets originated from different providers.
2) Or if there are only a few files and the user knows the region and file names.
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 261

b_cp_e35.fm / 10.05.12
If the provider regularly announces which cells are no longer supported and which new cells have been
issued, the following procedure is advised for the updating of unlicensed cells:
1. Install newly issued cells subsequently on all databases; see page 275.
2. Using the Update function as per page 274, perform the update of the existing cells on all ENC data-
bases of the system in one working step.
3. Delete cells that are no longer supported, as per Section 7.3.8: "Deleting ENC Cells" on page 275.
7.3.1 Permits for Licensed ENC cells
☞ For general information on this topic, see page 248.

☞ All operating actions listed in this section should be performed at the CHARTPILOT that is intended
for the chart maintenance work of the system. For the following operating steps, the Type ENC must
be set in the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance.
Initial Installation of IHO ENC

1. Before initial installation can take place, a subscription must be taken out with a provider. Here the
system identification code is needed, and the ENC cells to be used must be determined.
For IHO ENC, the system identification code is called the User Permit Number and is displayed
when, in the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance > ENC Licensing, the button View User Permit
No. is pressed.
You can obtain the information on the available ENC cells in various ways, e.g. through the provider,
or through the internet. If you have an ENC CD from the provider: The product list located on the
CD details all the ENC cells available from the publisher of the CD at the time it was made; for the
required operating actions, see page 280.
If the provider needs other data about the system, further relevant data can be generated as an
ECDIS Passport and sent to the provider; see page 265.
2. You then receive
- the permit file, in which all ENC cell permits acquired by you are present (per ENC permit
Floppy, USB-Disk(s)/media 1) or per e-mail),
- the current (IHO) ENC Base CDs,
- if applicable, the current (IHO) ENC Update CD.
3. Installing ENC cell permits:
Put the ENC permits Floppy Disk into the Floppy or the media in the USB-Disk(s), and in the menu
Utilities > Chart Maintenance > ENC Licensing press the button Install Permits from Device1). A
Device Selection dialog box opens. Select the Floppy, CD/DVD drive or the USB-Disk(s), copy the
permit file containing the permits from the Floppy, CD/DVD or USB-Disk(s) into the local ENC data-
base. These processes can be observed in a dialog box. The question Transferring permits to all
other systems? should be answered with OK.
After the corresponding request, close the dialog box with Cancel.
262 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e35.fm / 10.05.12
☞ The file needed for the licensing process is called PERMIT.TXT. The procedure described must
also be applied if these files were received by e-mail. In this case, you must create the ENC
permits Floppy or copy the ENC permits files onto the USB-Disk(s)/media 1) yourself.
If the above-mentioned files were transferred as an archive file (e.g. the .ZIP/.TAR/.GZ format),
they must be decompressed or unpacked before. Installation as described is only possible if the
files with the a.m. names are located on the Floppy or USB-media (if necessary, check this with
a PC).
The initial installation can now be continued with the transfer of the cell files as per Section 7.3.2:
"Transfer Function: Transferring All ENC Cells from Removable Device to Local Database" on page 267.
Initial Installation of C-MAP ENC

user key file is needed (containing the system identification code among others, and the ENC cells
to be used must be determined.
When a DOS-formatted Floppy or USB-Disk(s)1) is inserted and the button Generate User Key File
is then pressed in the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance > ENC Licensing, the Select Device
dialog box opens. Select the wanted device and click on the OK button, the user key file with the
name USER.USR is stored on the Floppy or on the USB-Disk(s). Send the file via e-mail or the
Floppy to the provider.
You can obtain the information on the available ENC cells in various ways, e.g. through the provider,
or through the internet.
If you have an ENC media from Jeppesen Marine: The table of contents of the CD details all the
ENC cells available from the publisher of the CD at the time it was made; for the required operating
actions, see page 257.
Install permits from Device on the ENC databases
Check of the permits installed on the local database
Data backup of the permits installed on the local database

Delete permits on the local database
Install the Digital Certificate(s) for IHO ENC data

Show the Digital Certificate(s) for IHO ENC data
Delete the Digital Certificate(s) for IHO ENC data
Display the User Permit Number for IHO ENC data; see page 262
Generate an ECDIS Passport for IHO ENC data; see page 265
Generate the system identification code for Jeppesen Marine ENC data
Fig. 7-8 The menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance > ENC Licensing
1) see footnote 1)
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 263

b_cp_e35.fm / 10.05.12
2. You then receive

- the licence file, in which all ENC cell licences acquired by you are present (per ENC licence
Floppy, USB-Disk(s) 1), or per e-mail),
- the current CM-ENC media.
3. Installing C_MAP ENC cell licences:
Put the ENC licence Floppy Disk into the Floppy or the external media with the ENC licence file(s)
in the USB-Disk(s) and the newest CM-ENC CD into the CD/DVD drive or the newest CM-ENC
file(s) on USB-media into another USB-Disk(s), and in the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance > ENC
Licensing press the button Install Permits from Device. After the Select Device dialog box
opened select the Floppy/USB-Disk(s), click the OK button, a file navigation dialog box opens to
select the required permits file(s). Usable permits files are marked with (☞) in front of the file name
and click OK. For validation now a Select Device dialog box opens to select the CD/DVD or USB-
Disk(s) with the newest CM-ENC media content to check against for validation. After clicking the OK
button the licence information is checked and stored on all ENC databases of the system. These
processes can be observed in a dialog box. If the standard CM-ENC CD is in the CD/DVD drive and
the required permits Floppy Disk is in the Floppy the validation operation is starting automatically.
☞ The file needed for the licensing process is called password.usr. The procedure described
must also be applied if this file was received by e-mail. In this case, you must create the ENC
licence USB-Disk yourself.
"Transfer Function: Transferring All ENC Cells from Removable Device to Local Database" on page 267.
Renewing the Cell Permits 2), Procuring New Cell Permits

If existing permits are renewed or further permits are procured later, the procedure described above must
be repeated. The corresponding cell files can be transferred by means of the Update function as per
Section 7.3.4: "Update Function: Update of IHO ENC Cells on All Databases" on page 269 or 7.3.6.
An ENC permits Floppy or USB-Disk(s) can also contain new permits which you have not ordered, even
if you are not expressly informed about this. This is the case when cells are replaced by other cells.
If all cells for which permits have been procured have been installed, you need not concern yourself with
this, because the replacement cells are automatically installed by the Update function (see Section 7.3.4:
"Update Function: Update of IHO ENC Cells on All Databases" on page 269 or 7.3.6) and the replaced
cells are proposed for deletion.
However, if you do not install all cells for which permits were procured, the replacement cells must be
installed as per Section 7.3.2: "Transfer Function: Transferring All ENC Cells from Removable Device to
Local Database" on page 267. For this reason, you must determine the additionally installed permits
already during the installation of the permits, in order to know which cells you then have to install. For
further details, see page 273, N o t A l l C e l l s o f I H O E N C f o r W h i c h P e r m i t s a r e A v a i l a b l e a r e t o b e
Installed.
Deleting Permits
ENC cell permits are generally not deleted automatically. If expired cell permits are not to be extended,
these permits must be deleted manually.
1. In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance, set ENC as the Type.
2. In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance > ENC Licensing, press the Delete Permits button. If the
corresponding enquiry appears, select the ENC type(s) to be deleted.

2) permits for IHO ENC cells or licences for C-MAP ENC cells. In the following, “permit” also stands for “licence”.
264 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e35.fm / 10.05.12
3. In the selection menu which then opens up, transfer those permits that are indicated by the text
EXPIRED from the left-hand list to the right-hand list (for the list operating procedure, see also page
254). After pressing of the OK button of the selection menu and appropriate answering of the
resulting safeguard question, the expired permits are deleted in the local ENC database.
If a transfer or update of ENC cells is to take place afterwards, these actions need only be performed on
the local ENC database.
☞ If ENC cells are transferred (using the Transfer function or the Update function, independently of the
source), all ENC permits on the local database are automatically copied to the ENC databases to
which the transfer of the cells is taking place. Here permits that are not located on the local database
are deleted from the other ENC databases.
USEFUL INFORMATION
Checking the Installed Permits

If difficulties occur in the display of cells for which a permit exists, the permits installed in the local ENC
database can be checked: the check is initiated in the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance > ENC
Licensing by pressing the button Verify Installed Permits. A dialog box opens to verify the installed
ENC to Check against installed product list or Check against Removable Media. Choose the
required check. Then click on the OK-button. If the corresponding enquiry appears, select the ENC
type(s) to be deleted. In the dialog box which then opens up, information about the check performed is
given.
☞ If IHO ENCs from various providers are used, all permits are assembled here.
☞ On the individual equipment items, you can perform in the same way a check of the permits existing
in the other ENC databases of the system.
Performing Data Backup of the Installed Permits

Data backup can be performed for the acquired permits too: put an empty, DOS-formatted Floppy Disk
into the Floppy, and in the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance > ENC Licensing press the Permit
Backup button. If the corresponding enquiry appears, select the ENC type(s) to be deleted. A Select
Removable Media dialog box apears 1). Select the needed media. The permit file is then copied from the
local ENC database to the selected media. A dialog box then opens up, containing information about
each process that is completed.
Installing the Digital Certificate for IHO ENC

The public key is used for authentication of the IHO ENC cells. It need, and indeed may, only be changed
when the provider requests that this be done. The menu for entering the public key is opened in the menu
Utilities > Chart Maintenance > ENC Licensing by means of the Install Digital Certificate button.
It is possible to install certificates from various providers. A warning will be indicated if an IHO ENC cell
is about to be authenticated by a non-IHO certificate from a different provider than IHO.
Generating the ECDIS Passport for IHO ENC

The system data which may possibly be needed by the provider of IHO ENC are compiled in the ECDIS
Passport. When, after a DOS-formatted Floppy Disk has been inserted into the Floppy or a USB-media
is inserted in USB-Disk(s)1), the Generate ECDIS Passport button in the menu Utilities > Chart Mainte-
nance > ENC Licensing is pressed and the entries which are then requested are performed:
1. Contact Person
2. Vessel E-MAIL
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 265

b_cp_e35.fm / 10.05.12
3. Contact phone
4. Contact fax
5. Operator Remark
After filling out the requests and confirming with OK, a Select Device dialog box opens to select the
device to store, the data is stored as an .xml file on the Floppy or USB-media, together with two other
files which may needed for the interpretation of the .xml file.
☞ Parts of the content can be viewed and printed out at the PC.
Expiry of the Cell Permit of IHO ENC

In the last month prior to expiry of the permit, you are made aware of this date by means of a message
when you select the cell for display. After expiry of the permit, you can still display in the usual way the
cells that exist in the ENC database. However, you do not receive any ENC Update CDs, and cells
cannot be transferred. Thus, not all cells are up-to-date. When you select a cell for display, your attention
is drawn to this fact by means of an appropriate message, the Chart Status field of the navigation data
line becomes yellow, and the display Permit warn. appears there.
End of the Subscription Licence of C-MAP Marine ENC

Jeppesen Marine has defined two expiry dates for the end of a subscription licence:
- Subscription expiry date: This is the day on which the contractual relationship expires. After this
date, no more updates are performed and the use of the data (then obsolete) may be dangerous;
this is followed two months later by the
- Licence expiry date: There is now no legal basis for continuing to use the data.
One month before the subscription expiry date, a message about the subscription expiry date is shown
as soon as a C-MAP ENC cell affected by this date is displayed.
From the subscription expiry date until the licence expiry date, a message about the licence expiry date
is shown as soon as a C-MAP ENC cell affected by this date is displayed. In addition, the Chart Status
field of the navigation data line becomes yellow, and the display Licence appears there.
From the licence expiry date, there is a corresponding message as soon as a region affected by this date
is shown in the chart display with the C-MAP ENC chart selected. In addition, the Chart Status field of
the navigation data line becomes red, and the display Licence appears there.
Checking the CM-ENC media

If problems occur when accessing the CM-ENC CD, it is possible to check the consistency of the data
contained there. This is done by means of the function Validate Data on CD-ROM provided in the menu
Utilities > Chart Maintenance > ENC Other Functions.
☞ This check can take 30 minutes. During this time, the CHARTPILOT cannot be used for other
purposes.
Showing Information about the CM-ENC media

The properties of the CM-ENC media can be displayed by means of the function View CD-ROM Version
provided in the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance > ENC Other Functions.
Showing the System ID for C-MAP ENC

The system ID needed for the licensing of C-MAP ENC can be displayed by means of the function View
System ID provided on the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance > ENC Other Functions. It uniquely iden-
tifies the system installed on board your ship with regard to the installation of the ENC, and may be
needed for servicing purposes.
266 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e35.fm / 10.05.12
7.3.2 Transfer Function: Transferring All ENC Cells from Removable Device to Local Database
☞ For general information on this topic and further necessary steps, see page 249 and 260.
Application:
- Initial installation of (licensed and unlicensed) ENC cells
- Update of unlicensed ENC cells
With the procedure described:
- All ENC cells existing on the CDs being used are transferred to the local database and updated
there. If they are licensed ENC cells, the transfer is limited to those cells for which permits are
installed on the local database.
☞ For more details on this topic, see page 282.
Preparations:
- If licensed ENC cells are to be transferred: Install all permits of the provider whose CD is being used
to the local database, as per Section 7.3.1: "Permits for Licensed ENC cells" on page 262.
- If unlicensed ENC cells are to be updated: In all ENC databases, delete all cells of this provider, as
per Section 7.3.8: "Deleting ENC Cells" on page 275.
2. Put the newest ENC Base CD 1) into the CD drive, and in the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance
set CD-ROM as the Source. If messages relating to the table of contents appear, answer with OK.
☞ Do not make a selection by regions before performing the next step (e.g. there must be no
frame shown in the world chart).
3. Press the Transfer button. If messages relating to the table of contents appear, answer with OK and
press the Transfer button again.
4. Under Destination, mark only CHARTPILOT (this one).
☞ Under Cells to be Transferred, leave all navigational purposes switched on.
5. In the Transfer menu, click the OK button and, in the selection menu which then opens, enter all
the files into the right-hand column by clicking Add All >> and press the OK button.
6. When data of the IHO ENC are transferred, the dialog box ENC Cell Transfer then opens. There,
define how the program should behave when certain errors occur during the transfer.
☞ This is used to decide whether faulty data are incorporated into the ENC database and whether
ENC cells with faulty data are updated. This topic is explained in detail on page 283.
7. After pressing of the OK button of the dialog box ENC Cell Transfer, transfer and data conversion
begin. The dialog box Transferring ENC Cells appears. In its upper part, the process currently
taking place is listed, and in the Iower part all errors and warnings occurring in the transfer and
conversion process are listed. (What happens during this transfer is described on page 282.)
8. When the transfer process has finished (you are informed of this in the dialog box Transferring ENC
Cells), close the dialog box by means of the Cancel button.
If there is an Update CD that is newer than the ENC Base CD being used, then it is probable that
not all of the transferred cell files are up-to-date. The necessary updating is performed with step 9:
9. Remove the ENC Base CD from the CD drive and insert the newest ENC Update CD. Then perform
step 3 to step 8 once again.
1) For unlicensed ENC cells: the newest CD. Unlicensed ENC cells are not normally divided into Base CD and Update CD.
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 267

b_cp_e35.fm / 10.05.12
7.3.3 Transfer Function: Transferring All ENC Cells from Local to Other Databases
Application:
- Initial installation of (licensed and unlicensed) ENC cells
- Update of unlicensed ENC cells
- All ENC cells 1) located in the local database are copied to all other ENC databases of the system.
- All ENC cell permits located on the local database are copied to all other ENC databases, whereas
permits that are not on the local database are deleted from the other ENC databases.
Preparations:
- The transfer as per Section 7.3.2: "Transfer Function: Transferring All ENC Cells from Removable
Device to Local Database" on page 267 must have been carried out.
- All CHARTPILOTs and MULTIPILOTs must be switched on.
- If it is possible that the other databases could contain ENC cells for which you are not sure that they
are up-to-date, delete all ENC cells from these databases as per Section 7.3.8: "Deleting ENC Cells"
on page 275.
- If unlicensed ENC cells are to be updated: If this has not yet been done, delete all cells of this
provider from the other ENC databases as per Section 7.3.8: "Deleting ENC Cells" on page 275.
☞ This transfer proceeds faster than the updating or transfer from Removable Device, since the data
no longer have to be decrypted, decompressed and converted.
2. In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance, as the Source select the equipment item that is currently
being operated (this one).
3. Press the Transfer button. Under Destination, mark all CHARTPILOTs and MULTIPILOTs.
☞ Under Cells to be Transferred, leave all navigational purposes switched on.
4. In the Transfer menu, press the OK button and, in the selection menu which then opens, enter all
the files into the right-hand column by clicking Add All >>.
5. After pressing of the OK button of the selection menu, the transfer begins. The dialog box Remote
Transfer of ENC Cells appears. In its upper part, the process currently taking place is listed, and in
the Iower part all errors and warnings occurring in the transfer process are listed.
6. When the transfer process has finished (you are informed of this in the dialog box Remote Transfer
of ENC Cells), close the dialog box by means of the Cancel button.
1) Including the allocated Manual ENC Update files that are available there.
268 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e35.fm / 10.05.12
7.3.4 Update Function: Update of IHO ENC Cells on All Databases
☞ For general information on this topic, see page 249 and 260.
Application:
- Update of the IHO ENC cells in all ENC databases of the system after receiving a new ENC (Base
or Update) CD or after generating an Online Update CD, USB-Disk(s) or Floppy.
- Installation of IHO ENC cells for post-procured permits in all ENC databases of the system.
With the procedure described 1):
- All ENC cell permits located on the local database are copied to all other ENC databases, whereas
permits that are not located on the local database are deleted from the other ENC databases.
- On the local database, all ENC cells are updated for which permits are available there. (If new
permits were installed in the meantime, the corresponding cells are also transferred and updated.)
- The updated cells are transferred to all other ENC databases of the system.
- Outdated cells that are no longer supported are deleted (after a safeguard question).
☞ Please note: The Update function analyses the local database, and only the changes that are neces-
sary for this are also carried out in the other databases. On the other databases, this will only cause
no errors if they have the same status (date of issue) as the local database. This is one of the
reasons why all databases of the system must generally always have the same status.
Preparations:
- Permits that were procured after the last update must have been installed in the local database as
per Section 7.3.1: "Permits for Licensed ENC cells" on page 262.
- For an online update: The Online Update CD or USB-media was produced. It must contain all cumu-
lative updates based on the Base CD last used for an update.
2. Put the Online Update CD/DVD or the most recent IHO ENC CD/DVD into the CD/DVD drive or the
Online Update USB-Disk(s) in the USB-port.
☞ The most recent ENC CD/DVD is usually an Update CD/DVD. If, after the last Update CD/DVD,
a Base CD/DVD has appeared, that CD/DVD must be inserted. What is important is that it must
be the latest ENC CD/DVD.
3. In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance, set CD/DVD or USB-Disk(s) (if the files of the latest
ENC data is copied on a USB-media) as the Source. If a message about the table of contents
appears, answer it with OK.
4. Press the button Utilities > Chart Maintenance > Update. The menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance >
Update opens 2). Under Destination there, mark all CHARTPILOTs and MULTIPILOTs.
5. In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance > Update, press the OK button.
6. As a result, the dialog box Type of Update opens up. If not a standard or base CD or a USB-media
with standard file structure is used a Select Directory or File dialog box opens up to select the
required files or directories to update.
7. In the dialog box Type of Update, press the button Update based upon installed permits.
☞ For the function of the button Update based upon installed cells, see page 273.
1) For the ENC cells of the provider whose Update CD is being used
2) Is not shown when only this CHARTPILOT is installed.
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 269

b_cp_e35.fm / 10.05.12
8. In the dialog box Type of Update, press the OK button. As a result, the update process is started
and the dialog box Updating ENC Chart Database opens up.
9. If another CD/removable device has to be inserted, a request to do that appears in an additional
dialog box.
10. In the selection menu, press the OK button and, in the dialog box ENC Cell Transfer which then
opens, define how the program should behave when conversion errors occur during the transfer.
☞ This is used to decide whether faulty data are included in the ENC database or whether ENC
cells are not updated in the event of conversion errors. This topic is explained in detail on page
283.
11. The program compares the cells on all other databases with the cells on the local database. If neces-
sary, the respective cells will be transferred to the other database.
If the program detects that the local ENC database contains cells that are no longer supported or for
which no permits exist, the corresponding message is shown. After confirmation, a selection menu
appears in which these cells are listed on the left. It is recommended that these cells be deleted (use
Add All >> to enter all cells into the right-hand column and then press OK). The deletion is then
carried out in all databases of the system.
12. When a message stating completion of the update appears, you can close the dialog box Updating
ENC Chart Database by means of the Cancel button.
It is recommended that a check of the installed cells be performed afterwards as per Section 7.3.10:
"Check of the ENC Cells Installed" on page 276.
7.3.5 Real Time Update (RTU) for C-MAP ENC
☞ The procedure can be performed by any subscriber of the Jeppesen Marine ENC data. A special
registration is not required.
IMPORTANT:
This online update does not replace the regular updates. Even if online
carried out with every new CD received from Jeppesen Marine.
The Real Time Update is performed in three steps:

1. Generating the RTU request; see below.
2. Producing the Online Update CD 1); see below.
3. Performing the update as per Section 7.3.6: "Update Function: Update of the C-MAP ENC Cells on
All Databases" on page 271.
A prerequisite for successful updating by RTU is that an update according to Section 7.3.6: "Update
Function: Update of the C-MAP ENC Cells on All Databases" on page 271 must have been performed
completely and successfully with the last CD received from Jeppesen Marine.
1) If the data volume is low, the data can also be transferred to a Floppy and if too large it is possible to use a USB-media or device ( see
also Section 3.7: "Using Removable Devices" on page 73). The term “Online Update CD” is then understood to mean this Floppy/USB-
media in the following.
270 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e35.fm / 10.05.12
Generating the RTU Request and Producing the Online Update CD

1. Put a DOS-formatted Floppy Disk into the Floppy or an external media in the USB-Disk(s), and in
the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance > ENC Other Functions press the button Generate RTU
Request. After selecting the storing device in the Select Device dialog box, has been answered with
OK, an RTU request is generated and written to the selected device (Floppy, USB-Disk(s)) as a file
with the name ENC_[date]_[UTC].org. This process can be observed in a dialog box.
2. When this file is sent as the attachment of an e-mail to the Jeppesen Marine RTU server, the server
then returns one or more e-mails after a short while, each with one or more files attached.
☞ The e-mail address must be requested from Jeppesen Marine or, alternatively, it may be
obtained from the Jeppesen Marine homepage on the Internet.
☞ The entire process is automatic. Any message in the body of the own e-mail is ignored. The file
name is used to indicate how many files belong in total to this update:
u001x002.ans
Number of files belonging to this update
Sequential number of this file
3. Producing the Online Update media: Label a media (CD) (best done by including the chart type
and date) and burn all the files received to this media. It is also possible to store the received data
on a USB-media.
Use this Online Update media to perform an update as per Section 7.3.6: "Update Function: Update of
the C-MAP ENC Cells on All Databases" on page 271.
7.3.6 Update Function: Update of the C-MAP ENC Cells on All Databases
Application:
- Update of the C-MAP ENC cells in all ENC databases of the system after receiving a new CM-ENC
CD or for a Real Time Update (after generating the Online Update CD/DVD) 1).
- Installation of C-MAP ENC cells for post-procured licences in all ENC databases of the system.
- All C-MAP ENC cell licences located then on the local database are copied to all other ENC data-
bases, whereas licences that are not located on the local database are deleted from the other ENC
databases.
- On all ENC database, all cells are updated for which licences are available there.
- Outdated cells that are no longer supported are deleted on all ENC databases.
Preparations:
- Licences that were procured after the last update must have been installed in the local database as
per Section 7.7.1: "Licences for CM-93/3Pro Cells" on page 299.
- For a Real Time Update: The Online Update CD/USB-media was produced in accordance with
Section 7.3.5: "Real Time Update (RTU) for C-MAP ENC" on page 270.
2. Put the CM-ENC CD, the Online Update CD into the CD drive or the USB-Disk(s) in the USB-port.
1) see also Section 7.3.5: "Real Time Update (RTU) for C-MAP ENC" on page 270
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 271

b_cp_e35.fm / 10.05.12
If a new CM-ENC media has been received with which no update has been performed yet, this CD
must always be used.
This also applies when its issue date lies before the date of the last online update that was
performed. In this case, perform an online update again (with a renewed update request) after
carrying out the update with the CM-ENC CD.
3. In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance, set CD/DVD, USB-Disk(s) or Floppy as the Source. If
a message about the table of contents appears, answer it with OK.
5. In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance > Update, press the OK button. By means of the dialog
box which then opens up, you are (again) requested to insert the latest CD. If you have not done
this in step 2, do it now and press the OK button of the dialog box. When not using a standard CD
or having standard file structure on USB-Disk(s) a Select File or Directory dialog box opens to
select the required file(s) or directory. As a result, the update process is started and the dialog box
Updating ENC Chart Database opens up.
If the update was aborted for some reason, then the databases will contain cells from different CD
versions. Therefore the update must be initiated again as soon as possible and brought to completion.
7.3.7 Divergent Procedures for Transfer and Update
In some cases, it is useful to deviate from the procedures described in Section 7.3.2: "Transfer Function:
Transferring All ENC Cells from Removable Device to Local Database" on page 267 to 7.3.6 for the
transfer and update:
Initial installation of the Licensed ENC cells using the Update Function
The initial installation of the licensed ENC cells should be performed as per Section 7.3.4: "Update Func-
tion: Update of IHO ENC Cells on All Databases" on page 269 or 7.3.6, if all permits for the cells to be
installed were installed (as per Section 7.3.1: "Permits for Licensed ENC cells" on page 262) on at least
the local database beforehand.
This approach is will take several hours, but it is the best way to perform a full, system-wide update. If
data are to be installed in a hurry and if only a subset of the licenced cells are needed at the moment,
the transfer-procedure may be used. Afterwards, all licenced cells must be installed by means of the
update function as soon as possible. see Section 7.3.2: "Transfer Function: Transferring All ENC Cells
from Removable Device to Local Database" on page 267 for details.
Changing from CM-ENC to IHO ENC or vice versa

In case of a complete change you have to remove the complete database before you install the new type.
See Section 7.2.4: "Deleting the Charts or Cell Files" on page 251.
272 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e35.fm / 10.05.12
Initial installation of the Unlicensed ENC cells on all Databases in one Step
The initial installation of unlicensed ENC cells can be performed with the procedure as per Section 7.3.2:
"Transfer Function: Transferring All ENC Cells from Removable Device to Local Database" on page 267
directly in all databases of the system. The transfer as per Section 7.3.3: "Transfer Function: Transferring
All ENC Cells from Local to Other Databases" on page 268 is then no longer necessary.
With transfer as per Section 7.3.2: "Transfer Function: Transferring All ENC Cells from Removable Device
to Local Database" on page 267, mark all CHARTPILOTs in step 4 under Destination in such cases.
ENC merged from CM- ENC and IHO ENC

It is recommended that you do not use different sources of licences for the same area, to be sure that
you have a consistent system.
Not All Cells of IHO ENC for Which Permits are Available are to be Installed
☞ In this case, the initial installation is not possible by means of the Update function (see above).
With the initial installation as per Section 7.3.2: "Transfer Function: Transferring All ENC Cells from
Removable Device to Local Database" on page 267, an appropriate selection must be performed; for the
selection procedure, see Section 7.2.6: "Selecting the Charts or Cell Files" on page 252. Then perform
the transfer as per Section 7.3.3: "Transfer Function: Transferring All ENC Cells from Local to Other Data-
bases" on page 268 to all other databases. Such an initial installation with subsequent transfer must also
be carried out for new cells for which permits were procured afterwards.
With the update as per Section 7.3.4: "Update Function: Update of IHO ENC Cells on All Databases" on
page 269, in this case, the function Update based upon installed cells must be selected in step 7.
If cells were replaced by other cells by the provider, the replaced cells are proposed for deletion during
the update (and should also be deleted), but the replacement cells are not automatically transferred
(because the setting Update based upon installed cells was selected). They must therefore be trans-
ferred to the local database before the update as per Section 7.3.2: "Transfer Function: Transferring All
ENC Cells from Removable Device to Local Database" on page 267.
In such a case, you will automatically be sent the required permits per ENC cells permits Floppy 1) or per
e-mail by the provider. You will receive the information on which new cells are to be transferred when you
install the permits provided on the Floppy or USB-media as per Section 7.3.1: "Permits for Licensed ENC
cells" on page 262. All cells to be installed because of new permits are marked with the message Cell
(name) : Permit added to permit database. If desired, print out this list.
If not all cells have already been installed, it is also advisable to transfer only the replacement cells which
belong to the region covered by the installed cells. This is achieved when a regional selection (Section
7.2.6.3: "Selection according to Agency Codes and to Cell Names / Chart Numbers" on page 254) is
performed before the selection by cell names (Section 7.2.6.1: "Selection according to Regions" on page
253).
Not All the Available Unlicensed ENC Cells of a Provider are to be Installed
For the initial installation and for each update:
1. On the local ENC database, delete all cells of the provider as per Section 7.3.8: "Deleting ENC Cells"
on page 275.
2. During transfer as per Section 7.3.2: "Transfer Function: Transferring All ENC Cells from Removable
Device to Local Database" on page 267, select the required cells; for the selection procedure, see
Section 7.2.6: "Selecting the Charts or Cell Files" on page 252.
1)
The permits of such new cells can also be contained on a permits Floppy which you are still expecting (because permits have been renewed
or new ones have been ordered).
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 273

b_cp_e35.fm / 10.05.12
Cells" on page 275.
4. Perform the transfer as per Section 7.3.3: "Transfer Function: Transferring All ENC Cells from Local
to Other Databases" on page 268 to all other databases.
The Number of Unlicensed ENC Cells of a Provider is Small in Relation to the Number of Other
Installed ENC Cells
For the initial installation and for each update:
1. On the local ENC database, delete all cells of the provider as per Section 7.3.8: "Deleting ENC Cells"
on page 275.
2. Perform the transfer as per Section 7.3.2: "Transfer Function: Transferring All ENC Cells from
Removable Device to Local Database" on page 267, if applicable only with selected cells; see above.
Cells" on page 275.
4. During transfer as per Section 7.3.3: "Transfer Function: Transferring All ENC Cells from Local to
Other Databases" on page 268, select only the cells transferred with step 2; for the selection proce-
dure, see Section 7.2.6: "Selecting the Charts or Cell Files" on page 252.
Update of the Installed Unlicensed ENC Cells using the Update Function
The Update function can also be used to update unlicensed cells. Here only those cells which are
contained in the CD/USB-Disk(s)/Floppy being used and which are already installed on the local data-
base will be updated.
No cells are proposed for deletion. This approach is therefore only advisable if the provider regularly
announces:
- which cells have been published anew, so that they can be installed subsequently, as described on
page 275, and
- which cells are no longer supported, so that they can be deleted as per Section 7.3.8: "Deleting ENC
Cells" on page 275.
With the procedure described, the changes made in the local database are also performed in all other
ENC databases.
☞ In the other databases, this will only cause no errors if they have the same status (issue date) as
the local database. This is one of the reasons why all databases of the system must generally
always have the same status.
Preparations: All CHARTPILOTs and MULTIPILOTs must be switched on.
2. Put the most recent ENC CD into the CD drive or the USB-media in the USB-Disk(s).
3. In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance, set CD/DVD or USB-Disk(s) as the Source. If a
message about the table of contents appears, answer it with OK.
box which then opens up, you are (again) requested to insert the latest CD. If you have not done
this in step 2, do it now and press the OK button of the dialog box. When not using a standard CD
274 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e35.fm / 10.05.12
or having standard file structure on USB-media a Select File or Directory dialog box opens to select
the required file(s) or directory. As a result, the update process is started and the dialog box
Updating ENC Chart Database opens up.
6. In the selection menu, press the OK button and, in the dialog box ENC Cell Transfer which then
opens, define how the program should behave when conversion errors occur during the transfer.
☞ This is used to decide whether faulty data are included in the ENC database or whether ENC
cells are not updated in the event of conversion errors. This topic is explained in detail on page
283.
Subsequent Installation of Single Unlicensed ENC Cells

The new cells are transferred to all ENC databases in one working step. This is done with the procedure
described in Section 7.3.2: "Transfer Function: Transferring All ENC Cells from Removable Device to
Local Database" on page 267, with the following deviation:
- In step 4 under Destination, mark all CHARTPILOTs and MULTIPILOTs.
- In step 5, transfer only the files that bear the names of the new cells into the right-hand list of the
selection menu (for selection menu, see page 254).
☞ Often, there will be several files for a particular cell on the CD/USB-media (for explanations of
this, see page 278).
7.3.8 Deleting ENC Cells
Application:
There are so many reasons why it may be necessary to delete cells from the databases that they cannot
be listed here. Reference to the necessity of deleting cells is made at the corresponding points.
By means of the following procedures, it is possible to delete any desired selection of ENC cells on each
ENC database that exists in the system. The associated Manual ENC Update files, if there are any, are
automatically deleted as well. Permits are not deleted in this process.
Deleting Selected Cells

The listed selection procedures are described in Section 7.2.6: "Selecting the Charts or Cell Files" on
page 252.
2. In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance, specify under Source the equipment item on which the
cells are to be deleted. This unit must be switched on.
3. If the selection is to be made by regions or according to navigational purposes, open the corre-
sponding frame in the world chart and press the Delete button. The Delete menu then opens.
4. It is possible to select according to navigational purpose in the Delete menu. With the aid of the
button Include Touched Cells, it can be specified there whether only those cells are to be deleted
that are situated completely within the frame, or also those cells that are only touched by the frame.
5. If the ENC database contains cells of different ENC types, a box also appears with a button for each
of these types. By pressing the corresponding buttons, a selection can be made here according to
these ENC types.
☞ Because the cells selected in the world chart are marked green, it is possible in this way to
show where the cells of a particular ENC type are located.
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 275

b_cp_e35.fm / 10.05.12
6. In the Delete menu, press the OK button and then, in the selection menu which opens, perform the
selection according to cell names or select all files by clicking on Add All >>.
7. When the OK button is pressed in the selection menu, the cells listed in the right-hand list are
deleted in the database specified by step 2. Alternatively, deletion can be prevented by pressing the
Cancel button.
Deleting All ENC Cells of a Database

☞ Do not make a selection by regions before performing the next step (there must be no frame
shown in the world chart).
3. Press the Delete button and press the OK button in the Delete menu.
4. In the selection menu which then opens, click on Add All >>. After the OK button is pressed, all
ENC cells are deleted in the database specified by step 2. Alternatively, deletion can be prevented
by pressing the Cancel button.
7.3.9 Later Update of an Individual Equipment Item
If an update was not performed on all CHARTPILOTs and MULTIPILOTs, the non-updated databases
must be updated as soon as possible.
To do this, repeat the update-procedure, and make sure that all destinations are selected for the update.
After the update procedure is finished, perform a verification on all destinations in the system.
7.3.10 Check of the ENC Cells Installed
After an update and whenever there are doubts about the consistency or up-to-dateness of the database,
the databases should be checked by means of the following function. The procedure depends on the type
of ENC.
Check of the IHO ENC Cells

1. In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance > ENC Other Functions, press the button Verify
Installed Cells.
2. Apart from the local database, other databases can also be checked in one working step: Under
Destination, mark the relevant databases and click the OK button.
3. If the ENC database contains cells of different ENC types, in the dialog box which then opens up,
select IHO ENC and press OK.
4. In the dialog box which then opens up, choose the reference against which the check is to be
performed:
- Check against installed product list: Choose this in normal cases (for the contents of this
product list: see P r o d u c t L i s t on page 280).
- Check against Removable Media: For special cases, e.g. if the difference between the
contents of the database and the contents of a CD/DVD, Floppy or USB-Media (older or newer)
is of interest.
5. Press the OK button. If Check against Removable Media was chosen, insert the CD/DVD, Floppy
or USB-Media now, at the latest, and click the OK button in the box with the corresponding request.
276 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e35.fm / 10.05.12
6. As a result, the check is started and the corresponding dialog box opens up. If no errors are found,
the message No errors found is shown in the box. Otherwise, a reports on the errors is provided
in the Errors/Warnings part of the dialog box. The following messages may need explanation:
- ERROR: Cell (cell name): No entry found in product list!
This message is shown when the data provider has deleted the cell from the product list, e.g.
because it is no longer supported.
Recommendation: Enquire at the provider
- WARNING: (cell name): External reference file (file name) is missing!
This message is shown when the data provider has indicated in the cell file that an additional
file contains supplementary information but this additional file was not found. Recommendation:
Enquire at the provider, or delete the cell file and re-install it on all ENC databases.
Check of the C-MAP ENC Cells

Installed Cells.
select Jeppesen Marine ENC and press OK.
4. Since there is no product list for Jeppesen Marine ENC cells, it is only possible to check against the
CM-ENC CD and against the Online Update CD or against USB-media 1). Now, at the latest, insert
the CD/DVD or USB-Disk(s) and click the OK button in the box with the corresponding request.
in the Errors/Warnings part of the dialog box. The following messages may need explanation:
☞ Because only cell files, but no external reference files are transferred during a Real Time
Update, the message WARNING: (cell name): External reference file (file name) is missing!
is shown for all cells updated by RTU for which additional files are intended. At the next regular
update, the external reference files are transferred and so these messages are no longer
shown. If this message still appears after a regular update, it is advisable to ask the provider
about the possible cause.
Check of the Unlicensed ENC Cells

Unlicensed cells can only be checked for consistency, not for up-to-dateness.
Installed Cells.
select Unlicensed ENC and press OK.
in the Errors/Warnings part of the dialog box.
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 277

b_cp_e35.fm / 10.05.12
7.3.11 Other Useful Information about the Data Maintenance of the IHO ENC Cells
Base Files and Update Files of the Cells on external media; Cell Files in the Databases
The ENC files usually supplied on external media are different from the files contained on the hard disk
drives in the ENC databases 1).
Cell files on the external media: For every cell of the ENC, there is a base file. If changes are neces-
sary, an update file is generated, containing the changes only. If further changes are then necessary, a
further update file is generated, containing only the new changes. In this way, for every cell a number of
update files can result which all refer to the one base file of the cell and to the update files previously
issued for this base file.
This sequence is interrupted at some time by the issuing of a base file for a new edition or for a re-
issue. When the new edition is issued or a re-issue is made, the new base file contains all changes
published up until then by means of update files, and often additional changes that were not yet contained
in the last update file.
After a new edition has been issued, the edition number is incremented, but after a re-issue the cell
retains its old edition number. The update files that had been issued up until then and the old base file
thus become invalid.
The file names consist of the name of the cell and the file extension.
- The extension 000 indicates the base file.
- Following a new edition, the update files are given a serial extension-number beginning at 001.
- After a re-issue, the count of the update files does not begin at 001 but is resumed instead.
- The file names of different editions do not differ.
DE416050.000
File extension: 000 = base file, > 000 = update file
Production number
Navigational purpose, see page 81 Name of the cell
Agency code, see page 255
Cell files in the ENC databases: For each cell, there exists in the ENC databases of the equipment
items only one file, to which the most recent changes are added during an update.
In addition, the cell files of the ENC database differ from those of the CDs/USB-Disk(s) through the
data format:
- In the database, the files are stored in a format that is optimized for the everyday use of the data.
- Files of the unlicensed ENC cells are stored on the CDs/USB-media in a transfer-specific format
defined in the IHO standard S-57. To be able to use the data, they must be converted into the data-
base format. This is done during the transfer or update.
- Files of the licensed ENC cells are compressed and encrypted by the provider on the basis of the
S-57 format. During the transfer or update, these files must therefore be decrypted, decompressed
and converted into the database format.
ENC Base exchange sets and ENC Update excahnge sets of the IHO ENC 2)
The files of the licensed cells are distributed over two different types of data:
1) For this, the IHO uses the term SENC (System Electronic Navigational Chart).
2) Typically one medium contains one exchange set
278 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e35.fm / 10.05.12
ENC Base sets: When one or more base sets are issued, They usually contains all cell changes that are
necessary at that time. For changed cells for which a new edition is not issued at the same time, the Base
CD therefore also contains the update files.
ENC Base sets therefore contain
- the base files of all cells that were issued when the Base set was issued,
- all update files that were issued for these base files when the Base set was issued,
- in addition, the product list representing the update status at the time when the Base set was issued;
see below.
ENC Update set: The next changes in the set of data (new update files, new editions, first editions for
new cells) are all contained in an Update set. This Update set therefore refers to the Base set(s) that was
issued last.
After the issuing of an Update set, further changes are published cumulatively in the same way on the
following Update set. Therefore, for an update it is always sufficient to use the current Base CD together
with the most recent Update set.
ENC Update CDs contain only additions to the Base set(s), i.e.
- all update files issued after appearance of the Base set(s),
- frequently, base files of new editions,
- if appropriate, first editions of cell files (base files)
- in addition, the product list representing the update status at the time when the Update set was
issued; see below.
This sequence is interrupted at some time by the issuing of new Base set(s) - see above. When it is
issued, the old Base sets and all Update sets previously issued become invalid.
Checks the update status of the ENC cells in the local database; see page 276
Deletion of the complete ENC database; see page 252
Displays the list of available IHO ENC cells (product list); see page 280.
Transfers the product list from the CD/USB-media into the local ENC database 1).
Deletion of an installed product List; see page 281
Displays current information from the provider of IHO ENC cells; see page 286.
Shows the replacement info; see page 283
Checks the consistency of the data on the Jeppesen Marine CD; see page 266
Shows the information about the Jeppesen Marine CD; see page 266
Shows the system ID needed for installing Jeppesen Marine ENC cells; see page 266
Generates an RTU request for execution of an online update; see page 270.
1) This also takes place automatically for all ENC databases of the system when the Update func-
tion is used - see page 280.
Fig. 7-9 The menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance > ENC Other Functions
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 279

b_cp_e35.fm / 10.05.12
Product List
Fig. 7-10 The Product List Window
Each data exchange set (Update or Base set(s)) of IHO ENC cells contains a product list detailing all
available cells, together with the corresponding file status valid at the time of medium manufacture.
Meaning of the terms:
Name: Name of the cell
Sts: Status of licence: P = permit installed
Edition: Current edition number
Issue Date: Date when the current base file was issued
Latest Upd. Issue Date: Issue date of the last update file that was published for the current base file
Latest Upd. Number: Number of update files published up to this time for the current base file
Base Cell Upd. Number: Last update file that was incorporated into the base file during a re-issue
Last Upd. Number for prev. Edition: Total number of update files published up to this time for the
previous base file
(C)ompress (E)ncrypt: C=1; E=1: File is compressed/encrypted
Base Cell Location: The medium on which actual Base Cell is located
☞ If a cell has been replaced, a list of cells as replacement is displayed in the line underneath the data
of the appropriate cell
For each provider of IHO ENC cells, there is a product list in each ENC database. During a transfer or
update, it is automatically replaced by the latest product list of the provider. The program uses this to
generate another product list detailing all cells which occur in one of the provider-product lists in the ENC
database. For each cell, it enters the most up-to-date status of those it finds in the provider-product lists.
This “merged” product list can be viewed and printed out, just like the product list contained on the
medium which is currently inserted:
Showing the Product List:
In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance > ENC Other Functions, press the button Show Product List.
In the dialog box which then opens up, select Product List on CHARTPILOT to display the “merged”
product list located in the database or Product List on Removable Device if the product list 1) located
on the currently inserted CD/DVD or USB-Disk(s) is to be shown, and then press the OK button. The
product list appears and can be printed out by means of the Print button in the dialog box.
1)
If you obtain ENC cells from both Primar Stavanger and IC-ENC, you may notice that their product lists hardly differ. This is because these
two providers synchronize their product lists.
280 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e35.fm / 10.05.12
Deleting one Product List

After the installation of the first IHO ENC cell from your new supplier we recommend to delete the Product
List from your previous supplier.
A new Product list will be installed automaticly with the next IHO ENC cell installation if neccesary .
☞ It is not possible to delete the last File from the Chartpilot!

At least one file must remain.
2. In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance, press the button ENC Other Functions.
3. In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance, ENC Other Functions press the button Delete Product
List.
4. When the OK button is pressed the selected Product List will be deleted. Deletion can be prevented
by pressing the Cancel button.
Deletion of the selectet Product List Closes the window Open the helptext window
Fig. 7-11 Deletion a Product list
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 281

b_cp_e35.fm / 10.05.12
Operating the Product List; Showing Listed Cells in the World Chart
The positions of all cells which are included in the product list are shown in the world chart, irrespective
of the navigational purposes. Cells for which permits are available are shown in green.
Contents: See text.
Prints of the product list (all pages!) Closes the list
Fig. 7-12 The product list
By clicking in the world chart, the cell located at the clicked position is marked in the list. If several
cells are available at the clicked position, this is indicated. Repeated clicking of the position marks all cells
in the list in succession. A cell can also be marked by clicking in the list.
In the world chart, the marked cell is highlighted in orange.
Internal Process of the Transfer (Transfer Function as per Section 7.3.2: "Transfer Function:
Transferring All ENC Cells from Removable Device to Local Database" on page 267)
For the transfer, the program uses the list which was created in the selection menu on the right-hand side
(step 5, see page 267). In the case of licensed cells, this list only includes the files of cells for which
permits are available in the local database.
For each cell for which a file is listed there, first the base file is transferred and then the update files:
A base file is only transferred if the cell located in the local database is based on an older edition or on
the same one, and in the case of the same edition only if no update has been incorporated so far. An
update file is only transferred if the associated base file and all update files issued until then have already
been incorporated into the cell located on the database. Update files are therefore always transferred in
a continuously increasing order.
☞ The fact that, for each transfer, unlicensed files are converted and licensed files decrypted, decom-
pressed and converted (see B a s e F i l e s a n d U p d a t e F i l e s o f t h e C e l l s o n e x t e r n a l m e d i a ; C e l l F i l e s
i n t h e D a t a b a s e s on page 278) and that the contents of the update files are then incorporated into
the cell files located in the database will no longer be mentioned here every time.
The most frequent cases in which error/warning messages about the transfer process appear in the lower
list of the box which then opens are:
- Owing to a conversion error, the (base or update) file was not transferred:
ERROR: Cell ’file name’: Failed to install cell to database!
- The cell located on the database already has at least the status which would have been achieved
with the selected file:
WARNING: ’file name’: ENC Update ’a.b’ is already installed in SENC!
(a = edition of the cell; b = update No.)
282 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e35.fm / 10.05.12
- The selected update file cannot be transferred, because not all older update files have already been
incorporated into the cell in the database.
ERROR: ’file name’: UPDATE SEQUENCE: Can’t Update SENC ’a.b’ to Edition.Update ’a.x’!
(a = edition of the cell on which the cell located in the database is based; b = the last update No.
incorporated into the database; x = update No. of the file that lead to this message)
- For the selected update file, there is no cell on the database.
ERROR: ’file name’: Can’t update, base cell is not installed!
If it is stated in an update file that the entire associated base file is no longer valid and should be deleted,
the program halts and requests confirmation of the deletion in a separate dialog box. In addition, the
following message appears in the dialog box:
ATTENTION: ’file name’: CANCEL BASE CELL : SENC cells should be deleted!
In the case of licensed cells, it is possible that additional error/warning messages of a self-explanatory
nature are shown.
Information about Replacement Info

If the provider(s) of the chart data have noted the replacement information within the product list, the list
will be analyzed and checked during the IHO ENC update process. If permits for the update of a cell are
missing or some cells are not installed, a protocol will be saved which can be opened using the Show
Replacement Info button.
Handling of Conversion Errors

Unfortunately, faulty ENC files are available on the market, and these lead to errors during the conversion
process. It is clear that these data cannot be used to create an ENC database that is both complete and
error-free, but a database that is either as complete as possible 1) or one that is free of errors.
The program gives the operator the opportunity to decide which of the two objectives should be achieved
when conversion errors are encountered.
Moreover, thanks to detailed error reports, the program also makes it possible for the operator to decide
for each conversion error whether the faulty file should be transferred. This possibility is described under
A n a l y s i s o f C o n v e r s i o n E r r o r s on page 284.
☞ When making the decision on which objective to achieve, one should be aware that most of the
conversion errors caused by faulty files are of a formal nature and of little nautical relevance, but that
at the same time it cannot be excluded that hazardous nautical errors may possibly arise in this way.
☞ The error frequency depends on the region (and hence on the manufacturer of the files). In some
regions, the files contain so many errors 2) that only a few ENC cells would be left in an error-free
database; for this reason, only the use of a fairly complete database (but one containing errors) is
advisable in such cases.
The database should be as complete as possible:
This is done by also including cells in the database with which conversion errors have been encountered.
Here it is necessary to accept nautically relevant errors in the cell. The cells are not marked as being
faulty, and the errors are not detectable as such in the display of the cell.
This objective is achieved by activating the function Transfer on Error in the dialog box ENC Cell
Transfer before commencing the transfer or update (step 6 on page 267 or step 10 on page 270).
During the transfer or update, the files for which conversion errors occurred are listed under Errors/Warn-
ings in the dialog box. If it was not possible to transfer an ENC file (base file or update file) because of
the conversion errors, this is also reported there.
1) “As complete as possible” because some files also contain errors that make conversion of the file impossible.
2)
A large error frequency is the typical result of initial problems with production. It may be assumed that the situation will improve in the short
or medium term.
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 283

b_cp_e35.fm / 10.05.12
☞ Details on the errors that occurred during the last transfer of the base file and that occurred during
the transfer of the last update file are displayed in the Info box of the Chart Maintenance subroutine
(see page 285) and in the Info box which appears when the cell is used.
Starts the transfer

or update Aborts the transfer or
update
If the errors are to be analysed If the database should be as If the database should be
complete as possible free of errors
Fig. 7-13 The dialog box ENC Cell Transfer
The database should be free of errors:

With this approach, the conversion of a file is aborted as soon as the program detects an error. The corre-
sponding cells on the ENC database are therefore not updated. They do not contain any conversion
errors but content-related errors that were supposed to have been corrected through the update. To
obtain an error-free database, these cells must be deleted.
To achieve this objective, the following steps are necessary:
1. Before commencing the transfer (step 6 on page 267) or update (step 10 on page 270, or step 6 on
page 275), activate the function Skip on Error in the dialog box ENC Cell Transfer.
2. Make a note of the cells for which the following messages have appeared in the lower list of box
which opens during the transfer or update (if necessary, print out this list):
ERROR: Cell ’file name’: Failed to install cell to database!
ERROR: ’file name’: UPDATE SEQUENCE: Can’t Update SENC ’a.b’ to Edition.Update ’a.x’!
3. On all databases, delete these cells as per Section 7.3.8: "Deleting ENC Cells" on page 275.
Analysis of Conversion Errors

During a transfer or update, details may be shown on the conversion errors which occurred. For each
individual conversion error which occurred, you can then decide whether the faulty file should be trans-
ferred. Alternatively, the producer should be able to use these data to clarify the nautical relevance of the
error and to correct the error in a future edition.
1. Before commencing the transfer or update (step 6 on page 267, or step 10 on page 270), activate
the function Halt on Error in the dialog box ENC Cell Transfer.
2. As soon as a conversion error occurs during the transfer or update, the program halts and the dialog
box ENC Conversion Error opens. With the button Details provided there, another dialog box is
opened with details on the conversion error which occurred. If necessary, print out the details and
close the box.
284 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e35.fm / 10.05.12
Information about Opens a dialog box with

the faulty file detailed information about
the faulty file (for special-
ists only).
The data can also be
printed out by means of
the Print button which is
provided there.
This (faulty) file is to be This and all further (faulty) This (faulty) file is not to be This and all further (faulty)
transferred. files are to be transferred. transferred. files are not to be transferred.
Fig. 7-14 The dialog box ENC Conversion Error

3. After you have decided in the dialog box ENC Cell Transfer whether the file should be transferred
despite any errors (by pressing the Transfer button) or not (by pressing the Skip button), the program
continues execution.
4. If more conversion errors occur, repeat step 2 and 3. Alternatively, continue by pressing the button
Transfer All or Skip All. For the remaining cells, this has the same effect as if the button Transfer
on Error or Skip on Error had been pressed at the start instead of Halt on Error; see H a n d l i n g o f
C o n v e r s i o n E r r o r s on page 283.
Subsequent analysis of the errors contained in the cells of the database (because the function Transfer
on Error was used during the transfer or update) is only partially possible 1). To obtain clarity on the error
situation in a systematic way, the cells of the database must be deleted and an initial installation as per
Section 7.3.2: "Transfer Function: Transferring All ENC Cells from Removable Device to Local Database"
on page 267 must be carried out with the setting Halt on Error.
Displaying Information about the ENC Cells of the Local Database

When you click with the INFO key in the world chart on an ENC cell which belongs to the local ENC data-
base (this one) and is displayed in the world chart, a dialog box opens up, containing information about
the updating of this cell. With the Expand button, the dialog box can be extended by the addition of
detailed information about the ENC cell that is marked in the upper list.
With the Details of button, you specify which information is to appear additionally 2):
- Cell History: For the first issue of the cell file and for all update files that have been added: edition
of the files, and transfer date.
- Last Conversion Errors 3): The conversion errors that have occurred during transfer of the base file.
This is the same information as the information displayed in the dialog box ENC Conversion Error
by means of the Details button during transfer or update - see page 284.
- Last Conversion Messages: Information about the contents of the last base file that was trans-
ferred.
- Last Update Errors 3): The conversion errors that occurred during transfer since the last transfer of
the base file. This is the same information as the information displayed in the dialog box ENC
Conversion Error by means of the Details button during transfer or update - see page 284.
- Last Update Messages: Information about the contents of the changes produced by the transfer of
the last update file.
1) One possibility is: Determine the position of the faulty cell in the world chart by marking it in the product list (see page 282) and displaying
information on this cell; see further below: D i s p l a y i n g I n f o r m a t i o n a b o u t t h e E N C C e l l s o f t h e L o c a l D a t a b a s e .
2) Except for the Cell History, this information is available only in the ENC database of the equipment item on which the transfer and conver-
sion from the CD took place.
3) Appears after pressing of Details of if, and only if, relevant messages or errors are present.
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 285

b_cp_e35.fm / 10.05.12
With the Print button, the content of the displayed list can be printed out.
Edition of the cell file: Date of issue of the most Date of the last transfer from the Type of chart
Number before the dot: the edition of the recent update file used ENC CD to the ENC database
base file used during the last update
Number after the dot: file extension of the
most recent update file used
Name of the cell
Switches on/off the display

of the details.
Switches over to the main program

(to Planning display mode) and thus
switches on the display of the
selected electronic chart. This does
not cause switch-off of the Chart
Maintenance subroutine.
Jumps to the Manual ENC Update

editor; the update file of the marked
cell then opens up.
Printing of the information Specifying which information Detailed information about Closes the box.
contained in the list is to appear in the lower list. the file marked above
Fig. 7-15 The dialog box with detailed information about an ENC cell file of the ENC database
Displaying Further Information from the Provider of the Licensed ENC

Insert the latest ENC (Update or Base) CD into the CD drive. In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance
> ENC Other Functions, press the button Show README Text and, in the dialog box which then opens
up, select README.TXT on Removable Media and press OK. The provider’s latest information appears
and can be printed out by means of the Print button in the dialog box.
If, in the dialog box, README.TXT on CHARTPILOT is selected, the information contained in the local
ENC database appears. 1)
7.3.12 Other Useful Information about the Data Maintenance of C-MAP ENC Cells
CM-ENC media
The ship receives the CM-ENC media at intervals governed by the individual contract with Jeppesen
Marine. For it to be permissible to sail without paper charts, the corresponding regulations must be
observed with regard to the frequency of these updates.
This CM-ENC media contains all ENC cells that are available at the time of publishing. It contains new
editions or re-issues of ENC cells, but no update cells.
1)
For each application of the Update function, the README text on the ENC CD is transferred to the ENC databases of the system and
overwrites the README text previously stored there.
286 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e35.fm / 10.05.12
Operating Instructions 7.4 Data Maintenance of the Manual ENC Updates
Unlike the cells of the IHO ENC CDs, the ENC cells are available directly in the SENC format and there-
fore need not be compiled. This increases the speed when installing the cells.
RTU Service
In the periods between publishing of the CM-ENC media, Jeppesen Marine provides the RTU service as
a way of keeping the data as current as possible.
To keep the data quantities to be transferred as low as possible, only updates are provided by the RTU
service. New editions, or additional new cells, are not made available. In the same way, the updates do
not include the external reference files needed in some cases. These are separate files containing addi-
tional textual or graphic information.
For the reasons mentioned above, it is absolutely necessary to update
the database immediately when a new CM-ENC media is received,
because only this source contains all the necessary data!
The RTU service therefore represents a useful supplement, but is no substitute for the update with the
CM-ENC media!
In order to obtain a correct set of update cells for the data installed on the units, it is necessary to
generate a new request directly before each planned online update and to send this to the RTU server
of Jeppesen Marine.
The updates then received always refer to the CM-ENC media installed last. For this reason, all cells
updated by RTU are replaced by the version of the cell located on the media whenever a new CM-ENC
media is installed, even if their date indicates that they are more up-to-date than the new CM ENC media.
For this reason, it is urgently recommended that an online update be
performed immediately after the latest CM-ENC media is installed.
7.4 Data Maintenance of the Manual ENC Updates
At the end of the editing process, Manual ENC Updates which have been edited according to Section
5.3: "Editing of Manual Updates of the ENC" on page 201 are stored as a file in the local ENC database
only.
The transfer that is then necessary to the other hard disk drives of the system is performed in the same
way as described in Section 7.3.3: "Transfer Function: Transferring All ENC Cells from Local to Other
Databases" on page 268 for transfer of the ENC cells except that, as the Type, ENC - Man. Updates is
selected, and not ENC.
If a Manual ENC Update file is to be deleted and the file of the corresponding ENC cell is to remain
preserved, deletion is performed as described in Section 7.3.8: "Deleting ENC Cells" on page 275 for the
ENC, again with the exception that, as the Type, ENC - Man. Updates is selected, and not ENC.
☞ If ENC cells are transferred between the equipment items, the associated Manual ENC Update files
that exist on the equipment item that is set as the source are automatically transferred too. When
ENC cells are deleted, the associated Manual ENC Update files that exist in the equipment item are
automatically deleted.
USEFUL INFORMATION
Displaying Information about the Manual ENC Update Files of the Local Database
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 287

b_cp_e35.fm / 10.05.12
7.5 Data Maintenance of Own Charts Operating Instructions
If ENC - Man. Updates is selected as the Type, and if the INFO key is used to click on a Manual ENC
Update cell belonging to the local ENC database and displayed in the world chart, the dialog box which
then opens up displays the name of the cell and the date of the last change; see also D i s p l a y i n g I n f o r -
m a t i o n a b o u t t h e E N C C e l l s o f t h e L o c a l D a t a b a s e on page 285. With the Expand button that exists
there, the dialog box can be extended by the addition of a list which, for all editing sessions, shows which
objects have been inserted or deleted in the Manual ENC Update File.
7.5 Data Maintenance of Own Charts
Before the Own Chart cells edited according to Section 5.4: "Editing Cells of Own Chart" on page 205
can be used in the overall system, they must be transferred to the Own Chart databases of the individual
units by means of the subroutine Chart Maintenance. This is done by means of the procedure described
for the ENC data - see Section 7.3.3: "Transfer Function: Transferring All ENC Cells from Local to Other
Databases" on page 268.
Deletion of the Own Chart cells too is performed in the same way as deletion of the ENC files - see
Section 7.3.8: "Deleting ENC Cells" on page 275.
7.6 Data Maintenance of the ARCS Charts
ARCS charts are produced exclusively by the Admiralty Raster Chart Service. They can be procured from
several different providers.
For chart maintenance, a distinction must be made between the following procedures. In special cases,
however, it may be advisable to use a different procedure; see Section 7.6.5: "Divergent Procedures for
Transfer and Update" on page 295.
Initial installation of ARCS charts:
1. Procure an ARCS Navigator Licence from a provider, procure the necessary ARCS chart permits
from him, and install these on the local database; see Section 7.6.1: "Licence and Permits for ARCS
Charts" on page 289.
2. Using the Transfer function as per Section 7.6.2: "Transfer Function: Transferring All ARCS Charts
from CD to Local Database" on page 292, transfer all the chart files for which permits have already
been installed from the provider’s CDs to the local database.
3. Using the Transfer function as per Section 7.6.3: "Transfer Function: Transferring All ARCS Charts
from Local to Other Databases" on page 293, transfer all ARCS files from the local database to all
other ARCS databases of the system.
Updating of ARCS charts:
Regular update: As soon as a new CD has been received, perform an update on all ARCS databases
of the system in one working step, using the Update function as per Section 7.6.4: "Update Function:
Update of the ARCS Charts on All Databases" on page 294.
no later than one week after last receiving a regular (Update) CD.
To do this, an Online Update CD or USB-Disk(s) is produced at the PC, with which the update is
performed on all ARCS databases of the system in one working step, using the Update function as per
Section 7.6.4: "Update Function: Update of the ARCS Charts on All Databases" on page 294; see also
page 250.
288 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e35.fm / 10.05.12
Operating Instructions 7.6 Data Maintenance of the ARCS Charts
Installation of subsequently licensed charts:

1. Install any ARCS chart permits that were procured later to the local database; see Section 7.6.1:
"Licence and Permits for ARCS Charts" on page 289.
2. Using the Update function as per Section 7.6.4: "Update Function: Update of the ARCS Charts on
All Databases" on page 294, transfer the charts to all ARCS databases of the system in one working
step.
7.6.1 Licence and Permits for ARCS Charts

for the chart maintenance work of the system. For the following operating steps, the Type ARCS
must be set in the Utilities > Chart Maintenance menu.
Initial Installation
system identification code and the PIN 1) are needed, and the ARCS charts to be used must be
determined.
With the chart type ARCS, the system identification code is called the User Permit Number and this
is displayed together with the PIN when, in the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance > ARCS
Licensing, the button View User Permit No. is pressed.
You can obtain the information on the available ARCS charts in various ways, e.g. through the
provider, or through the Internet.
If the provider needs other data about the system, further relevant data can be generated as an
ECDIS Passport and sent to the provider; see page 291.
2. You then receive
- the ARCS chart permits floppy (which contains the permit files, in which all permits acquired
by you are present),
- the ARCS Charts CDs of the geographical areas for which you have ordered charts (these CDs
contain all charts of the geographical area in the original state, i.e. without update),
- the current ARCS Update CD (this contains updates for all charts issued, and cumulatively the
Notices to Mariners and the Temporary and Preliminary Notices to Mariners published by
the UKHO).
1) This PIN is not a “personal” number, but denotes the type and manufacturer of the system.
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 289

b_cp_e35.fm / 10.05.12
7.6 Data Maintenance of the ARCS Charts Operating Instructions
Installation of the permits on the ARCS databases

For the later acquisition of permits without ARCS chart permits Floppy
Check of the permits installed on the local database
Data backup of the permits installed on the local database
Deletion of permits on the local database
Displaying the User Permit Number and the PIN

Displaying licensing data.
Generating an ECDIS Passport for ARCS data; see page 265
Fig. 7-16 The menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance > ARCS Licensing
3. Installing ARCS chart permits:

Put the ARCS chart permits Floppy Disk into the Floppy, and in the menu Utilities > Chart Mainte-
nance > ARCS Licensing press the button Install Permits from Device. A Select Device dialog
box then appears to select the Floppy or the USB-Disk(s) 1); after you have answered that request
with OK, the permit files containing the permits are copied from the media into the local ARCS data-
base. These processes can be observed in a dialog box. The question Transferring permits to all
other systems? should be answered with OK.
The files needed for the licensing process are called GB.LCN and GB.NCP. The procedure
described must also be applied if these files were received by e-mail. In this case, you must create
the ARCS permits Floppy/USB-Disk(s) yourself beforehand by transferring the received files to a
DOS-formatted Floppy or USB-Disk(s).
☞ If the above-mentioned files were transferred as an archive file (e.g. the .ZIP format), they must
be decompressed. Installation as described is only possible if the files with the a.m. names are
located on the Floppy/USB-Disk(s) (if necessary, check this with a PC).
☞ The licensing data are displayed when, in the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance > ARCS
Licensing, the button View Licence Details is pressed. A list of the permits that are now installed
is displayed when, in the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance > ARCS Licensing, the button Verify
Installed Permits is pressed. Close the dialog boxes by means of Cancel.
"Transfer Function: Transferring All ARCS Charts from CD to Local Database" on page 292.
Renewing the ARCS Chart Permits; Procuring New Permits

If existing permits are renewed (extended) or further permits are procured later, the procedure described
above must be repeated. The corresponding chart files can then be transferred by means of the Update
function as per Section 7.6.4: "Update Function: Update of the ARCS Charts on All Databases" on page
294.
290 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e35.fm / 10.05.12
If permits are to be ordered later for further charts, and data transfer per ARCS chart permits Floppy is
not appropriate or not possible (e.g. because the ship is at sea), the permit code of the charts can also
be communicated by e-mail, fax or telephone. For each chart, the appropriate dialog box must be opened
in the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance > ARCS Licensing by pressing Install Permit Manually, this
permit code must be entered behind Permit, and the OK button must be pressed.
Deleting Permits
ARCS chart permits are generally not deleted automatically. If expired permits are not to be renewed,
these permits must be deleted manually.
1. In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance, set ARCS as the Type.
2. In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance > ARCS Licensing, press the Delete Permits button.
3. In the selection menu which then opens up, transfer those permits that are indicated by the text
EXPIRED from the left-hand list to the right-hand list (for the list operating procedure, see also page
254). After pressing of the OK button of the selection menu and appropriate answering of the
resulting safeguard question, the expired permits are deleted in the local ARCS database.
If a transfer or update of ARCS charts takes place subsequently, these actions need only be performed
on the local ARCS database.
☞ If ARCS charts are transferred (using the Transfer function or the Update function, independently of
the source), all ARCS chart permits on the local database are automatically copied to the ARCS
databases to which the transfer of the charts is taking place. Here permits that are not located on
the local database are deleted on the other ARCS databases.
USEFUL INFORMATION
Checking the Installed Permits

If difficulties occur in the display of charts for which a permit exists, the permits installed in the local ARCS
database can be checked: the check is initiated in the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance > ARCS
Licensing by pressing the button Verify Installed Permits. In the dialog box which then opens up, infor-
mation about the check performed is given.
☞ On the individual equipment items, you can perform in the same way a check of the permits existing
in the other ARCS databases of the system.
Performing Data Backup of the Installed Permits

Data backup can be performed for the acquired permits too: put an empty, DOS-formatted Floppy Disk
into the Floppy or a USB-media in the USB-Disk(s), and in the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance >
ARCS Licensing press the Permit Backup button. A Select Device dialog box opens to select the
media to store and click the OK button. 1) The permit file is then copied from the local ARCS database to
the Floppy or USB-media. A dialog box then opens up, containing information about each process that is
completed.
Generating the ECDIS Passport for ARCS Charts

The system data which may possibly be needed by the provider of ARCS charts are compiled in the
ECDIS Passport,. When, after a DOS-formatted Floppy Disk has been inserted into the Floppy or a USB-
media has been inserted in the USB-Disk(s), the Generate ECDIS Passport button in the menu Utilities
> Chart Maintenance > ARCS Licensing is pressed a Select Device dialog box opens to select the
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 291

b_cp_e35.fm / 10.05.12
required media and click OK. The entries which are then requested are performed, the data is stored as
an .xml file on the removable media, together with two other files which may needed for the interpretation
of the .xml file.
☞ Parts of the content can be viewed and printed out at the PC.
New ARCS Chart Permits Floppy

Each permit is valid for two successive issues of the chart. The ARCS chart permits Floppy only contains
permits for the existing current edition and for the next future edition of the chart. If a further edition
appears, UKHO supplies the most recent chart permits for ARCS via e-mail.
Expiry of the ARCS Navigator Licence

In the last month prior to expiry of the licence, a message drawing your attention to this deadline appears
as soon as a chart is selected for display.
In the month after expiry of the licence, the charts that exist on the hard disk can still be displayed in the
usual way. However, no ARCS Update CDs are sent, and no charts can be transferred. Therefore, not
all charts are completely up-to-date. When a chart is selected for display, a message about this appears,
the Chart Status field of the navigation data line becomes yellow, and the display Licence exp. appears
there.
One month after expiry of the licence, it is no longer possible to display ARCS charts.
7.6.2 Transfer Function: Transferring All ARCS Charts from CD to Local Database
Application:
- Initial installation of ARCS charts
- All ARCS charts 1) for which unexpired ARCS chart permits are present on the local database are
transferred to the local database and updated there.
- All ARCS chart permits located on the local database are copied to all other ARCS databases,
whereas permits that are not located on the local database are deleted from the other ARCS data-
bases.
- The Notices to Mariners and Temporary and Preliminary Notices to Mariners provided on the ARCS
Update CD are transferred to the local database.
Preparations:
- Install all permits to the local database as per Section 7.6.1: "Licence and Permits for ARCS Charts"
on page 289.
2. Put the most recent ARCS Update CD into the CD drive, and in the menu Utilities > Chart Mainte-
nance set CD/DVD as the Source. If a message relating to the table of contents appears, answer
it with OK.
1) Together with the included plans
292 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e35.fm / 10.05.12

☞ Under Charts/Plans to be Transferred, leave all navigational purposes switched on.
6. In the selection menu, press the OK button. The dialog box Transferring ARCS Charts appears.
7. After the corresponding request, insert the requested CD and resume the transfer with OK.
8. If the charts that are to be transferred are distributed over several CDs, procedure 7 is repeated
accordingly.
9. On completion of the transfer, start the update of the local database by pressing the OK button after
the corresponding request.
10. When the transfer process has finished (you are informed of this in a dialog box), close the dialog
box Transferring ARCS Charts by means of the Cancel button.
7.6.3 Transfer Function: Transferring All ARCS Charts from Local to Other Databases
Application:
- Initial installation of ARCS charts
- All ARCS charts 1) located on the local database are copied to all other ARCS databases of the
system;
bases.
- The Notices to Mariners and Temporary and Preliminary Notices to Mariners located on the local
database are transferred to all other ARCS databases.
Preparations:
- The transfer as per Section 7.6.2: "Transfer Function: Transferring All ARCS Charts from CD to
Local Database" on page 292 must have been carried out.
2. In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance, as the Source select the CHARTPILOT that is currently
3. In the world chart, pull open the largest possible frame (up to the margin) and press the Transfer
button.
4. Under Destination, mark all CHARTPILOTs and MULTIPILOTs.
☞ Under Charts/Plans to be Transferred, leave all navigational purposes switched on.
6. After pressing of the OK button of the selection menu, the transfer begins. The dialog box Remote
Transfer of ARCS Charts appears. In its upper part, the process currently taking place is listed, and
in the lower part all errors and warnings occurring in the transfer process are listed.
1) Together with the included plans
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 293

b_cp_e35.fm / 10.05.12
7. When the transfer process has finished, press the Cancel button after the corresponding request.
7.6.4 Update Function: Update of the ARCS Charts on All Databases
Application:
- Update of ARCS charts in all ARCS databases of the system after receiving a new ARCS Update
CD or after generating an Online Update CD/USB-Disk(s).
- Installation of ARCS charts for subsequently procured permits on all ARCS databases of the system.
With the procedure described, the following actions are carried out on all ARCS databases:
- All charts are updated for which there are unexpired permits on the local database. 1) (If new permits
were installed there in the meantime, the corresponding charts are also transferred and updated.)
- All ARCS charts for which there are no permits, or only expired permits, on the local database are
deleted (after a safeguard question).
- All obsolete ARCS charts that are no longer supported are deleted (after a safeguard question).
bases.
- The Notices to Mariners and Temporary and Preliminary Notices to Mariners located on the ARCS
Update CD are transferred to all other ARCS databases.
Preparations:
- Permits that were procured after the last update must have been installed in the local database as
per Section 7.6.1: "Licence and Permits for ARCS Charts" on page 289.
- Expired permits that are not to be renewed must have been deleted in the local database; see page
291.
- For an online update: The Online Update CD or USB-Media was produced. It must cover all charts
that are to be updated.
2. Put the Online Update CD or the most recent ARCS Update CD into the CD drive or the USB-
Disk(s) in the USB-port.
box which then opens up, you are (again) requested to insert the latest ARCS update CD. If you
have not done this in step 2, do it now and press the OK button of the dialog box. As a result, the
dialog box Type of Update opens up.
6. In the dialog box Type of Update, press the button Update based upon installed permits.
☞ For the function of the button Update based upon installed charts, see page 296.
1) When using the Online Update CD, this applies only for the charts downloaded when generating the Online Update CD.
294 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e35.fm / 10.05.12
7. In the dialog box Type of Update, press the OK button. As a result, the update process is started
and the dialog box Updating ARCS Chart Database opens up.
8. If another CD/USB-Disk(s) has to be inserted, a request to do that appears. If the correct medium is
not found Select Device dialog box appears and an other Removable Medium can be selected. 1)
9. If the program detects that the local ARCS database contains charts that are no longer supported,
or for which the permit has expired, or for which no permit exists, an appropriate message is shown.
After confirmation, a selection menu appears in which these charts are listed on the left. It is recom-
mended that these charts be deleted (use Add All >> to enter all charts into the right-hand column
and then press OK). The deletion is then carried out in all databases of the system.
ARCS Chart Database by means of the Cancel button.
11. With an additional check, you can make sure that the update on the local database was successful:
In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance > ARCS Other Functions, press the button Verify
Installed Charts. A selection menu appears in which all charts installed on the local database are
listed on the left. If all charts are to be checked use Add All >> to enter all charts into the right-hand
column and then press OK. In the dialog box which then opens, the message No errors found must
be shown, to indicate a successful update.
USEFUL INFORMATION
Data Existing on an ARCS Update CD

Each ARCS Update CD contains the following data which are up-to-date at the time of issuing of the CD:
- The complete catalog of the charts issued by UKHO. It contains, among other things, the informa-
tion indicating which CD contains which chart.
- The areas (or tiles, according to ARCS terminology) of all ARCS charts issued that have changed
relative to the files contained in the most recent ARCS Charts CDs.
- All charts which have been completely changed or issued anew after the issuing of the most recent
ARCS Charts CDs.
- The most recent Notices to Mariners and Temporary and Preliminary Notices to Mariners.
- Further data which are necessary for proper execution of the update.
Transferring All ARCS Charts from CD to Local Database" on page 292 to 7.6.4 for the transfer and
update:
Initial Installation of the ARCS charts using the Update Function

The initial installation of the ARCS charts can also be performed as per Section 7.6.4: "Update Function:
Update of the ARCS Charts on All Databases" on page 294, if all permits for the charts to be installed
were installed (as per Section 7.6.1: "Licence and Permits for ARCS Charts" on page 289) on at least the
local database beforehand.
This approach is particularly advantageous when no MULTIPILOT is installed or when only a few charts
are to be installed.
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 295

b_cp_e35.fm / 10.05.12
If MULTIPILOTs are available and more than just a few charts are to be installed, it is advisable to mark
in step 4 under Destination only CHARTPILOT (this one) and then to perform the transfer to all other
databases as per Section 7.6.3: "Transfer Function: Transferring All ARCS Charts from Local to Other
Databases" on page 293.
No MULTIPILOT is Installed in the System

The initial installation of ARCS charts is most easily performed with the Update function; see above.
Not All Charts for Which Permits are Available are to be Installed
☞ In this case, the initial installation is not possible by means of the Update function (see above).
With the initial installation as per Section 7.6.2: "Transfer Function: Transferring All ARCS Charts from
CD to Local Database" on page 292, an appropriate selection must be performed; for the selection proce-
dure, see Section 7.2.6: "Selecting the Charts or Cell Files" on page 252. Then perform the transfer as
per Section 7.6.3: "Transfer Function: Transferring All ARCS Charts from Local to Other Databases" on
page 293 to all other databases. Such an initial installation with subsequent transfer must also be carried
out for new charts for which permits were received later.
With the update as per Section 7.6.4: "Update Function: Update of the ARCS Charts on All Databases"
on page 294, the function Update based upon installed charts must in this case be selected in step 6.
If charts were replaced by other charts through UKHO, the replaced charts are proposed for deletion
during the update (and should also be deleted), but the replacement charts are not automatically trans-
ferred (because the setting “Update based upon installed charts” was selected). They must therefore
be transferred to the local database before the update as per Section 7.6.2: "Transfer Function: Trans-
ferring All ARCS Charts from CD to Local Database" on page 292. In such a case, you will automatically
be sent an ARCS chart permits Floppy 1) by UKHO. The information about which new charts must be
transferred is given on the info sheet supplied with the Floppy.
If not all charts have already been installed, it is also advisable to transfer only the replacement charts
which belong to the region covered by the installed charts. This is achieved when a regional selection
(Section 7.2.6.3: "Selection according to Agency Codes and to Cell Names / Chart Numbers" on page
254) is performed before the selection by chart names (Section 7.2.6.1: "Selection according to Regions"
on page 253).
7.6.6 Deleting ARCS Charts
Application:
There are so many reasons why it may be necessary to delete ARCS charts from the databases that they
cannot be listed here. Reference to the necessity of deleting ARCS charts is made at the corresponding
points.
By means of the following procedure, it is possible to delete any desired selection of ARCS charts on
each ARCS database that exists in the system. Permits are not deleted in this process.
Deleting Selected Charts

page 252.
1)
The permits of such new charts can also be contained on a permits Floppy or a USB-media which you are still expecting (because permits
have been renewed or new ones have been ordered).
296 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e35.fm / 10.05.12
charts are to be deleted. This unit must be switched on.
4. If no frame was drawn in step 3, the number of charts and plans on the database are shown in the
Delete menu, grouped according to navigational purpose. If a frame was drawn, it is possible to
select according to navigational purpose in the Delete menu. With the aid of the button Include
Touched Charts/Plans, it can be specified there whether only those charts and plans are to be
deleted that are situated completely within the frame, or also those charts and plans that are only
touched by the frame.
☞ Because the plans located on a chart are stored in the file of the chart, the chart and the plans
it contains are always processed together. If a plan is selected for deletion, then the chart on
which the plan is situated and all other plans contained in the chart are also selected for dele-
tion, even if they lie outside of the defined region.
To prevent charts / plans outside the defined region from being deleted, the selected charts /
plans are displayed in the world chart (in succession for each navigational purpose). In the case
of charts / plans that lie outside the defined region and should therefore not be deleted, click on
them with the INFO key to determine the chart number and then remove this chart from the
right-hand list of the selection menu after performing step 5.
selection according to chart names or select all files by clicking on Add All >>.
6. When the OK button is pressed in the selection menu, the charts listed in the right-hand list are
Cancel button.
Deleting All ARCS Charts of a Database

charts are to be deleted. This unit must be switched on.
4. In the selection menu which then opens, click on Add All >>. After the OK button is pressed, all
ARCS charts are deleted in the database specified by step 2. Alternatively, deletion can be
prevented by pressing the Cancel button.
USEFUL INFORMATION
Meaning of the Status Display in the Selection Menu

No entry: The permit is installed and valid, i.e. the chart is available for display.
EXPIRED: The permit has expired; it is not certain that the chart is completely up-to-date.
NO PERM: The chart is installed, but a valid permit no longer exists. It is not certain that the chart
is completely up-to-date. Presumably, the permit has been deleted and can be
installed again.
OBSOLETE: The chart has been removed from the ARCS catalog. It is no longer being supported
by UKHO with the aid of updates, and should be deleted.
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 297

b_cp_e35.fm / 10.05.12
7.7 Data Maintenance of the CM-93/3Pro Chart Operating Instructions
7.6.7 Later Update of an Individual Equipment Item
If an update was not performed on all CHARTPILOTs and MULTIPILOTs, the non-updated databases
must be updated as soon as possible.
The simplest approach is to perform an update as per Section 7.6.4: "Update Function: Update of the
ARCS Charts on All Databases" on page 294 from a CHARTPILOT with an ARCS database that has
already been updated to the ARCS database that has not yet been updated. Here only the non-updated
CHARTPILOT / MULTIPILOT should be marked in step 4.
7.7 Data Maintenance of the CM-93/3Pro Chart
The CM-93/3Pro chart is exclusively published by the company Jeppesen Marine.

Chart maintenance for the CM-93/3Pro chart comprises the following operations:
Initial Installation of the CM-93/3Pro Chart
1. If there are no CM-93/3Pro licences, procure these for the desired zones or areas from SAM Elec-
tronics. Then install the licences you receive on the local database. See Section 7.7.1: "Licences for
CM-93/3Pro Cells" on page 299.
2. Transfer all the CM-93/3Pro cell files for which the licences apply from the provider’s CDs 1)to the
local database, as per Section 7.7.2: "Transfer Function: Transferring All CM-93/3Pro Cells from
Medium to Local Database" on page 306.
3. Now transfer all CM-93/3Pro cell files from the local database to all other CM-93/3Pro databases of
the system, as per Section 7.7.3: "Transfer Function: Transferring All CM-93/3Pro Cells from Local
to Other Databases" on page 307.
If large volumes of data are to be transferred, this process may take a very long time: The entire
CM-93/3Pro chart consists of approx. 15,000 cells, and the transfer to several CHARTPILOTs and/
or MULTIPILOTs can take many hours. If this period of time is not available, it is advisable to transfer
only the cells of the region that is to be sailed first (for the procedure, see page 311).
By the first regular update, at the latest, all cells should have been transferred in this way. The
reason: when the CM-93/3Pro CD is used, the Update function always transfers all those licensed
cells that are not yet contained in the databases. If large numbers of cells are missing from the data-
bases, the update will take correspondingly longer.
1) The data media to which the CM-93/3Pro cells are transferred are in fact DVDs. Because this distinction is irrelevant for the actual handling,
the term “CD” is used both in the user interface of the CHARTPILOT (e.g. Source: CD/DVD) and in these Operating Instructions. Therefore,
only CHARTPILOTs equipped with a DVD drive are able to handle CM-93/3Pro charts.
CM-93/3Pro DVDs that are suitable for use at the CHARTPILOT are marked as Only readable in SAM Electronics systems. There are
older CHARTPILOT versions, where unpredictable errors may occur if other DVDs are used.
There are older CHARTPILOT versions with a CM-93/3Pro database, on which CM-93/3Pro charts can hence be displayed but which cannot
access the CM-93/3Pro CD. Such a CHARTPILOT is therefore not suitable for this work; it must be supplied with these data by means of
step 3.
298 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e35.fm / 10.05.12
Operating Instructions 7.7 Data Maintenance of the CM-93/3Pro Chart
Special hint for CM93/3Pro Charts on Multiple Volumes

Since the amount of data of the electronic charts has increased continuously, data may be delivered as
a set of two or more DVDs nowadays.
So it may be necessary to change between the inserted volumes of one delivery during the installation/
update process.
Due to the fact that the moment, in which the change has to be made, is not exactly predictable, please
Note:
You will be prompted by a message window if it is neccessary to change the inserted volume. Please
follow the instructions stated in the message window to complete the installation/update process.
Updating the CM-93/3Pro Cells:

Regular update: As soon as a new CD has been received, perform an update on all CM-93/3Pro data-
bases of the system in one working step, using the Update function as per Section 7.7.5: "Update Func-
tion: Update of the CM-93/3Pro Cells on All Databases" on page 310.
no later than one week after last receiving a CM-93/3Pro CD.
To do this, an Online Update CD is produced at the PC or copy the required files on a USB-media/device,
with which the update is performed on all CM-93/3Pro databases of the system in one working step, using
the Update function as per Section 7.7.5: "Update Function: Update of the CM-93/3Pro Cells on All Data-
bases" on page 310; see also page 250. The online update of the CM-93/3Pro cells begins with the
generation of the RTU request as per Section 7.7.4: "Real Time Update (RTU) for Jeppesen Marine ENC"
on page 308.
Installing Subsequently Licensed Cells:
1. Using the Update function as per Section 7.7.5: "Update Function: Update of the CM-93/3Pro Cells
on All Databases" on page 310, perform an update on all CM-93/3Pro databases of the system in
one working step.
2. Install any CM-93/3Pro licences that were procured later to the local database; see Section 7.7.1:
"Licences for CM-93/3Pro Cells" on page 299.
3. If only a few cells were licensed subsequently: Using the Update function as per Section 7.7.5:
"Update Function: Update of the CM-93/3Pro Cells on All Databases" on page 310, transfer the cells
to all CM-93/3Pro databases of the system in one working step.
If many cells were licensed subsequently: Use the Transfer function as per Section 7.7.2: "Transfer
Function: Transferring All CM-93/3Pro Cells from Medium to Local Database" on page 306 and
Section 7.7.3: "Transfer Function: Transferring All CM-93/3Pro Cells from Local to Other Databases"
on page 307 as for the initial installation, step 2 and 3.
7.7.1 Licences for CM-93/3Pro Cells

for the chart maintenance work of the system. For the following operating steps, the Type CM-93/
3Pro must be set in the Utilities > Chart Maintenance menu.
The CM-93/3Pro chart is divided into ten zones, and has divided up each zone into a different number
of areas. Each cell of the CM-93/3Pro chart is assigned to an area.
For this chart type, two different licence types are available:
- Subscription licences: These utilization rights are limited in time, and also include the supply of
updates during the period of use.
- Purchase licences: These are time-unlimited rights to use the cells of a certain edition.
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 299

b_cp_e35.fm / 10.05.12
Before deciding on a Purchase Licence, it is essential to consider the following:

- Within a particular system, only one of the licence types can be used for the CM-93/3Pro Chart.
- All purchase licences refer to the editions of the cells located on a certain CD. If a purchase licence
is obtained subsequently for another region, this licence also refers to the editions of the cells
located on the CD supplied for the first purchase licence. However, these cells may already be obso-
lete by this time.
- If a change is made later from purchase licences to subscription licences, none of the purchase
licences procured previously can be used after that (not even on other systems).
- Cells used on the basis of a purchase licence can only be updated by using a new purchase licence.
Licences Provided with Hardware (Test Licence)
For some of the CHARTPILOTs installed after introduction of the chart type CM-93/3Pro, a subscription
licence for all available cells (Zone 0) is included in the scope of supply. This test licence has a validity
of 6 months, beginning at its activation.
For these systems, a CM-93/3Pro CD 1) is already provided and the corresponding licence is already
installed. So it is possible to start the initial installation, see page 298. If you intend to continue using the
CM-93/3Pro chart after expiry of this licence, the desired licences can be procured as described in
Section 7.7.1.1: "First Procurement of Subscription Licences" on page 300.
7.7.1.1 First Procurement of Subscription Licences
Procurement of the licences is supported by the subroutine Chart Maintenance. If you do not wish to use
the assistance of SAM Electronics, please proceed as follows:
Procurement of the CM-93/3Pro CD

1. In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance, press the button CM-93/3Pro Licensing.
2. A Select Device dialog box opens to select CD/DVD or USB-Disk(s) 2).
3. Acknowledge the request to insert a CD with OK.
4. Answer the question posed in the subsequent dialog box (i.e. whether a CD is to be delivered) with
OK.
5. Then a 2nd Select Device dialog box appears with the request to insert a Floppy or USB-Disk(s) 3).
Now, at the latest, insert a DOS-formatted Floppy Disk into the Floppy or a USB-Disk into the USB-
Disk(s) and press the OK button.
6. As a result, the file USER.USR is generated; this contains the system ID (this is the system identi-
fication code described in Section 7.2.2: "Procuring the Subscription, Permits and Licences" on page
248). A box appears to report this process. After the corresponding request, close it with Cancel.
7. Send the Floppy or the file USER.USR to SAM Electronics 4). You will then receive the CM-93/3Pro CD.
☞ If you already know which zones and/or areas you need, you can order the licences at the same
time, by specifying the desired zones and/or areas and the licence type when you send the
USER.USR file. You will then receive the codes of the requested licences together with the CM-
93/3Pro CD and can dispense with the steps described below.
1)
If the CD provided is no longer up-to-date when the system is delivered, please contact SAM Electronics to request the current version of
the CD.
2)
see also Section 3.7: "Using Removable Devices" on page 73
3) see footnote 1)
4) address see page 2.
300 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e35.fm / 10.05.12
Selecting the Zones and Areas and Procuring the Subscription Licences
1. After receiving the CD, press the button CM-93/3Pro Licensing in the menu Utilities > Chart Main-
tenance.
2. Now, at the latest, insert the CM-93/3Pro CD into the drive and confirm the request to do so with
OK. Acknowledge the message that the boundaries of the zones and areas have been read in.
3. In the CM-93/3Pro Licensing menu, press the Subscription Licence button.
4. In the Subscription Licence menu which then opens, select the regions by choosing the corre-
sponding zone or area in the frames Zone Selection and Area Selection and entering it into the list
Selected Regions, and then repeating the procedure for all desired regions.
Details:
- When opening the menu, Zone 0 is selected. Zone 0 denotes the entire surface of the earth; it
therefore contains the zones 1 to 9, with the boundaries indicated.
- To be able to select an area within the frame Area Selection, the corresponding zone (1 to 9)
must have been selected in the frame Zone Selection.
- The zone or area selected last is displayed as a hatched region in the world chart.
- The buttons Next and Prev. can be used to select each zone or area in sequence.
- The Add/Remove button is then used to enter the selected zone or area into the list Selected
Regions. Repeated pressing deletes the entry.
- The entries in the list can also be deleted by marking them and then pressing the button
Remove from List.
- The boundaries of the zones and areas entered in the list are displayed in the world chart, with
their water areas appearing dark-blue.
- If licences are already installed on the CHARTPILOT, the corresponding zones and areas are
also shown. In the list, the corresponding expiry date of the subscription licence (yyyy-mm-dd)
is also displayed, whereas for purchase licences the indication (purchased) is shown.
5. In the Subscription Licence menu, press the Write Licence Request button.
6. Now, at the latest, insert a DOS-formatted Floppy Disk 1) into the Floppy or a USB-Disk(s) in the
USB-port 2) and confirm the request to do so with OK.
7. As a result, the file USER.USR (containing the system ID) is generated, together with the file
AREA.REQ, which contains the licence type and the data of the selected regions. These activities
are indicated in a dialog box. Acknowledge the completion message with OK, and close the box with
Cancel.
8. Send the Floppy or the two files by e-mail to SAM Electronics 3), and apply for the licences.
1)
or the Floppy used for requesting the CM-93/3Pro CD
3) address see page 2.
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 301

b_cp_e35.fm / 10.05.12
Selection of the zones
Number of the currently selected zone

This marks the next or previous zone by means of hatching.
Enters the currently hatched zone into the list Selected

Regions, or deletes this list entry
Selects the area (with operating analogous to zone selection)
The list contains:

- the selected zones and areas (without the date)
- the zones and areas for which licences have already been
installed (with the date on which the licence expires)
Deletes the entries marked in the list
Generates the files for procuring the licences
Fig. 7-17 The menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance > CM-93/3Pro Licensing > Subscription Licence
Procurement of Subscription licences

Procurement of Purchase licences
Installation of the existing licences on the inserted Floppy or USB-media – see page 303
Installation of licences through manual entry of the licence codes - see page 304
Check of the licences installed on the local database - see page 306
Deletion of CM-93/3Pro licences on the local database - see page 305
Fig. 7-18 The menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance > CM-93/3Pro Licensing
7.7.1.2 First Procurement of Purchase Licences
☞ Purchase licences cannot be installed if subscription licences are already installed; see page 301.
Purchase licences are procured in the same way as subscription licences, with the sole distinction that
the Purchase Licence menu is used instead of the Subscription Licence menu (press Purchase
Licence in step 3).
302 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e35.fm / 10.05.12
7.7.1.3 Subsequent Procurement of Further Licences
The subsequent procurement of licenses is carried out in the same way as the first procurement
described above.
Here the following must be observed: If you intend to continue using the licences applied thus far, the
licences to be procured subsequently must be of the same type. If purchase licences are procured subse-
quently, these must refer to the same CD to which the existing licences already refer. To exclude misun-
derstandings, it is advisable to mention in your request for subsequent Purchase Licenses that purchase
licences are already in use, with indication of the issue date of the CD to which they refer.
7.7.1.4 Installing the Licences
This section applies independently of the licence type and irrespective of whether the licences were
procured for the first time, whether subscription licences were extended, and whether the licences were
provided or procured additionally.
Depending on what was agreed, you will receive the licences
- as the file PASSWORD.USR on Floppy or by e-mail, or
- in the form of the licence code by e-mail or by telephone.
The entry procedures to be applied are therefore different. Refer to A) how to read in the licences by
Floppy or USB-media. Refer to B) for manual entry of the 16 character licence code.
A) Installing the Licences Contained on the Floppy

With this procedure, all existing licences are always installed.
This procedure must also be applied if the file PASSWORD.USR was received by e-mail. In this case,
you must create the CM-93/3Pro licence Floppy or copy the file onto a USB-Disk yourself beforehand, by
transferring the received file to a DOS-formatted Floppy or the USB-Disk.
☞ If the above-mentioned file was transferred as an archive file (e.g. the .ZIP format), it must first be
decompressed. Installation as described is only possible if the file with the a.m. name is located on
the licence Floppy (if necessary, check this with a PC).
2. Now, at the latest, insert the CM-93/3Pro CD you received last into the drive or the USB-Disk into
the USB-port. A Select Device dialog box opens to select the device, where the required files are
stored and confirm the request to do so with OK. Acknowledge the message that the boundaries of
the zones and areas have been read in.
☞ If a subsequently procured purchase licence is to be installed, the CD to which the earlier
purchase licences refer must be inserted.
3. In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance > CM-93/3Pro Licensing, press the button Install
Licences from....
4. Now, at the latest, insert the CM-93/3Pro licence Floppy Disk into the Floppy or the USB-Disk into
the USB-port. A Select Device dialog box apears, confirm the corresponding request with OK.
5. The activities are shown in the dialog box which then opens. Successful installation of the licences
is reported in another box. Confirm this. Acknowledge the box with the completion message, and use
Cancel to close the dialog box that opened first.
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 303

b_cp_e35.fm / 10.05.12
B) Installing the Licences through Manual Entry of the Licence Codes

2. Now, at the latest, insert the CM-93/3Pro CD you received last into the drive and confirm the request
to do so with OK. Acknowledge the message that the boundaries of the zones and areas have been
read in.
☞ If a subsequently procured purchase licence is to be installed, the CD to which the earlier
purchase licences refer must be inserted.
3. In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance > CM-93/3Pro Licensing, press the button Install
Licences Manually.
4. In the menu Install Licences Manually which then opens, select the zone or area for which a
licence code is available and insert it under Licence Code for:. This is done the aid of the button
provided in the frames Zone Selection and Area Selection; see page 301.
5. Under Enter Licence Code, type in the 16-digit licence code and press the Apply button. A dialog
box will then report that the licence has been installed. Acknowledge the completion message with
OK, and close the box with Cancel.
6. If more licences are to be installed, repeat step 4 and 5.
Specifies the region for which the licence is to be installed

For operating sequences, see page 301
Region for which the licence is to be installed
Here you enter the licence code received for the region.
Installs the entered licences
List contains the zones and areas for which licences have already been installed:
- Subscription licences with indication of the licence expiry date
- Purchase licences with the remark (Purchased)
Fig. 7-19 The menu ... > Chart Maintenance > CM-93/3Pro Licensing > Install Licences Manually
304 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e35.fm / 10.05.12
7.7.1.5 Useful Information about Licensing
Deleting of Licences
2. Now, at the latest, insert the CM-93/3Pro CD you received last into the drive and confirm the request
to do so with OK. Acknowledge the message that the boundaries of the zones and areas have been
read in.
3. In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance > CM-93/3Pro Licensing, press the button Delete
Licences.
4. In the Delete Licences menu, mark the licences to be deleted and then press the button Delete
Licence(s).
5. Confirm the safeguard question. A dialog box will then show that the marked licences have been
deleted on all CM-93/3Pro databases. Acknowledge the completion message with OK, and close the
box with Cancel.
If a transfer or update of CM-93/3Pro cells takes place subsequently, these actions need only be
performed on the local CM-93/3Pro database.
☞ If CM-93/3Pro cells are transferred (using the Transfer function or the Update function, independ-
ently of the source), all CM-93/3Pro licences on the local database are automatically copied to the
CM-93/3Pro databases to which the transfer of the charts is taking place. Here licences that are not
located on the local database are deleted on the other CM-93/3Pro databases.
End of the Subscription Licence

Jeppesen Marine has defined two expiry dates for the end of a subscription licence:
- Subscription expiry date: After this date, no more updates are performed,
and two month later
- Licence expiry date: After this date, the cells are no longer displayed.
One month before the subscription expiry date, a message about the subscription expiry date is shown
as soon as a CM-93/3Pro cell affected by this date is displayed.
From the subscription expiry date until the licence expiry date, a message about the licence expiry date
is shown as soon as a CM-93/3Pro cell affected by this date is displayed. In addition, the Chart Status
field of the navigation data line becomes yellow, and the display Licence appears there.
☞ This behaviour also applies for any 6-month test licence which may have been supplied with the
hardware, see page 300. With this licence, the first message about the subscription expiry date
already appears 3 months after the start of the licence period, but the CM-93/Pro chart can be used
for a total duration of 6 months.
From the licence expiry date, there is a corresponding message as soon as a region affected by this date
is shown in the chart display with the CM-93/3Pro chart selected. In addition, the Chart Status field of the
navigation data line becomes red, and the display Licence appears there.
Checking the CM93/3Pro Medium

If problems occur when accessing the CM-93/3Pro Medium, it is possible to check the consistency of the
data contained there. This is done by means of the function Validate Data on Medium provided in the
menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance > CM-93/3Pro Other Functions.
☞ This check can take 30 minutes. During this time, the CHARTPILOT cannot be used for other
purposes.
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 305

b_cp_e35.fm / 10.05.12
Showing Information about the Medium

The properties of the CD can be displayed by means of the function View Version of the Medium
provided in the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance > CM-93/3Pro Other Functions.
Checks the consistency of the data on the Medium
Shows the information about the Medium
Shows the system ID
Checking the installed cells; see page 312

Deletion of the complete ENC database; see page 252
Fig. 7-20 The menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance > CM-93/3Pro Other Functions
Checking the Installed Licences

If difficulties occur in the display of cells for which a licence exists, the licences installed in the local CM-
93/3Pro database can be checked: the check is initiated in the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance > CM-
93/3Pro Licensing by pressing the button Verify Installed Licences. A Select Device dialog box opens
to select the required media, then click the OK button. In the dialog box which then opens in the back-
ground, information about the check performed is given.
☞ On the individual equipment items, you can perform in the same way a check of the licences existing
in the other CM-93/3Pro databases of the system.
Showing the System ID

The system ID can be displayed by means of the function View System ID provided on the menu Utilities
> Chart Maintenance > CM-93/3Pro Other Functions. It uniquely identifies the system installed on board
your ship with regard to the installation of the CM-93/3Pro chart, and may be needed for servicing
purposes.
7.7.2 Transfer Function: Transferring All CM-93/3Pro Cells from Medium to Local Database
☞ It is not permissible to have cells from different versions of the CM-93/3Pro Medium installed on the
same system. For this reason, the following important condition applies for the transfer function: If
the database into which new cells are to be transferred already contains cells, both these and the
new cells must originate from the same Version of media.
☞ Jeppesen Marine normally delivers the CM-93/3Pro Medium as a DVD, but it is also possible to copy
the files onto USB-Disk(s).
Application:
- Initial installation of CM-93/3Pro cells
- All CM-93/3Pro cells existing on the media being used are transferred to the local database and
updated there.
306 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e35.fm / 10.05.12
Preparations:
- Install all CM-93/3Pro licences to the local database, as per Section 7.7.1: "Licences for CM-93/3Pro
Cells" on page 299.
1. In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance, set CM-93/3Pro as the Type.
2. Put the CM-93/3Pro CD into the CD drive or the USB-Disk(s) into the USB-port, and in the menu
Utilities > Chart Maintenance set CD/DVD or USB-Disk(s) as the Source. If the Source media has
not the standard file structure, a Select Data File or Directory as Data Source dialog box opens
to select the desired file(s) or directory and click the OK button . If messages relating to the table of
contents appear, answer with OK.
☞ Under Cell Files to be Transferred, leave all navigational purposes switched on.
5. In the Transfer menu, click the OK button and, in the selection menu which then opens, enter all
6. After pressing of the OK button of the selection menu, transfer and data conversion begin. The
dialog box Transferring CM-93/3Pro Cells appears. In its upper part, the process currently taking
place is listed, and in the Iower part all errors and warnings occurring in the transfer and conversion
process are listed.
7. When the transfer process has finished (you are informed of this in the dialog box Transferring CM-
93/3Pro Cells), close the dialog box by means of the Cancel button.
"Check of the CM-93/3Pro Cells Installed" on page 312.
7.7.3 Transfer Function: Transferring All CM-93/3Pro Cells from Local to Other Databases
☞ It is not permissible to have cells from different versions of the CM-93/3Pro CD installed on the same
system. For this reason, the following important condition applies for the transfer function: If the data-
base into which new cells are to be transferred already contains cells, both these and the new cells
must originate from the same CD.
Application:
- Initial installation of CM-93/3Pro cells
- All CM-93/3Pro cells located in the local database are copied to all other CM-93/3Pro databases of
the system.
- All CM-93/3Pro licences located on the local database are copied to all other CM-93/3Pro data-
bases, whereas licences that are not on the local database are deleted from the other CM-93/3Pro
databases.
Preparations:
- The transfer as per Section 7.7.2: "Transfer Function: Transferring All CM-93/3Pro Cells from
Medium to Local Database" on page 306 must have been carried out.
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 307

b_cp_e35.fm / 10.05.12
2. In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance, as the Source select the equipment item that is currently
3. Press the Transfer button. Under Destination, mark all CHARTPILOTs and MULTIPILOTs.
4. In the Transfer menu, press the OK button. The transfer begins. The dialog box Remote Transfer
of CM-93/3Pro Cells appears. In its upper part, the process currently taking place is listed, and in
the Iower part all errors and warnings occurring in the transfer process are listed.
5. When the transfer process has finished (you are informed of this in the dialog box Remote Transfer
of CM-93/3Pro Cells), close the dialog box by means of the Cancel button.
7.7.4 Real Time Update (RTU) for Jeppesen Marine ENC
☞ The procedure can be performed by any owner of a subscription licence. A special registration is not
required.
IMPORTANT:
This online update does not replace the regular updates. Even if online
carried out with every new CD/DVD received from Jeppesen Marine.
The Real Time Update is performed in three steps:

1. Generating the RTU request; see below.
2. Producing the Online Update medium 1); see below.
3. Performing the update as per Section 7.7.5: "Update Function: Update of the CM-93/3Pro Cells on
All Databases" on page 310.
A prerequisite for successful updating by RTU is that an update according to Section 7.7.5: "Update
Function: Update of the CM-93/3Pro Cells on All Databases" on page 310 must have been performed
completely and successfully with the last CD received from Jeppesen Marine.
Generating the RTU Request and Producing the Online Update medium
1. Put a DOS-formatted Floppy Disk into the Floppy or a USB-media into the USB-Disk(s), and in the
menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance > CM-93/3Pro Other Functions press the button Generate RTU
Request. A Select Device dialog box opens to select the needed media, 2) confirmed with OK. After
the request to insert the Floppy/USB-media has been answered with OK, an RTU request is gener-
ated and written to the Floppy/USB-media as a file with the name CM93-3_[date]_[UTC].org. This
process can be observed in a dialog box.
2. When this file is sent as the attachment of an e-mail to the Jeppesen Marine RTU server, the server
then returns one or more e-mails after a short while, each with one or more files attached.
☞ The e-mail address must be requested from Jeppesen Marine or, alternatively, it may be
obtained from the Jeppesen Marine homepage on the Internet.
1) If the data volume is low, the data can also be transferred to a Floppy/USB-Disk(s)/media. The term “Online Update CD” is then understood
to mean this Floppy or USB-media/device in the following.
308 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e35.fm / 10.05.12
☞ The entire process is automatic. Any message in the body of the own e-mail is ignored. The file
name is used to indicate how many files belong in total to this update:
u001x002.ans
Number of files belonging to this update
Sequential number of this file
3. Producing the Online Update Media: Label a CD/DVD, USB-media (best done by including the
chart type and date) and copy all the files received to this media.
Use this Online Update CD to perform an update as per Section 7.7.5: "Update Function: Update of the
CM-93/3Pro Cells on All Databases" on page 310.
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 309

b_cp_e35.fm / 10.05.12
7.7.5 Update Function: Update of the CM-93/3Pro Cells on All Databases
Application:
- Update of all CM-93/3Pro databases of the system after receiving a new CM-93/3Pro medium or for
a Real Time Update (after generating the Online Update medium or USB-Disk(s)).
- Installation of CM-93/3Pro cells for post-procured licences in all CM-93/3Pro databases of the
system.
- After an initial installation has been performed step by step (see page 311), check to ensure that all
licensed cells have been transferred.
- Expired licences are deleted in the local database.
- All CM-93/3Pro licences located then on the local database are copied to all other CM-93/3Pro data-
bases, whereas licences that are not located on the local database are deleted from the other CM-
93/3Pro databases.
- On all CM-93/3Pro database, all cells are updated for which licences are available there.
- Outdated cells that are no longer supported are deleted on all CM-93/3Pro databases.
Preparations:
- Licences that were procured after the last update must have been installed in the local database as
per Section 7.7.1: "Licences for CM-93/3Pro Cells" on page 299.
- For a Real Time Update: The Online Update medium was produced in accordance with Section
7.7.4: "Real Time Update (RTU) for Jeppesen Marine ENC" on page 308.
2. Put the most recent CM-93/3Pro CD or the Online Update CD/DVD into the CD/DVD drive or the
USB-Disk(s) into the USB-port.
If a new CM-93/3Pro CD/DVD has been received with which no update has been performed yet, this
CD/DVD must always be used.
This also applies when its issue date lies before the date of the last online update that was
performed. In this case, perform an online update again (with a renewed update request) after
carrying out the update with the CM-93/3Pro CD/DVD.
5. In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance > Update, press the OK button. If the operating media
has not the standard file structure, a Select Data File or Directory as Data Source dialog box
opens up to select the wanted file(s) or directory, confirm with OK. By means of the dialog box which
then opens up, you are (again) requested to insert the latest media. If you have not done this in step
2, do it now and press the OK button of the dialog box. As a result, the update process is started
and the dialog box Updating CM-93/3Pro Chart Database opens up.
CM-93/3Pro Chart Database by means of the Cancel button.
If the update was aborted for some reason, then the databases will contain cells from different CD/DVD
versions. Therefore the update must be initiated again as soon as possible and brought to completion.
310 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e35.fm / 10.05.12
Transferring All CM-93/3Pro Cells from Medium to Local Database" on page 306 to 7.7.5 for the transfer
and update:
The required time is not available for the initial installation

If, before the first use of the CM-93/3Pro chart, there is not enough time for a complete initial installation,
it is possible to use the Transfer function to transfer only the cells of the region which will be sailed next.
With the initial installation as per Section 7.7.2: "Transfer Function: Transferring All CM-93/3Pro Cells
from Medium to Local Database" on page 306, an appropriate selection can be performed; for the selec-
tion procedure, see Section 7.2.6: "Selecting the Charts or Cell Files" on page 252. Then perform the
transfer as per Section 7.7.3: "Transfer Function: Transferring All CM-93/3Pro Cells from Local to Other
Databases" on page 307 to all other databases.
As soon as there is sufficient time, the other licensed regions should be installed in the same manner,
but at the latest when the first regular update is due; see the note on page 298.
The cells that were not included by the consecutive selections are installed during the next update as per
Section 7.7.5: "Update Function: Update of the CM-93/3Pro Cells on All Databases" on page 310. If you
do not wish to wait for the next scheduled update, the CD/DVD received most recently can be used for
this purpose.
7.7.7 Deleting CM-93/3Pro Cells
Application:
By means of the following procedures, it is possible to delete any desired selection of CM-93/3Pro cells
on each CM-93/3Pro database that exists in the system.

page 252.
4. It is possible to select according to navigational purpose in the Delete menu. With the aid of the
button Include Touched Cells, it can be specified there whether only those cells are to be deleted
that are situated completely within the frame, or also those cells that are only touched by the frame.
selection according to cell names or select all files by clicking on Add All >>.
6. When the OK button is pressed in the selection menu, the cells listed in the right-hand list are
Cancel button.
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 311

b_cp_e35.fm / 10.05.12
Deleting All CM-93/3Pro Cells of a Database

4. In the selection menu which then opens, click on Add All >>. After the OK button is pressed, all CM-
93/3Pro cells are deleted in the database specified by step 2. Alternatively, deletion can be
prevented by pressing the Cancel button.
7.7.8 Check of the CM-93/3Pro Cells Installed
After an update and whenever there are doubts about the consistency or up-to-dateness of the database,
the databases should be checked by means of the following function.
1. In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance > CM-93/3Pro Other Functions, press the button Verify
Installed Cells.
2. A Select media for varification dialog box opens to select CD/DVD or USB-Disk(s)/media, confirm
with OK. If the media has not the standard file structure, a Select File or Directory dialog box opens
to select the required file(s) or directory, confirm with OK.
4. At the latest, insert the media and click the OK button in the box with the corresponding request.
the message No errors found is shown in the box. Otherwise, a report on the errors is provided in
the Errors/Warnings part of the dialog box.
☞ Because only cell files, but no external reference files are transferred during a Real Time
Update, the message WARNING: (cell name): External reference file (file name) is missing!
is shown for all cells updated by RTU for which additional files are intended. At the next regular
update, the external reference files are transferred and so these messages are no longer
shown. If this message still appears after a regular update, it is advisable to ask the provider
about the possible cause.
7.7.9 Other Useful Information about the Data Maintenance of Jeppesen Marine CM-93/3Pro Cells
CM-93/3Pro CD
The ship receives the CM-93/3Pro CD/DVD at intervals governed by the individual contract with
Jeppesen Marine.
This CM-93/3Pro CD/DVD contains all CM-93/3Pro cells that are available at the time of publishing. It
contains new editions or re-issues of CM-93/3Pro cells, but no update cells.
RTU Service
In the periods between publishing of the CM-93/3Pro CDs, Jeppesen Marine provides the RTU service
as a way of keeping the data as current as possible.
312 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e35.fm / 10.05.12
Operating Instructions 7.8 Data Maintenance of the CM-93/2 Chart
To keep the data quantities to be transferred as low as possible, only updates are provided by the RTU
service. New editions, or additional new cells, are not made available. In the same way, the updates do
not include the external reference files needed in some cases. These are separate files containing addi-
tional textual or graphic information.
For the reasons mentioned above, it is absolutely necessary to update
the database immediately when a new CM-93/3Pro CD/DVD is received,
because only this source contains all the necessary data!
The RTU service therefore represents a useful supplement, but is no substitute for the update with the
CM-93/3Pro CD/DVD!
In order to obtain a correct set of update cells for the data installed on the units, it is necessary to
generate a new request directly before each planned online update and to send this to the RTU server
of Jeppesen Marine.
The updates then received always refer to the CM-93/3Pro CD/DVD installed last. For this reason, all
cells updated by RTU are replaced by the version of the cell located on the CD/DVD whenever a new
CM-93/3Pro CD/DVD is installed, even if their date indicates that they are more up-to-date than the new
CM-93/3Pro CD/DVD.
For this reason, it is urgently recommended that an online update be
performed immediately after the latest CM-93/3Pro CD/DVD is installed.
7.8 Data Maintenance of the CM-93/2 Chart
The CM-93/2 chart is exclusively published by the company Jeppesen Marine.

Note: It is not possible to restore or load data for Transfer or Update
operations from a USB-device. This older chart system is not supported
by USB-operations.
Chart maintenance for the CM-93/2 chart comprises the following operations:
Initial Installation of the CM-93/2 Chart
1. Take out a subscription for the desired zones or areas from SAM Electronics and then install the
CM-93/2 Authorization Code you receive on the local database; see Section 7.8.1: "Taking Out a
Subscription for CM-93/2 Cells" on page 314.
2. Transfer all the CM-93/2 cell files for which the Authorization Code applies from the provider’s CDs/
DVDs to the local database, as per Section 7.8.2: "Transferring Cells of the CM-93/2 Chart from CD
to Local Database" on page 316.
3. Now transfer all CM-93/2 cell files from the local database to all other CM-93/2 databases of the
system, as per Section 7.8.3: "Transferring All CM-93/2 Cells from Local to Other Databases" on
page 317.
Updating of the CM-93/2 Chart
1. On the local database, delete all CM-93/2 cell files as per Section 7.8.5: "Deleting Cells of the CM-
93/2 Chart" on page 318 1).
2. Transfer all the CM-93/2 cell files for which the Authorization Code applies from the newest CDs to
the local database, as per Section 7.8.2: "Transferring Cells of the CM-93/2 Chart from CD to Local
Database" on page 316.
3. On all other databases, delete all CM-93/2 cell files as per Section 7.8.5: "Deleting Cells of the CM-
93/2 Chart" on page 318 1).
1) See page 318: S a v i n g T i m e w i t h t h e U p d a t e
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 313

b_cp_e35.fm / 10.05.12
7.8 Data Maintenance of the CM-93/2 Chart Operating Instructions
4. Now transfer all CM-93/2 cell files from the local database to all other CM-93/2 databases of the
system, as per Section 7.8.3: "Transferring All CM-93/2 Cells from Local to Other Databases" on
page 317.
Purchasing and Installing Subsequently Licensed Cells:
As for I n i t i a l I n s t a l l a t i o n o f t h e C M - 9 3 / 2 C h a r t
7.8.1 Taking Out a Subscription for CM-93/2 Cells

for the chart maintenance work of the system. For the following operating steps, the Type CM-93/2
must be set in the Utilities > Chart Maintenance menu.
Before initial installation can take place, a subscription must be arranged with SAM Electronics to cover
one or more particular geographical areas. With this chart type, the system identification code (see
Section 7.2.2: "Procuring the Subscription, Permits and Licences" on page 248) and geographical areas
are combined to form the CM-93/2 User Code. This code must be generated at one of the CHARTPI-
LOTs of the system on which the CM-93/2 chart is to be used; see below. You will be sent the CM-93/2
CDs when the subscription has been taken out.
When you send the CM-93/2 User Code to your contractual partner, you will be given the CM-93/2
Authorization Code, with which you can then activate the subscription in the system; see below.
The CM-93/2 chart is divided into nine zones, and has divided up each zone into a different number of
areas. Each cell of the CM-93/2 chart is assigned to an area. If you wish to obtain cells of the CM-93/2
chart, you can take out a subscription for all zones, for one or more zones, or for one or more areas.
Generating CM-93/2 User Code

1. Put one of the CM-93/2 CDs into the CD/DVD drive.
2. Call up the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance > CM-93/2 Subscription. In the world chart which
then appears, Zone 1 is displayed as a hatched region. If an existing subscription has already been
activated, the corresponding regions are marked dark blue.
3. In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance > CM-93/2 Subscription, indicate under Selection by
whether you have taken out a subscription for zones or for areas.
314 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e35.fm / 10.05.12
Time at which the subscription was last activated
Specifies whether only zones or only areas are selected.

Number of the currently selected zone
Number of the currently selected area within the currently selected zone
This marks the next or previous zone or area by means of hatching.
Enters the currently hatched zone or area into the list of regions that are to be covered
by the subscription, or deletes this list entry (the regions entered in the list are displayed
dark blue in the world chart).
CM-93/2 User Code

From the list of regions to be covered by the subscription, and from
other data, this generates the CM-93/2 User Code.
Input field for the CM-93/2 password

Activates the subscription.
Cancels the subscription.
Fig. 7-21 The menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance > CM-93/2 Subscription
4. With the buttons ☞ and –, mark under Selection all subscribed zones or areas by means of
hatching, and in each case press Add/Remove until all subscribed-for zones or areas are marked
dark blue on the world chart. When doing this, note the numbers of the marked zones or areas.
By pressing Add/Remove again, marking can be cancelled.
5. Press the Generate User Code button. The 18-place CM-93/2 User Code is then displayed to you
above this button.
☞ The menu can be exited by clicking on the Chart Maintenance button, which is situated above
the menu.
6. To obtain the CM-93/2 Authorization Code, send this CM-93/2 User Code to the department from
which the subscription was obtained,
IMPORTANT:
Note not only the User Code but also - and without fail - all numbers of
the zones or areas covered by your subscription. You will need these
numbers so that you can activate the subscription.
Entering the Authorization Code; Activating the Subscription

After the 16-digit CM-93/2 Authorization Code has been received, the subscription can be activated:
1. Generate the User Code again by marking all zones or areas covered by the subscription - see
above. If, in this process, the same zones/areas are marked as in the first-time generation of the
User Code, the same User Code must also be displayed. Compare the User Codes!
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 315

b_cp_e35.fm / 10.05.12
2. Under Authorization Code, input the Authorization Code received, and press Activate Subscrip-
tion. The transfer of the files of the zones or areas covered by the subscription is then enabled in
the CHARTPILOT. If, previously, the subscription had covered different zones or areas, these can
no longer be transferred from the CD.
☞ Zero or capital O? The User Code and Authorization Code are hexadecimal numbers, and so
they do not contain a capital O.
☞ The menu can by exited by clicking on the Chart Maintenance button situated above the menu.
You can now transfer the subscribed-for data from the CD to the hard disk drive (see Section 7.8.2:
"Transferring Cells of the CM-93/2 Chart from CD to Local Database" on page 316).
Deleting the Subscription Data

If work with the CM-93/2 chart is no longer to be performed with the system, or if an error in licence
management occurs and cannot be corrected by means of the operating procedure described, the
subscription can be cancelled.
NOTICE:
After the following procedure has been performed, cells of the CM-93/2
chart cannot be transferred from the CD into the CM-93/2 databases of
the system. Only if it is known which zones or areas were covered by the
subscription, and only if the Authorization Code is available, will it be
possible to bring the subscription back into existence so that cells of the
CM-93/2 chart can again be transferred from the CD.
In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance > CM-93/2 Subscription, press the Remove Subscription
button. A safeguard question then appears. If you then enter the word PRUNE in the input field of that
safeguard question and press the OK button, the subscription data will be deleted on the hard disk drive
of the CHARTPILOT that is being operated.
☞ In this process, the cells of the CM-93/2 chart remain preserved. If the entire local CM-93/2 database
is to be deleted, then in addition the cells of the CM-93/2 chart will have to be deleted in accordance
with Section 7.8.5: "Deleting Cells of the CM-93/2 Chart" on page 318.
7.8.2 Transferring Cells of the CM-93/2 Chart from CD to Local Database
Application:
- Initial installation of CM-93/2 cells
- Update after receiving the latest CM-93/2 CDs
- Installation of subsequently licensed CM-93/2 cells
- All CM-93/2 cells for which there is a subscription are transferred to the local database.
☞ From the program point of view, no distinction is made between first-time transfer and an update:
both on receiving the CM-93/2 CDs for the first time and on receiving the more up-to-date CDs, all
desired data must be transferred into the CM-93/2 databases of the system by means of the proce-
dure described here.
Preparations:
- For the initial installation and for the installation of subsequently licensed cells: Install the Authoriza-
tion Code on the local database as per Section 7.8.1: "Taking Out a Subscription for CM-93/2 Cells"
on page 314.
- For an update: On the local database, delete all CM-93/2 cell files as per Section 7.8.5: "Deleting
Cells of the CM-93/2 Chart" on page 318 1).
316 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e35.fm / 10.05.12
1. In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance, set CM-93/2 as the Type.
2. Put the CD/DVD of the desired zone into the CD/DVD drive and in the menu Utilities > Chart Main-
tenance, set CD/DVD as the Source. If a message appears concerning the table of contents,
answer it with OK.
5. After pressing of the OK button of the Transfer menu, transfer and conversion begin. The only cells
that are transferred are the selected cells not yet present in the CM-93/2 database selected under
Destination, and the selected cells that are present with a different status. During this process, the
progress of the transfer (and of the simultaneous decoding and conversion to the internal format) is
displayed. Transfer is finished when the display Percentage copied 100% appears, together with a
corresponding message.
7.8.3 Transferring All CM-93/2 Cells from Local to Other Databases
Application:
- Initial installation of CM-93/2 cells
- Update after receiving the latest CM-93/2 CDs
- Installation of subsequently licensed CM-93/2 cells
- All CM-93/2 cells located on the local database are copied to all other CM-93/2 databases of the
system.
Preparations:
- The transfer as per Section 7.8.2: "Transferring Cells of the CM-93/2 Chart from CD to Local Data-
base" on page 316 must have been carried out.
- Only for an update: On all other databases, delete all CM-93/2 cell files as per Section 7.8.5:
"Deleting Cells of the CM-93/2 Chart" on page 318 1).
2. In the menu Utilities > Chart Maintenance, as the Source select the CHARTPILOT that is currently
3. In the world chart, pull open the largest possible frame (up to the margin) and press the Transfer
button.
4. Under Destination, mark all CHARTPILOTs and MULTIPILOTs.
5. After pressing of the OK button of the Transfer menu, the transfer begins. The dialog box Remote
Transfer of CM-93/2 Cells appears. In its upper part, the process currently taking place is listed,
and in the lower part all errors and warnings occurring in the transfer process are listed.

ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 317

b_cp_e35.fm / 10.05.12
6. When the transfer process has finished, press the Cancel button after the corresponding request.
In some cases, it is useful to deviate from the procedures described in Section 7.8.2: "Transferring Cells
of the CM-93/2 Chart from CD to Local Database" on page 316 to 7.8.5 for the transfer and update:
Saving Time with the Update

If, during an update, the existing cells on the databases are not deleted before the transfer is performed,
the transfer process is much faster, because only the changed (and, if any, the new) cells are transferred.
Deleting the cells before the update is only necessary to ensure that no cells remain on the databases
that were replaced by one or more other cells and are therefore no longer supported. Because this
replacement of existing cells occurs very rarely, it is justifiable not to perform the deletion with every
single update.
No MULTIPILOT is Installed in the System

The initial installation can be performed with the procedure as per Section 7.8.2: "Transferring Cells of
the CM-93/2 Chart from CD to Local Database" on page 316 directly on all databases of the system. The
transfer as per Section 7.8.3: "Transferring All CM-93/2 Cells from Local to Other Databases" on page
317 is then no longer necessary.
With transfer as per Section 7.8.2: "Transferring Cells of the CM-93/2 Chart from CD to Local Database"
on page 316, mark all CHARTPILOTs under Destination in step 4.
Not All of the Cells of the Subscription are to be Installed

With the initial installation as per Section 7.8.2: "Transferring Cells of the CM-93/2 Chart from CD to Local
Database" on page 316, an appropriate selection must be performed; for the selection procedure, see
Section 7.2.6: "Selecting the Charts or Cell Files" on page 252. Then perform the transfer as per Section
7.8.3: "Transferring All CM-93/2 Cells from Local to Other Databases" on page 317 to all other databases.
Such an initial installation with subsequent transfer must also be carried out for new cells for which
subscriptions were taken out later.
7.8.5 Deleting Cells of the CM-93/2 Chart
Deleting All CM-93/2 Cells of a Database

3. Press the Delete button and press the OK button in the Delete menu. An input field appears. If the
word PRUNE is entered there and the OK button is pressed, all cells of the CM-93/2 chart on the
CM-93/2 database defined by step 2 are deleted.
318 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e35.fm / 10.05.12

page 252.
4. If no frame was drawn in step 3, the number of cells in the database are shown in the Delete menu,
grouped according to navigational purpose. If a frame was drawn, it is possible to select according
to navigational purpose in the Delete menu. With the aid of the button Include Touched Cells, it
can be specified there whether only those cells are to be deleted that are situated completely within
the frame, or also those cells that are only touched by the frame.
5. In the Delete menu, press the OK button. When the safeguard question which then appears is
answered by pressing of the associated OK button, all cells that are contained in the CM-93/2 data-
base defined by step 2 and have been selected for deletion are deleted. Alternatively, deletion can
be prevented by pressing the Cancel button.
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 319

b_cp_e35.fm / 10.05.12
320 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e35.fm / 10.05.12
CHARTPILOT 8 Auxiliary Functions, ECDIS
Operating Instructions 8.1 Management of the Track, Waypoint, Map and User Chart Objects Files
8 Auxiliary Functions, ECDIS
8.1 Management of the Track, Waypoint, Map and User Chart Objects Files
8.1.1 Maintaining Order in the Catalogs
8.1.1.1 Track, Map 1) and Waypoint Files
When you have generated the first track files or map files 2), you will probably assign them to the catalog
that was created by the manufacturer. If you then make more frequent use of the advantages offered to
you by the system in conjunction with the tracks, you might wish to distribute the existing files later on to
several catalogs. Furthermore, at some time, files will certainly have to be deleted or assigned to a
different catalog, or a file will have to be given a different number, or a catalog will have to be renamed,
and so on. You can also obtain an overview of the contents of a catalog by having a list printed out indi-
cating the files contained in the catalog.
The procedure for executing these measures is described in the following. However, it is assumed that
the procedure for handling the files needed for generating the tracks, maps and waypoint files (loading,
selecting, storing etc. - see Section 5.1) are known.
The description is given using the tracks as an example. waypoint files are always dealt with in the
same way, except that the specific menu is called up under
Maps > ... or Tracks > Waypoint File > ... and not under
Tracks > ... .
Generating a New Catalog

A catalog is generated when, during storage of a file, a catalog name not yet used is entered under
Selected Catalog in the ... > Store menu and the menu is exited by pressing of the OK button.
All catalogs are of equal priority; there are no lower-level catalogs.
Deletion of Files
A track is deleted on the hard disk drive when
- the catalog containing the tracks to be deleted is marked under Catalogs in the Tracks > Delete
menu,
- the tracks to be deleted are marked under Tracks, and
- the menu is exited by pressing of the Delete button.
NOTICE:
Files that are deleted are irretrievably lost. Therefore, make back-up
copies on Floppy (see Section 8.1.2) or USB-Disk(s) before making
extensive changes to the catalogs and files.
1) On CHARTPILOTs installed with R1x00 radars, maps are only available on customer´s request and must be activated on service-level.
2)
All information about handling of map files in this and the following chapters is only valid for systems with Radar 9xxx or for sytems with
Radar 1x00 if the map function of the chartpilot has been enabled on service level.
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 321

b_cp_e39.fm / 10.05.12
8 Auxiliary Functions, ECDIS CHARTPILOT
8.1 Management of the Track, Waypoint, Map and User Chart Objects Files Operating Instructions
Deleting a Catalog
A catalog can be deleted only if there are no files assigned to it. Therefore, if necessary, all files
contained in the catalog must first be deleted or assigned to a different catalog.
A catalog is deleted when
- the catalog does not contain any files,
- this catalog is marked under Catalogs in one of the ... > Delete menus, and
- the ... > Delete menu is exited by pressing of the Delete button.
Assigning a File to a Different Catalog

The file must be loaded. A track is assigned to a different catalog as follows:
- it is selected in the Tracks > Edit > Select menu,
- in the Tracks > Edit > Store menu, a copy of this track is stored in the other catalog, and then
- in the Tracks > Delete menu, the track is deleted from the original catalog.
The copy is given a different number or a different name if you change the entries under No. or Name
in the ... > Store menu.
Giving a New Number to a File

The file must be loaded. The number of a file is changed as follows:
- the file is selected in the Tracks > Edit > Select menu,
- the new number is entered under No. in the Tracks > Edit > Store menu, and
- the menu is exited by pressing of the OK button.
Giving a New Name to a Catalog

A catalog cannot be renamed. However, you can obtain the same effect as renaming if you
- create a new catalog with the desired name and
- assign to the new catalog all files contained in the catalog that is to be renamed.
Printing Out a List of the Files Contained in the Catalogs

It is also possible to print out a list of the files contained in one or more catalogs. Printing takes place if
- the printer and the printer controller are set (see page 73),
- the catalogs whose files are to be listed are marked under Catalogs in the Data Transfer From
Harddisk menu,
- the file types that are to be contained in the list are selected under File Type in the Utilities >
Backup/Restore menu,
- the Print Catalog button is pressed there, and the question which then appears is answered by
pressing of the Yes button.
In the list that is printed out, the track files are preceded by a T, the map files by an M, and the
waypoint files by a W.
322 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e39.fm / 10.05.12
8.1.1.2 Files of the User Chart Objects
Catalog Structure
The files of the User Chart Objects are stored in separate catalogs. The program automatically defines
both the files and the catalogs. During this process, symbols and lines are not treated in the same way
as areas.
Files of the Symbols and Lines

- The earth's surface is divided up into areas measuring 3° by 3°. All symbols and lines positioned on
such an area are put into one and the same file.
During the process of division into files, lines which extend beyond these boundaries are cut at
the boundary; when the files are called up for the purpose of display or processing, these lines
are joined together again.
- The earth's surface is divided up into areas measuring 15° by 15°. All User Chart Objects files
assigned to such an area are put into a catalog.
For the designation of the files and catalogs, the south-west corner of the area is used in all cases.
File of the Areas

All areas edited as User Chart Objects, together with the marked events (see Section 4.9) and the
entered position-fixes (see Section 4.10), are put into a single file with world-wide coverage. In the Data
Transfer menus, this file is called Areas, Events and Fixes.
Processing of the Catalog Structure

Changes in the files and catalogs, as described in Section 8.1.1.1, cannot be made in the User Chart
Objects files. Printing of the files contained is not possible either.
Just as a line/symbol file and the catalog are generated automatically as soon as a symbol or line
is edited for the defined area, the file and (if applicable) the catalog are also deleted again as soon
as there are no longer any symbols and lines (or parts of lines) in the area defined for them.
8.1.2 Data Backup
It is strongly recommended that all track, map, waypoint and User Chart Objects files present on the hard
disk drive should be copied onto Floppy or USB-Disk(s) (see also Section 3.7: "Using Removable
Devices" on page 73), and that these Floppy/USB-Disk(s) should be kept in a safe place. If the hard disk
gets damaged or if the files stored on it are accidentally erased, the copies stored can be used to recover
the stock of data.
Naturally, you can also transfer the files onto Floppy/USB-Disk(s) in order to copy them onto CHARTPI-
LOTs or MULTIPILOTs 1000 and 91xx of other systems.
The program also allows the copying of any desired selection of the existing files. However, if you are
copying the files for the purpose of data saving, it is advisable to save track, map and waypoint files and
all User Chart Objects files in one operation each, or to save one or more catalogs completely per oper-
ation, or to proceed according to file types.
Only for Floppy (ARCHIVE): During copying, any files that are present on the Floppy are erased.
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 323

b_cp_e39.fm / 10.05.12
Performing Data Backup: Copying Files on media

1. Put a Floppy Disk into the Floppy (with the sliding protective cap leading the way, and with the
central hole facing downwards; the write protection must be off, i.e. the hole at bottom left, as seen
from above, must be covered) or the USB-Disk(s) into the USB-port.
2. Switch on Track or User Objects and, by pressing the buttons Track (T), Waypoint (W) or Lines
and Symbols and Areas, Events, Fixes, specify which file types are to be copied. All of the
following actions refer only to the file types selected in this way.
Select operation to backup or re-
This specifies the type of files that are offered for selection as files to be transferred.
Backup to Device or Restore from Device. Select this button to start

operation. Calls up the Select Device dialog box.
Calls up a safeguard question; if this question is answered in the affirmative,

printing of the catalog begins - see page 322.
Fig. 8-1 The Utilities > Backup/Restore menu
3. All files that are to be copied must now be entered under Selected Files in the Data Selection menu
(Figure 8-2). For this purpose, the following possibilities exist and can be used one after another:
Selecting all files of one or more catalogs: Mark the catalog(s) under Catalogs, and press Add
Catalogs >>.
Selecting one or more files of a catalog: Under Catalogs, mark the catalog; under Files, mark
the file(s) that is (are) to be selected; and press Add Files >>.
Withdrawing the selection of one or more catalogs or files: Under Selected Files, mark the
catalogs or files that are not to be copied, and press the Remove button.
Completely resetting the selection made: Press the button Remove All.
4. In the Utilities > Backup/Restore menu, press the Backup to Device button. The Select Device
dialog box opens to select the device to backup (see also Section 3.7: "Using Removable Devices"
on page 73), confirm with OK. The Backup dialog box opens, where it is possible to select the
wanted destination directory to store, confirm with OK.
324 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e39.fm / 10.05.12
Note for Track/Map: The catalog will be created as a new folder on the
backup medium. The files themselves will be stored there.
Note for User Objects: The Areas, Events and fixes file will be stored as
a single file on the medium. The Lines and Symbols catalog directories
will be stored as folders on the medium.
Mark the catalog(s)

which contain files
that are to be copied.
- In the case of Catalogs and files
Own Object that are to be copied
catalogs, the
geographical
area too is
stated.
Inserts all files of

the marked cata-
logs into the
Selected Files list.
Files of the catalog

that was marked
(last) under Catalogs
- In the case of
Own Object cata-
logs, the
geographical
area too is Removes all catalogs
stated. and files from the
Inserts all files marked under Removes the catalogs and files marked under
Files into the Selected Files list. Selected Files from the Selected Files list.
Fig. 8-2 The Data Selection menu
Data Entered under Selected Files

From left to right, the following items are entered:
- File type; T = Track, M = Map, W = Waypoint file,
- Catalog >
- File number (track number, map number, number of the waypoint file). In the case of line/symbol files
of the User Chart Objects: the coordinates of the file content,
- File name (track name, map name, name of the waypoint file)
Instead of the file number and file name, (All) is entered if all files of the catalog of the type shown in the
line are selected.
USEFUL INFORMATION
For Floppy (Archive) only
If not all selected files fit on the inserted Floppy

If a file that is to be transferred no longer fits on the Floppy, an appropriate message appears. When this
occurs, take the inserted Floppy out and put another Floppy in. After pressing of the Continue button,
the transfer is continued. On the Floppy, make a note of the sequence in which they were inserted.
(During the process of copying back, Floppy used one after another in one and the same operation must
be inserted in the same sequence.)
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 325

b_cp_e39.fm / 10.05.12
Copying the Catalog Assignments, Index File

On the Floppy, a special file (Index File) is created in which, for every file copied, a note is made stating
which catalog this file comes from. As a result, when files are being copied back they can be assigned
to the original catalogs again.
8.1.3 Restoring Data
This section describes how track, map, waypoint and User Chart Object files that have been copied onto
Floppy or USB-Disk(s) as described in Section 8.1.2 1) can be copied back onto the hard disk drive of the
CHARTPILOT.
If a set of data damaged on the hard disk drive is to be restored by copying, it is usually a good idea to
copy all files that exist on the medium. However, the program also permits the copying of just a selection
(any desired selection) of the files that exist on the media.
Data Restoration: Copying Files from Floppy/USB-Disk(s) onto the Hard Disk Drive
1. Put the Floppy Disk into the Floppy (with the sliding protective cap leading the way and with the
central hole facing downwards) or the USB-Disk in the USB-port.
2. Switch on Track or User Objects and, by pressing the buttons Track (T), Waypoint (W) or Lines
and Symbols and Areas, Events, Fixes, specify which file types are to be copied. All of the
following actions refer only to the file types selected in this way.
3. Press the Restore from Device button, a Select Removable Medium dialog box opens. Select the
wanted medium to restore from and confirm with OK. A Select file(s) or directory dialog box opens,
file(s) marked with a (+) in front of the file name can be restored 2), confirm with OK.
So that a file cannot be accidentally overwritten on the hard disk drive, and thus lost, the program
checks during the preparation whether the catalog into which a file is to copied already contains a
file of the same type with the same number. If it does, the Overwrite dialog box appears, like in
Figure on page 76 (see also Section 3.7: "Using Removable Devices" on page 73).
4. When the message File(s) successfully restored appears in the Ready menu, all selected files
have been copied onto the hard disk.
1) and may have been modified on another computer with special programs, e.g. tracks with the aid of a weather routing program,
2) files marked with a (-) can not be restored
326 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e39.fm / 10.05.12
USEFUL INFORMATION
For Floppy (Archive) only
If files have been copied onto several Floppies in one and the same operation, these Floppy must now
be used in the same sequence.
Catalogs and files
that are to be copied
The catalogs from which

there are files present on
the Floppy are listed here:
Mark the catalog(s) which
contain files that are to be
copied.
This puts all files of the

marked catalogs into the
Files present on the

Floppy which are
contained in the
catalog marked (last)
under Catalogs
Puts all files marked under Files Removes from the Selected Files Removes all catalogs
into the Selected Files list. list those catalogs and files that are and files from the
marked under Selected Files. Selected Files list.
The Data Transfer to Data Selection menu
Data Entered under Selected Files

From left to right, the following are entered:
- File type (T = Track, M = Map, W = Waypoint file)
- Catalog >
- File number (track number, map number, number of the waypoint file). In the case of line/symbol files
of the User Chart Objects: the coordinates of the file content,
- File name (track name, map name, name of the waypoint file)
Instead of the file number and file name, (All) is entered if all files of the catalog of the type shown in the
line are selected.
8.1.4 Transfer of Track and Waypoint Files by E-Mail
Sending by email
1. Store the wanted data on the Floppy (MS-DOS)/USB-Disk (see also Section 8.1.2: "Data Backup"
on page 323).
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 327

b_cp_e39.fm / 10.05.12
2. Send the file(s) by email on a PC.

Receiving by email
1. Store the received data on a removable medium again (see also Section 8.1.3: "Restoring Data" on
page 326).
2. Restore from Removable Medium on the CHARTPILOT.
8.1.5 Reception of Track Files from a Connected Computer
The CHARTPILOT can also receive track files from a connected computer, e.g. when used in a surveying
system. The data transfer is initiated in the connected system. All tracks received in this way are stored
in the ImportExport catalog and can be called up from there when needed for use at the CHARTPILOT
and the radar indicators.
8.1.6 Converting Objects of the Map into User Chart Objects
Depending on the system configuration, this function is absent on some systems

Because the maps can only be used on the radar 9xxx series, but not on the radar 1000 series, in the
case of systems with mixed equipment there might be a desire to display the objects of the maps on the
radar 1000 series as well. This is made possible by conversion of the maps.In the process of converting
a map, the map objects are transformed into corresponding User Chart Objects 1). In this form they are
stored in the files of the User Chart Objects on the local hard disk drive and are distributed to all hard
disk drives in the system. For details, see Appendix D.
To avoid confusion during future editing of the User Chart Objects, the same map objects must not be
converted more than once. It is true that the program prevents the same map from being converted more
than once on a given unit, but it does not prevent a map from being converted more than once on
different units.
Important:
Conversion should always take place on one and the same unit.
If a map is created as a modified copy of another map, only one of the
two should be converted.
Conversion of Maps
1. In the Floppy/USB-Disk(s), insert the Floppy/USB-Disk(s) containing the maps that are to be
converted.
2. Select the source: From Hard Disk or From Device.
Selecting From Hard Disk. In the Maps on Hard Disk dialog box, it is possible to select the wanted
maps for conversion, press the Add Files button, the files appear in the Maps for Conversion frame,
confirm with the Read and Convert button.
If selecting From Device, press the Read and Convert button, the Select Device dialog box opens
to select the wanted device, confirm with OK. The Select file(s) or directory dialog box opens.
Selectable file(s) are marked with (+) in front of the file name. Then click the OK button to start the
conversion (see also Section 3.7: "Using Removable Devices" on page 73).
3. If it is not known whether maps have already been converted, and if so, which ones, a list of the
maps that have already been converted on this unit can be displayed by means of the button List
Converted Maps.
1) Copies of the objects are converted; the original map remains unchanged.
328 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e39.fm / 10.05.12
Maps which have already been converted on this unit, and catalogs in which all maps have
already been converted on this unit, are marked with a C on the left.
4. When the message Conversion finished appears in the dialog box, this means that all selected
maps have been converted and you can close the dialog box by pressing the OK button.
Delete Converted Objects

All User Chart Objects which have got into the map files by conversion of these maps can be deleted
from these files. Furthermore, the map is removed from the list of maps that have already been converted
on this local machine (see above, step 3).
1. In the menu Utilities > Backup/Restore > Maps to User Chart Objects, use the button List
Converted Maps to call up a selection menu in which all maps that have already been converted
on this unit are listed on the left.
2. In this menu, all maps including converted objects to delete must now be entered under Maps for
Deletion (for the operating possibilities, see page 324).
3. Press the button Delete Converted Objects. The dialog box Conversion/Deletion, which informs
you of the on-going activities, then opens up, and the deletion begins.
4. When the message Deletion finished appears in the dialog box, this means that the conversion of
the selected maps has been reversed, and you can close the dialog box by pressing the OK button.
Specifies that conversion of maps is going to take place.
- Maps which are present on the local hard disk drive are converted.
- Maps which are present on removable media are converted. From Device opens
the Select Device dialog box (see also Section 3.7: "Using Removable Devices"
on page 73).
Starts the conversion process
- Indicates the maps that have already been converted on this unit.
- Makes it possible to select the maps whose conversion is to be reversed.
Reverses the conversion of the maps selected for such reversal.
Calls up a safeguard question; after the appropriate answering of that ques-

tion, the subprogram Backup/Restore is switched off.
Fig. 8-3 The menu Utilities > Backup/Restore > Maps to User Chart Objects
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 329

b_cp_e39.fm / 10.05.12
8.2 Text Pages; Lists and Notes Operating Instructions
8.2 Text Pages; Lists and Notes
8.2.1 Generating and Using the Text Pages
With the CHARTPILOT, you can also write texts, e.g. address lists of agents, the abandon ship list, or
the crew muster roll. Such texts, called Text Pages, can be inspected at any time on the CHARTPILOT,
and can be printed out on the connected printer.
This function is implemented by means of a subroutine which you can start in the Tree under Utilities in
the Conning mode by pressing the Text Pages button. The Utilities > Text Page menu then appears (if
the menu function is switched on), and the entire chart area is covered by a menu with which Text Pages
can be generated, modified and read.
Number of the Text Page:

It identifies the Text Page within the catalog; it must be entered.
Name of the Text Page:

It appears in the menus for calling up the Text Page (entry is not obligatory).
Date of the last modi-

fication; it is entered
automatically.
The Utilities >

Text Page menu;
see Figure 8-5 on
page 331.
Text Page display:

If the Text Page is longer than 25 lines, only part of it is displayed; the rest can be made visible by scrolling.
Fig. 8-4 The CHARTPILOT Display for the Text Page
330 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e39.fm / 10.05.12
Operating Instructions 8.2 Text Pages; Lists and Notes
Text Pages are generated and handled as individual files in exactly the same way as tracks, for example.
Like tracks,
- Text Pages are provided with a number to identify them,
- Text Pages must be loaded before any modification,
- a new or modified Text Page must be stored, and during that process it must be assigned to a
catalog,
- Text Pages that are no longer needed can be deleted.
The operating procedure for this is completely equivalent to the corresponding operating procedure for
tracks as described in Section 5.1 and Section 8.1.1. In the following, therefore, apart from the general
principles only those special features that relate to the handling of Text Pages are explained.
Loading a Text Page; Examining a Text Page

If a Text Page is to be examined, modified or printed out, it must first be loaded: press Load; under Cata-
logs, click the correct catalog; under Text Pages, click the correct Text Page; and by pressing the Apply
button, trigger the loading process. The first 25 lines of the loaded Text Page then appear in the Text
Page display. The remaining lines can be made visible by scrolling. When you have loaded the correct
Text Page, you can close the ... > Load menu by pressing the Cancel button.
In contrast to the tracks, only one Text Page at a time can be loaded; it is then also displayed in the
Text Page display.
Load the existing Text Page in order to display it or modify it;

this is done in the same way as loading a track - see page 165.
Generating a completely new page.
Storing the Text Page displayed; this is done in the same

way as storing a track - see page 189.
Deleting a loaded Text Page; this is done in the same

way as deleting a track - see page 321.
Causes printing of the Text Page displayed.
Makes it possible to edit a Text Page.
Copies all Text Pages from the hard disk drive to the Floppy
Disk contained in the Floppy - see page 333.
Deletes all Text Pages from the hard disk drive and copies all Text Pages
from the Floppy Disk in the Floppy to the hard disk drive - see page 333.
Leaves the menu and stops the current processing.

Alternative: Pressing the Tree button likewise causes leaving of the menu; the
processing of the Text Page is not stopped, and can be resumed at any time.
Fig. 8-5 The Utilities > Text Page menu
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 331

b_cp_e39.fm / 10.05.12
8.2 Text Pages; Lists and Notes Operating Instructions
Generating or Modifying a Text Page

1. If a completely new Text Page is to be generated, press the New button,
or
2. if an existing Text Page is to be modified or if a new Text Page is to be generated from an existing
one by copying and modifying, load the relevant Text Page.
3. By pressing the Edit button, switch on the Editing mode. As a result, the Text Page display becomes
an input field.
4. In the Text Page frame, click the No. field and enter a new four-figure number (for specifying of the
number, see below).
5. In the Text Page frame, click the Name field and enter the name which is to be used for the Text
Page.
6. In the editing field, you can now input or modify the desired text.
7. To complete the editing process, the Text Page must be stored, possibly not until after it has been
printed out.
Storing the Text Page

With Store, call up the Store Text Page menu, and under Catalogs select the catalog in which the Text
Page is to be stored. When you leave the menu by pressing the OK button, storage takes place (this is
all equivalent to the storing of a track - see page 189).
Printing Out a Text Page

In all cases, it is the loaded Text Page that is printed out, so load the Text Page if necessary. Adjust the
printer and the printer controller (see page 73). In the Text Page menu, press the Print button. The Text
Page is printed out.
USEFUL INFORMATION
Specifying the Text Page Number

When selecting the number, note the following:
- The Text Page is listed in ascending numerical order in the catalog in which it is stored.
- It is uniquely identified by the number within the catalog. If a number already present in the catalog
is used, the old Text Page with this number is erased when the new Text Page is stored. (However,
during the storing process, a safeguard question draws you attention in good time to the double allo-
cation of the number.) You can obtain an overview of the existing numbers after pressing the Load
button (then leave the Load menu by pressing Cancel).
8.2.2 Management of the Text Pages
Also Text Pages should be saved so that they will not be irretrievably lost if a defect occurs on the hard
disk drive. Saving of the Text Pages is done by copying their files onto a data-saving medium. In all
cases, all of the Text Pages present on the hard disk drive are saved together.
In the CHARTPILOT, the files of the Text Pages are handled fully independently of the track
waypoint and User Chart Object files, and therefore so too is their saving process.
332 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e39.fm / 10.05.12
Operating Instructions 8.3 Voyage Recording
You perform the saving process by putting the data-saving medium into the drive, pressing the Save Text
Pages button in the Utilities > Text Page menu. A Select Device dialog box appears, select the wanted
device(s) and confirm with OK. A Select file(s) or directory dialog box opens to navigate through the
file structure, select the directory to store and confirm with OK (see also Section 3.7: "Using Remov-
able Devices" on page 73).
If the saved files of the Text Pages are to be copied back onto the hard disk drive, put the data-saving
medium into the drive, press the Restore Text Pages button, a Select Device dialog box appears, select
the wanted device(s) and confirm with OK. A Select file(s) or directory dialog box opens to navigate
through the file structure, select the file "textpage.tar" for restore and confirm with OK (see also Section
3.7: "Using Removable Devices" on page 73). All file(s) with a (+) in front of the file name can be
selected. Confirm with OK.
NOTICE:
All Text Page files which already exist in the system are overwritten by
this, if Floppy (Archive) was selected.
Creating a New Catalog

The Main catalog is created in the factory. If you make use of the possibilities offered by the Text Pages
for more effective organisation, it might be appropriate to create additional catalogs (e.g. for individual
geographical areas). A new catalog is created if, during storage (after pressing of Store), the name is
changed in the Selected Catalog field.
8.3 Voyage Recording
The CHARTPILOT offers several possibilities of recording important nautical data during the voyage.
Basically, a distinction must be drawn between the following:
- Voyage recording, in which the data are stored on the hard disk drive and which you cannot switch
off, and
- the generation of protocol prints (i.e. record print-outs) which you can initiate and parameterise
during the voyage (see Section 8.4).
8.3.1 Performing of Voyage Recording, Management of Recordings
As long as the CHARTPILOT is switched on, the present data relating to

- Navigation, Short Term
- Navigation, Long Term
- ARPA Targets
- AIS Targets
- Engine and Thruster
- Azimuth Thruster
- Environment
- Weather
- ECDIS
- TRACKPILOT
- SPEEDPILOT
are stored cyclically in individual records on the hard disk drive.
The records are put into two different files:
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 333

b_cp_e39.fm / 10.05.12
8.3 Voyage Recording Operating Instructions
- In the short-term recording file, all records with the exception of Navigation, Long Term are stored
at short intervals (record ECDIS only if the data has been changed). Each individual record remains
in the file for 12 1) hours at least, and is then deleted (overwritten). Because the file remains intact
even when the CHARTPILOT is switched off, it therefore always contains the data of the past 12 1)
hours during which the CHARTPILOT was switched on.
- In the long-term recording file, only the Navigation, Long Term records are stored; this is done
once every 30 minutes. Each individual record remains in this file for 3 month unless the file is
deleted before that by means of the Reset function.
Details for contents of the recordings and recording intervals see Appendix C.
At any time, both recordings can be stored permanently, their content can be replayed on the screen of
the CHARTPILOT (see Section 8.3.2) and can be printed out on the printer. For these purposes, the file
concerned must first be loaded. The files can also be backed up on Floppy/USB-Disk(s) and (e.g. for
replay or printing out) they can be copied back to the hard disk again from the Floppy/USB-Disk(s).
So that the long-term recording file will only contain the data of the present voyage, it must be reset at
the beginning of the voyage, i.e. its content must be deleted.
The recording of records is done by the main program, and therefore takes place as long as the CHART-
PILOT is switched on. However, if you want to operate the voyage recording function you must switch on
a special subroutine and must switch it off again at the end of the operating procedure.
Switching the Voyage Recording Operating Program On and Off

In the Tree, call up the voyage recording operating program by pressing the Voyage Recording button.
The Voyage Recording menu then appears (see Figure 8-6).
This subroutine is switched off by pressing the Exit button in the Voyage Recording > File menu and by
appropriately answering the safeguard question which then appears.
Reset Long-Term Recording...

Search Date and Time ...
General Information...
Replay Monitor... See Section 8.3.2.
ECDIS Information ...
LOP Information
Load Newest
Load
Store...
Print... Short-Term Recording... For functions of the individual buttons, see text.
Delete Long-Term Recording...
Backup...
Restore...
Exit...
Fig. 8-6 The Voyage Recording menu and its submenus
1) Can also be set to 24 hours at service level.
334 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e39.fm / 10.05.12
Resetting the Long-Term Recording at the Beginning of the Voyage

Click the Reset Long-Term Recording button in the Voyage Recording > Options menu. If you give the
appropriate answer to the safeguard question which then appears, the content of the long-term recording
file will be deleted.
If the content of the long-term recording file is to be preserved, you must store the file or copy it onto
a Floppy before.
The content of the short-term recording file cannot be deleted.
Loading the present File

By pressing the Short-Term Recording button or the Long-Term Recording button in the Voyage
Recording > File > Load Newest menu, select the file type. The current content of the selected file is
then loaded into the main memory of the operating program. If there was already a file loaded, it is
deleted in the main memory during this process.
Loading a File which is Already Stored

In the Voyage Recording > File > Load menu, select the file type. A list of the stored files of the selected
type then appears in a menu. Click the name of the desired file. It then appears in the Selection field.
By pressing of the OK button, this file is loaded into the main memory of the operating program. If there
was already a file loaded, it is deleted in the main memory during this process.
Storing a File
To be able to store a file on the hard disk drive, the file must be in the loaded state.
Under Selection in the Voyage Recording > File > Store menu, enter the name under which the loaded
file is to appear for further handling in the menus. If the name of a file already stored is to be used and
the stored file is to be deleted, the name can be taken over into the Selection field by clicking in the list
situated above that. By pressing of the OK button, the file situated in the main memory is stored on the
hard disk drive under the file name entered.
If the hard disk drive already contains a file with this name, a message about this appears. After
appropriate confirmation of this message, the file present on the hard disk drive is deleted when the
new file is stored.
Depending on the file type, up to five files can be stored. If an attempt is made to store a sixth file,
an appropriate message appears. As an alternative to storing, copying onto a Floppy is possible.
Data Backup, Copying Files onto a Floppy

Data backup of the voyage recording files is done in the same way as data backup of the track files (see
page 323). The menu corresponding to the Data Transfer From Harddisk menu (see Figure 8-2 on page
325) is opened in the Voyage Recording > File menu by pressing the Backup button. In the Files on
Harddisk frame, all existing short-term recording files and all long-term recording files are listed in one
list each.
Insert a Floppy Disk in the Floppy 1) or USB-Disk(s) into the USB-port. All files that are to be copied must
now be entered under Selected Files. Start the copying process by pressing the Transfer button.
For entering the files into the Selected Files list and the further procedure, see P e r f o r m i n g D a t a
B a c k u p : C o p y i n g F i l e s o n m e d i a , step 3 on page 324. (see also Section 3.7: "Using Removable
Devices" on page 73)
1)
With the sliding protective cover pointing away from you, the central hole facing downwards, and the write protect function switched off, i.e.
the hole at bottom left (as seen from above) must be covered.
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 335

b_cp_e39.fm / 10.05.12
8.3 Voyage Recording Operating Instructions
Copying a File from a Floppy onto the Hard Disk Drive

Insert a Floppy Disk in the Floppy or USB-Disk(s) into the USB-port and press the Restore button in the
Voyage Recording > File menu. The Select Device dialog box appears to select the wanted media. In
the dialog box which then appears, the type and name of the file contained on the Floppy is displayed.
After appropriate answering of the safeguard question contained in the dialog box, the file is copied onto
the hard disk.
If the hard disk contains a file of the same type having the same name, an appropriate message
appears (see also Section 3.7: "Using Removable Devices" on page 73) and confirm with OK. Now
opens a Select file(s) or directory. Files marked with (+) in front of the file name are ready to
restore. Select these files and confirm with OK.
If the hard disk already contains five files of the type, a request appears, requesting deletion of one
of the files on the hard disk.
Deleting a File on the Hard Disk

In the Voyage Recording > File > Delete menu, select the file type. A list of the stored files of the selected
type then appears in a menu. Mark the file that is to be deleted and press the OK button. After the safe-
guard question which then appears has been answered appropriately, the marked file is deleted on the
hard disk.
Printing Out the Content of the Short-Term Recording

The content of the short-term recording cannot be printed out directly. However, the content of the
short-term recording can be printed out indirectly by switching on the cyclical recording of nautical own-
ship data and the recording of the selected position and speed sensors according to Section 8.4 while
the track is being replayed according to Section 8.3.2.
Printing Out the Content of the Long-Term Recording

To be able to print out the content of the long-term recording, the long-term recording must be in the
loaded state.
1. Set the printer and the printer controller (see page 73).
2. Click the Print button in the Voyage Recording > File menu. The Print Voyage box then appears.
The Print Complete function is switched on. Under From, the recording instant of the first record is
displayed, and under To the recording instant of the last record is displayed.
3. If you want to print the entire content of the loaded file, you must now press the OK button.
or
4. If you only want to print out part of the file, switch on the Print Part function, under From and To
input the beginning and end of the recording time-period that is to be printed out, and then press the
OK button.
The execution of the printing process is controlled by the operating system. During printing, you can
therefore use the voyage recording program for other purposes or else you can switch it off.
8.3.2 Replay of a Voyage Recording
During replay of a voyage recording, the program parts which provide the displays and the operating
functions use the recorded data (including the recording instant concerned) instead of the data that
currently exist.
336 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e39.fm / 10.05.12
The display used during the recording, the display mode, the track that may have been used, the
switched-on menus etc. are not recorded. Therefore, these settings can be operated freely when the
voyage recording is being replayed.
While the voyage recording is being replayed, the own ship symbol and all own ship data appear on the
screen as usual. You can then operate the CHARTPILOT largely as if the ship were currently moving
according to the data displayed. If, for example, you then load a track and define it as the System Track,
the data in (for example) the Track/Schedule display refer to this track. If, for example, you change the
alarm limits, the alarm messages appear in accordance with the set values. If, during replay, you have
activated the generation of protocol prints, the recorded own ship data are printed out on the connected
printer on the basis of the System Track that is set during the replay.
During replay of a voyage recording, only the following differences exist compared to on-line operation:
- The definition of the System Track affects the CHARTPILOT only; it has no effect on the other
components of the system.
- If a voyage recording is replayed during the voyage, the alarm messages generated by the system
in the meantime do not appear on the CHARTPILOT.
- The time axis is compressed, and the compression can be varied.
During replay, a large, flashing appears in the chart area.
Basically, these remarks apply both to the 12 Hours Recording and to the long-term recording. in the case
of the long-term recording, however, it must be borne in mind that, because of the low frequency of
recording (one recording every 30 minutes), this recording is equivalent to a series of snapshots.
Replay of a Voyage Recording

1. If a System Track has been defined, it must first be deselected (see page 230).
2. Switch on the operating program for voyage recording, and load the desired file (see page 335).
3. With the symbol keys of the Voyage Recording menu, you can now control the timing of the replay
in a manner similar to that of a video recorder (see the following illustration).
During replay of the short-term recording, a recording instant is reproduced every second or so;
during replay of the long-term recording, every 10 seconds or so.
In the menu Voyage Recording > Options, you can open the Time Search box by means of the
Search Date and Time function. There, the recording (start) instant that is to be displayed can be
specified (as often as is desired, including during replay).
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 337

b_cp_e39.fm / 10.05.12
8.4 Protocol Prints Operating Instructions
In the menu Voyage Recording > Display,

- by switching on the function General Information, you can obtain an indication of the number
of records contained in the file and of the period of recording time covered by the file,
- by switching on the function Replay Monitor, you can, during replay, obtain an indication of the
numbers and types of the records recorded at the time displayed,
- by switching on the function ECDIS Information, you can obtain an indication of data of the
electronic chart that was being presented at the time displayed,
- by switching on the function LOP Information, you can obtain information about the actions that
have been taken regarding the Lines of Position functionality.
Type and name of the file being replayed
Recording instant Paused: Replay is currently not taking place.

Running: Replay is taking place.
Jump to the beginning of the file Jump to the end of the file
Jump to an earlier recording instant Stops replay. Starts replay. Jump to a later recording instant
(Pressing for a longer time (Pressing for a longer time increases the
increases the rewind speed.) fast forward speed.)
Fig. 8-7 The Voyage Recording menu (replay functions)
Making a Protocol Print of a Short-Term Recording

During replay of the Short-Therm Recording, you can perform all recording processes described in
Section 8.4. The recording period which can be set under Period in the Peripheral Devices > Printer >
Config. Cyclic Protocol menu refers to the recording instants. If you want to obtain a print-out of all
records for a particular section of the voyage, you must therefore set the Time there to 10 seconds.
8.4 Protocol Prints
On the (optional) printer, important nautical data and operational data of the system can be recorded
continually during operation of the system.
Setting of the Recording

The Protocol Print (i.e. the print-out of a record) is switched on/off in the menu Peripheral Devices >
Printer by means of the button Protocol Print.
Under Protocol Type, the data groups to be recorded are specified:
- System Settings: Changing of important settings of the system
- System Messages: All alarms and messages that have occurred in the system
- Cyclic Protocol: Selected nautical data (these are recorded cyclically).
338 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e39.fm / 10.05.12
Operating Instructions 8.4 Protocol Prints
------------------------------------------------------------------
Table header
Time: ZT 14:33 22.11.95 UTC 13:33 22.11.95
Track No: 1300 Track Name: STO-S.ARM-KAS-HKI
These parameters were Waypoint No: 50 Waypoint Remark: SÖDERARM
WPB: 70.0 deg WPD: 2.5 NM Track: 69.1 deg
specified in the ... > Config. ------------------------------------------------------------------
Cyclic Protocol menu. Time GPS 1 Position HDG SMG CMG Depth
[ZT] WGS84 [deg] [kt] [deg] [m]
14:33 59:46.260 N 019:23.472 E 68.7 16.7 68.7 122.1
In the ... > Config. Cyclic 14:34 59:46.359 N 019:23.990 E 69.3 16.7 69.3 87.5
14:35 59:46.459 N 019:24.497 E 69.0 16.7 69.0 101.4
Protocol menu, 60 s was 14:36 59:46.559 N 019:25.023 E 69.7 16.7 69.7 116.8
specified under Period, Time. 14:37 59:46.658 N 019:25.541 E 69.5 16.7 69.5 82.4
14:38 59:46.756 N 019:26.057 E 69.0 16.7 69.0 113.8
14:39 59:46.855 N 019:26.574 E 69.3 16.7 69.3 106.0
Track No. 1300 is defined ------------------------------------------------------------------
Time: ZT 14:40 22.11.95 UTC 13:40 22.11.95
as the System Track; Track No: 1300 Track Name: STO-S.ARM-KAS-HKI
waypoint No. 51 was Waypoint No: 51 Waypoint Remark: ARMBÅGEN
passed at 14:40 hours. WPB: 119.6 deg WPD: 18.7 NM Track: 120.1 deg
------------------------------------------------------------------
Time GPS 1 Position HDG SMG CMG Depth
[ZT] WGS84 [deg] [kt] [deg] [m]
14:40 59:46.947 N 019:27.096 E 74.7 16.7 74.6 84.8
Because System Settings 14:41 59:46.997 N 019:27.638 E 84.8 16.6 84.6 121.2
is switched on, the fact is 14:42 59:46.996 N 019:28.189 E 94.8 16.6 94.8 94.6
recorded here that, at 14:43 14:43 59:46.945 N 019:28.729 E 105.7 16.6 105.6 93.7
hours, DGPS was selected < (14:43) Speed Sensor Changed to DGPS >
as the speed sensor. 14:44 59:46.845 N 019:29.241 E 116.5 16.6 116.4 121.5
14:45 59:46.708 N 019:29.720 E 120.8 16.6 120.8 84.9
14:46 59:46.570 N 019:30.194 E 120.3 16.7 120.3 105.7
14:47 59:46.430 N 019:30.674 E 120.0 16.7 120.0 114.7
Because System Messages 14:48 59:46.291 N 019:31.152 E 120.2 16.7 120.0 82.3
is switched on, the fact is < (14:48) TP POSITION STATUS CHANGED Accept or
recorded here that, at 14:48 change position sensor.>
hours, the alarm POSITION 14:49 59:46.151 N 019:31.630 E 120.3 16.7 120.0 116.5
STATUS CHANGED 14:50 59:46.015 N 019:32.110 E 120.3 16.7 120.0 103.3
occurred.
Fig. 8-8 Example of a Protocol Print
Setting the Cyclical Recording of the Nautical Data

For the cyclical recording, the following items can be specified:
- Whether the cyclical recording is to take place at fixed intervals of time or at fixed intervals of
distance travelled, and how large the interval should be,
- which items of own ship's data are to be recorded.
Setting the Recording Cycle and the Period

1. Under Period in the Peripheral Devices > Printer > Config. Cyclic Protocol menu, specify by
clicking Time or Distance whether the recording is to be done at intervals of time or at intervals of
distance sailed by the ship.
2. Behind the clicked button, input the interval (time or distance).
3. f necessary, you can retrieve the old setting at any time by pressing Reset. If the new setting is to
be put into effect, you must press OK.
Selecting the Own Ship Data that are to be Recorded

1. Select the Peripheral Devices > Printer > Protocol Print > Config. Cyclic Protocol menu. In the
Configured Items list, all data selected for recording are listed. In the Available Items list, the other
data which can also be recorded are listed.
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 339

b_cp_e39.fm / 10.05.12
8.4 Protocol Prints Operating Instructions
2. The sequence in the record line will correspond to the sequence selected in the Configured Items
list. Therefore, starting at the top of this list, check firstly the position in the list up to which the selec-
tion desired for the protocol print has already been entered correctly, including the sequence. Delete
the data entered below this position in the list by marking them and pressing Remove.
3. In the correct order in the Available Items list, select the data that are to be recorded additionally,
and by pressing Add transfer these data to the end of the Configured Items list. When the number
of data included under Selected Items is equal to the maximum number of data that can be printed
out in a record line, further inclusion is prevented.
4. If necessary, you can retrieve the old record selection at any time by pressing Reset. If the record
is to be made using the new selection of data, you must press OK.
Prints out the existing content of the screen.
Switches the Protocol Print on and off. Switching off initiates the printing of data
that have already been stored but not yet printed out.
Specifies whether the Protocol Print is to contain the change in the selected position and
speed sensors and in the operational data of the TRACKPILOT and SPEEDPILOT.
Specifies whether the Protocol Print is to contain alarms that occur.
Specifies whether the Protocol Print is to contain the nautical data specified under
Config. Cyclic Protocol.
Settings for the cyclical recording of the nautical data
All print-outs generated by this CHARTPILOT are printed out on this printer.
Causes premature print-out of the accumulated data that are to be recorded.
Aborts the Protocol Print. The data not yet printed out are deleted.
With this, printing can be stopped at any time. (The commands already
sent to the printer are still executed.) See page 73.
Fig. 8-9 The Peripheral Devices > Printer menu
Printing the Recording Data Out Prematurely

Basically, printing out is performed page by page. In the case of Protocol Prints, this has the effect that
printing takes place at fairly long intervals of time. If the recording data that have accumulated in the
meantime are to be printed out prematurely, this can be achieved in the menu Peripheral Devices >
Printer by the pressing of Print Now / Form Feed.
Aborting the Protocol Print

In the menu Peripheral Devices > Printer, the Print Erase/Stop button can be used to abort the protocol
print. The data not yet printed out are deleted.
340 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e39.fm / 10.05.12
Operating Instructions 8.4 Protocol Prints
USEFUL INFORMATION
Recording of Important Settings of the System

If, in the menu Peripheral Devices > Printer, under Protocol Type, the function System Settings is
switched on, the following changes are recorded if Protocol Print is in the switched-on state:
- The newly selected position sensor,
- the newly selected speed sensor,
- the fact that the TRACKPILOT has been activated or switched off,
- the mode to which the TRACKPILOT has been switched,
- the fact that the SPEEDPILOT has been activated or switched off,
- the mode to which the SPEEDPILOT has been switched.
If the cyclical recording of nautical data is in the switched-on state as well, these changes in the system
settings are inserted in that recording in chronological order.
Nautical Data which can be Recorded Cyclically

The following data can be recorded (if the sensors for the data are connected):
- Air Humidity Relative humidity of the outside air
- Air Pressure Air pressure (the outside air)
- Air Temperature Temperature of the outside air
- CMG (Course Made Good) Observed course over ground
- Depth Water depth measured with the navigation echosounder
- Dewpoint Dewpoint of the outside air
- DMG (Distance Made Good) Distance from the last waypoint
- ETA (Estim. Time of Arrival) Probable time of arrival at the present waypoint
- HDG (Heading) Present compass course
- Position Present position of own ship (the coordinate system that is set for
the display of the chart area is used)
- Sea Water Temperature Sea water temperature
- SMG (Speed Made Good) Observed speed over ground
- STW (Speed Through Water) Speed through the water
- Time (ZT) Zone time
- TTG (Time To Go) Probable sailing time up to the present waypoint
- Wind Direction (True) Absolute direction of the wind
- Wind Speed (True) Absolute speed of the wind
- WPB (Waypoint Bearing) Bearing of the present waypoint
- WPD (Waypoint Distance) Distance of the present waypoint
- XTD (Cross Track Distance) Present cross track distance from the pre-planned track
Recording of the Alarms and Messages

If, in the menu Peripheral Devices > Printer, under Protocol Type, the function System Messages is
switched on, particular alarms which the CHARTPILOT has reported in the alarm list are recorded if
Protocol Print is in the switched-on state.
Additional Recording in the Table Header

The table which is thus created contains the following items additionally in the table header on each page:
- Date and time (zone time and UTC)
and, if a System Track has been defined, the following also:
- Number and name of the track
- Number of the present waypoint and remark about the waypoint
- Bearing (WPB) and distance (WPD) of the present waypoint
- Direction (track) of the present track segment.
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 341

b_cp_e39.fm / 10.05.12
8.5 Determination and Back-Up of the System Parameterisation Operating Instructions
In addition, this table header is inserted in the same form on the page when the ship has passed a
waypoint of the System Track and also when another System Track is defined.
Specifies that the cyclical recording is to take place at intervals of

time or at intervals of distance travelled.
Time period of the cyclical record print-out
Distance travelled between the cyclical record print-outs
Specifies that the cyclical recording is to take place at intervals of
distance travelled.
Data that are not recorded but can be recorded
Removes the data marked under Available Items and
inserts them under Configured Items.
Removes the data marked under Configured Items and inserts them under
Available Items.
Data intended for recording
Retrieves the configuration that existed when this menu was called up.
Fig. 8-10 The Peripheral Devices > Printer > Protocol Print > Config. Cyclic Protocol menu
8.5 Determination and Back-Up of the System Parameterisation
In the setting-to-work process, a large number of settings are made on the CHARTPILOT at service level,
with which the CHARTPILOT is adapted to suit the connected items of equipment. The same applies to
the other components of the system (TRACKPILOT, Engine Interface, SPEEDPILOT). The configuration
files which contain these data of the components mentioned can be backed up on a Floppy or USB-
Disk(s) when the setting-to-work process has been completed; the Floppy/USB-Disk(s) is/are then kept
on board. These data can then be accessed at any time during service work.
If you discover that this Floppy/USB-Disk(s) is no longer available, you can perform the data back-up
yourself.
If a fault occurs during operation, it can be very helpful if, prior to service work, you can inform our Service
Department of particular setting values if requested to do so. This may even eliminate the need for
service work. For this reason, you can inspect the larger part of these data and can print them out on the
system's printer.
These functions are implemented by a subroutine which you can start by pressing the System Mainte-
nance button under Utilities in the Tree in the Chart and Conning modes.
342 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e39.fm / 10.05.12
Operating Instructions 8.5 Determination and Back-Up of the System Parameterisation
Determining the System Parameterisation

In the list contained in the Utilities > System Maintenance > Configuration > View menu, mark the compo-
nents whose system parameter settings are to be displayed, and press the OK button. These data are
then displayed in a scrollable list in the Status Log Page - see Figure 8-13.
If you are looking for a particular term in the list, you can press the Find button: a box then appears.
Enter the term in that box, and press the Find Next button situated there.
Printing Out Displayed System Parameter Settings

If you press the Print button in the Status Log Page and answer appropriately the question which then
appears, the content of the list contained in the Status Log Page is printed out on the system's printer.
Data Back-Up; Copying Configuration Files onto Floppy or USB media

1. Put a Floppy Disk into the Floppy (with the sliding protective cover pointing away from you, the
central hole facing downwards, and the write protect function switched off, i.e. the bottom left-hand
hole as seen from above must be covered) or the USB-Disk(s) into the USB-port(s) (see also Section
3.7: "Using Removable Devices" on page 73).
2. Press the Backup button in the Utilities > System Maintenance > Configuration menu, a Select
Configuration Set dialog box appears. Switch the Use Backup Device button on and confirm with
OK. A Select Device dialog box appears, select the wanted device(s) and confirm with OK. A Select
file(s) or directory dialog box opens to navigate through the file structure of the media, select the
directory to store and confirm with OK (see also Section 3.7: "Using Removable Devices" on
page 73). When all files have been copied, an appropriate message appears.
Floppy: After taking the Floppy Disk out of the drive, switch on the write
protect function: to do this, open the bottom left-hand hole (as seen from
above) by sliding the small plate. As a result, the Floppy contents cannot
be either overwritten or erased. Label the Floppy to indicate its content
and the date, and store it in a safe place.
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 343

b_cp_e39.fm / 10.05.12
8.5 Determination and Back-Up of the System Parameterisation Operating Instructions
Calls up the Configuration menu for the following functions:

- Determining the system parameterisation and printing it out.
- Data back-up of the configuration files.
- Making system settings - see Section 8.7.
Determining the system version - see Section 8.6
Switches off the subroutine System Maintenance

and calls up the display of the electronic chart again.
Fig. 8-11 The Utilities > System Maintenance menu
Make system settings (see Section 8.7)

Determining the system parameterisation
Data back-up of the configuration files
Operating at service level (after input of the password).
Password input (for service activities only)
Operating at service level (after input of the password)
Fig. 8-12 The Utilities > System Maintenance > Configuration menu
344 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e39.fm / 10.05.12
Operating Instructions 8.5 Determination and Back-Up of the System Parameterisation
Selects the component whose system param-

Status Log list eterisations are to be displayed
Clears the display of the Searches in the Status Prints out the content of the Shows the parameters of
data shown in the Log list to find a text Status Log list on the the components marked i
Status Log list. which is to be input. system's printer. the list above
Fig. 8-13 The Status Log Page and the ... > System Maintenance > Configuration > View menu
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 345

b_cp_e39.fm / 10.05.12
8.6 Determining the System Version Operating Instructions
8.6 Determining the System Version
If a fault occurs during operation, it can be very helpful if you can inform our Service Department of the
program version and the versions of the program modules if requested to do so. For this reason, you can
inspect these data and can print them out on the system's printer.
Determining the System Version and Printing it Out

Press the Version button in the Utilities > System Maintenance menu. These data are then listed in the
Status Log Page (see Figure 8-13).
If you press the Print button in the Status Log Page and give the appropriate answer to the question
which then appears, these data will be printed out on the system's printer.
8.7 Making System Settings
You can make the following system settings:

- The transmission ratio between trackball movement and cursor movement
- The duration for which a key of the A/N keyboard must be pressed so that the button reacts as
having been clicked
- The repetition function of the keys of the A/N keyboard
- The tone with which alarms are emitted on the CHARTPILOT.
Transmission Ratio between Trackball Movement and Cursor Movement

Press the Pointer button in the Utilities > System Maintenance > Configuration > Options menu. In the
dialog box which then opens, you can set the speed of the cursor by means of the sliding controllers
Acceleration and Threshold. With the Default button, you retrieve the basic setting.
Changing the Duration for which a Key of the A/N Keyboard must be Pressed to Click it
Press the Keyboard button in the Utilities > System Maintenance > Configuration > Options menu. In
the dialog box which then opens, you can use the sliding controller Click Volume to set the duration for
which a key of the A/N keyboard must be pressed so that the button reacts as having been clicked. With
the Default button, you retrieve the basic setting.
Switching the Repetition Function of the Keys of the (A/N Keyboard On and Off
Press the Keyboard button in the Utilities > System Maintenance > Configuration > Options menu. In
the dialog box which then opens, you can use the Auto Repeat function to specify whether or not
prolonged pressing of a key causes repetition of the input.
Setting the Alarm Tone

In the menu Utilities > System Maintenance > Configuration > Options, press the Audio button. In the
dialog box which then opens, you can set the frequency with the sliding controller Tone, the duration with
Duration, and (in some configurations) the volume of the acoustic signal which can be emitted by the
CHARTPILOT with Volume. With the Default button, you retrieve the basic setting.
346 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e39.fm / 10.05.12
CHARTPILOT 9 Alarm Management
9 Alarm Management
9.1 General
If the CHARTPILOT wants to draw the operator's attention to a situation which might require intervention
by him, it generates an alarm message. These messages may have the level of an alarm (requiring
immediate attention), a warning or an indication. Any of these messages consists of a text message,
which in many cases is supplemented by an acoustic signal. The text message is shown in the alarm list
together with an alarm or warning symbol. Indications don´t carry a symbol.
If there is a bridge alarm system connected, its alarm messages will be transferred to the CHARTPILOT.
9.1 General
In case the CHARTPILOT receives particular 1) messages it generates the BRIDGE ALARM SYSTEM
alarm, together with the designation of the received message.
Priority levels of the alarm system:
An alarm is an audible and visible signal that indicates a condition requiring immediate
Alarm attention and action by the operator to maintain the safe navigation of the ship.
A warning is announced visually with optional audible signal for precautionary reasons to
Warning make the operator aware of changed conditions which are not immediately hazardous, but
may become so if no action is taken.
An indication is a message in the alarm list which informs about a condition out of the ordi-
Indication nary consideration of the situation or of given information.
As soon as a new entry occurs in the alarm list, the horn symbol in the top right corner of the screen
becomes coloured and the list automatically is displayed. The newest entry will be at the top of the list.
Many alarms and warnings are supplemented by an acoustic signal. For warnings, the acoustic signal
can be switched off.
Behaviour when an Alarm occurs

1. Switch off the acoustic signal (if there is one) as follows:
Press the Acknowledge button in the alarm list. As a result, the acoustic signal emitted by the
CHARTPILOT is switched off 2).
2. You must immediately try to get a clear idea of the causes of the alarm or warning, the system
status, and possible system reactions, and, if appropriate, you should immediately take all of the
necessary measures to counteract any possible dangers.
3. Removing the cause of the alarm or warning: If an alarm has occurred due to a cause that can
be removed, that cause must be removed as quickly as possible; see also Section 9.2.
Many warnings and indications disappear when the cause disappears. Acknowledgement is then
unnecessary, but alarms must be acknowledged in any case.
4. The alarm and many warnings must be acknowledged if the situation allows or requires such
acknowledgement:
In the alarm list, press the Acknowledge button after having selected the entry. As a result, the entry
which is marked is usually acknowledged. If the reason for the alarm or warning stays present, the
entry remains in the list, otherwise it is removed. As a result of this, alarms or warnings which have
1)
For each alarm that can be emitted by the bridge alarm system, a setting is made at service level to specify whether the alarm message
BRIDGE ALARM SYSTEM or BRIDGE ALARM SYST. is to be triggered on the NACOS components mentioned, and whether this is to
occur there together with an acoustic signal.
2) In the case of appropriate installation, the acoustical signal can be switched off by operation of an external operating element too.
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 347

b_cp_e37.fm / 10.05.12
9 Alarm Management CHARTPILOT
also been distributed to other items of equipment within the system are acknowledged there too. If
some other entry is marked, the entry which is to be acknowledged must be marked beforehand by
clicking 1).
If alarms are also distributed to other items of equipment within the system, or if the system deviates
from the behaviour described above, e.g.
- if the alarm cannot be acknowledged at all or throughout the entire system, or
- if acknowledgement causes something to be initiated or enabled, or
- if an acknowledged alarm is repeated for as long as the cause of the alarm continues to exist,
this situation is mentioned in Section 9.2. In all cases, this second pressing of the Acknowledge
button switches off on all items of equipment the acoustic signal caused by the alarm.
After selection of an entry in the alarm list with the DO-key, the selected alarm or warning can also
be acknowledged with the MORE-key of the trackball.
It is advisable to acknowledge the alarms and warnings of the main navigation sensors (gyro, speed
9.1 General
and position sensor) at one of the radar indicators; when the TRACKPILOT is in use, only the radar
indicator selected as TRACKPILOT Master, is able to execute the final acknowledgement and
required sensor selection functions.
Generally Switching the Acoustic Signal On and Off for Particular Alarms
In the Alarm Settings menu, you can define by means of the Buzzer On function whether the acoustic
signal should or should not be sounded on the CHARTPILOT when one of the warnings marked with the
symbol in Section 9.2 occurs. Switching off the alarm sound is not advisable when a CHARTPILOT
is used for track or chart monitoring purposes, if the operator is not continuously observing the display of
the indicator.
Switching Off the Display of the Alarm List

When the last remaining entry in the alarm list is acknowledged or removed by the system, the display
of the alarm list is switched off automatically. By pressing the Cancel button, you can switch off the
display of the alarm list without having acknowledged the alarm message. The horn symbol in the navi-
gation data line remains displayed coloured in order to point out that not all alarms have been cancelled.
Even if the display of the alarm list has been switched off with the CANCEL button, the alarm list
opens automatically as soon as another alarm, warning or indication occurs.
Switching On the Display of the Alarm List

The display of the alarm list can be switched on at any time simply by clicking the horn symbol.
1) If the display of the list has been switched off even although an alarm that can be acknowledged has not been acknowledged, that alarm
is automatically marked as soon as the list is opened again. Only in this case is it necessary, after opening of the alarm list, to mark the
most recent alarm by clicking before acknowledgement. The most recent alarm is inserted at the top of the alarm list.
348 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e37.fm / 10.05.12
USEFUL INFORMATION
Contents of the Alarm List

All of the alarms, warnings and indications are listed which have occurred so far but have not been
acknowledged or removed again by the system.
Alarm, warning or indication message with appropriate symbol, time and date of its appearance
and stating the system component (source) that has triggered the alarm.
9.1 General
Opens the Chart Alarm list.
Acknowledges the marked message. Switches off the display of the alarm list.
Fig. 9-1 The alarm list
For each entry in the list, the following items of information are displayed:
Symbol
Alarm (blinking: Not yet acknowledged)
Warning (blinking: Not yet acknowledged)
Indication no symbol
Date, Time
The date and time (UTC) at which the alarm was generated or received.
Source
The system component which has generated the entry in the alarm list. Meanings:
- AIS AIS electronics unit
- BAS External alarm system, e.g. Bridge Alarm System BAS40 - see Section 11.4
- CP CHARTPILOT computer
- ECDIS CHARTPILOT computer (ECDIS program)
- RADAR Electronics of one of the connected radar indicators
- UPS Uninterruptible power supply
- NAVTEX NAVTEX receiver
Description
Here, the message text appears, often followed by other items of information or by a suggestion of how
you can react appropriately to the alarm or warning.
In Section 9.2, all alarms, warnings and indications which can occur on the CHARTPILOT are listed and
explained in alphabetical order.
Alarm Outputs
In particular situations, the CHARTPILOT outputs an electrical signal via the connected radar system, e.g.
for the purpose of driving an external alarm display unit. The faults and alarms which cause the output of
such an alarm signal are stated in Appendix B.
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 349

b_cp_e37.fm / 10.05.12
9.2 List of Alarms, Warnings and Indications Operating Instructions
Prevention of Triggering of the Watch Alarm

If the installation has been performed appropriately including a connection of the radar system to the
watch alarm system, any operating action performed on a CHARTPILOT or on the radar system will have
9.2 List of Alarms, Warnings and Indications
the same effect as the operating of a watch alarm key (i.e. resetting the external watch timer).
The following entries can appear in the alarm list of the CHARTPILOT (both in Chart mode and in
Conning mode).
The acoustic signal which then occurs and the alarm priority is indicated by the following symbols:
On the CHARTPILOT, an acoustic signal occurs regardless of whether the

Buzzer On/Off function is set in the Alarm Settings menu (see page 348).
On the CHARTPILOT, an acoustic signal occurs if the Buzzer On/Off function
is set in the Alarm Settings menu (see page 348).
Whether an acoustic signal occurs on the CHARTPILOT depends on the factors
described.
An alarm has occurred and will be indicated. Alarms must be acknowledged in
any case.
A warning has occurred and will be indicated. Warnings can be acknowledged,
but they will stay in the alarm list until their reason is no longer present, regard-
less if they have been acknowledged or not.
For AIS Alarms see chapter 9.2.1
For NAVTEX Alarms see chapter 9.2.2
APPROACHING WAYPOINT [Waypoint] WOP [xx : yy min]

The next wheel over point (before the stated waypoint) will probably be reached in xx minutes and
yy seconds (see page 105). The time between reaching the wheel-over point and the occurrence of
this warning is displayed in the Alarm Settings menu and can be changed there.
Special feature: The warning is generated by all those units of the system for which such generation
is switched on (CHARTPILOT: in the menu Alarm Settings). On each of these units, an acknowl-
edgement is necessary.
BRIDGE ALARM SYSTEM (alarm designation)

The bridge alarm system (if installed and connected) has signalled to the NACOS the alarm
message stated under alarm designation (see page 383).
See footnote on page 347.
Special feature: The alarm is distributed over the entire system.
By acknowledgement of the alarm on the CHARTPILOT, the connected bridge alarm system too is
acknowledged.
350 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e37.fm / 10.05.12
Operating Instructions 9.2 List of Alarms, Warnings and Indications
COURSE LIMIT EXCEEDED Off course xx.x ° Limit yy °

The actual course differs by xx.x° from the course defined by the System Track, and thus exceeds
the set course limit of yy°.

Special feature: The alarm is generated by all those units of the system for which such generation
For as long as the course limit continues to be exceeded, an acknowledged alarm is not repeated.
When the TRACKPILOT is being operated in Track mode, then instead the alarm TP COURSE
LIMIT generated by the TRACKPILOT appears on the radar indicator selected as TRACKPILOT
Master, in this situation.
Remedy:
- Increase the course limit or
- wait until the TRACKPILOT has reduced the course error below the limit
- switch over to another steering mode or manual steering.
DANGEROUS TARGET radar indicator n (n=radar indicator number)

This radar indicator has detected a dangerous target.
The alarm should be acknowledged at the relevant indicator.
Special feature: This alarm can only appear if activated on service level.
DEAD MAN PRE ALARM Press any key.

The watch alarm system will trigger the watch alarm after a short time if, within that time, the DEAD
MAN PRE ALARM is not acknowledged and no watch alarm key is pressed.
Special feature: Acknowledgement with any key on the CHARTPILOT or with any key on any radar
indicator.
DEPTH LIMIT EXCEEDED Depth xxx.xm Limit yym, check chart and sounder
The water depth below the transducer measured by the navigational echosounder is xxx.x m and is
thus less than the set depth alarm value of yy m.
Special features: The alarm is generated by all those units of the system for which such generation
is not switched off (at the CHARTPILOT: in the Alarm Settings menu). On each of these units, an
acknowledgement is necessary.
EXITING ANCHOR WATCH AREA

The ship is touching the boundary of the anchor watch area.
Special feature: This alarm cannot be acknowledged. It disappears when the ship is completly
inside the ANCHOR WATCH area again or when the watch alarm function is switched off after the
warning OUT OF ANCHOR WATCH AREA has been acknowledged.
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 351

b_cp_e37.fm / 10.05.12
GYRO FAULT Check gyro compass, switch to back-up gyro.

The compass has been switched off, the connection is lost, is faulty, or is reporting invalid data.
Special feature: The alarm is distributed over the entire system. Acknowledgement is possible on
any indicator.
If the navigation sensors cannot be operated from the CHARTPILOT, acknowledgement on the
CHARTPILOT does not cause acknowledgement on the other items of equipment.
If the GYRO FAULT alarm occurs, the North-Up display mode is automatically switched on and all
display objects and operating possibilities for which the heading information is required are no longer
shown or are inactive. If the cause is not corrected within 30 seconds, the tracked targets are
deleted.
Remedy: Check the compass system.
GYRO VALID Check/accept gyro value.

The compass is again transmitting valid data.
Special feature: The alarm is distributed over the entire system. Acknowledgement is possible on
any indicator.
CHARTPILOT does not cause final acknowledgement on the other items of equipment.
When the TRACKPILOT is in the activated state, this alarm can be acknowledged finally only on the
radar indicator selected as TRACKPILOT Master.
If a compass is installed which sends heading changes only, the heading transfer must be synchro-
nised again. For this purpose, and if the navigation sensors can be operated on the CHARTPILOT,
the menu Sensor Settings > Set Gyro appears automatically after switch-off of the acoustic signal;
for further information, see page 145.
LATITUDE EXCEEDED Check position data.

The 85th parallel of latitude has been exceeded. The entire NACOS is no longer processing position
data. Functions that need position data, e.g. Track mode and some display functions may no longer
be used here.
Special feature: The alarm is distributed over the entire system. This indication cannot be acknowl-
edged. It will disappear after the cause has been eliminated.
LOG STATUS CHANGED Accept or change speed sensor.

The log selected as the speed sensor has changed its status, e.g. from Bottom Track to Water
Track. It is sending valid data.
WARNING:
If the TRACKPILOT is steering the ship in Course mode or Track mode,
a course change occurs if the drift component has changed as a result
of the switch-over.
Special features: The warning is distributed over the entire system. Acknowledgement is possible
on any indicator.
It is possible to define that this warning can generally be suppressed by the operator at the radar
indicators.
Remedy: Check what change of status is involved; if necessary, select some other speed sensor.
352 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e37.fm / 10.05.12
LOST TARGET radar indicator n (n=radar indicator number)

This radar indicator has lost a tracked target.

The alarm should be acknowledged at the relevant indicator.
Special feature: This warning can only appear if activated on service level.
LOW POSITION QUALITY Check position, change position sensor.

The selected position sensor is transmitting position data which vary more than is usual for this type
of sensor.
on any indicator.
This warning can only appear if activated on service level.
Remedy: Check the position sensor; select some other position sensor if possible.
NAVIGATION SENSOR DATA NOT AVAILABLE Check radar indicator.

None of the radar indicators which can operate as a Sensor Master provides navigation data. There-
fore, all own ship data are missing on the CHARTPILOT, and so it can no longer be used for nautical
surveillance.
Special feature: The alarm cannot be acknowledged. It disappears when its cause has been elimi-
nated.
Remedy: Check the radar system. Switch off or restart the defective radar indicator.
Option: Switch to Local Sensors, if this option is installed in the CHARTPILOT.
OBJECT OF INTEREST [supplement] 1)

The chart monitoring performed by the CHARTPILOT has revealed that a vector chart object being
monitored, i.e. a potentially dangerous chart object, is situated a short distance ahead of own ship,
or is already being touched by own ship's contour, or is situated ahead of own ship on the currently
relevant part of the System Track.
A) With NEARBY as the supplement (see also page 110):
The guard sector or own ship (see page 105) is touching one or more objects belonging to the
specified object class, i.e. if the course and speed remain unchanged, these objects might be
run over within the time or distance entered under Objects of Interest in the menu Alarm
Settings > Chart Alarms.
B) With ON TRACK as the supplement (see also page 110):

The System Track (with the width defined by the pre-planned track limit) is touching one or more
of the objects specified in A).
Special features: The CHARTPILOT distributes the warning to all RADARPILOTs and CHARTRA-
DARs; indication on the RADARPILOT and CHARTRADAR: OBJECT OF INTEREST NEARBY or
ON TRACK.
The warning can be acknowledged on the CHARTPILOT or on the radar indicator.
An acknowledged warning is not repeated while the conditions that led to the warning continue to
exist. Only when these conditions no longer exist does renewed occurrence of the above-mentioned
conditions in the same object class cause a message again.
1) Additional information about the different currently valid chart alarms is available in the Chart Alarm list. (See 4.4)
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 353

b_cp_e37.fm / 10.05.12
OUT OF ANCHOR WATCH AREA

The ship has left the anchor watch area.
Special feature: Through the acknowledgement, the anchor watch function (i.e. the anchor watch
alarm) is switched off.
POSITION INVALID Select ESTIMATED or another position sensor.

The selected position sensor is sending invalid position data. Another position sensor will have to be
selected by the operator. During the transition period, the system determines the position by dead
reckoning (i.e. is temporarily switched to Estimated Position).
Special features: The alarm is distributed over the entire system. Acknowledgement is possible on
any indicator.
If the navigation sensors cannot be operated from the CHARTPILOT, final acknowledgement on the
If the navigation sensors can be operated from the CHARTPILOT, the menu Sensor Settings > Posi-
tion Sensor, containing the data of a substitute sensor, opens automatically after acknowledgement.
This sensor can be confirmed by means of OK, or some other sensor has to be selected. The sensor
which is now selected by the operator continues to be treated as a substitute sensor, i.e. as soon
as the position sensor which led to the POSITION INVALID alarm is sending valid data again, the
POSITION VALID warning appears.
POSITION STATUS CHANGED Accept or change position sensor.

The selected position sensor has performed an internal change of status (e.g. from DGPS to GPS)
or the receiving method has changed (e.g. from DECCA to LORAN).
any indicator.
The acoustic signal does not appear if a change-over from GPS to DGPS takes place and no posi-
tion offset has been set.
It is possible to define that this alarm can generally be suppressed by the operator at the radar indi-
cators.
POSITION TIMEOUT Select another position sensor.

Data are no longer being received from the selected position sensor. Another position sensor will
have to be selected by the operator. During the transition period, the system determines the position
by dead reckoning (i.e. is temporarily switched to Estimated Position).
any indicator.
tion Sensor, containing the data of a substitute sensor, opens automatically after acknowledgement.
This sensor can be confirmed by means of OK, or some other sensor has to be selected. The sensor
which is now selected by the operator continues to be treated as a substitute sensor, i.e. as soon
as the position sensor which led to the POSITION TIMEOUT alarm is sending valid data again, the
POSITION VALID warning appears.
354 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e37.fm / 10.05.12
POSITION VALID Check and accept position sensor.

The position sensor which had given the POSITION INVALID or POSITION TIMEOUT alarm is
again sending valid data.

on any indicator.
tion Sensor, containing the data of the sensor which had given the POSITION INVALID or POSI-
TION TIMEOUT alarm, opens automatically after acknowledgement. After checking the new sensor-
data, either confirm this sensor by clicking on the OK button or select some other sensor.
ROT LIMIT EXCEEDED Check gyro compass, switch to backup gyro.

The rate of turn computed from the change in the received heading signal is greater than is possible
on the basis of the ship's dynamics as parameterised in the system. From this, it can be concluded
that the compass or the transfer of the heading signal is defective.
any indicator.
This alarm can only appear if activated on service level.
Remedy: Check the compass.
SAFETY CONTOUR [supplement] 1)

The chart monitoring performed by the CHARTPILOT has revealed that the safety contour or some
other area that is not deep enough is situated a short distance ahead of own ship, or is already being
touched by own ship's contour, or is situated ahead of own ship on the currently relevant part of the
System Track.
A) With NEARBY as the supplement (see also page 110):
The guard sector (see page 105) is touching the safety contour or the insufficiently deep region
specified as the object class, i.e. if the course and speed remain unchanged, these objects
might be run over within the time or distance entered under Objects of Interest in the menu
Alarm Settings > Chart Alarms.

The System Track (with the width defined by the pre-planned track limit) is touching the safety
contour or the specified insufficiently deep region.
Special features: The CHARTPILOT distributes the alarm to all RADARPILOTs and CHARTRA-
DARs; name on the RADARPILOT and CHARTRADAR: SAFETY CONTOUR NEAR BY or ON
TRACK.
The alarm can be acknowledged on the CHARTPILOT or on the radar indicator.
An acknowledged alarm is not repeated while the conditions that led to the alarm continue to exist.
Only when these conditions no longer exist does renewed occurrence of the above-mentioned condi-
tions in the same object class cause an alarm again.
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 355

b_cp_e37.fm / 10.05.12
SPEED INVALID Select another speed sensor.

The speed sensor is sending invalid data. Another speed sensor will have to be selected by the
operator. At present, the speed that was last sent as the valid speed is being used. Dashes are
shown in the speed area.

any indicator.
If the navigation sensors can be operated from the CHARTPILOT, the menu Sensor Settings >
Speed Sensor, containing the data of a substitute sensor, opens automatically after acknowledge-
ment. This sensor can be confirmed by means of OK, or some other sensor has to be selected. The
sensor which is now selected by the operator continues to be treated as a substitute sensor, i.e. as
soon as the speed sensor which led to the SPEED INVALID alarm is again sending valid data, the
SPEED VALID alarm appears.
SPEED TIMEOUT Select another speed sensor.

Data are no longer being received from the selected speed sensor. Another speed sensor will have
to be selected by the operator. At present, the speed that was last sent as the valid speed is being
used. Dashes are shown in the speed area.
any indicator.
Speed Sensor, containing the data of a substitute sensor, opens automatically after acknowledge-
ment. This sensor can be confirmed by means of OK, or some other sensor has to be selected. The
sensor which is now selected by the operator continues to be treated as a substitute sensor, i.e. as
soon as the speed sensor which led to the SPEED TIMEOUT alarm is again sending valid data, the
SPEED VALID alarm appears.
Until valid speed data are received, the alarm is repeated at intervals of one minute.
SPEED VALID Check and accept speed sensor.

The speed sensor which had given the SPEED INVALID or SPEED TIMEOUT alarm is again
sending valid data.
on any indicator.
Speed Sensor, containing the data of the sensor which had given the SPEED INVALID or SPEED
TIMEOUT alarm, opens automatically after acknowledgement. After checking the new sensor data,
either confirm this sensor by clicking on the OK button or select some other sensor.
TARGET IN ACQUISITION ZONE radar indicator n 1) (n=radar indicator number)

This radar indicator reports to the CHARTPILOT that a target which is not yet being tracked has
been acquired automatically in the acquisition/guard zone.
The warning should be acknowledged at the relevant indicator.
1)
On the RADARPILOT/CHARTRADAR, move the mousepointer above the text. A box with additional information ("balloon text") appears.
For example, the number of the CHARTPILOT reporting the warning is displayed. Numbers 1 to 5 are possible.
356 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e37.fm / 10.05.12
TARGET IN GUARD ZONE radar indicator n (n=radar indicator number)

This radar indicator reports that a target which is already being tracked has entered the acquisition/
guard zone at the indicated range and bearing.
The warning should be acknowledged at the relevant indicator.
TRACK LIMIT EXCEEDED XTD xxx m Limit yyy m, navigate with care.
The cross track distance is xxx m and thus exceeds the set track limit of yyy m.
Special features: The alarm is generated by all those units of the system for which such generation
For as long as the track limit continues to be exceeded, an acknowledged alarm is not repeated.
When the TRACKPILOT is being operated in Track mode, then instead the warning TP TRACK
LIMIT generated by the TRACKPILOT appears on the radar indicator selected as TRACKPILOT
Master, in this situation.
Remedy: Increase the track limit (if the nautical situation allows this) or deactivate the track alarms
on the CHARTPILOT.
UNEXPECTED END OF [Program name] select TREE, EXIT to restart

A serious fault on the CHARTPILOT has occurred. The program must be aborted: Click on the TREE
button, then the EXIT button. The CHARTPILOT must be restarted; see page 27. If this is not
successful, it might be possible to correct the fault by switching the equipment off completely with
the POWER DOWN button; see page 25.
Special feature: Acknowledgement is not possible.
USER CHART OBJECT [supplement] 1)

The chart monitoring performed by the CHARTPILOT has revealed that a User Chart Object of the
class "own safety line" or "danger highlight", i.e. a potentially dangerous object, or a User Chart
Object of the class "own MARPOL line" is situated in a short distance ahead of own ship, or is
already being touched by own ship's contour, or is situated ahead of own ship on the currently rele-
vant part of the System Track.
A) With NEARBY, supplement (see also page 110):
The guard sector or own ship (see page 105) is touching one or more own safety lines or
danger highlights or MARPOL lines, i.e. if the course and speed remain unchanged, these
objects might be run over within the time or distance entered in the menu Alarm Settings >
Chart Alarms.

The System Track (with the width defined by the pre-planned track limit) is touching one or more
own safety lines or danger highlights.
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 357

b_cp_e37.fm / 10.05.12
Special features: The CHARTPILOT distributes the warning to all RADARPILOTs and CHARTRA-
DARs.
The warning can be acknowledged on the CHARTPILOT or on one of the radar indicators.
9.2.1 AIS Alarms
DANGEROUS TARGET [n] yy.yNM zzz° (yy.y=range, zzz=true bearing)

An AIS target has become a dangerous target. The CPA and TCPA have become less than the set
limits. The bearing and range of this target are stated.
AIS INTERROGATION
The AIS has received a long-range interrogation. The Reply mode (see page 124) AUTO has been
selected. The reply was given automatically.
AIS INTERROGATION Reply required

The AIS has received a long-range interrogation. The Reply mode (see page 124) MANUAL has
been selected. The reply is sent when, in the menu Radar/AIS > Interrogation, the button Reply is
pressed.
LOST TARGET [n]

An AIS target being tracked has been lost.
AIS OFF, POSITION LOST Check position sensor

All information about AIS targets including their displays has been deleted because determination of
own position has been taking place by dead reckoning for the past 10 minutes.
Special feature: The warning cannot be acknowledged. It disappears when its cause has been elim-
inated.
Remedy: Select some other position sensor.
AIS OFFLINE
Data are no longer being received from the AIS system.
inated.
Remedy: Check the AIS system. It might be possible to eliminate the fault by switching the voltage
supply to the AIS electronics unit off and then on again at the ship's mains.
FAULT xx AIS: (Description)

This alarm indicates that there is a technical fault which is impairing, or could impair, the functioning
of the AIS system (xx = number of the fault).
If such an alarm is occurring frequently or if it persists for some time, the service organisation
should be informed of this.
Remedy: Check for information in the AIS manual.
358 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e37.fm / 10.05.12
NEW SAFETY MESSAGE

The AIS has received a safety message.

The content of the safety message can be accessed by the menu Radar/AIS > Read Message.
NO AIS DANGEROUS TARGET ACQUISITION SOG Lost, Check sensors

Because of missing data, the own speed vector over ground cannot be determined. For all AIS
targets, the collision avoidance computation and therefore the automatic acquisition and the
DANGEROUS AIS TARGET alarm do not take place.
inated.
Remedy: Check speed sensor, check position sensor.
SAFETY MESSAGE OVERFLOW

Because the AIS safety message that was received last has caused the number of messages to
exceed the number that can be stored, the oldest safety message is deleted.
Remedy: Delete any safety messages that are no longer needed.
SAFETY MESSAGE TRANSMISSION FAILED

The AIS system has recognised that the safety message might not have been transmitted success-
fully.
The cause of this can be that an incorrect MMSI number has been entered and that, as a result,
no confirmation of reception has been received from the addressee.
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 359

b_cp_e37.fm / 10.05.12
9.2.2 NAVTEX Alarms

NAVTEX OFFLINE
The NAVTEX receiver is not online, i.e. the receiver has been switched off, has failed or the communi-
cation to the receiver´s INS-port is interrupted.
The following warnings and alarms are only available if a NAVTEX receiver is connected to the radar
system and the alarm function is activated on this CHARTPILOT.
NAVTEX NEW MESSAGE (n)

The NAVTEX receiver has reported a new message which has been stored on the CHARTPILOT. The
number (n) indicates how many new (unread) messages are available. Even if the NAVTEX Alarm func-
tion is not activated on the CHARTPILOT, the new received message will be stored and can be read and
printed by the operator.
NAVTEX MESSAGE OVERFLOW

The maximum number of messages that can be stored on the CHARTPILOT has been reached. New
incoming messages will overwrite the oldest messages automatically.
NAVTEX NAVIGATIONAL WARNING

The NAVTEX has received a new navigational warning message.
NAVTEX METEOROLOGICAL WARNING

The NAVTEX has received a new meteorological warning message.
NAVTEX SAR INFOORMATION MESSAGE

The NAVTEX has received a new search and rescue information.
NAVTEX RX MALFUNCTION
The NAVTEX receiver has detected an internal malfunction.
NAVTEX BIST FAILURE

The receiver has reported a fault in its built-in self test system (BIST).
NAVTEX GENERAL FAILURE

The NAVTEX has stopped receiving and is no longer reporting messages.
NAVTEX FAULT (n)

The NAVTEX receiver has detected an internal error code (n). Refer to the Navtex manual for details.
360 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e37.fm / 10.05.12
CHARTPILOT
Part III CHARTPILOT as Conning Display
In this part, those functions are described which the CHARTPILOT, when used in NACOS, offers in
Conning mode.
In the following instructions for the operating procedure of these func-

tions, it is assumed that the CHARTPILOT is switched to Conning mode.
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 361

b_cp_e4.fm / 10.05.12
CHARTPILOT
362 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e4.fm / 10.05.12
10 General
In the case of use without a TRACKPILOT, the Conning mode described in this part is not appli-
cable. In this case, in addition to the functions described in Part II, the functions marked with # in
the following are available on the CHARTPILOT in Chart mode.
When the CHARTPILOT is switched to Conning mode, it displays a conning display grouped around a
diagram of the ship and consisting of a summary of the most important ship-handling data.
The composition of the data displayed can be adapted to suit the given situation by switching over
between
- the Navigation Page for sailing on the open sea and in coastal approaches
- the Docking Page # for docking
- the Keel Clearance Page # for sailing in shallow water.
As the data display, the following can be displayed, whichever is selected:
- the Track/Schedule display 1) or
- the Track/Control display 1),
- the NACOS Status display or
- an External Alarm display 2).
Furthermore, in Conning mode the following functions are available:
- Performing nautical calculations #
- Generating the pilot card #
- Generation, display and management of lists and notes (Text Pages) 1)
- Determination and saving of system parameterisations 1)

- Determining the system version 1)
- Making system settings 1)
In parts, Conning mode has the same man-machine interface as Chart mode. Therefore, all of Section 3
is applicable, except that the chart area is replaced by different displays. 3)
The basic setting of Conning mode is the Navigation Page. It appears after switch-over to this mode has
taken place for the first time. Because all of the above-mentioned functions are implemented by means
of individual subroutines, function selection is performed via the Tree. The most important functions can
be additionally called up in the basic menu line by means of buttons. The Tree of Conning mode is shown
in Figure 10-1.
The alarm management function described in Section 9 for Chart mode is fully applicable to Conning
mode as well.
1) The same function is also available in Chart mode

2) Only if there is an external alarm system connected which provides the necessary signals.
3)
At service level, the display can be changed in such a way that the menus and the data displays appear on the left-hand side. With this
setting, the individual displays of the Navigation Page appear on the right-hand side.
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 363

b_cp_e41.fm / 10.05.12
Prepares the switch-off (at the mains) of Switches the tree off without a
the CHARTPILOT; see page 26. functional switch-over taking
place.
Stops all programs that are running, and
after presentation of the Log-On display it
independently starts the main program of the
CHARTPILOT (see page 27).
Fig. 10-1 The Tree in Conning mode
364 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e41.fm / 10.05.12
CHARTPILOT 11 The Displays of the Conning Display and their Settings
Operating Instructions 11.1 The Navigation Page
11 The Displays of the Conning Display and their Settings
11.1 The Navigation Page
On the Navigation Page, a set of data needed for sailing in coastal approaches and on the open sea can
be displayed as numerical values and as graphics. You can parameterise some parts of this display your-
self.
The Navigation Page is divided into the middle part and individual displays which can be displayed on
the left-hand side of the screen.
Depending on the type of propulsion, the display of the engines in the middle part is set during setting-
to-work to
- conventional propulsion - see Figure 11-2 and Figure 11-3
- propulsion by means of azimuth thrusters - see Figure 11-4 and Figure 11-5 - or
- the individual combination of the existing propulsion types; for an example, see Figure 11-6.
Switching On the Navigation Page

In the Tree, press the Navigation button. The Navigation Page appears, and also the Navigation menu
if the menu display is switched on.
Because the Navigation Page is part of the subroutine which makes the Conning mode possible, the
Navigation Page appears automatically when the switch-over to Conning mode takes place and also
when, in Conning mode, a subroutine that was started there is switched off (with the Exit button).
Parameterisation of the Navigation Page

Parameterisation is performed in the Navigation menu.
- Parameterisation of the Middle Part
In the Display Mode frame, you can choose between
- Open Sea; in the ship symbol, this provides a graphic display of the course deviation, the track
deviation and (in the case of conventional propulsion) the longitudinal speed, among other
things, (Figure 11-2 and 11-4)
- Harbour; in the ship symbol, (in the case of conventional propulsion) this displays the power of
the thrusters, among other things (Figure 11-3).
- Selection of the Individual Displays
In the Display Options frame, by means of the buttons Display 1 to Display 3 it is possible to
specify which of the individual displays shown in Figure 11-9 and 11-10 is to be presented at each
of the three places provided for this purpose on the left-hand side of the screen. Display 1 defines
the top place, and Display 3 defines the bottom place. If the button is set to Empty, no individual
display is presented at the place.
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 365

b_cp_e42.fm / 10.05.12
11 The Displays of the Conning Display and their Settings CHARTPILOT
11.1 The Navigation Page Operating Instructions
If data are not displayed even although you have switched on the display of these data, the reason
is probably that these data or the values needed for their computation are not available to the
CHARTPILOT.
In the middle part, the course deviation, track deviation and (in the case of conventional
propulsion) longitudinal speed (among other things) are displayed graphically.
In the middle part, the powers of the thrusters (among other things) are displayed graphically
(in the case of conventional propulsion).
On ships with azimuth thrusters situated on center line, the button Manoeuvre appears here
in addition. By means of this button, in the middle part, data of these azimuth thrusters
(among other things) are displayed graphically.
Rotating the entire middle part by 180 °.

Selection of the individual display for the place at top left.
Selection of the individual display for the place at centre left.
Selection of the individual display for the place at bottom left.
Display indicating that, with the Recording display switched on, the history of gyro
heading is displayed.
In addition to the gyro heading, the history of the rudder angle is displayed when the
Recording display is switched on.
In addition to the gyro heading, the history of the Rate of Turn is displayed when the
Recording display is switched on.
After a safeguard question has been answered appropriately, this switches off the
Conning subroutine and switches over to Chart mode.
Fig. 11-1 The Navigation Menu
366 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e42.fm / 10.05.12
Next course: preplanned course which is used 2) as the set course Rate of Turn, computed from the change in
by the TRACKPILOT after pressing of the EXECUTE key 3). the gyro heading values supplied by the
compass
Bar to the right: Ship is turning to starboard.
Radius of the turning circle currently being performed, computed from the Triangle at the end of the scale: Exceeding
measured speed and the ROT. If the radius of the turning circle is greater of the scale range.
than 5 NM, the radius is not displayed.
Next radius:
Set radius with which the TRACKPILOT is performing a course change. Preplanned set radius
If the next manoeuvre cannot be performed with the set radius, and Track which is defined as the
mode is in the switched-on state, the value flashes. set radius by pressing
of the EXECUTE 3) key
Gyro heading
Yellow triangle: The set course, specified by the TRACKPILOT: 1) 2)
Actual course 1) = Gyro heading + drift angle

(+ course correction 7))
Set course, specified by the TRACKPILOT: 1) 2)

Drift angle computed from the longitudinal and transverse speeds

supplied by the selected speed sensor (from BT values, if available)
Course deviation (Set course minus actual course) 4) 5)

Bar to the right: The actual value lies to starboard of the set value.
Track deviation: 4)
Bar to the right or R: The ship is situated to the right of the track.
XTD: Deviation from the System Track 6)

R = the ship is situated to the right of the track
Red background: Deviation from the System Track exceeds
the set track limit.
Rudder angle, from the rudder angle sensor

Yellow triangle: The set rudder angle, specified by the TRACKPILOT
Red lines: The rudder limit that is set on the TRACKPILOT
Longitudinal speed measured by

1) Course over ground if the selected speed sensor is working in Bottom Track mode the selected speed sensor:
Course through the water if the selected speed sensor is working in Water Track mode Bar grey: Speed over ground
2) In Course and Track mode of the TRACKPILOT, this is displayed beside Course to make Bar blue: Speed through the water
it clear that the values are no Heading values.
3) Additionally in Track mode if, and only if, the WOP has been reached and after an appro-
priate alarm.
4) Relative to the track used by the TRACKPILOT, computed by the TRACKPILOT.
In Heading mode and Course mode, this is the deviation from a track which has been spec-
ified by the input of the set course (designation: Off Track). In Track mode, this is the devi- Displays not explained here:
ation from the System Track (designation XTD). See Figure 11-3
5) In Anchor Control mode: Heading deviation, red line = set heading limit, etc
6) Computed by the CHARTPILOT main program. The display is absent if the ship is sailing in
Track mode, because then XTD is displayed in the track deviation bar.
7) In the Track mode only.
Fig. 11-2 Navigation Page, conventional propulsion, middle part, Open Sea Display Mode
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 367

b_cp_e42.fm / 10.05.12
Power of the bow and stern thrusters:

Length of bar corresponds to power reported by thruster
(100% = half the width of the ship).
Bar is displayed in direction of ship's acceleration caused by
the transverse thrust.
Transverse speed at the bow, computed by the system 1)
Speed over ground or speed through the water1)
Set speed specified by the SPEEDPILOT 1)
Mode of the SPEEDPILOT
Propeller shaft revolution rate 2)
Pitch of variable-pitch propeller2)
Shaft Power 2)
Longitudinal speed measured by the

selected speed sensor 1)
Clutches 2)
Yellow area: Engine coupled
In the case of ships with two
Transverse speed at the stern, propeller shafts, the data of the star-
computed by the system 1) board shaft are displayed here.
Next speed: Preplanned speed which is specified

as the set speed to the SPEEDPILOTfor the next
leg of the pre-planned track. 3)
Displays not explained here:
See Figure 11-2
Actual set lever value
1) Speed over ground if the selected speed sensor is working in Bottom Track mode,
speed through the water if the selected speed sensor is working in Water Track mode
2) Data from the engines
3) Additionally with activated TRACKPILOT if, the WOP of the system track has been passed.
Fig. 11-3 Navigation Page, conventional propulsion, middle part in Harbour Display Mode
368 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e42.fm / 10.05.12
Next course: Preplanned course which is used 2) as the set course Rate of Turn, computed from the change in
by the TRACKPILOT after pressing of the EXECUTE key 3). the gyro heading values supplied by the
compass
Bar to the right: Ship is turning to starboard.
Radius of the turning circle currently being performed, computed from the Triangle at the end of the scale: Exceeding
measured speed and the ROT. If the radius of the turning circle is greater of the scale range.
than 5 NM, the radius is not displayed.
Next radius:
Set radius with which the TRACKPILOT is performing a course change. Preplanned set radius
If the next manoeuvre cannot be performed with the set radius, and Track which is defined as the
mode is in the switched-on state, the value flashes. set radius by pressing
of the EXECUTE 3) key
Gyro heading
Yellow triangle: The set course, specified by the TRACKPILOT: 1) 2)
Actual course 1) = Gyro heading + drift angle

(+ course correction 7))
Set course, specified by the TRACKPILOT: 1) 2)

Drift angle computed from the longitudinal and transverse speeds

supplied by the selected speed sensor (from BT values, if available)
Course deviation (Set course minus actual course) 4) 5)

Bar to the right: The actual value lies to starboard of the set value.
Track deviation: 4)
Bar to the right or R: The ship is situated to the right of the track.
XTD: Deviation from the System Track 6)

R = the ship is situated to the right of the track
Red background: Deviation from the System Track exceeds
the set track limit.
1) Course over ground if the selected speed sensor is working in Bottom Track mode
Course through the water if the selected speed sensor is working in Water Track mode
2) In Course and Track mode of the TRACKPILOT, this is displayed beside Course to make it
clear that the values are no Heading values.
3) Additionally in Track mode if, and only if, the WOP has been reached and after an appro-
priate alarm.
4) Relative to the track used by the TRACKPILOT, computed by the TRACKPILOT. Displays not explained here:
In Heading mode and Course mode, this is the deviation from a track which has been spec- See Figure 11-5
ified by the input of the set course (designation: Off Track). In Track mode, this is the devi-
ation from the System Track (designation XTD).
5) In Anchor Control mode: Heading deviation, red line = set heading limit, etc
6) Computed by the CHARTPILOT main program. The display is absent if the ship is sailing in
Track mode, because then XTD is displayed in the track deviation bar.
7) In the Track mode only.
Fig. 11-4 Navigation Page, Azimuth Thruster, middle part in Open Sea Display Mode
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 369

b_cp_e42.fm / 10.05.12
Data of the azimuth thruster:

Length of the yellow bar and lower numerical value:
Revolution rate of the thruster (actual value)
Bar is yellow: Normal direction of rotation of the propeller.
(Ship is propelled in the ahead direction of the thruster).
Bar is red: Propeller is rotating in reverse. (Ship is propelled Transverse speed at the bow,
in the direction opposite to the ahead direction of the computed by the system 1)
thruster.).
Yellow triangle on the outside: Thruster direction set by the
TRACKPILOT
Red scale sector: Rudder limit set for the TRACKPILOT
Yellow triangles on the bar: Thruster revolution rate set by
the SPEEDPILOT
Black triangle and upper left numerical value: Heading
direction of the thruster
At service level, it is possible to specify that the numerical
field becomes green or red when the ship is not being
propelled in ahead. Whether the colour indicates the
direction of the force exerted by the thruster or, alterna-
tively, the direction in which the ship is moved can also be
specified at service level.
Propeller symbol indicates whether the propeller is situated
at the front or back of the thruster.
Circular area is red: Thruster is out of service.
Right numerical value: Power of the thruster, if available
Positions of the azimuth thruster displays:

Ships with normal bridge configuration: At the top, the fore
thrusters; at the bottom, the aft thrusters
Ferries with bridges fore and aft: At the top, the thrusters
situated in front of the person looking at the screen; at the
bottom, the thrusters behind the person looking at the screen.
Mode of the SPEEDPILOT
Set speed specified by the SPEEDPILOT 1)
Longitudinal speed measured

by the selected speed sensor:
Speed over ground or speed through the water1) Bar grey: Speed over ground
Bar blue: Speed through the
water
Transverse speed at the stern,
computed by the system 1) Next speed: preplanned speed which is spec-
ified as the set speed to the SPEEDPILOT
Displays not explained here: after pressing of the EXECUTE key 2)
See Figure 11-4
Actual set lever value
1) Speed over ground if the selected speed sensor is working in Bottom Track mode,
speed through the water if the selected speed sensor is working in Water Track mode
2) Additionally in Track mode of the TRACKPILOT if, and only if, the WOP has been reached and after an appropriate alarm.
Fig. 11-5 Navigation Page, Azimuth Thruster, middle part in Harbour Display Mode
370 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e42.fm / 10.05.12
This example shows the middle part of

the Navigation Page in Harbour display
mode for a ship with diesel electric
propulsion and azimuth thrusters.
Navigation data according to

Figure 11-2
Data of the bow azimuth thruster (or

pump jet) according to Figure 11-5
Navigation data according to

Figure 11-3
Data of the stern thrusters according to

Figure 11-3
Data of the diesel electric propul-

sion analogous to Figure 11-3
Data of the rudder according

to Figure 11-2
Fig. 11-6 Navigation Page, example of a different propulsion combination
If an echosounder with several transducers is installed, the selected transducer

is noticed here.
Water depth under the keel measured by the navigation echosounder at the location
of the selected transducer including the depth history of the past 10 minutes
Red line: The set depth alarm value
By means of a context-sensitive menu, the depth range displayed can be set to a
different fixed value or to automatic range-adaptation.
Depth
Fig. 11-7 Navigation Page, individual displays, Figure 1
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 371

b_cp_e42.fm / 10.05.12
Wind display (Switch-over by means of context-sensitive menu)

Rel: relative wind; measured by the wind sensor
True: true wind; computed by the system
Wind speed (Switch-over of the unit of measurement by

means of context-sensitive menu)
Wind direction
Ship symbol represents the present gyro heading
Yellow arrow pointing inwards: Wind direction
Blue arrow pointing outwards: Direction of the current
Red line: Actual course = Gyro heading + drift angle
Wind + Set
Direction and speed of the current, computed from the difference between Bottom Track data and Water Track data
If the selected speed sensor supplies both Bottom Track data and Water Track data, the set and drift are computed from these.
If the selected speed sensor supplies only Bottom Track data or only Water Track data, the system also uses data from other
connected sensors. If a transverse component is absent, the displayed values do not indicate the drift vector correctly. This is
the case, for example, if the longitudinal speed from the EM log is supplemented by the speed over ground (from the GPS
receiver).
If data entered manually are taken into account in the computation of set and drift, the fields have a yellow background.
Air temperature, outside, transferred from the weather station
Relative humidity of the outside air, transferred from the weather station
Dew point of the outside air, computed from air temperature and relative humidity
Barometric pressure transferred from the weather station, including

its variation during the past 8 hours
Sea water temperature, transferred from the temperature

sensor or from the weather station
Weather
Black triangle: Permanent helm
Recording of the past 10 minutes:

Blue: Gyro heading
Yellow: Rudder angle (mean value in the case of twin rudders) or ROT.
Selection of the recorded parameters in the Recording Options frame in
the Navigation menu - see page 366.
Gyro heading is always displayed when the Recording display is in the

switched-on state.
In the case of twin rudder systems, the mean value of the two rudder
systems is displayed.
Recording In Conning mode, the values from the past 10 minutes are continuously
stored for all three parameters which can be displayed here, so that the
history will be displayed immediately when switch-on of the Recording
display and switch-over between Rudder angle and ROT take place.
372 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e42.fm / 10.05.12
Environmental data supplied by external item of equipment
Ship's attitude data provided by external equip-

ment - see also Keel Clearance Page, page 377
Environment (selectable only if the appropriate sensors are installed)
Mode of the main generators
Power of the main generators:

- Top edge of the green bar: Total power available at present
- Green area: Spare power at present
- Yellow bar: Power output or used power
Total power available at present For Generated Power, there are
Spare power at present other displays with a different
selection and layout of the data
Power output or used power described.
Generated Power (Can be selected only in the case of ships with electromotive propulsion and special interface.)
Data of the selected speed sensor
Measured speed through the water

The availability of transverse speed is
dependent on the type of speed sensor
Speed
Speed WT
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 373

b_cp_e42.fm / 10.05.12
11.2 The Docking Page Operating Instructions
Overall estimated effect of the thrusters:

Green arrow: Present effect (estimated direction of the ship’s movement caused by the
thrust)
Yellow arrow: The set value (estimated sum of propulsion orders)
Both arrows represent the vector sum of the available azimuth thrusters calculated from
the data input. The maximum length of the arrows represents 100% thrust on all available
thrusters.Use RPM: Values are based on the signalled rotational speed of the azimuth
propeller
Use Power: Values are based are the measured output
Use Pitch: Values are based on the signalled propeller pitch data
Use Power**2/3: Values are based are the measured output, taking into account a
nonlinear relationship between measured output and thrust.
Note: The rotational forces, generated by the thrusters cannot be derived from the
Manoeuvre Manoeuvre display.
(Can be selected only in the case
of ships with azimuth thrusters and Mode of the azimuth thruster control system (only available with special interface)
special interface)
11.2 The Docking Page
On the Docking Page, a set of data needed for docking manoeuvres can be displayed as numerical
values and also graphically. You can parameterise this display yourself.
Switching On the Docking Page

In the Tree, press the Docking button. The Docking Page and (if the menu display is switched on) the
Docking menu appear.
Parameterisation of the Docking Page

Parameterisation is performed in the Docking menu.
- Selection of the Data to be Displayed
By pressing of the buttons Rate of Turn to Thruster, as well as History and Prediction, select the
data that are to be displayed.
- Setting the past track
When you switch on History, the last 10 positions of the ship are displayed relative to the present
position (if, because of low speed, they are situated within the display). The time covered by this
display can be set under History by means of the sliding controller. The distance between two
displayed positions of the ship is therefore one tenth of the value displayed on the sliding controller.
- Setting the Display of the Ship's Probable Movement
if you switch on Prediction, a prediction takes place to find out where the ship will sail to if it main-
tains its present state of motion. As in the case of the past track, 10 positions of the ship (at the
most) are displayed relative to the present position. Setting is done under Prediction in a manner
similar to the setting of the past track.
- Other Parameterisations:
In the lower part of the menu, after clicking of the relevant buttons you can specify whether
- the ship speeds and the drift are to be displayed in kt or in m/s,
- the ship symbol is to point upwards, downwards, to the right or to the left.
If data are not displayed even although you have switched on the display of these data, the reason
is that these data or the values needed for computing them are not available to the CHARTPILOT.
374 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e42.fm / 10.05.12
Operating Instructions 11.2 The Docking Page
Rate of Turn, computed from the change in Trim: Difference between the forward draught and aft draught, computed from
the gyro heading values supplied by the the draughts or determined by connected trim sensor (– = bow is down)
compass Heel: Heel determined by the heel sensor
Bar to the right: The ship is turning to star- List: Draught increase caused by heel; determined by the list sensor or
board. computed from the heel
Red Triangle at end of scale: Exceeding of Squat: Draught increase caused by the suction effect occurring between the
the scale range. moving ship and the water bottom; computed from the ship's speed and the
water depth, taking account of the factors stored in the ship model
Clearance: Least distance between the ship and the water bottom, computed
from the least depth measured by the navigation echosounder under the ship
minus the list and squat, and minus the trim if the trim is positive
Gyro heading
Draught aft, manually
Draught forward, set (see page 394) or
Future positions of the ship, assuming that manually set (see page computed from the
the longitudinal and transverse forces remain 394) or determined by draught forward and the
constant; display of the next 10 positions connected sensors trim or determined by
relative to the present position (the time connected sensors
interval can be set under Prediction in the
Docking menu).
Drift, set: Speed and direction of the

current, computed from the difference
between Bottom Track and Water Track data
Wind, Rel. or Wind, True: Wind speed and
wind direction, measured by the wind sensor
(Rel.: relative wind, True: true wind; selec-
tion of True/Rel and unit of measurement of
the wind speed via context menu.
Water depth under the keel measured by

the navigation echosounder at the location
of the selected transducer
including the depth history of the past 10
minutes
If an echosounder with several transducers
is installed, the selected transducer is
noticed next to the depth value.
Red line: The set depth alarm value
By means of a context-sensitive menu,
the depth range displayed can be set to
a different fixed value or to automatic
range-adaptation.
White lines: Speed vectors forward and aft

(computed from the displayed speeds of the
ship); limited to 2.5 kt
Blue arrow: Relative drift vector (= DRIFT
and SET); limited to 2.5 kt Rudder angle,
Yellow flag: Wind direction and speed, rela- Propulsion data as described in measured by the
tive; 5 m/s corresponds to half a division; Figure 11-3 rudder angle sensor
measured by the wind sensor Alternatively, on ships with azimuth
Brown bar: Power of the thrusters thrusters, their data can be displayed
- Bar length corresponds to power here; for explanation, see page 370.
reported by thruster. Ship's speed, measured by the
(100% = half the width of the ship) selected speed sensor:
- Bar is displayed in direction of the ship's Past positions of ship, display of the - Selected sensor
acceleration caused by the transverse last 10 positions relative to the present - Transverse speed at the bow
thrust. position (The time interval can be set - Longitudinal speed
under History in the Docking menu.) - Transverse speed at the stern
Fig. 11-11 The Docking Page
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 375

b_cp_e42.fm / 10.05.12
11.2 The Docking Page Operating Instructions
Switching on the parameters that are to be displayed.
Switches on/off the display of the past track.

Setting the period of time for which the past track is to be displayed
Switches on/off the display of the predicted positions.

Setting the period of time for which the predicted positions is to be displayed.
Specifying the units of measurement for ship's speed and drift.

Specifying the orientation of the ship symbol.
Switches off the subroutine for display of the Docking Page. The Navigation
Page appears.
Fig. 11-12 The Docking Menu
376 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e42.fm / 10.05.12
Operating Instructions 11.3 The Keel Clearance Page
11.3 The Keel Clearance Page
On the Keel Clearance Page, data which are helpful for sailing in shallow water are displayed as numer-
ical values and graphically.
Draught aft, manually set Smallest measured depth from Draught forward, manually set Present measured
(see page 394) or computed the navigation echosounder (see page 394) or determined by depth from the navigation
from the draught forward and under the ship connected sensors echosounder 1)
the trim or determined by
connected sensors
Trim: Difference between the

forward draught and aft draught,
computed from the draughts or
determined by connected trim
sensor (– = bow is down)
Heel: Heel, determined by

the heel sensor
List: Draught increase caused by

heel, determined by the list sensor
or computed from the heel
Squat: Draught increase caused by

the suction effect occurring between
the moving ship and the water bottom,
computed from the speed from the
selected speed sensor and the
present depth measured by the navi-
gation echosounder, taking account of
the factors stored in the ship model
Clearance: Least distance between

the ship and the water bottom,
computed from the least depth meas-
ured by the navigation echosounder
under the ship minus the list and
squat, and minus the trim if the trim is
positive
Graphic display of Heel

Longitudinal speed, with
statement of source
Graphic display of Trim Water depth in meter
Schematic diagram of the depth situation under the ship:
- Horizontal line: Largest draught (forward draught plus list and squat, and plus trim if trim is positive)
- Lower grey area: The upper edge is the depth history (the most recent measurements made by the navigation
echosounder)
- Green bar: Position of least measured depth under the ship; bar height corresponds to clearance. Bar goes red:
The measured water depth is less than the set depth alarm value
- Dashed red line: The set depth alarm value
1) If the ship has an echosounder with several transducers, the displayed data are shown only if the forward transducer is selected.
If a different transducer is used, the values of Minimum Depth, Squat and Clearance as well as the diagram of the depth situ-
ation under the ship are not shown. The numerical value of Actual Depth is arranged in accordance with the position of the
selected transducer.
Fig. 11-13 Keel Clearance Page
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 377

b_cp_e42.fm / 10.05.12
11.3 The Keel Clearance Page Operating Instructions
Switching On the Keel Clearance Page

In the Tree, press the Keel Clearance button. The Keel Clearance Page and (if the menu display is
switched on) the Keel Clearance menu appear.
Parameterisation of the Keel Clearance Page

- Specifying the Depth Range that is to be Displayed Graphically
Under Depth Scale, by means of the two arrow keys, set the depth range which is to be displayed
below the ship symbols on the Keel Clearance Page.
- Specifying the Units of Measurement for the Ship's Speed
With the Speed button, choose between kt and m/s.
Specifying the depth range to be displayed graphically.
Specifying the units of measurement for the ship's speed.
Switches off the subroutine for the display of the Keel Clearance Page.
The Navigation Page appears.
Fig. 11-14 The Keel Clearance menu
378 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e42.fm / 10.05.12
Operating Instructions 11.4 The Data Displays
11.4 The Data Displays
In Conning mode too, the display is supplemented by the data displays appearing in the right-hand side-
strip. In contrast to Chart mode, the presentation of these data displays cannot be switched off; they can
only by concealed by the menu.
It is possible to choose between the following types of display:
The Track/Schedule display summarises the most important data needed for track-keeping and time
schedule planning. All data displayed there relate to the System Track. The display corresponds to the
Track/Schedule display which can be selected in Chart mode, but it is supplemented by the addition of
status messages of the TRACKPILOT.
The Track/Control display likewise contains the most important data needed for track-keeping and time
planning, likewise relating to the System Track but with a different set of data. This display corresponds
to the Track/Control display which can be selected in Chart mode, but is supplemented by the addition
of status messages of the TRACKPILOT.
All items of data relating to the System Track which appear in the data displays are determined by
the CHARTPILOT main program. As a result, there might be slight deviations relative to the data
computed and displayed by the TRACKPILOT (e.g. the track deviation on the Navigation Page).
The NACOS Status display indicates which NACOS components and which of the sensors connected
to the NACOS are switched on or are functioning.
In the External Alarm displays, alarm messages are displayed which are signalled by a connected
alarm-system, e.g. a bridge alarm system. 1)
When an alarm signal of this kind reaches the NACOS, the NACOS first generates the BRIDGE ALARM
SYSTEM alarm (see Section 9). Whether an acoustic signal is emitted as well depends on the alarm
message that is signalled.
Selection of the Data Display to be Presented

The selection between Track/Schedule display, Track/Control display and NACOS Status display is made
after clicking of the top button of the data display that is being presented.
Switch-on of the External Alarm display takes place in the NACOS Status display after clicking of the
button below the top button.
1) The following features of the External Alarm displays can be configured at service level, and so these displays might differ from the example
shown in Figure 11-18:
- Title of the displays
- Number of possible alarms and thus number of displays
- Designation of the alarms
- Whether an acoustic signal is emitted by the NACOS, and if so, for which of the alarms.
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 379

b_cp_e42.fm / 10.05.12
11.4 The Data Displays Operating Instructions
The Track/Schedule Display
Title button; after clicking, a different data display can be switched on.
Number, remark about the waypoint, and Switching forward to the next set of
geographical position of the waypoint that waypoint data takes place abeam of
is passed last the present waypoint. If the TRACK-
PILOT is steering with Pilot Data or
Number1), remark about the waypoint, and in Track mode, the TRACKPILOT
geographical position of the present waypoint makes the decision about switching
forward (normally occurs at the
Estimated time of arrival at the present wheel over point).
waypoint
Estimated time to go to the present
waypoint
Number and remark about the waypoint of the arrival point (for arrival point, see page 233)
arrival point
Existing status messages of the TRACKPILOT, relative to the System Track

- OFF COURSE: The set course limit is exceeded
- OFF TRACK: The set track limit is exceeded
- REDUCED RADIUS: The next planned manoeuvre cannot be performed with the
set radius that is currently set
- SHORT RADIUS: The next planned manoeuvre cannot be performed with the
maximum rudder angle
- Track Status OK: None of the above-mentioned fault messages are present.
- LOW SPEED: The ship's speed is lower than the minimum speed that ensures safe
manoeuvring by the TRACKPILOT.
1) Number field is yellow: System Track is violated within the next 20 NM by safety contour, object of
interest or own safety line.
By clicking of the INFO key, the System Track can be checked as far as the last waypoint.
Fig. 11-15 The Track/Schedule Display in the Conning Mode
380 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e42.fm / 10.05.12
The Track/Control-Display
Title button; after clicking, a different data display can be switched on.

Last waypoint
Geogr. position of the present waypoint

Left: Sailing mode: GC = Great Circle, RL = Rhumb Line
Centre: Track control mode: To WPT = To Waypoint, To TRK = To Track
Right: Pilot Data Status: PD on = Pilot Data are switched on for the TRACKPILOT
Left: Bearing of the present waypoint

Right: WPD: Distance to the present waypoint 1)
Left: In To Track mode: Direction of the present track line

In To Waypoint mode: Last computed course of the temporary track to the present
waypoint
Right: Deviation from the System Track; R: Ship is situated to the right of the System
Track
Field is red: The track limit is exceeded.
Planned time schedule: The following data are obtained if the ship
sails to the arrival point at the Arrival Speed.
Actual time schedule: The following data are obtained if the ship sails
to the arrival point at the present speed.
Switch-over: After clicking
Next leg data: see figure on page 66
Number of the waypoint of the arrival point (for arrival point, see page 233)

Planned time of arrival at the arrival point
arrival point (Spare: Arriving too early)
Remaining distance to go to the arrival point

or with actual time schedule: present speed

Existing status messages of the TRACKPILOT, relative to the System Track
(see Track/Schedule display, page 380)
Fig. 11-16 The Track/Control Display
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 381

b_cp_e42.fm / 10.05.12
The NACOS Status Display
After clicking, a different data display can be switched on.
Title button; if there is an external alarm system connected which supplies the neces-
sary signals, an External Alarm display can be switched on here after clicking.
Status of the NACOS components

The meaning of the display is stated in the table below.
Status of the connected sensors

ON, green background: The sensor is supplying valid signals to the NACOS.
OFF, red background: The sensor is not supplying valid signals.
Special feature in the case of GPS receiver:

- If the DGPS only function is selected in the Use of GPS frame in the Sensor Settings
> Position Sensor menu, ON appears with a red background if the GPS receiver is not
working in Differential mode.
- If the DGPS and GPS function is selected in the Use of GPS frame in the Sensor
Settings > Position Sensor menu, a red field appears in front of GPS if the GPS
receiver is not working in Differential mode.
Fig. 11-17 The NACOS Status Display
The Status Displays of the NACOS Components
NACOS component ON, green background OFF, yellow background OFF, red background
TRACKPILOT Ship is being steered TRACKPILOT is not acti- Failed or mains power
with the TRACKPILOT vated switched off
Engine Interface Is emitting signals prop- Failed or mains power
_____
erly switched off
SPEEDPILOT Speed is being controlled SPEEDPILOT is not acti- Failed or mains power
with the SPEEDPILOT vated switched off
Radar Indicator or Radar indicator is Failed or switched off
_____
MULTIPILOT switched on
382 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e42.fm / 10.05.12
The External Alarm Displays
After clicking, a different data display can be switched on.
Title button; after clicking, the NACOS Status display or a different External Alarm display
can be switched on here.
List of possible alarm messages
Text with red background: Alarm is present and has not yet been acknowledged.
Text with yellow background: Alarm is present and has been acknowledged.
Fig. 11-18 Example of an External Alarm Display
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 383

b_cp_e42.fm / 10.05.12
384 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e42.fm / 10.05.12
CHARTPILOT 12 Auxiliary Functions, Conning
Operating Instructions 12.1 Performing Nautical Calculations
12 Auxiliary Functions, Conning
12.1 Performing Nautical Calculations
This section describes how, with the CHARTPILOT, you can

- perform position-reckoning calculations
- calculate the rendezvous point of two ships
- solve current-sailing problems
- obtain support in carrying out a measured mile run
- determine sunrises and sunsets to check the compass accuracy
- determine the altitude and azimuth of the most important fixed stars.
These functions are implemented by means of individual subroutines which you can start in the Tree
under Calculator in Conning mode by pressing the appropriate button. In the chart area, the menu of the
started program then appears, and on the right (if the menu display is switched on) the Calculator menu
appears, from which the other subroutines too can be started.
Position-reckoning calculations; see page 386
Calculating the rendezvous point of two ships; see page 387
Measured mile calculations; see page 389
Determination of sunrises and sunsets; see page 390
Solving current-sailing problems; see page 388
Determining the altitude and azimuth of fixed stars; seepage 392
Leaves the menu and aborts the calculations that are taking place.
Alternative: Pressing of Tree also exits the menu, but the
calculations continue to run in the background.
Fig. 12-1 The Calculator menu
USEFUL INFORMATION
Ending the Calculations

If the calculations are to be ended, you must leave the Calculator menu by pressing Exit. As a result,
the subroutine concerned is switched off.
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 385

b_cp_e43.fm / 10.05.12
12 Auxiliary Functions, Conning CHARTPILOT
12.1 Performing Nautical Calculations Operating Instructions
However, it is also possible to leave this menu without stopping the calculations; the values upon which
the calculations are based then remain intact. In this case, the calculation data remain preserved and you
can briefly inspect and modify the calculations while you are performing the nautical monitoring with the
aid of the CHARTPILOT.
Coordinate System Used

All computations that can be performed via the Calculator menu are based on the chart datum WGS 84.
12.1.1 Performing a Position-Reckoning Calculation
After selection of the menu function Calculator > Reckoning, the following menu appears:
Own Ship pressed: as the starting data,

the current data of own ship are used.
Other pressed: the starting data can be

input manually; they are not updated.
Starting data
Sailing data
Specifies whether the calculation is

performed for Great Circle (orthodrome)
or for Rhumb Line (loxodrome).
Destination data
Fig. 12-2 The Calculator > Reckoning menu
On the basis of the starting data, it is possible to determine

- the destination data by inputting the sailing data or
- the sailing data by inputting the destination data.
1. Defining the Starting Data
If the data of own ship (position, time) are to be used as the starting data, Own Ship must be in the
switched-on state. In this case, the starting data and also the calculated values are continuously
updated. If the calculations are to be performed on the basis of fixed starting data, you must press
Other and must input or correct the starting data.
386 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e43.fm / 10.05.12
2. Selecting the Sailing Mode

This is done by pressing Rhumb Line or Great Circle.
Then either
3. input destination data
After the input of the destination position, the course and distance from the starting position to the
destination position are displayed under Course and Distance. After input of the destination time,
the necessary speed and the travelling time are displayed under Speed and TTG.
or
4. input the sailing data
After input of the course under Course and of the distance under Distance, the destination position
is displayed. After input of the speed under Speed or of the sailing time under TTG, the destination
time is displayed.
USEFUL INFORMATION
Exceeding of Input Limits
If a speed of less than 0.1 kt is input under Speed, this value is not accepted, and dashes appear there.
This is also intended to indicate that the destination time displayed is not correct.
If, under TTG, the value 0 or a value is displayed which would produce a speed which could no longer
be displayed, dashes likewise appear under Speed.
If the destination time that has been input would produce a TTG greater than 99 days, dashes appear in
the TTG day display.
12.1.2 Calculating the Rendezvous Point of Two Ships
After selection of the menu function Calculator > Rendezvous, the following menu appears:
Sets the starting data of ship A to the

currently existing data of own ship.
Starting data; these have to be input.
Speed data:
these are calculated when Set is pressed; if
Calculated is pressed, they have to be input.
The calculated sailing data
Data of the rendezvous point

Calculated pressed: Rendezvous data are
calculated from the starting data and speed
data of ship A and ship B; the points lie on a
loxodrome.
Set pressed: Rendezvous data and the starting

data of ship A and ship B are preset. The
speed data of ship A and ship B are calculated.
Fig. 12-3 The Calculator > Rendezvous menu
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 387

b_cp_e43.fm / 10.05.12
- For ships A and B, the rendezvous data of the ships can be determined on the basis of their starting
data and speed data; the rendezvous point lies on the straight line (loxodrome) between their starting
positions. Or:
- For ships A and B, the necessary speeds can be calculated on the basis of their starting positions
and the preset rendezvous-data.
In both cases, the courses to be sailed, distances to go and times to go are determined as well.
1. Specifying whether the Rendezvous Data are to be Preset or Calculated
Press Calculated if the rendezvous data are to be calculated, or press Set if the rendezvous data
are to be preset.
2. Inputting the Starting Data
Under Ship A and Ship B, input the desired values under Lat, Lon, Time and Date. By pressing of
Restart, the starting data of ship A are set to the currently existing data of own ship.
- If Calculated is pressed, Restart also sets the speed of ship A to the currently existing speed
of own ship. The speed of ship B has still to be input or corrected. When this has been done,
the rendezvous data and sailing data calculated from the input data are displayed.
- If Set is pressed, the rendezvous data must be input or corrected. The speeds and sailing data
calculated from the input data are then displayed.
12.1.3 Solving Current-Sailing Problems
After selection of the menu function Calculator > Current Sailing, the following menu appears:
Selection of the current-sailing problem
The data wanted; result of the calculation
The given data
Graphic display of the current-

sailing problem
Fig. 12-4 The Calculator > Current Sailing menu (problem 1)
The following current-sailing problems can be solved in order to take account of, or to determine, the
direction and speed of the current:
388 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e43.fm / 10.05.12
Problem 1:
- Given: the heading (HDG) and speed through the water (STW, and also the direction of the current
(set) and speed of the current (drift).
- Wanted: the course over ground (course made good, CMG) and speed over ground (speed made
good, SMG).
Problem 2:
- Given: the course over ground (course made good, CMG) and speed through the water (STW), and
also the direction of the current (set) and speed of the current (drift).
- Wanted: the heading (HDG) and speed over ground (speed made good, SMG).
Problem 3:
- Given: the heading (HDG) and speed through the water (STW), and also the course over ground
(course made good, CMG) and speed over ground (speed made good, SMG).
- Wanted: the direction of the current (set) and speed of the current (drift).
1. Select the current-sailing problem
This is done by pressing Problem 1, Problem 2 or Problem 3.
2. Input the known values
Inputting is done under Own Ship Data. Data that are not to be input are displayed there faintly. The
result is displayed numerically under Results and graphically in the compass rose; the colours are
used in a consistent manner.
12.1.4 Support for the Measured Mile Run
After selection of the menu function Calculator > Measured Mile, the following menu appears:
Here, before the measured mile run is performed,

input the distance taken from the chart.
When the ship crosses the starting line, press

Start or the Enter key. The data that exist at this
instant are „frozen“.
The time and distance that have elapsed since
pressing of Start; the data are „frozen“ when
End is pressed.
The currently existing data;

when the ship crosses the finishing line, press
End or the Enter key. The data that exist at this
instant are „frozen“.
Speed determined by the log

Speed determined from the starting posi-
tion, end position and Running Time
Speed determined from the input Distance and
Running Time
Fig. 12-5 The Calculator > Measured Mile menu
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 389

b_cp_e43.fm / 10.05.12
To support the measured mile run, the following data are determined:
- The average speed during the measured mile run, according to the log that is being tested.
- The speed calculated from the starting position, the end position and the time required.
- The speed calculated from the distance input and from the time needed.
1. Sensor Selection
On the radar, select the speed sensor whose accuracy is to be checked by the measured mile run,
and select the most accurate position-sensor.
2. Starting the Measured Mile Run
Sail into the measured mile at constant speed on a constant course. When the ship crosses the
starting line, press the Start button or the Enter key. The data that exist at this instant are recorded
under Start. Under Running, the time which has elapsed since pressing of the Start button and the
distance of the present position from the starting position are displayed.
3. Ending the Measured Mile Run
When the ship crosses the finishing line, press the End button or the Enter key. The data that exist
at this instant are recorded under End. Under Running, the time that has elapsed between the start
and the end, and the distance between the starting position and the end position, are displayed.
4. Determining the Results
Under Results, the following items are displayed:
- Speed by Log: During the measured mile run, the speed value supplied by the selected speed
sensor is stored at intervals of one second. The arithmetic mean of these values is displayed
here.
- Speed by Time & Position: The speed resulting from the distance between the starting posi-
tion and end position and from the time between the start and end is displayed. The position
data of the selected position sensor are used.
- Speed by Time and Distance: The speed resulting from the value that was input under
Distance and from the time between start and end is displayed.
5. Repetition of the Measured Mile Run
After the results have been documented, a repetition of the measured mile run can be prepared by
pressing Start. As a result, all measured data are deleted, and the currently existing data of own
ship are displayed again under Start and End.
12.1.5 Determining the Data of Sunrises and Sunsets
After selection of the menu function Calculator > Sunrise & Sunset, the following menu appears:
The time of day and the true bearing of sunrises and sunsets can be determined
- for the next sunrise or sunset, calculated for the position which will then be reached if the course
and speed remain constant, or
- for any future or past sunrise or sunset at any position.
With this function, the accuracy of the compass can be checked.
390 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e43.fm / 10.05.12
Press if the coming sunrise or sunset is to be

calculated for the position that will then be
reached (event position). If this is pressed again,
the calculation is repeated.
Eye level must be input.
Data on which the calculation of the event

position is based
Calculated distance to go to the event position
Press if an event position is to be preset as a defi-
nite value.
Event position: the position to which the sunrise

and sunset data displayed below refer.
Set pressed under Own Ship Data: the event
position is calculated from the Own Ship data.
Set pressed under Event Position: the event
position can be preset as a definite value.
With these, it is possible to switch over to the next

or previous sunsets or sunrises.
Data of the sunrise or sunset, relative to the
event position.
Fig. 12-6 The Calculator > Sunrise & Sunset menu
Determination of Data of the Next Sunrise or Sunset

1. Under Eye Level, input the eye height (the observation height above the water surface).
2. In the Own Ship Data frame, press the Set button. When this is done,
- the currently existing data of own ship under Own Ship Data are frozen,
- the position which the ship will have during the sunrise or sunset is calculated, assuming that
the course and speed will remain constant (this position is displayed under Event Position),
- the distance to go to reach that point is displayed under DTG,
- in the bottom frame, there are displays showing whether the event is a sunrise or a sunset, the
time at which it will occur, and - under Azimuth - the true bearing at which it will occur.
These displays are automatically updated at intervals of 60 seconds, so that they then correspond
to the own ship data which then exist.
Determining Data of a Future or Past Sunrise or Sunset for Any Position

1. Under Eye Level, input the eye height (the observation height above the water surface).
2. Press Event Position Set.
3. Under Event Position, input the position and (if applicable) the date for which the sunrise or sunset
data are to be determined. In the bottom frame, there are displays showing whether the event is a
sunrise or a sunset, the time at which it occurs, and the true bearing at which it occurs.
4. With Next Event, the data of the next sunrise or sunset can be called up; with Past Event, the data
of the previous sunrise or sunset can be called up.
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 391

b_cp_e43.fm / 10.05.12
12.1.6 Determination of the Data of Fixed Stars
After selection of the menu function Calculator > Altitude & Azimuth, the following menu appears:
Run pressed: The star data are calculated for the

ship's existing position and for the existing
time.
Fixed pressed: The reference data can be input
under Own Ship Data.
Ship's position and time to which the star data

refer
Click the desired fixed star; to do this, scroll the

list if necessary.
Fixed star data referenced to the data displayed

under Own Ship Data
Fig. 12-7 The Calculator > Altitude & Azimuth menu
The altitude and azimuth of the most important fixed stars can be determined
- referenced to the ship's existing position and the existing time or
- referenced to any position of the ship and any time.
1. If the fixed star data are to be displayed for the existing position and existing time, press Run. Under
Own Ship Data, the own ship data are displayed and updated
or
2. If the data are to be determined for a different position or for a different time, press Fixed, and under
Own Ship Data input the desired reference position and the reference time.
3. In the Fixed Star Table list, click the desired fixed star. Under Results, the altitude and azimuth of
the selected fixed star are displayed behind Altitude and Azimuth respectively.
USEFUL INFORMATION
Contents of the Fixed Star Table

In this list, the following items are displayed (from left to right):
- Serial number of the star in the Nautical Almanac
- Name of the constellation
- (Name of the star)
- Brightness of the star.
392 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e43.fm / 10.05.12
Operating Instructions 12.2 Generating the Pilot Card
12.2 Generating the Pilot Card
You can at any time generate a pilot card containing the currently existing data.
This function is implemented by means of a subroutine which you can start by pressing the Pilot Card
button in the Tree in Conning mode. Part of the pilot card then appears in the chart area; the other part
can be made visible by scrolling, and the Pilot Card menu appears on the right (if the menu function is
switched on).
Makes it possible to update Makes it possible to update the data

Triggers the printing the draught values and the
of the pilot card. listed under NAUTICAL CHECKLIST on
displacement. the pilot card; menu see Figure 12-9 on
page 394.
Ends the processing of the pilot card.
Fig. 12-8 CHARTPILOT Display for generating the Pilot Card
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 393

b_cp_e43.fm / 10.05.12
12.2 Generating the Pilot Card Operating Instructions
Generating a Pilot Card

1. Adjust the Printer and the Printer control (see page 73).
2. Entering the Draught and Displacement
Check whether (in the third line from the top) the draught values and the displacement are correct.
If draught sensors fore and aft or a forward draught sensor and a trim sensor are connected, then
no manual input is possible. If only a forward draught sensor is connected, then the draught aft must
be entered, whereas if no draught sensor is available at all, both values must be entered.
The manual input can be made at all CHARTPILOT and MULTIPILOT indicators in the system. The
values are distributed system-wide for the pilot card and conning displays. The draught values are
not taken over into the pilot card if the pilot card is already displayed, but can be accepted by oper-
ation the Draught menu. The value sent out by the own AIS system is not changed by this and must
be entered correctly in addition; see page 120.
A correction of the values is made as follows:
- By pressing Draughts, call up the menu Draughts, and input the currently existing values
under Draught fore and Draught aft. The midship draught calculated from these values is
displayed under Draught midship, and the displacement calculated from them is displayed
under Displacement.
- Make the desired corrections. By pressing of the Apply button, the values calculated for
Draught midship and Displacement from the draught values that were input are displayed.
When all values are correct, press the OK button.
- Then, in the dialog box which then appears, enter your name. By pressing of the OK button of
this dialog box, the Draughts menu is closed and the new values are entered in the pilot card.
3. Entering Further Nautical Data
Check whether the data entered under NAUTICAL CHECKLIST are correct. A correction is made
as follows:
- By pressing Nautical Checklist, the menu Nautical Checklist (see Figure 12-9) is called up.
There, all data entered in the pilot card under NAUTICAL CHECKLIST are listed.
- Make the desired corrections and press the OK button.
- In the dialog box which then appears, enter your name. By pressing of the OK button of this
dialog box, the Nautical Checklist menu is closed and the new values are entered in the pilot
card.
4. Printing Out the Pilot Card
The print-out takes place after the Print button has been pressed.
USEFUL INFORMATION
Here, enter values that are to appear under NAUTICAL CHECK-

LIST in the pilot card.
Takes over the entered values into the pilot card.
Leaves the menu without taking account of the altered values.
Fig. 12-9 The Pilot Card > Nautical Checklist menu
394 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e43.fm / 10.05.12
Operating Instructions 12.2 Generating the Pilot Card
Source of the Pilot Card Data

All items of data whose modification possibility is not described above have been input in the process of
installing the CHARTPILOT. This also applies to the factors for calculating the displacement from the
draught values. The pictures were selected from a number of standard pictures. The parameters listed
under NAUTICAL CHECKLIST were entered during the installation process and can, if necessary, be
altered at service level, and (within the scope of the space available) additions can be made to them.
These draught values were

entered in the Pilot Card >
Draughts menu; the displace-
ment was calculated from these
values.
All other values and displays

were defined during the installa-
tion of the CHARTPILOT.
These values were entered

in the Pilot Card > Nautical
Checklist menu.
The name that was entered

last upon leaving the
... > Draughts menu or the
... > Nautical Checklist menu
appears here.
Fig. 12-10 Example of a pilot card generated on the CHARTPILOT
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 395

b_cp_e43.fm / 10.05.12
12.2 Generating the Pilot Card Operating Instructions
396 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e43.fm / 10.05.12
CHARTPILOT
Appendices
A Care and Maintenance

B Alarm Outputs
C Data Recorded during Voyage Recording
D Conversion of the Map Objects into User Chart Objects
E Displays of the UPS, Model DLP100
F Displays of the UPS, Model DLP150
H Keyboard Templates
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 397

b_cp_e6.fm / 10.05.12
CHARTPILOT
398 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e6.fm / 10.05.12
CHARTPILOT A Care and Maintenance
Operating Instructions A 1 Cleaning/Exchanging the Filter Pads
A Care and Maintenance
Care of the components of the CHARTPILOT is limited to occasional cleaning of the monitor screens.
This should be done by means of a soft cloth moistened with alcohol.
The following maintenance work must be done regularly by the on-board personnel:
Cleaning or exchanging the filter pads and checking the fans the electronics unit of the CHART-
PILOT
Check of the monitor performance
If necessary, the following work can possibly be performed by on-board personnel:
Cleaning the CDs and the optics of the CD drive
A1 Cleaning/Exchanging the Filter Pads
This work needs to be done on the electronics unit of the CHARTPILOT only.
The activity should be carried out quarter-yearly, but more frequently than that if the equipment is
installed in a dusty environment. If the air is particularly dust-free, the interval can be extended.
Taking out the filter pad: This is situated under the cover at the top of the electronics unit. It can be
gripped at its front left-hand corner and can be pulled out without having to undo the screws.
Cleaning the filter pad: Wash the filter pad in lukewarm soapy water and dry it before inserting it again.
If the filter pad has to be exchanged: the ordering number is 2175640.
A2 Checking the Fans
NOTE:
The electronics unit may only be opened by qualified persons.
This work needs to be done on the electronics unit of the CHARTPILOT only.
The check should be performed quarter-yearly.
Performing the check: Undo the screws of the casing cover and take the casing cover off. Check that the
casing fan (under the filter pad) and the CPU fan are running and that there are no noises indicating
damaged bearings. When screwing the casing cover back on, ensure that the grounding cable is plugged
in.
A3 Check of the Monitor Performance
To ensure that the symbols and other objects of the electronic chart can be interpreted correctly, it is
essential that the colours are being displayed correctly. However, monitors are subject to technical influ-
ences which can cause falsification of colour reproduction. Such processes, which are usually due to
aging, take place over a period of years or are caused by external influences, e.g. in the case of monitors
with cathode ray tubes they are caused by magnetic fields from adjacent units.
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 399

b_cp_e61.fm / 10.05.12
A Care and Maintenance CHARTPILOT
A 3 Check of the Monitor Performance Operating Instructions
For the use of the ENC charts, a possibility of checking the colour reproduction of the monitor has there-
fore been stipulated as a requirement. If the checks described in the following are unsuccessful, then in
the case of monitors with cathode ray tubes degaussing must be performed (see also page 25) or colour
adjustment of the monitor must be carried out by service personnel. In extreme cases it may be neces-
sary to replace the monitor.
This check should be performed annually on all monitors, especially if the equipment is approved as an
ECDIS.
This check was originally prescribed for CRT monitors, which from many years of experience had
been known to be subject to ageing, leading to a falsification of their colour reproduction. As long as
sufficient experience has not yet been obtained in this regard for the TFT monitors in use today, this
check should also be applied to them.
All TFT monitors which have originally been delivered and approved by SAM Electronics have a
response time (luminance persistance) of more then 1 ms.
The test consists of two parts:
Test of the Grey Values

The test should be performed in daylight.
1. Display any ENC chart, and set the brightness to Bright Day.
2. Open the Info box, and in the index card Legend, under ECDIS Chart1 Presentation, click on the
line Show Greyscale Test Diagram.
3. The test bars which then appear must be displayed in graded shades of grey, and must only have
very slight colour components or none at all.
Test of the Colour Display

The test should be performed with various room brightnesses, and definitely also at night with the colour
palette Dark Night.
1. Display any ENC Chart and adjust the colour palette to suit the room brightness.
2. Open the Info box, and in the index card Legend, under ECDIS Chart1 Presentation, click on the
line Show Colour Diff. Diagram.
3. In all rectangles displayed, there is a diagonal line with a different colour. All lines must be clearly
recognisable.
400 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e61.fm / 10.05.12
CHARTPILOT A Care and Maintenance
Operating Instructions A 4 Cleaning the CDs and the Optics of the CD Drive
A4 Cleaning the CDs and the Optics of the CD Drive
If problems arise when data are transferred from the CD during chart maintenance activities, they may
be caused by soiling of the CD or the optics of the CD drive. In such cases, cleaning may possibly solve
the problem.
The optics are located on the CD tray (which is extended when the CD drive is opened).
Indications that the errors which occurred may be due to a dirty or damaged CD:
- Soiling: Are there any fingerprints or other signs of dirt on the unprinted side of the CD?
- Damage: Are there any scratches or other signs of damage on the CD (both sides!)?
- The errors occur only when a certain CD is used (strong indication).
- The errors can be reproduced when a certain CD is used, i.e. the same errors occur when repeated
attempts are made.
However, dirt on the CD can still be the cause, even if the errors are not the same.
- The same errors occur at different CHARTPILOTs when a certain CD is used (very strong indica-
tion).
Indications that the errors which occurred may be due to dirty optics of the CD drive:
- The lens is visibly dirty (this can perhaps only be seen with a magnifying glass).
- Although there is a CD in the drive, the Chart Maintenance subroutine reports that no CD, or the
wrong CD, was inserted.
- Errors occur only at certain CHARTPILOTs.
- The errors cannot be reproduced, i.e. the same errors do no occur when repeated attempts are
made.
Non-reproducible errors can also be caused by dirty CDs.
Cleaning the CD:

Remove light traces of dirt by using a lint-free cloth (e.g. cleansing tissue for eye glasses) with little pres-
sure. Do not wipe in circles. If this is not successful, clean the unprinted side of the CD with lukewarm
water and the a.m. cloth, and then dry it with such a cloth.
Cleaning the Optics of the CD Drive:

CAUTION
Cleaning is an intrusion into a sensitive optical assembly with high-
precision parts. It should only be performed by persons who have the
necessary capabilities and know-how.
Note: The lens has a diameter of approx. 2 mm and a resolution of several thousandths of a millimetre.
In many CD drives, it is made of plastic. The smallest scratches and the slightest changes to the surface
(e.g. through liquids) can lead to irreversible damage to the optics and hence to the necessity to
exchange the CD drive.
The cleaning must be performed with a soft brush that is suitable for cleaning optics, a soft lint-free cloth
(cleansing tissue for eye glasses) or a cotton bud, all of which must be used with extremely low pressure.
The cloth or cotton bud may be moistened slightly with distilled water (without any formation of drop-
lets). If distilled water is used, ensure that the lens is dried properly afterwards using a cotton bud or cloth
as specified above. Do not use any other liquids!
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 401

b_cp_e61.fm / 10.05.12
A Care and Maintenance CHARTPILOT
A 4 Cleaning the CDs and the Optics of the CD Drive Operating Instructions
402 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e61.fm / 10.05.12
CHARTPILOT B Alarm Outputs
B Alarm Outputs
The following alarm is given in the form of an electrical signal. If there is a Bridge Alarm System BAS40
installed and if the installation is of the standard kind, then this signal is sent to that system and is proc-
essed there in an appropriate manner.
Chart Alarm
The signal is given when one of the following alarms is generated:
- APPROACHING WAYPOINT
- COURSE LIMIT EXCEEDED
- DEPTH LIMIT EXCEEDED
- GYRO FAULT,
- EXITING ANCHOR WATCH AREA
- OBJECT OF INTEREST
- OUT OF ANCHOR WATCH AREA
- POSITION INVALID
- POSITION TIMEOUT,
- SAFETY CONTOUR,
- SPEED INVALID,
- SPEED TIMEOUT,
- TRACK LIMIT EXCEEDED
- USER CHART OBJECT
or if a connected radar indicator detects that the CHARTPILOT has failed.
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 403

b_cp_e62.fm / 10.05.12
B Alarm Outputs CHARTPILOT
404 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e62.fm / 10.05.12
CHARTPILOT C Data Recorded during Voyage Recording
C Data Recorded during Voyage Recording
Recording intervals of the individual records:

Recording Intervals
Duration of
Record
Factory setting Settings possible at service storage 1)
level 2)
Navigation, Short Term 10 seconds none 12 hours
ARPA Targets 20 seconds 10, 20, 60 and 300 seconds 12 hours
AIS Targets 20 seconds 10, 20, 60 and 300 seconds 12 hours
Engine and Thruster 60 seconds 10, 20, 60 and 300 seconds 12 hours
Azimuth Thruster 20 seconds 10, 20 and 60 seconds 12 hours
Environment 60 seconds 10, 60 and 300 second 12 hours
Weather 300 seconds 10, 60 and 300 seconds 12 hours
ECDIS 20 seconds 3) none 12 hours
TRACKPILOT 20 seconds 10, 20 and 60 seconds 12 hours
SPEEDPILOT 20 seconds 10, 20 and 60 seconds 12 hours
Navigation, Long Term 30 minutes none 3 month
1)
The 12 hours settings can also be set to 24 hours at service level.
2)
Recordings with variable recording intervals can also be suppressed
3)
Checking-interval; recording is performed only after changes
Contents of the records:

Navigation, Short Term
Own position with status and selected position sensor
Gyro heading with status
Rate of turn with status
BT speed ahead and across with status
WT speed ahead and across with status
COG and SOG with status
Selected speed sensor
Rudder angle port rudder with status
Rudder angle starboard rudder with status
ARPA Targets
For each ARPA target:
Position
Relative speed (magnitude and direction)
Target ID
Symbol, status of the target
AIS Targets
For each AIS target:
Position
Speed (magnitude and direction)
Target ID
Symbol, status of the target
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 405

b_cp_e65.fm / 10.05.12
C Data Recorded during Voyage Recording CHARTPILOT
Engine and Thruster

Shaft revolution rate and shaft status (for port and starboard shafts if applicable)
Shaft power with status (for port and starboard shafts if applicable)
Pitch of the variable-pitch propeller with status (for port and starboard shafts if applicable)
Power of the thruster with status (for each thruster)
Trim with status
Heel with status
Azimuth Thruster
All data needed in the Navigation Page for the azimuth thruster display - see page 370
Environment
Rel. wind direction and speed with status
Abs. wind direction and speed
Wind sensor with status
Drift direction and speed of the current with status
Water depth with status
Weather
Weather sensor with identifier and channel-number
Rel. humidity with status
Abs. humidity with status
Dew point with status
Atmospheric pressure [mmHg] with status
Atmospheric pressure [Bar] with status
Air temperature with status
Sea water temperature with status
ECDIS
Chart type
File name of the cell displayed at own position (vector charts) or name of the chart displayed at own posi-
tion (raster charts)
If relevant:
Edition Number
Update Number
Latest Issue Date
TRACKPILOT
All data displayed in the menu Pilot > TRACKPILOT - see page 69
All data displayed in the TRACKPILOT row of the Navigation Page - see page 369
SPEEDPILOT
All data displayed in the menu Pilot > SPEEDPILOT - see page 69
All data displayed in the SPEEDPILOT row of the Navigation Page - see page 368
Navigation, Long Term
Own position with status and selected position sensor
Gyro heading with status
COG and SOG with status
Selected speed sensor
Rel. wind direction and speed with status
Abs. wind direction and speed
Wind sensor with status
Drift direction and speed of the current with status
Water depth with status
406 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e65.fm / 10.05.12
CHARTPILOT D Conversion of the Map Objects into User Chart Objects
D Conversion of the Map Objects into User Chart Objects
Conversion of the Map Symbols

All sixteen different map symbols are converted into the User Chart Objects having the same meaning
(for conversion, see page 328):
Map Object 1) User Chart Object 2)

Map Paper Simpli-
Symbol Chart fied
Light vessel Light vessel (light color white)
Radio reporting point Radio calling-in point
Pilot station Pilot boarding place
Anchorage Anchorage area
Fishing area Fishing facility
Cylindrical buoy Buoy, special purpose (shape = can)
Conical buoy Buoy, special purpose (shape = con)
Cylindrical light buoy Buoy, special purpose with light
Spar light buoy (SB) Buoy, lateral starboardhand (shape = spar) with topmark
Spar light buoy (P) Buoy, lateral porthand (shape = spar) with topmark
Hazard buoy (N) Buoy, lateral north (shape = pillar) with topmark
Hazard buoy (E) Buoy, lateral east (shape = pillar) with topmark
Hazard buoy (S) Buoy, lateral south (shape = pillar) with topmark
Hazard buoy (W) Buoy, lateral west (shape = pillar) with topmark
Light Light, color white
Radio station Radio station
1)
The designation used in the Map editor
2)
Data determined by means of the Info box
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 407

b_cp_e71.fm / 10.05.12
D Conversion of the Map Objects into User Chart Objects CHARTPILOT
Conversion of the Map Lines

Map lines are converted into feature lines.
Feature lines can be converted later into own safety lines by means of the User Chart Object editor
- see page 199. 1)
The sixteen patterns which it was possible to edit for the RADARPILOT 9xxx are displayed on the
CHARTPILOT by means of only eight different map line patterns. These eight patterns are taken over in
the conversion process.
The various colours which it was possible to edit are not converted.
.
Map line Pattern Number Description Line Pattern of User Chart Object 1)
Displayed on the
Edited 2) CHARTPILOT
01 No display (No conversion)
02 02 Solid, thin Solid 1
03 03 Solid, thick Solid 2
04 04 Dashed, thin Dash 1
05 05 Dashed, thick Dash 2
06 06 Dotted, thin Dot 1
07 07 Dotted-and-dashed, thin DashDot 1
08 08 Dotted-and-dashed, thick DashDot 2
09 Same as 04 Solid, thin Solid 1
10 10 Dotted, thick Dot 2
11 Same as 10 Dotted, thick Dot 2
14 Same as 08 Dotted-and-dashed, thick DashDot 2
16 Same as 05 Dashed, thick Dash 2
1)
Data determined by means of the Info box
2)
The designation used in the Map editor
1)
After this conversion, the safety lines are managed as edited User Chart Objects. One of the results of this is that the converted safety
lines continue to exist when the conversion of the map is reversed.
408 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e71.fm / 10.05.12
CHARTPILOT E Displays of the UPS, Model DLP100
E Displays of the UPS, Model DLP100
The following description refers to the Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS), model DLP100, from the
company RIELLO ELETTRONICA s.r.l., which is used as standard equipment by SAM Electronics.
The UPS is continuously in the switched-on state, and therefore does not need any operating actions.
This section of the text indicates which displays appear on the UPS during normal operation, and which
displays appear in the case of a fault.
Normal operation is displayed as follows (LED's from the bottom upwards and from right to left – see
also Figure E-1):
Load: Depending on the load, one or more of the green LED's are alight. The red LED >100 must not
light up except for a short time (e.g. when a connected unit is being switched on).
Battery Charge: Normally, one or more LED's are alight. If they flash for a long time, the batteries are
being overcharged (a case requiring service).
The left-hand LED flashes when the operating system of the CHARTPILOT is being shut down
(because, after a long-duration failure of the ship's mains, the battery has lost most of its charge).
Mains Present (green): This must be alight as long as failure of the ship's mains does not exist.
Battery Operation (green): This may be alight only when the UPS is receiving no power from the ship's
mains.
Replace Battery (red): The test performed automatically every 40 hours has revealed that the capacity
of the internal batteries is too small. The batteries must be exchanged immediately.
The batteries require no maintenance. The task of exchanging them is performed by the service
personnel.
By-pass (green): This must not be alight except for a short time (for example when a connected unit is
being switched on).
Fault/Stand-by (red): This must not be alight except after a long period of failure of the ship's mains, or
in the case of overtemperature or overloading.
Acoustic Signal
- During a failure of the ship's mains, a beep occurring every 7 seconds indicates that the UPS is not
receiving power from the ship's mains. When the operating system of the CHARTPILOT is being
shut down, the beep occurs every 2 seconds. This signal can be switched off by pressing of the (left-
hand) ON key.
- Four long tones / a one-second pause: the battery is being overcharged.
- Continuous tone: The UPS is not delivering any voltage; the monitoring electronics will have to be
unlocked.
Unlocking the UPS and Switching it On Again

When the Fault/Stand-by LED is alight because the batteries are exhausted due to a long period of
failure of the ship's mains, the monitoring electronics must be unlocked so that the connected units are
receiving power again. This cannot occur until the voltage of the ship's mains is available again.
Unlocking is performed by switching off the UPS by pressing of the OFF key.
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 409

b_cp_e66.fm / 10.05.12
E Displays of the UPS, Model DLP100 CHARTPILOT
Load: Fault/Stand-by (red):

Flashes when the batteries have become The loading of the UPS - Is alight if the batteries have been
discharged to such an extent that the discharged to such an extent that the
supply of power can be maintained for UPS is no longer producing any
about 3 minutes only. The operating voltage and the monitoring electronics
system of the CHARTPILOT is being shut is locked.
down. Battery Charge: So that the connected units will again
The charging status of the be receiving voltage, the UPS must be
batteries. unlocked by pressing of the ON key.
LED's flashing: the batteries If the above-mentioned causes cannot
Mains Present (green): are being overcharged. be explained in terms of external
Is alight when the UPS is in the switched-on circumstances, there is probably a
state and is receiving >180 V from the ship's need for service.
mains. - Flashes when the UPS is in Stand-By
Flashes if the voltage of the ship's mains lies mode, i.e. when it is not delivering any
between 170 V and 180 V or if the output voltage voltage.
is not yet in synchronism with the voltage of the
ship's mains.
Battery Operation (green):

Is alight if current is being
taken from the batteries of
the UPS (voltage of the
ship's mains is < 170 V).
By-pass (green):
Is alight if the connected
Replace Battery (red): CHARTPILOT is receiving its
The batteries must be power directly from the ship's
replaced by new ones. mains, e.g. because the load
is greater than the permis-
sible UPS load or the UPS
electronics has failed.
ON key:
Switches the UPS on (press at least 5
seconds).
Suppresses the acoustic alarm from the
UPS while the UPS is running in battery Stand-by key:
mode. Switches the UPS to Stand-By
If the key is pressed in the operating mode, i.e. the UPS does not deliver
mode for longer than five seconds, a any voltage.
battery test is performed. If the batteries This key must not be operated when
do not pass the test, the Replace Battery the connected CHARTPILOT is
LED then lights up. running!
Normally, the UPS electronics generates the supply voltage for the connected CHARTPILOT. It takes the energy for this directly
from the ship's mains or – if the ship's mains has failed – from the internal battery.
Fig. E-1 Display elements and operating elements of the UPS (model DLP100)
410 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e66.fm / 10.05.12
CHARTPILOT F Displays of the UPS, Model DLP150
F Displays of the UPS, Model DLP150
The following description refers to the Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS), model DLP150, from the
company RIELLO ELETTRONICA s.r.l.
The UPS is continuously in the switched-on state, and therefore does not need any operating actions.
This section of the text indicates which displays appear on the UPS during normal operation, and which
displays appear in the case of a fault.
Normal operation is displayed as follows (LED's from the bottom upwards and from right to left – see
also Figure F-1):
Load: Depending on the load, one or more of the green LED's are alight. The red LED >100 must not
light up except for a short time (e.g. when a connected unit is being switched on).
Battery Charge: Normally, one or more LED's are alight. If they flash for a long time, the batteries are
being overcharged (a case requiring service).
Mains Present (green): This must be alight as long as failure of the ship's mains does not exist.
UPS ON (green): Must be alight.
Normal Operation (green): Must be alight.
Fault/Stand-by (red): This must not be alight except after a long period of failure of the ship's mains, or
in the case of overtemperature or overloading.
(The right-hand LED in the third row has no function)
Battery Operation (yellow): This may be alight only when the UPS is receiving no power from the ship's
mains.
By-pass (green): This must not be alight except for a short time (for example when a connected unit is
being switched on).
Battery Low (yellow):
- When no power from the ship's mains is present (Mains Present is not alight): The operating system
of the CHARTPILOT is run down (because after a long period of failure of the ship's mains, the
battery has lost almost all of its charge).
- If power from the ship's mains is present (Mains Present is alight): The test performed automatically
at intervals of 40 hours has revealed that the capacity of the internal batteries is too low. The
batteries must be exchanged immediately.
The batteries are maintenance-free. The task of exchanging them is performed by service
personnel.
Acoustic Signal
- During a failure of the ship's mains, a beep occurring every 7 seconds indicates that the UPS is not
receiving power from the ship's mains. When the operating system of the CHARTPILOT is being
shut down, the beep occurs every 2 seconds. This signal can be switched off by pressing of the (left-
hand) ON key.
- Four long tones / a one-second pause: the battery is being overcharged.
- Continuous tone: The UPS is not delivering any voltage; the monitoring electronics will have to be
unlocked.

When the Fault/Stand-by LED is alight because the batteries are exhausted due to a long period of
failure of the ship's mains, the monitoring electronics must be unlocked so that the connected units are
receiving power again. This cannot occur until the voltage of the ship's mains is available again.
Unlocking is performed by switching off the UPS by pressing of the OFF key.
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 411

b_cp_e67.fm / 10.05.12
F Displays of the UPS, Model DLP150 CHARTPILOT
Fault/Stand-by (red):
- Is alight if the batteries have been discharged to
Load: such an extent that the UPS is no longer producing
The loading of the UPS any voltage and the monitoring electronics is
UPS ON (green): locked.
Is alight when the UPS is in the So that the connected units will again be receiving
switched-on state and the UPS voltage, the UPS must be unlocked by pressing of
electronics is generating voltage. the ON key.
Battery Charge:
The charging status of the If the above-mentioned causes cannot be explained
batteries. in terms of external circumstances, there is prob-
LED's flashing: the batteries ably a need for service.
are being overcharged. - Flashes when the UPS is in Stand-By mode, i.e.
Mains Present (green): when it is not delivering any voltage.
Is alight when the UPS
is in the switched-on
state and is receiving >
170 V from the ship's
mains.
Flashes if the output
voltage is not yet in
synchronism with the
voltage of the ship's
mains.
This has no
Normal Operation (green): function here.
Is alight when the
connected CHARTPILOT is
receiving its power from the
UPS electronics.
Battery Low (yellow):

Battery Operation (yellow): - If Mains Present is alight: The
Is alight if current is being batteries have become discharged to
taken from the batteries of such an extent that the supply of
the UPS (voltage of the power can be maintained for about 3
ship's mains is < 170 V). minutes only. The operating system
of the CHARTPILOT is being shut
down
By-pass (green): - If Mains Present is not alight: The
Is alight if the connected batteries must be replaced by new
ON key: ones.
CHARTPILOT is receiving its Switches the UPS on.
power directly from the ship's Suppresses the acoustic alarm from the
mains, e.g. because the load UPS while the UPS is running in battery Stand-by key:
is greater than the permis- mode. Switches the UPS to Stand-By
sible UPS load or the UPS If the key is pressed in the operating mode, i.e. the UPS does not
electronics has failed. mode for longer than five seconds, a deliver any voltage.
battery test is performed. If the batteries This key must not be operated
do not pass the test, the Replace Battery when the connected CHART-
LED then lights up. PILOT is running!
Normally, the UPS electronics generates the supply voltage for the connected CHARTPILOT. It takes the energy for this
directly from the ship's mains or – if the ship's mains has failed – from the internal battery.
Fig. F-1 Display elements and operating elements of the UPS (model DLP150)
412 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e67.fm / 10.05.12
CHARTPILOT G Displays of the UPS, Model Series DLG
G Displays of the UPS, Model Series DLG
The following description refers to the uninterruptible power supply (UPS) of the DLG series from the
company RIELLO ELETTRONICA s.r.l., which was used up until the end of 1999.
The UPS is switched on continually and therefore does not require any operating actions. From this
section of the text, you can see which displays appear on the UPS when it is running properly, and which
displays appear when there is a malfunction.
Proper operation is indicated as follows (see also Figure ):
- LOAD Depending on the load, one or more of the green LED's is alight. The red
LED >100 may only be alight for a short time (e.g. while a connected unit is
being switched on).
- BATTERY Normally, one or more LED's are alight. If they flash for a long time, the
batteries are being overcharged (service case).
- On The LED in the button indicates that the connected units are being supplied
with voltage.
- TIMER This function is not used.
- LINE This must be alight as long as there is no failure of the ship's mains.
- EMERGENCY This may only be alight while the UPS is not being supplied with power from
the ship's mains.
- BATTERY LOW This may only be alight after lengthy failure of the ship's mains
- REPLACE BATTERY The test which is performed automatically every 40 hours has found that the
capacity of the internal batteries is too low. The batteries must be exchanged
immediately.
The batteries need no maintenance. The task of exchanging them is
done by service engineers.
- BYPASS This may only be alight for a short time (e.g. when a connected unit is being
switched on).
- STANDBY/FAULT This may only be alight after lengthy failure of the ship's mains. Unlocking
the UPS and switching it on again are required - see below.
- Acoustic signal During a failure of the ship's mains, a beep every 7 seconds indicates that
the UPS is not being supplied with power from the ship's mains. If BATTERY
LOW is alight, the beep occurs every 2 seconds.
A continuous tone indicates that there is overtemperature in the UPS or that
the UPS is overloaded (LED >100 alight)

If the STANDBY/FAULT LED is alight because the batteries are exhausted due to excessively long
failure of the ship's mains, the monitoring electronics must be unlocked so that the connected units will
be supplied with voltage again. This cannot take place until the voltage of the ship's mains is available
again.
Unlocking is done by switching off the UPS by pressing the Off button. After switching it on again by
pressing the On button, the connected units should again be receiving voltage. If this is not the case, the
STANDBY/FAULT LED has lit up not because of exhausted batteries but because of overtemperature or
overloading.
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 413

b_cp_e64.fm / 10.05.12
G Displays of the UPS, Model Series DLG CHARTPILOT
LOAD %
>100
100
Load of the UPS
75
50
25
BATTERY %
100 Charge state of the batteries

LED's flashing: Batteries are being overcharged.
80
60
Switches the UPS on. The LED in the button indicates that the connected units
40 are being supplied with voltage.
20 Switches the UPS off. This button must not be pressed when the
connected CHARTPILOT is running.
lo g
Dia
Suppresses the acoustic alarm generated by the UPS while the UPS is
running in battery mode.
Not relevant
Is alight when the UPS is being supplied with ship's mains voltage > 170 V.
On Off Is alight when current is being taken from the batteries of the UPS.
Lights up if the batteries are discharged to such an extent that the power supply
TIMER can be maintained for only 2 minutes or so. The operating system of the
CHARTPILOT is shut down.
LINE The batteries must be renewed.

EMERGENCY Is alight when the connected CHARTPILOT is receiving energy directly from the
ship's mains, e.g. because the load is greater than the permissible UPS load or
BATTERY LOW the UPS electronics has failed.
REPLACE BATTERY
Is alight if
BYPASS a) the batteries are discharged to such an extent that the UPS is no longer
supplying voltage,
STANDBY/FAULT b) there is overtemperature in the UPS, or
c) the UPS is overloaded.
The UPS must be unlocked so that the connected units will be supplied with
voltage again.
If the above-mentioned causes cannot be explained on the basis of external
circumstances, there is probably a need for service.
Fig. G-1 Displays and controls of the UPS (model series DLG)
414 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e64.fm / 10.05.12
CHARTPILOT H Keyboard Templates
H Keyboard Templates
F12
F12
F12
You can cut out one of the keyboard
templates printed here and fix it above the
function keys.
Menu
Menu
Menu
F11
F11
F11
The right-hand template is intended for
use in systems without a TRACKPILOT.
Tree
Tree
Tree
F10
F10
F10
Brightness
Brightness
Brightness
F9
F9
F9
Disp
Disp
Disp
Std
Std
Std
F8
F8
F8
Center
Center
Center
Set
Set
Set
F7
F7
F7
Range
Range
Range
F6
F6
F6
Event
Event
Event
F5
F5
F5
F4
F4
F4
F3
F3
F3
CONNING
CONNING
F2
F2
F2
CHART
CHART
F1
F1
F1
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 415

b_cp_e63.fm / 10.05.12
H Keyboard Templates CHARTPILOT
416 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_e63.fm / 10.05.12
CHARTPILOT 13 Index
13 Index B
Backup (menu) 308, 313
Numerics Bad Scale (display) 85
base station 61
2nd Position Sensor (menu) 139
basic menu line 44
A
bearing
A/N keyboard determination of b. between objects 111
setting the necessary click duration 330 determination of b. of objects 110
switching the repetition function on and off 330 bearing line, see EBL
acoustic signal 331 bearing scale 52
suppressing for particular alarms 332
bridge alarm system 399
address-lists 314 alarm message from b. 334, 346, 375
Aids-to-Navigation 61 brightness
data display 70 setting b. of screen 81
AIS targets British Admiralty Charts 81
collision course 57
button 33
display data 70
displaying/printing information about A. 68 clicking 33
term 55 buzzer on/off 334, 345
alarm list 333 C
switching the display on and off 332
Cancel button 38
alarm outputs 399
Cancel key of the membrane keyboard 32
alarms 331
care 395
recording the a. 325
Cassini 158
Anchor watch 182
catalog
Apply button 38
for files of the User Chart Objects 307
ARCS charts for text pages 317
see also raster chart for track and waypoint files 177
chart type 78 for track, map, waypoint files 214, 305
data maintenance 273 generation of 177, 305
deleting charts 281 listing/printing the content 306
deleting the database 239 renaming of 306
marking changed regions 88 CD
permits 274
transferring charts 277, 278, 301 ARCS Charts 274
update 279 ARCS Update CD 274
CM-93/Pro 283
area (CM-93/2 chart) 298 dirty CD 245
area (CM-93/3 chart) 284 ENC Base CD 248, 264
ARPA targets ENC Update CD 248, 264
collision course 57 CD drive 24
display data 70 dirty CD drive 245
displaying/printing information about A. 68 cells 78
term 55 centered display 89, 90
arrival attribute 171, 221 chart
calibrating on the digitizer 154
arrival point 221
preparation 157
defining of 228 reference points 155, 157
Arrival Speed 172, 221 CHART (button in the Tree) 26
arrival time 223 chart area
Authorization Code (CM-93/2 charts) 298 division 47
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 417

b_cp_eix.fm / 10.05.12
13 Index CHARTPILOT
empty and grey 84 in the editing of tracks 151

switching individual displays on and off 47 course and speed vector of own ship 53
chart editor 78 switching the display on and off 53
chart excerpt 156 course and speed vectors of radar targets
chart mode 31 display 57
chart range, see range 83 relative and true display 57, 90
chart status field 46
course change
chart types 77
see radius
CHARTPILOT course limit
functions in chart mode 31
ECDIS monitoring 103
functions in conning mode 359 programming 173
reducing computer workload 75
switching off 26 course transfer 135
switching on 25 course up RM 89, 91
switch-over the mode 26
course vector, see course and speed vector
CHARTPILOT program
current-sailing problems, solving of 384
aborting and restarting of 27
cursor 33
clicking 33
control 32
CM-93/2 chart form 33
see also vector chart cursor display 47
chart type 78
code of the navigational purpose 79 cylindrical equal spaced 158
data maintenance 297 D
deleting the database 239
geographical structure 79 danger highlight 182
subscription 298 see also User Chart Object
transferring cells 300, 301 ECDIS Monitoring 107
update 300 editing 187
CM-93/3Pro chart data backup
see also vector chart ARCS permits 276
cells 79 ENC permits 251
chart type 78 system parameters 326
code of the navigational purpose 79 text pages 317
data maintenance 283 track-, map-, waypoint-, User Chart Object- data 307
deleting the database 239 track-, waypoint-, User Chart Object- data 307
geographical structure 79 voyage recording 319
licences 284 data displays 48, 62, 375
transferring cells 291, 292
update 257, 294
collision avoidance 77
data input 43
colour 211
database 31, 231
deleting complete d. 239
colour faults on screen 26
date/time (menu) 142
colour information in this document 82
Datum mism. (display) 160
colour reproduction of the monitors 103, 395, 396
datum, see coordinate system
compass 135
dead reckoning 139
configuration file 327
dead reckoning position, correction of 140
CONNING (button in the Tree) 26
deep contour 100
conning data display 65
Delete button 38
conning mode 359
delete tracks 305
coordinate system 94, 155, 161, 167, 204, 382
departure time 223
conversion of c. (raster charts) 160
418 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_eix.fm / 10.05.12
CHARTPILOT 13 Index
depth contours 100 ENC

DGPS receiver 139 see also vector chart
base file 263
dialog box 40
cell, information about the c. 270
changing the size 40 cells 79
shifting 40 chart type 77
digitizer 166, 208 code of the navigational purpose 79
ending work with d. 158 data maintenance 245
setting up 154 deleting cells 261
switching off 27, 168 deleting the database 239
switching on 25 geographical structure 79
marking of changes 99
digitizer cursor 51, 156, 167 name of the base file 264
digitizer cursor display 47, 156 name of the update file 264
digitizer pointer 167 objects displayed 69
permits 248, 249
diskette 310, 312, 320, 327 transferring cells 252, 253
displacement 390 update (licensed ENC) 254
display base 96 update (unlicensed ENC) 247, 260
update file 264
display mode 88
estimated position 140
Display Mode menu 92
estimated time of arrival 221
display standard 96
ETA 221
DO key 32
event
Docking display 66 displaying/printing information about an e. 68
docking manoeuvre 62 marking 130
Docking page 370 symbol 52
draught 390 event marker, deletion of 52, 132
drift, manual input 136 Events (menu) 131
DVD 283 Exit button 76
external alarm displays 379
E
F
EBL 110, 111
switching off the display 113 fans
EBL2 display 47 checking 395
ECDIS 77 feature area 182
editing 187
ECDIS Chart No.1 69
feature line 182
editing 187
connection with the TRACKPILOT 104
System Track against vector chart 108 filter pads
edit (menu) exchanging/cleaning 395
tracks 204 fixed star data, determination of 388
editing 42 focus frame 35
editing cursor 34 function keys
electronic bearing line, see EBL keyboard template 411
overview 32
electronic chart 31, 95
function overview, see tree
cells 78
defining objects to be displayed 96 G
display groups 96
Gauss conformal cylindrical 158
object classes 96
switching display on/off 77 Gauss-Krueger 94, 158
types (vector chart or raster chart) 77 GC, see great circle
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 419

b_cp_eix.fm / 10.05.12
13 Index CHARTPILOT
geodetic datum 94 long-term recording 318

GPS mode 139 M
graphic elements in chart area 50 main program, 75
great circle 171 maintenance work 395
grey shade display 82 manoeuvre
grid 52, 157 display of impossible m. 59
guard sector 105 manual ENC update
gyro, see compass 135 data maintenance 272
editing 189
H
manual ENC update file 190
hard disk drive 231, 245, 263, 272, 300, 307, 310
map 202
head up RM 89, 91
administrative data 202
heading line 53 conversion 312
switching the display on and off 53 displaying/printing information about m. 68
generation of 203, 204
I printing of data in list form 215
ID 166 storing of 214
ideal purpose, see vector chart map name 214
IHO S-52 31 map number 214
IHO S-57 31 map symbols 202
INFO key 32 deletion of 207
generating alphanumerically 212
information generating with digitizer 208, 209
displaying/printing i. about an object 68 generation of 207
input field 34 shifting of 207
symbols used 212
insensitive display 33 taking over from existing map 207
INT 1 69 mapline 202
K cutting a m. 207
generating alphanumerically 210
keel clearance page 373
generating with digitizer 208
keyboard 32 generation of 206
see also A/N keyboard pattern 211
using the k. instead of trackball 35 taking over from existing map 207
keyboard illumination 81 Maps (menu) 203
keyboard template 411 MARPOL 73/78 182
keys measured mile run 385
overview of functions 32 measurement line 111
L menu
licence 236, 245 calling from tree 40
context-sensitive m. 39
licence expiry date 252, 290 operating a context m. 39
linepoint 202 operating a hierarchical m. 37
deletion of 207 switching the display on and off 37
generating with digitizer 209 Mercator 94, 157
generation of 206 monitor
insertion of 206
calibration 81
shifting of 206
lists 35 monitoring display mode 89
marking lines 36 MORE key 32
local database 31, 235 mouse 32
for mouse functions, see trackball throughout the entire
420 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_eix.fm / 10.05.12
CHARTPILOT 13 Index
document manual input of 138

keys 32 owner 166
N P
NACOS status display 378 paper chart No. 155, 157
nautical calculations 381 parameter point
nautical data display 59
protocolling the n. 325 insertion of 160
navigation data line 45 parameter point attribute 171
navigation page 361 passage list 227
navigation sensors passage plan 221
setting of 134 see also voyage planning
navigational purpose 78 activation 221, 228
defining the arrival point 228
NGO 158 generation of 223
north up RM 89, 91 input of planned time of arrival 223
notes 314 input of planned time of departure 223
printing of 224
Notices to Mariners 277, 278, 279 printing of data 227
numbers, input of 42 speed limitation 223, 228
O past plot
object classes 105
past plot of own ship 54
objects of vector charts 78
past plots of radar targets 58
OK button 38
relative and true display 58
Own Chart pattern
see also vector chart
of maplines 211
cell 80
chart type 78 pattern of tracks 60
data maintenance 273 permits 236
editing 193 ARCS chart 274
geographical structure 80 ENC cell 248, 249
Own MARPOL line 182 pilot card 389
MARPOL Pilot Data 147
see also own MARPOL line
Pilot menu 67
own MARPOL line
plan 81, 86
editing 187 Planned Speed 172, 221
own safety line 182 planning display mode 93, 153
see also User Chart Object defining the centre of the displayed chart-excerpt 93
ECDIS monitoring 107 position data
editing 187 checking the accuracy 139
own ship vector, see course and speed vector of position fix
own ship deleting mark 133
own ship’s data, recording of 323 marking 132
own ship’s symbol position sensor 138
defining position on screen 92 accuracy 54
display 53 recording the selected p. 325
switching the display on and off 53 selection 138
own speed position times 54
determination of the longitudinal and transverse speed switching the display on and off 54
138 position, determination of p. of object 110
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 421

b_cp_eix.fm / 10.05.12
13 Index CHARTPILOT
position-reckoning calculation 382 rhumb line 171

POWER DOWN (button in the Tree) 27 route, see track
prediction rudder economy
display 54 programming 173
switching the display on and off 54 S
pre-planned track 145
safety contour 100
see also track
Presentation (menu) 51
safety depth 100
printer 71
sailing
switching on 25, 27 in coastal approaches 361
in shallow water 373
Profile Speed 172, 221 on the open sea 361
Programmed Track 22 sailing mode 171
projection 94, 157 changing the track by changing the sailing mode 229
see also coordinate system SAR aircraft 55
protocol prints 322 scale bar 52
purchase licence 284 scale field 85
R Scale Minimum 191, 201
radius 146, 172 screen
range 83 printing the content of the s. 71
automatic switch over (raster charts) 87 screen division 44
determining r. between objects 112 scrolling 35
determining r. from objects 111
second position sensor
raster charts 85
vector charts 83 checking of position accuracy 139
display of past plot 54
range field 45, 83 selection of 139
range for raster charts, see raster chart: select- switching on and off the display of past plot 54
ing r. to be displayed SENC 31
range rings 51 set gyro 135
raster charts shallow contour 100
see also ARCS charts ship's mains failure 27
automatically selection of the chart 85
chart projection 80 slave indicator
displaying of existing r. 233 switching off 27
displaying/printing general data 68 switching on 25
displaying/printing notices and diagrams of r. 68 slave monitor
horizontal datum 80
switching off 27
legal aspects 77
switching on 25
limited functionality 80
name 86 sleeping targets 114, 115
selection of the r. to be displayed 85 sliding controller 34
setting of the r. to be displayed 85
SOLAS Regulation V20 77
structure 80
zooming 86 specifying the centre of the chart excerpt 132,
RCDS 78 133
reckoning 382 speed sensor 136
regions of the ARCS charts 81, 88 recording the selected s. 325
selection of 136
remark about the waypoint 170
Speed Sensor (menu) 137
rendezvous point of two ships, calculation of
speed vector, see course and speed vector
383
speed, see own speed
Reset button 38
422 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_eix.fm / 10.05.12
CHARTPILOT 13 Index
SPEEDPILOT display 47 data input methods 149

direction of t. 146
SPEEDPILOT, recording the selected mode 325
display 59
SRNC 31 displaying of existing tracks on world chart 234
standard display, fast switch-over to 50 displaying/printing data of elements of the t. 68
generation, work steps 150
status displays of the NACOS components 378 geometrical check 173
stern line 54 input of administrative data 149
switching the display on and off 54 loading 153
notes about t. 177
subroutines 75
preparation of change 152
subscription 236 printing of data in list form 179
subscription expiry date 252, 290 reversing the direction of 165
storing 177
subscription licence 284 switching the display on and off 59
sunrises and sunsets, determination of 386 track alarms 103, 105
system parameters 327 track control mode 171
system position 140 track file
System Track assigning to a different catalog 306
checking the S.T. 218 copying onto the hard disk drive 310
defining of S.T. 218 data restoration 310
deselection of present S.T. 218 loading 153
general 217 management 305
system version, determination of 330 track limit
T ECDIS monitoring 103
programming 173
target setting the T. 103
term 55 track line
target vector, see course and speed vectors of display of the course 59
radar targets to System Track 219
text labels 98 track name 177
text notes 182 track number 177
editing 188 track segment 145
Text Pages Track/Control display 63, 377
generation, changing of 314 Track/Schedule display 64, 376
management of 316
trackball
texts
separate 32
editing of 42 setting the cursor speed 330
Tiles 88 TRACKPILOT
time labels recording the selected mode 325
display 54 recording the switching on and off 325
switching the display on and off 54 TRACKPILOT display 47
time markers Tracks (menu) 149
display 58 tree of Chart mode 41
time schedule, see voyage planning tree of Conning mode 360
time zone 141 trial manoeuvre 127
to track 171 true motion 89, 90
to waypoint 171 true motion reset 92
track 145 setting the reset area 92
administrative data 147
check against the electronic chart 175 U
checking 173 UK Hydrographic Office 78
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 423

b_cp_eix.fm / 10.05.12
13 Index CHARTPILOT
uninterruptible power supply 27 switching off the display 113

displays, operating procedures 405, 407, 409 W
update waypoint 145
ARCS charts 279 alphanumeric generation of 161, 163
CM-93/2 chart 300 copying of 164
CM-93/3Pro chart 257, 294 defining a w. to be approached 229
ENC (licensed) 254 defining the w. to be approached 218
ENC (unlicensed) 260 deletion of 159, 164
UPS 27 enlarged display of approach 113
User Chart Object generation using electronic chart 159
generation with digitizer 166
areas 187, 188
generation, methods 149
displaying/printing data 68
insertion 159, 164, 167
editing 181 sequence of w. generation 151
files 307
shifting 159
identifying the U. 102
symbol in track display 59
lines 187 taking over from existing track 160, 164
saving 182
taking over from waypoint file 160, 165
symbols 185 waypoint approach
User Code (CM-93/2 Chart) 298 setting the alarm limit 104
User Permit Number (ENC) 248, 274 waypoint data 147
editing of 168
UTM 94, 158
sequence of editing of 151
V track 147
variable range marker, see VRM waypoint file 166, 180
vector chart see also track file
generating 180
see also ENC, CM-93/3Pro chart, CM-93/2 chart loading 153
display of available v. 83
displaying of existing v. 233 waypoint list 162
displaying/printing data relating objects of 68 configuring of 161
displaying/printing general data 68 waypoint name, see remark about the waypoint
ideal purpose 83
legal aspects 77 waypoint notes 172
measures for the display 95 waypoint number 170
objects 78 waypoint position 171
structure 78
waypoint zoom 113
vector, see course and speed vectors
weather routing 310
Visibility Groups
wheel over point 104, 146
menu 98
display 59
voyage planning 145
WOP, see wheel over point
see also passage plan
at constant speed 223, 228 world chart 233
changing an activated voyage plan 228 Z
on basis of Planned Speed values 221
with constant speed 222 zone (CM-93/2 chart) 298
voyage preparation 217 zone (CM-93/3Pro chart) 284
voyage recording zone time 141
execution 317
printing of content 320, 322
recorded data 401
replay 320
voyage time, planning of, see voyage planning
VRM 111
424 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

b_cp_eix.fm / 10.05.12
CHARTPILOT Notes
Notes
Space for your notes:
ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 425

b_cp_eno.fm / 10.05.12
CHARTPILOT 1 Annex for new IHO Standard S-52 Pres. Lib. Ed. 4.0 and AIO
Operating Instructions 1.1 Overview of Updated Functions
1 Annex for new IHO Standard S-52 Pres. Lib. Ed. 4.0 and AIO
Every CHARTPILOT has been approved according to the valid IMO Performance Standards (Interna-
tional Maritime Organisation, SOLAS) at the time of its installation on-board and to the corresponding IEC
Test Standards, especially to the IEC 61174 (ECDIS) Standard.
In addition every CHARTPILOT has been approved to the valid IHO Chart Standards at the time of its
on-board installation, especially to the S-52 Presentation Library.
The approval for the first one, the IMO Standard is valid for the full lifetime of the equipment.
In contrast to that the approval for IHO Standard is valid until an important update is issued by IHO. The
reason is that this standard defines the visualization of symbols on ECDIS. If a new symbol is applied to
the electronic chart delivered i.e. by Admiralty or C-Map it cannot be displayed on old equipment without
a SW update.
The latest version of the Presentation Library has been issued last year. Existing equipment has to be
updated until September 2017 to this latest S-52 Presentation Library 4.0.
Every CHARTPILOT 1100 can be updated to this latest IHO Standard by installing SW version 6.1.9 or
higher.
This annex describes the operating of the CHARTPILOT with SW 6.1.9 or higher as far as updated func-
tions are concerned.
1.1 Overview of Updated Functions
The updated IHO Standards include a number of changes that will bring significant benefits to the
mariner. IHO states that one of the biggest benefits of upgrading ECDIS systems to the latest S-52 Pres-
entation Library will be a reduction in the number of audible alarms triggered by ECDIS, helping ease the
issue of alarm fatigue on the bridge, whilst still maintaining safety at sea.
The introduction of an alert model, based on the requirements in the IMO ECDIS Performance Standard,
will also harmonize ECDIS behaviour across different manufacturers’ systems.
A number of significant changes to the Presentation Library reflect mariner feedback. For example, the
names of Fairways and Anchorage Areas will now appear on the ENC display.
A number of new symbols have been added to the Presentation Library. These new symbols help draw
attention to features that need to be highlighted, including the location of automatic ENC updates and
ENC features that have a temporal (time-based) attribute.
ED 3053 G 622 / 04 (2017-02) 1

CP1100_IHO_Update_Annex.fm /
1 Annex for new IHO Standard S-52 Pres. Lib. Ed. 4.0 and AIO CHARTPILOT
1.2 Improved Selection for Display of Text Labels Operating Instructions
1.2 Improved Selection for Display of Text Labels
Symbols, areas, lines and labellings (collectively called objects in the following) are individually stored
electronically in the vector chart. It is not necessary to display all of the objects at all times. Instead, an
appropriate and, at the same time, uncluttered display can be achieved by selection of the display group
required.
Furthermore, for a number of objects (e.g. buoys), there is a choice between two symbol presentations.
Irrespective of this, the number of text labels displayed can be influenced now in more detail as shown
here.
Instead of a selection between None, Few, Normal, and All text labels the mariner has now the choice
between None, Important, Groups and All.
If Groups is selected it comprises Important Text and all labels of a group, i.e. Names of Buoys/
Beacons.
Further groups cover Geographic Names, Berth Numbers, Nature of Seabed, and all other.
IMPORTANT Text covers:

Vertical clearance of bridges
Vertical clearance of overhead cable
Vertical clearance of overhead pipeline
Vertical clearance of conveyor
Bearing of navline
Recommended route
Recommended track
Deep water route centre line
Name and comm channels of radio calling-
in point
Text from user chart objects
OTHER Text comprises in detail:
Name or number of buoys

Name or number of beacons
Name or number of daymarks
Name or number of light Vessel
Name or number of offshore Platform
Light description string
Note on chart data or nautical publication
Nature of seabed
Geographic names
Select one or more text groups Value of magnetic variation
to be displayed. Value of swept depth
Height of islet or land feature
All settings remain if the system Berth number
is switched OFF and ON again. National language text
2 ED 3053 G 622 / 04 (2017-02)

Operating Instructions 1.3 More Detailed Selection of Visibility Groups
1.3 More Detailed Selection of Visibility Groups
The number of visibility groups has been extended from 16 to 20 and reorganized. A more clear pres-
entation to the specific mariners needs can be configured now.
The check marks for shallow water pattern and shallow water dangers, which were part of the visibility
options menu in the past, have now been shifted to the depth contour menu.
A new button for opening the Admiralty Information Overlay (AIO) menu has been added. It is visible only
if data for AIO have been loaded under chart maintenance.
Another button for names in national language, i.e. Korean, has been added as well. It is visible only if
this function has been activated during system configuration.
New function for

Admiralty Information
Overlay added, see
chapter about AIO
Check mark for

The former "Extra shallow water pattern
Info" button has been and dangers shifted
splitted into two, to Depth Contour
"Highlight Info" and menu
"Highlight Docu-
ment", one further
button has been
added for date
"Dependent Objects" Select one or more
visibility groups from
the list
Show names in
national language, i.e.
Korean
ED 3053 G 622 / 04 (2017-02) 3

1.4 Highlight Additional Information, Documents or Date Dependent Objects Operating Instructions
1.4 Highlight Additional Information, Documents or Date Dependent Objects
The presentation of additional information, documents, or date dependent objects has been improved
towards more flexibility.
In the new SW version the function to highlight this kind of information is split into three separate func-
tions.
If the function Highlight Info

or Highlight Document is
switched on, the objects for
which additional text infor-
mation or a document
(picture) are available are
marked with the symbol i
If the function Highlight Date

Dependent is switched on,
the objects which are valid
only for a certain time are
marked with the symbol d
Presentation of Date Dependent

Objects in chart if the Highlight
Date Dependent function is acti-
vated
4 ED 3053 G 622 / 04 (2017-02)

Operating Instructions 1.5 Improved Presentation of Date Dependent Objects
1.5 Improved Presentation of Date Dependent Objects
The presentation of date dependent objects has been improved towards more flexibility.
In former SW versions objects could be either displayed if valid at current date or always. If always had
been selected this mode was indicated in the navigation data line with a D.
In the new SW version the date dependent function has been extended. Now a time slot with start and
end date can be entered either for the display of all objects valid in this range or for the display of review
updates in this range.
Visualization of Temporary Objects
For objects which are not present continuously, e.g. buoys which are deployed seasonally, it is possible
to define whether the display is to take place only at the time entered for it in the electronic chart.
If date dependent objects (Within Selected Range) is selected, this mode is indicated in the navigation
data line with a D if the current date is included in the selected viewing range.
If the current date is not included in the selected viewing range a more eye-catching indication is given.
The message "Date Dependent" in combination with a yellow background is displayed in the top line.
Marking of Official Changes of the ENC
The ENC areas, lines and symbols changed by official updates can be marked:
- Deleted objects are marked by orange dashes, updated objects by orange circles.
- If done automatically, above updates are in bold orange, manual updates are in plain orange.
If date dependent update (Review Update) is selected, this mode is indicated in the navigation data line
with a yellow background and the text Review Update and all objects and lines changed by an official
update within the selected period are marked.
Click here to select

between:
Within Current Date
Within Selected Range
Review Update
ED 3053 G 622 / 04 (2017-02) 5

1.6 Route Planning and Monitoring with Date Dependent Objects Operating Instructions
1.6 Route Planning and Monitoring with Date Dependent Objects
As described in the last paragraph, the date dependent function has been extended. Now a time slot with
start and end date can be entered either for the display of all objects valid in this range or for the display
of review updates in this range.
For route planning it is now important to set the time slot with start and end date according
to the planned sailing period of own vessel. Covering a larger period with the time slot is
applicable as well. If the time slot is set outside of the sailing period it might happen that
temporary objects are not considered during the planning process.
A route check which has been carried out some time ago with a time slot covering that former period
might no longer be valid now. It is recommended to carry out a new route check when using a route.
For route monitoring during passage execution all current objects within the look-ahead sector and the
coming leg of the route are considered. Any time slot setting has no effect.
1.7 Show Shallow Water Pattern and Shallow Water Danger
The corresponding buttons have been shifted down to the depth contour menu just to release some
space for new functions in the Visibility Options menu. The function has not been changed.
Click here if non-navigable

areas shall be marked addition-
ally by means of a diagonal grid.
Click here if isolated dangers
situated in shallow water shall
be displayed
1.8 Extension for the Info Box
Within the Info Box the chart contents is presented in groups. These groups have been rearranged
according to the new visibility groups.
In addition the Info Box has been
extended by two new buttons for
"Administrative" and
"Advanced".
to allow the user to filter the
attribute details of a selected
object.
6 ED 3053 G 622 / 04 (2017-02)

Operating Instructions 1.9 Improved Alarm Handling for Chart Monitoring
1.9 Improved Alarm Handling for Chart Monitoring
1.9.1 Setting the Alarm Handling for Chart Monitoring
According to the new IHO standard the Chart Alarms have been rearranged and divided into three
groups: Safety Contour Alarms, Navigational Hazard Alarms, Special Area Alarms.
The alert handling is set by the user under CHART -> Alarm Settings -> Chart Alarms as follows:
Safety Contour
Select if the audible alarm Navigational Hazards
shall be triggered by the look Select if the warning in the
ahead sector and/or by the alarm list shall be triggered by
track corridor touching the the look ahead sector and/or by
safety contour or any rocks, the track corridor first touching
wrecks, and obstructions. the navigational hazard. Select
Select the visibility on chart. the indication on chart.
Special Areas
Select if the warning in the
alarm list shall be triggered by
the look ahead sector and/or by
the track corridor touching a
special area object.
Select the indication on chart

individually for different types of
special areas as listed to the
right
In general it is recommended to activate all three groups:

Safety Contour 1), Navigational Hazards, Special Areas (with all sub-areas).
If the presentation is overloaded, specific settings may be switched off.
If a part of the selection is switched off, this is indicated in the navigation status line with
the info symbol ! . By clicking to this field with the Info key a message with details of the
selected types may be opened.
1)
Refer to page 102 of the main CP 1100 operator instructions for editing the depth values.
ED 3053 G 622 / 04 (2017-02) 7

1.9 Improved Alarm Handling for Chart Monitoring Operating Instructions
1.9.2 Alarm List for Chart Alarms during Chart Monitoring
If occurring at least once, the three types of chart alarms are shown in the general alarm list of the CP
1100. Several alarms of the same group are summarized to one alarm.
Click to the button Show Chart Alarm List to open a detailed list with each individual message and more
details.
I
8 ED 3053 G 622 / 04 (2017-02)

Operating Instructions 1.9 Improved Alarm Handling for Chart Monitoring
1.9.3 Graphical Presentation of Chart Alarms in the Chart Area during Chart Monitoring
Examples for the presentation of the three chart alarms are given below:
1) Safety Contour ahead within the look

ahead sector, intersections are indicated
by a transparent red fill and a red border
line
2) Navigational Hazards ahead within

the look ahead sector are indicated
with a yellow square
3) Special Area ahead within the

look ahead sector, intersections are indicated by
a yellow border line
ED 3053 G 622 / 04 (2017-02) 9

1.10 Improved Handling of Warnings During Check of Tracks Operating Instructions
1.10 Improved Handling of Warnings During Check of Tracks
The check of tracks has been improved taking into account the new grouping of alarms which are now
related to Safety Contour, Navigational Hazards, and Special Areas. The handling for SW version is
as follows:
3 2
1. Select CHART -> Track -> Edit from the side menu, select a track.
2. Activate the Check function. The results of this check are shown in the Check Track window above
and graphically in the chart. With the activation of this menu button all alarm groups are automati-
cally included for this check. This setting is independent from any settings for chart monitoring. The
result may be a quite long list of warnings.
3. In the next step select Chart Special Areas to open a selection box for the various types of chart
special areas. Deactivate those, which are already well known for your passage.
4. Rerun the check with less stringent settings. Clarify the remaining list of results.
10 ED 3053 G 622 / 04 (2017-02)

Operating Instructions 1.11 ENC Update Status Report
1.11 ENC Update Status Report
Following the new IHO standard S-63 Ed.1.2 an ENC

Update Status Report has been added to the new
version.
It provides a powerful tool for the efficient management
of chart cells.
Users and authorities can check quickly if all installed (1)
licensed ENC cells are up-to-date.
1. Click to Chart Maintenance -> ENC Other Func-

tions... and -> ENC Update Status Report
(2)
2. Confirm the next question about required time. If
more systems are connected, first a box for the
selection of the desired CHARTPILOT or MULTIP-
ILOT is shown, select one system.
(3)
3. If not done already confirm the next question about
required time. Now a menu with the complete
status report is opened (see next page for full
view).
4. The ENC Update Status Report shows in the upper (4)

(5)
part some vessel and system related static informa-
tion and in the lower part a list of all installed ENC
cells.
5. The list can be sorted by cell no, status, or Data

Server (i.e. AVCS, PRIMAR).
Each time an update with official ENC cells according to S-63 Ed. 1.2 is performed, the corresponding
products list which comes along with the base or update media (CD, DVD, USB stick) is stored on your
CHARTPILOT. This list contains information about the latest version of each cell from a certain service
provider (i.e. AVCS, PRIMAR) and is related to a reference date.
When the update report is generated, the relevant reference date for each cell is compared with the
actual date. If the time difference is more than four weeks (28 days), the status of this cell is set to “Not
up to Date” according to IHO S-63 definition. This is independent from the fact whether the version of
the cell is identical to the latest version in the products list. In addition a window with a warning is shown.
If the time difference is less than four weeks (28 days) the version of each cell is checked individually
against the products list and the status is set individually.
If necessary the status is extended, i.e. “Not up to Date” and “License is missing”, and an appropriate
action is suggested in the last column.
ED 3053 G 622 / 04 (2017-02) 11

1.12 Indication of Chart Over Scale Operating Instructions
If a cell is not licensed (i.e. from NOOA or from C-Map SENC import) the status is set to "Unknown"
according to IHO S-63 definition.
Fig. 1-1 ENC Update Status Report
1.12 Indication of Chart Over Scale
In former SW versions an indication for "Over Scaled" could be indicated in the navigation data line.
In the new SW version this indication has been extended with an over scale factor:
Example: "Scale X2.5" means that the selected display scale is 2.5 times higher than the
compilation scale of the actual chart.
12 ED 3053 G 622 / 04 (2017-02)

Operating Instructions 1.13 Display of Admiralty Information Overlay (AIO)
1.13 Display of Admiralty Information Overlay (AIO) 1)
AIO is available as an option for the CP 1100 system.

AIO is a service from the United Kingdom Hydrographic Office (UKHO) and provides Notices to Mariners,
and additional information like reported navigational hazards, as a separate overlay on top of the Admi-
ralty Vector Charts.
The overlay includes all Admiralty Temporary & Preliminary Notices to Mariners (T&P NMs) in force
worldwide and additional information that relates to ENCs, published as ENC Preliminary NMs (EP NMs).
The overlay can not be used in conjunction with any other electronic charts, not with C-Map and other
ENC which are not from UKHO and not with raster charts.
The overlay has its independent version numbering which is not related to that one of the Admiralty
Vector Chart System. An earlier AIO version can be used in conjunction with actual AVCS charts but it
is recommended to have corresponding versions.
AIO data for the whole world are stored currently in a single cell, called GB800001. Further cells may be
added later by AVCS. This cell has to be installed first together with the corresponding permit before
usage. Please refer to the DATA MAINTENANCE chapter for an installation guide.
1.13.1 Using the Overlay in the Navigation Process
The Admiralty Information Overlay contains additional information that is considered navigationally signif-
icant and may affect your voyage. This information should be referred to when planning your passage
and may also be temporarily displayed during route monitoring.
When planning your passage it is normal to review all charts (and therefore
ENCs) that are expected to be used on the passage. When these charts are
reviewed, the overlay should be turned on and any features that could affect
the planned route should be investigated. Those features that are significant
for the planned passage should be marked i.e. by a user symbol or by a note
attached to a waypoint. The general availability of AIO for a certain chart is
indicated in the navigation status line as shown to the right.
Sufficient information should be attached to the user symbol or waypoint note to inform the navigator of
the action to be taken when they are encountered on passage.
The Overlay information may temporarily be displayed when navigating. To avoid too much information
obscuring the chart display the Overlay should normally be turned off and should only be turned on for
brief periods when required for reference.
1)
Text passages about AIO have been taken from the AIO User Guide V1.0 and adapted to the operating procedures applying to the CP
1100 system.
ED 3053 G 622 / 04 (2017-02) 13

1.13 Display of Admiralty Information Overlay (AIO) Operating Instructions
1.13.2 Displaying the AIO Overlay
Click to the Admiralty Information (1)

Overlay (1) button to open the
corresponding sub-menu (2).
There are four check boxes
arranged where you can activate or
deactivate temporary and prelimi-
nary chart information as well as
information objects.
Once activated the notices for mari-
ners (NM) and objects are displayed
as an overlay to the chart.
Temporary & Preliminary

Areas where Temporary notices
are valid, are marked with a red
polygon with red hatched fill which
indicates the area affected by the
NM (3).
Preliminary notices are marked in
the same way, but in green.
(2)
Each NM carries the same NM

number that is used in the Admiralty
Notices to Mariners Bulletin. This
number can be switched off by
deactivating the box Show Names
of Objects.
Each NM provides the full text of the

NM included as an associated text
file.
See next page for access to this
text.
14 ED 3053 G 622 / 04 (2017-02)

Operating Instructions 1.13 Display of Admiralty Information Overlay (AIO)
1.13.3 Access to the AIO Text
Use INFO Key to click into the

marked AIO area to open the
Info Box.
Click to the index card Chart
Contents.
Click into the
Click to AIO - Admiralty Infor- red area
mation Overlay to see the
available sub-entries.
Click to any of these sub-
entries to open the corre-
sponding text box.
Click to Administrative and/or
Advanced to see further text of
the text box.
Click to Details to show any
further associated text or
picture file.
ENC P Notices
The same way of marking but
in blue and the same proce-
dures are valid for ENC P NMs
(EP NM).
They contain additional infor-
mation that is specific to ENCs
and cannot be published as a
standard Admiralty Tempo-
rary or Preliminary Notice to
Mariners (T&P NM).
Each NM is allocated a unique
EP NM number.
No Information Objects
Where there is no equivalent
scale Admiralty paper chart, the UKHO does not have any additional information and the overlay shows
a ‘No Overlay’ feature. This feature is displayed as a grey polygon with a grey hatched fill indicating the
area where there is no overlay information.
Additional information, such as local T&P NMs, may be available in these areas from other sources.
When navigating in these areas, seafarers should ensure that all appropriate sources of information have
been consulted.
ED 3053 G 622 / 04 (2017-02) 15

1.13 Display of Admiralty Information Overlay (AIO) Operating Instructions
Wärtsilä SAM is a global leader in complete life-cycle power solutions for the marine and
energy markets. By emphasizing technological innovation and total efficiency, Wärtsilä SAM
maximizes the environmental and economic performance of the vessels and power plants of
its customers. Wärtsilä SAM is listed on the NASDAQ OMX Helsinki, Finland.
See also www.wartsila.com
WÄRTSILÄ® is a registered trademark. © 2010 Wärtsilä Corporation.
Wärtsilä SAM Electronics GmbH, Germany

Service
Customer Support Center
Phone: + 49 (0) 18 03 00 85 53
Fax: + 49 (0) 18 03 00 85 54
E-mail: shipservice.sam@wartsila.com
16 ED 3053 G 622 / 04 (2017-02)


Chartpilot 1100 Manual (New UPDATE 2017)

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Chartpilot 1100 Manual (New UPDATE 2017)

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Operating Instructions

Item No.:ED 3053 G 622 Revision: 02 (2012-05) Order No.:390005725

Wärtsilä SAM Electronics GmbH

General Safety Precautions

Even when this modern navigation equipment is being used, non-

ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 3

4 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

General Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 5

3.5.4.16 Aids-to-Navigation and Base Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

6 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 7

6.1 Voyage Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229

8 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

7.7.1.4 Installing the Licences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303

ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 9

12.1.1 Performing a Position-Reckoning Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386

10 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

Fig. 3-1 The various operating devices for cursor control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 11

Fig. 4-26 The menu Radar/AIS > Voyage Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

12 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

Fig. 6-6 Beginning of a Passage List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 13

Fig. 12-1 The Calculator menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385

14 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

= In this area, a context menu can be opened. 1)

ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 15

FIX ABS fixed absolute

16 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

RNC raster navigation chart

ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 17

18 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 19

20 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

1.1 The Functions of the CHARTPILOT

ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 21

22 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

1.2 The Consistent Common Reference System

Measurements relative to the Conning Position (REF = CON)

Implementation on the CHARTPILOT

ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 23

1.3 The Components of the CHARTPILOT and its Variants

The CHARTPILOT station consists of an industrial-quality computer electronics unit (= CHARTPILOT

1.4 Current IHO standards / Regulatory Approvals

1.5 Using this Manual

24 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

2 Switching the CHARTPILOT On and Off

2.1 Switching the CHARTPILOT On

Adaptation to Room Brightness

ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 25

Colour Distortions on Monitors with Flat Screens (TFT Monitors)

2.2 Switch-Over of the Modes

Switching Over to Chart Mode

Switching Over to Conning Mode

2.3 Switching the CHARTPILOT Off

26 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

Behaviour in the Event of Ship's Mains Failure

Behaviour in the Case of a Malfunction in the Chart or Conning Mode

ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05) 27

28 ED 3053 G 622 /02 (2012-05)

Part II CHARTPILOT as ECDIS

In the following instructions for the operating procedure of these func-